Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
R
^
OR
Before ft and in, Pattahh commonly remains; as Vila for bna,
BTjK for In all such cases, Pattabh, Seghol &c. are really
long and impure. ( 21. 7, 9, 12, 18.)
2. Instead of simple Sheva, the guttur als commonly
(not always) take a composite Sheva.
E. g. ftvrbfit instead of ; "in** instead of t o* or &c.
i *i* t 1*
{ 4 7 . QUIESCENT LXTT1RS. 107
But we have also ant | &c. i. e. gutturals with simple
Sheva. It should be particularly noted, that the gutturals never take
a vocal Sbeva simple, but always substitute in its place a composite
Sheva. A silent Sbeva simple, however, is not unfrequently placed
under them; yet never except after a short vowel, and when the gutturals
stand at the end of a mixed syllable.
Resh sometimes admits a composite Sheva, but not oftener than
most of the other consonants.
3. The guttur als and Resh very generally take a Pat-
tahh, par ticular ly in a f inal syllable, in pr ef er ence to any
other mutable r owel; pr obably because they wer e utter -
ed mor e easily with Pattahh.
E. g. Future Kal instead of 9*33^; Piel 3^3 instead of
kc.
7. But if the vowel in the f inal syllable wher e they oc-
cur be immutable, then the guttur als take a Pattahh Jwr-
tive ( 27) in or der to ease the pr onunciation.
E. g. &c.
8. Resh never takes Pattabh furtive; and in regard to the syllable
in which it occurs, though it inclines to the use of Pattahh, like the
gutturals, yet it frequently adopts the common forms.
47. Quiescent Utters ; cases where they quiesce.
(Comp. 25.)
The fact that these letters quiesce, and in what vowels, has been
considered in 23. The design of the present section is, to show
in what position or when quiescence happens to them, and the laws
in accordance with which their consonant-power ceases.
N. B. As the principles exhibited in this section are fundament-
al in respect to all the verbs, nouns, and adjectives, which are irreg-
ular by reason of quiescents, the student should not fail to make him-
self most thoroughly acquainted with them. This is by far the short-
est method of obtaining a correct understanding of the irregularities
in question.
t l . The Ehevi quiesce in a homogeneous vowel, when
108 47. QUIESCENT LETTERS*
accor ding to the analogy of other consonants, they would
stand at the end of a mixed syllable, or have a silent She-
va expr essed or implied under them.
E. g. {rrprpa instead of ^ni rPB; instead of SENV in-
stead of instead of ac*>n.
I I *
This rule is universal for Vav and Yodh, and for Aleph at the
end of words. But ft in the middle of words frequently retains its
character as a guttural ( 46. 2). E. g. Pjctr instead of tjDM?.
When g quiesces here it reads where fit quiesces in Hholem.
t He quiesces only in a f inal- syllable ( 23. 2), and al-
ways quiesces ther e unless it have a Mappiq. ( 30.)
t In the cases above, it is taken f or gr anted that the
vowel pr eceding the quiescent is homogeneous ; but if it
be heterogeneous, the Ehevi r etain their consonant power .
E.g. 9dv4a, may-me-ntm &c. ( 23. 5.)
t2. Aleph, Vav, and Yodh commonly (not always) qui-
esce, when accor ding to the analogy of other consonants, a
Sheva would immediately precede them.
E. g. nttip instead of riitu).
In such cases, the preceding Sheva is dropped, and the vowel
belonging to the quiescent comes into its place; as tPfttt'l instead of
I'lttifin instead of instead of Sfita; tflRB instead
ef ma n ; Dsp instead of Dip ; W # instead of Ma^fit &c.
t *. | I Ml T
m
NOTE. The above principle of contraction is carried so far, that
in a few cases vowel-letters preceded b j Sbeva even destroy a pre-
vious syllable, in order that they may throw back their vowel on
the preceding letter and quiesce in it. E. g. rrDttVn instead of the
regular rDfitVft; MOp^ instead of najnpb; ntefitbn instead of ^tefitbn.
t3 Vav and Yodh of the end of words, when a Sheva
or a f ur tive vowel pr ecedes them, uniformly go into qui-
escence.
This is effected by changing the preceding vowel, and accommo-
dating it to the final quiescent.
4 7 . QUIESCENT LETTERS. 109
E. g. W instead of TP ; instead of ^ ; tfin instead of i ri n;
3ria instead of i r i s; 3riQU)*i instead of i n n w the apoc. form of
. (1S3. VL b.)
On the contrary, Aleph remains t* otio at the end of a word, when
preceded by Sheva. E. g. MDlrj &c. ( 123.I. d.)
NOTE. The principle of quiescence in nos. 2 and 3 is the same;
bat in no. 3, the quiescent letter standing at the end of a word, and
having no vowel of its own to throw back apon the preceding let-
ter, and thus provide for ifs own quiescence, as is the case in no. 2,
resort is had to the various expedients just described. The Hebrew
language does not admit of a moveable Vav or Todh at the end of
words, when preceded only by a Sheva or by a furtive vowel.
1*4. Aleph, Vav, and Yodh f r equently quiesce, though
pr eceded and f ollowed by a vowel.
E. g. fi'lp instead of Ehj? qd^odm ; instead of bdryen; ttj&H
instead of ttjiH ro-Hish; instead of nijSJtt nlm-tsl-Klth.
NOTE. In the last case, viz. that of a Segholate form ( 59. 2),
the quiescence and consequent contraction always takes place if the
preceding vowel be homogeneous; as UfaH instead of ; n &B in-
stead of ; nteai instead of nj ba Sic. But if the preceding
vowel be heterogeneous, then the contraction does not take place;
as nTQ, rrj j . Quiescence is admitted here only by necessity, in or-
der to mark the construct state of nouns. ( 137. Dec. VI. e.f.)
5. Peculiarities of Ahph.
t(a) When Aleph with a composite Sheva is immedi-
ately pr eceded by a simple syllable with the cor r esponding
shor t vowel, this vowel is f r equently lengthened and Aleph
goes into quiescence.
E. g. WBNlb for for as it is often written;
rneo for HI*2 Niph. of Vntt; for i>2ey1fut Hiph. of &c.
(b) In the beginniig of a wor d, when a composite
Sheva belongs to it, Aleph not inf r equently takes a cor -
r esponding long vowel.
no
4 8 . QUIESCENTS J RELATION TO PRECEDING VOWELS*
Instead of ( ~ ) is put ( ) as for
( ) - ( ) - * *
( ) (-
1
-) - t r t n *
NOTE. This is a Syriasm. At the beginning of a word, the Syr-
ians always enunciate Alepb and also Yodh with a proper vowel.
6. When two quiescents come together , and a yowel
between them is moved back or dr opped (supr a nos. 2, 4),
one of them is put in otio. ( 23. 6.)
. g. pfifX with 1 in olio instead of 'pfiOS; nlfitbn with 1 in otio
instead of rriKbtt ; with fit in olio instead of bfc|*l30-
7. A quiescent may again become moveable, if a
change of vowels or par ticular f or ms of wor ds r equir e it
E.g. ihizj (for a betvc, plural shevarrim.
48* Quiescents ; relation both to homogeneous and heteroge-
neous vowels
tl* In or der to admit of quiescence the pr eceding
vowel must be homogeneous; and if the vowel be shor t,
it is of cour se lengthened by the quiescent ( 23. 3.)
E g. SttfcOb instead of SttRb ; instead of in-
stead of &c. ( 47.)
Pattahh and Segbol sometimes remain before a quiescent letter,
but are prolonged ( 23. 3) ; as nNnjxb for riK^jPb, for
( 47. 2 note.)
The future Kal of verbs && exhibits an exception to the above
rule (comp. 47. 6. o) ; as instead of b2>N, by the rule
NOTE. HOW to determine whether the long vowel should be
Tseri or Hhireq magnum when Yodh quiesces, or Hholem or Skureq
when Vav quiesces, can be learned only from practice.
t2. If the pr eceding vowel be heterogeneous, the case
is managed in two ways in or der to ef f ect a quiescence.
(a) The vowel conf or ms to the quiescent.
E. g. at vi f t instead of (Vav receiving Hholem or Shureq
23); instead of STib; nbt e instead of iibl*; instead of
n *ba.
*
4 9 . QUIESCENTS ; COMMUTATION AND OMISSION. I l l
(b) The quiescent conf or ms to the vowel.
E. g. &N{ or dj? instead of aij?, Vav being changed into Alepb
which is often dropped; instead of rn, Vav into Yodh ; F&tfj
instead of ), Vav into He ; instead of Yodh into He.
NOTE 1. The case a is the most common. In 6, the vowel is
retained because it is essential to the characteristic form of the
words, and the quiescent is therefore made to conform to it.
NOTE 2. The vowel-letters (N *J ) in cases where they are move-
able, sometimes conform to the vowel-points of the preceding sylla-
ble ; as instead of where Aleph is put for Vav because
of the preceding Qamets; instead of Q2, a*rj instead of awi,
where Yodh is put for Vav because of the preceding Hhireq. This
is very common in the Arabic.
49. Quiescents ; commutation and omission.
1. As the same vowels ar e homogeneous to sever al
of the quiescents ( 23. 2), a var iety of or thogr aphy has
ar isen in r egar d to the quiescents, without occasioning,
however , any dif f er ence in the pr onunciation.
E. g. K is put for ST-, as for
N I i l l , -
^ -
n
?r.
*<- rio
i-u - - ttti
n-i - s r j * i n n
i - . ran
rt-, - to* ritoaj
- t n i &i
2. The quiescents ar e of ten wholly omitted, the pr o-
nunciation r emaining the same. ( 24.)
In many words, custom authorizes the omission of the quiescents
uniformly. In others usage is variable. In some they are scarcely
ever omitted.
3. Daghesh euphonic sometimes occasions the omission
of a quiescent.
l i s 5 0 . QUIESCENTS ; APOCOPE AND PARAGOGE.
E. g. maz-zi, written also rtJJg fee. ( 29. 8. a).
On the exchange of the quiescents for each other when moveable
consonants, see 39. 2. c.
50* Quiescents 4 apocope andparagoge
This section treats only of those letters which are really quies-
cent. For the apocope and paragoge of moveable letters, see 42,43.
/. Apocope.
1. In the f utur e of ver bs nVi and in the apocopated
imper ative, H-. and H f all away. ( 123. I. d, III. d.)
E. g. fut. apocopated or ; Piel imper. apoco-
pated >1 &c.
2. The same apocope occur s in nouns der ived f r om
these ver bs, especially when they r eceive incr ease. ( 137.
Dec. IX.)
II. Paragoge.
Paragogic letters are either orthographic, or they serve to lengthen
out words.
3. Aleph par agogic af ter V, \ and \ is of ten mer ely
or thogr aphic. '
E. g. tops the same as ; t o 3*1 the same as Sal ; Klb the same
as 51b. The Arabians always write an orthographic Aleph after a Vav
quiescent at the end of a word. In Hebrew this seldom happens.
4. Sever al par agogic letter s, with their vowels, ser ve
to lengthen out wor ds.
() n - . E. g. Bft, by parag. Mart; "Jii (fem. pron.) by parag. JlSiT
Also in verbs; see 91, 92. 34. 2. h notes.
() ft-. E. g. (interjection), by parag. rtlrt;
(e) fT-. . g. i *, by parag. Also in verbs; see
at above under a.
(<Q i - . E. g. t u, by parag. Sal mostly in suffixes ( 126, 135);
by parag. llVft. (Comp. 40. 2. 45.4.)
5 1 , 5 2 . VOWELS; MUTATION ETC.
() V E. g. BV.1, by parag. b' MiS, 1W) ,
Ex. 15: 6.
For the tone-syllable of words which receive the above paragogic
letters, see 34. 2. h &c.
NOTE 1. In none of die preceding cases does the paragogic letter
affect the signification of the word to whkli it is appended. Compare
the last example in e, Ex. 15:* 6 and in verse 11.
NOTE 2. Pronominal suffixes to verbs and nouns, corresponding as
to appearance with most of the above paragogic forms, are also em-
ployed, and are treated of in 126, 135. The termination ap-
pear* also as a local preposition, indicating motion to a place. ( 157.)
5. A par agogic letter is most f r equently added to the
construct state of nouns ( 135). It also appear s of ten in
compound wor ds, L e. pr oper names; as 123
man of God, the f ir st noun being in the constr uct state.
IL OF THE VOWELS.
51. Vowels ; general causes of mutation*
The numerous changes of the Hebr ew vowels ar e
f undamentally connected with the whole gr ammatical con-
str uction of the language. They r esult from the lengthen-
ing and shortening of words ; the position of the tone-sylla-
ble ; the relation <f nouns to each other ; euphony ; the placing
of words at the end of sentences ; and the influence of dialects.
52. Vowels ; mutable and immutable.
In order to understand the following rules, it is necessary that the
student should have made himself familiar with the theory of pure
and Impure, long and short vowels, as exhibited in 21; with their or-
thography in connexion with the vowel-letters, as exhibited in 24;
and with the theory of the coalescence of the Ehevi, the gutturals,
Resh &c. in the vowels, as exhibited in 23. With the principles in
his mind which are there unfolded, he will be able to understand
without difficulty the following theory of the vowel-changes.
1 1 4
5 2 . VOWELS ; MUTABLE AND IMMUTABLE*
I. Common usage in respect to vowel-changes.
t l . All impur e vowels ar e long and immutable.
This is equally true of those which are called long, and of those
which are more usually short E. g. Qamets, Tseri, Hhireq, Hholem,
and Shureq, having a quiescent or a guttural coalescing with them, are
immutable, whether the quiescent &c.'be written out or not ( 21,
24). In the same manner, Pattahh, Seghol, and Qibbuts, when im-
pure, are equally immutable. Whether a vowel be impure and im-
mutable cannot, in many cases, be discerned merely from its appear-
ance ; because vowels after which the quiescents are omitted in writ-
ing ( 24), or vowels after which a Daghesh forte has fallen out
( 21. 7,8), are of doubtful appearance in these respects. A knowl-
edge of etymology, declension, dialects &c. is often necessary, in order
to decide in respect to the pureness and consequent mutability of vowels.
t2. All pur e vowels ar e mutable.
This is equally true of the long and of the short vowels. Long
vowels when pure may be shortened, and short vowels when pure
may be lengthened, i. e. long vowels when pure may be exchanged for
short ones, and vice versa. Gesenius has laid it down as a rule (large
Gram. 44), that short.vowels before Daghesh forte, i. e. in a mixed
syllable, are immutable. But this is evidently erroneous. E. g.
in pause nnt t ; nn? in pause Fins &c. where the short Pattahh is plain-
ly mutable. The fact most evidently is, that as a general principle
oil vowels unmixed with consonant-sounds, and therefore pure, are in their
nature mutable ; they may therefore be changed, whenever there is oc-
casion for i t This very simple theory appears to have been only
partially developed by the admirable grammarian just mentioned.
II. Particular usage in respect to vowel-changes.
To preserve the form of a particular word is sometimes so impor-
tant, that in order to effect this purpose the common law respecting
the mutability of vowels is transgressed.
3. Wher e ther e is an accidental concur r ence of a qui-
escent and a homogeneous vowel, and a coalescence takes
place in consequence of it, still, if declension r equir e it,
such vowel is mutable.
5 2 . VOWELS ; MUTABLE AND IMMUTABLE. 115
E. g. 3 pen. masc. K3>0, so written by reason of the N instead of the
regular form ( 55. 3), but 3 pers. fern. where the Qamets
under K is dropped, which shews that it is mutable. So flhp, with
suffix ""fipp i. e. the Hholem of the final syllable is thrown back
and shortened into Qamets Hhateph, although in the ground-form it
quiesced in 8. ( 126. IV. note 8.)
4. Immutable vowels belonging to the same class ar e
sometimes exchanged f or each other , on account of their
r elative length. ( 21. 20.)
() Hholem impur e and Shur eq.
E. g. Niph. 3 pers. sing, O'lpa with Hholem impure, but 2 pers.
niJMpa, 1 pers. Tiinsipa &c. with Shureq. So infinitive absolute
DIE, ->i0; but infinitive construct rm, *1*10 &c. So also many words of
the form 01253 &c. in the suffix-state, plural &c. take forms like "O.Htt,
&c. i. e. they substitute Shureq for Hholem impure.
() Tser i impur e and Hhir eq magnum.
E. g. Infin. abs. in Hiphil or infin. constr. (which is
shorter) So the plural noun in regimen is &c.
NOTE. In both the above cases, the first vowel is relatively longer
thart the second ( 21. 20); and when abridgment of form is required
without throwing away an immutable vowel, a correlate vowel some-
what shorter is chosen.
5. Shur eq in the r egular f utur e of ver bs IP, is ex-
changed in the apocopated f or m f or Hholem pur e. ( 118.
I. d.)
E. g. D*p, future ip?, apocopated form Dp^ which has a pure
Hholem, because with Vav prefixed it reads vay-ya-q&m with
short o. This exchange is made to shorten the form in the apocopat-
ed state; for Hholem pure is shorter than Shureq, although Hholem
impure would be longer than Shureq. (Supra. 4. a, and note.)
The same thing, in substance, takes place in some other cases in re-*
gard to exchange of forms. The reason is, that to mark the particu-
lar form by some peculiar designation, is more important than to ob-
serve the general laws of the change of vowels.
6. Feminine endings in H- ar e changed into in
r egimen. (135. 2.)
This results from the importance of marking the regimen-form:
116 5 3 . VOWELS ; GENERAL PRINCIPLES o r MUTATION.
in order to accomplish which, the common law of the immutability of
an impure vowel (in this case !*T-) is violated.
7. Composite Shevas with their cor r esponding shor t
r owels ar e sometimes exchanged f or each other .
E. g. ob*5 part masculine, hut in the feminine ftfcVag, plural
tnabya. So future with suffix ( 68.3). The A sound
is shorter than the E sound, and when the word receives increase
is not ^infrequently substituted for i t
NOTE. This change does not relate to the commutation of immutabU
vowels for each other, and therefore does not rank under the same
class with no. 4. But as it is similar in Its operation, and is occasioned
by a -similar cause, it is here noticed on account of these resemblances.
8. Besides the par ticular changes alr eady noticed,
ther e ar e other s which ar e occasioned by cer tain laws of
euphony, and by the position of wor ds in sentences; f or
an account of which see 60. In all languages ther e ar e
some anomalies, and in the Hebr ew they ar e occasional-
ly f ound in r espect to the vowels; but this does not pr ove
that gener al r ules r especting vowel-changes ar e not usef ul.
9. General Summary.
() Immutable. Qamets, Tser i, Hhir eq magnum, Hho-
lem, Shur eq, Pattahh, Seghol, Qibbuts, when impure.
() Mutable. Qamets, Tser i, Hholem, Pattahh, Seghol,
Hhir eq par vum, Qamets Hhateph, Qibbuts, when pure.
The student should note, that Hhireq magnum and Shureq are
always impure ; and Hhireq parvum and Qamets Hhateph are always
pure. All the other vowels may be pure or impure, and consequent-
ly mutable or immutable, according to their respective condition in
each particular word.
53. Vowels ; general principles of mutation.
t l . The exchange of the pur e vowels f or each other
is limited, almost exclusively, to the boundar ies of the
classes to which they r espectively belong. ( 21. 22.)
5 4 . VOWELS ; CHANGE OF LONG INTO SHORT.
117
There are a very few apparent exceptions to this principle. E. g.
130, plural t rnfc; plural &c. But even here, it is
perhaps more probable that the derivative forms come from IJa, a*yiB
&c. now obsolete. As to such cases as 2 person Hiph. nbt3j?H from
3 person &c. there is here rather a change of characteristics,
than an exchange of vowels.
1*2. The changes, almost without exception, r espect
the pur e vowels in the f inal and penult syllables of wor ds,
as they exist in the gr ound-f or m.*
54. Vowels ; change of long into short
"f l. Long vowels ar e exchanged f or shor t ones only
in mixed syllables, when the tone is r emoved.
As long vowels can usually stand in mixed syllables only when
they have the tone; so, that tone being removed, it is evident that
the long vowels must be shortened, when the syllable continues to
be a mixed one. ( 37 rules 5,6.)
NOTE. TO shorten a vowel is different from dropping i t Thus in
from the first vowel is dropped, the second is shortened, i. e. ex-
changed for a short vowel. For an account of vowels dropped, see 56.
t2. Long vowels ar e exchanged f or shor t ones when
the tone is moved forward, i. e. towar ds the lef t. This
happens in the f ollowing cases.
(a) When the wor d r eceives any accession beginning
with a consonant.
E. g. ground-form Here the Qamets in "Q goes into
Pattahh, and the first Qamets is dropped ( 56). So ground-form V,
with suffix tjb"r (but sometimes as *j*r); from fr
m
ylq-tbUkhd from ilr'ia gudh-ld from ^*1.
NOTE 1. The reason why the accession must begin with a consonant
* The ground-form of words is that on which the other or derived forms are
boilt. Io regard to the oblique cases of a OOUQ singular and the nominative
plural, the ground-form is the nominative singular. In regard to the oblique ca-
ses of the plural, it is the nominative plural. In the praeter of verbs, it is the
3 person singular &c.
1G
118 5 4 . VOWELS ; CHANGE OF LONG INTO SHORT.
is, that otherwise the long vowel is thrown into a simple syllable, and
of course must remain unchanged. E. g. 131, with suffix beginning
with a consonant D^i ai , where 13 is changed into 15 because it has
lost the tone by the accession of &3, and a long mixed syllable unaccent-
ed is contrary to usage. But in " ^ l , there is not the same reason for
changing the Qamets, because the accession begins with a vowel, and
necessarily takes away the last letter of the word, in order to form a
regular syllable ( 37 rule 1); consequently it leaves the Qamets of
the ground-form in a simple syllable, where it may stand unaccented,
and where it is the kind of vowel which such a syllable requires.
( 55. I.)
NOTE 2. There are a few cases where the accession to a word be-
gins with a consonant, and yet, although it removes the tone of the
previous syllable, it does not change the previous long vowel. E. g.
^151 dthfrd-rtkka, &c. But here a special expedient is adopted
to preserve the long vowel, viz. the final letter of the word is taken
away and thrown into the same syllable with the accession, and thus
Qamets remains in a simple syllable and needs no change. ( 31.2. b.)
t(6) When a mixed tone-syllable with a long pur e
r owel pr ecedes Maqqeph.
E. g. L^JN-bs kdl from JJS ( 32. 3). The two words thus connect-
ed, are regarded only as one in respect to accent
t(c) Gener ally, when a noun is in r egimen, i. e. bef or e
another noun in the genitive ( 135), and has a long pur e
vowel in a mixed f inal syllable, it exchanges the long vowel
f or a shor t one.
E. g. l i l word, but in regimen Hj5i? 131 the word of Jehovah.
For the ground of this change, see 135. The tonic accent, indeed,
is written in our Hebrew Bibles over such nouns when in regimen. But
this only serves to show, that the primary design of the accents is not
to mark the tone-syllable. At least, analogical reasoning in respect
to the shortening of the vowel in the case before us, would lead us to
believe, that two nouns in regimen are treated as a composite noun, and
so the real tone is removed to the ultimate or penult syllable-of
the second word ( 32. 3). The change which takes place In the
long pure vowel of a final mixed syllable of a noun in regimen, is
generally the same as that which happens in other cases from remov-
ing the tone.
5 5 . VOWELS ; CHANGE OP SHORT INTO LONG. 119
1*3. Long vowels ar e exchanged f or shor t ones when
the tone is moved backwards, i. e. towar ds the r ight
E. g. ground-form *$2; vay-ya^qbrn, ground-form tjjj
yd-qom; tJQttjPa* instead of 0nttp
t
2 Hos. 2: 9.
t4. In all the cases descr ibed in this section, the long
vowels ar e changed in the f ollowing manner.
Qamets goes into Pattahh.
Tseri Seghol or Hhireq parvum.
Hholem Qamets Hhateph or Qibbuls.
Compare the foregoing examples.
f 5. When a long tone-syllable becomes shor t, by r e-
ceiving an accession which causes Daghesh f or te to be in-
ser ted in its f inal letter , then the change of the long vow-
el is as f ollows.
Qamets goes into Pattahh.
Tseri Hhireq parvum.
Hholem Qibbuts or Qamets Hhateph.
E. g. b*, tW|, ^ ; p n , ngH; fr, 6z-zl
NOTE. If the tone remains, the vowel is not shortened; as
rtTah be. ( 34. 2. h.)
55. Vowels ; change of short into long.
Shor t vowels ar e exchanged f or long ones in the f ol-
lowing cases.
1*1. When f r om any cause a mixed syllable with a
shor t vowel is changed into a simple syllable.
E. g. inbDj5 he killed Aim, ground-form ground-form
ar t ; ground-form
NOTE. In this case, the accession made to the word begins with a
vowel. Consequently ty requires the last letter of the word to be uni-
ted with that vowel, and thus takes it away from the previously mix-
ed syllable, which of course becomes simple. But when long syllables
are shortened, the accession begins with a consonant. (6 54.2. a, note 1.)
5 6 . TOWELS DROPPED.
t2. When Daghesh f or te is omitted wher e analogy
r equir es it, i. e. in a guttur al, or at the end of a wor d.
(45. )
E. g. for ; ?J12 for ; *J13 for j i a ; b ^ for \>X*
t
used
instead of ft$r; DK for att = DK; for from &c.
Pattahh frequently remains before ft and n, but is long. ( 46. 1.)
NOTE ]. The cases in nos. 1 and 2 are in principle the same. All
the difference is, that in no. 2 the concluding guttural of the mixed
syllable coalesces with the vowel, so that the syllable becomes simple,
and long; whereas in no. 1 the concluding consonant is transferred to
another syllable, in which case usage commonly prolongs the vowel
which was short. (Comp. 23. 7.)
NOTE 2. In respect to the case where Daghesh forte is omitted at the
end of a word, the vowel is not uniformly prolonged, but often remains.
E. g. apocopated form for which is written ba^ and ba\
Compare 2Q = 33&, to account for the latter method of writing.
t3. When ther e is a concur r ence of a homogeneous
quiescent letter .
E. g. instead of ; ftb* instead of ftbs. (Comp. 52. 3.)
t4. In gener al (but not always) when a pause accent
f alls on a shor t vowel. ( 60. 7.)
E. g. D^ja instead of C?Q; baft instead of b^| -
But in the futures of Niphal and Hiphil, and occasionally of other
conjugations, the pause-accent falling on final Tseri commonly chan-
ges it into Pattahh ( 60. 7. a (2). 97. 2. 99.1, e.)
5. Ther e ar e a f ew peculiar anomalies.
() Some words (very few) prolong their vowel when they take the
article; as D?, C*ft; 1ft, 1 ftft; I S, I X* ; 16, IDf t ; yifi$, Y")ft &c.
() Seghol with ft quiescent at the end of words, when these words
are placed in regimen, goes into Tseri E. g. ft3|l, in regimen ft51;
a singularity limited to words of this form. ( 137. Dec. IX.)
56. Vowels dropped
t l . When f r om any cause the tone is moved f or war d,
or towar ds the lef t, f r om the syllable which had it in the
5 6 . VOWELS DROPPED.
121
gr ound-f or m, an omission of mutable vowels takes place
to cor r espond with it. This omission is r egulated by the
f ollowing pr inciples.
t2. When the tone is moved f or war d one syllable,
the penultimate vowel of the ground-f orm f alls away if it
be mutable.
E. g.
O f T" T I
7
T **' f l
But when the tone continues on the same syllable as in the ground*
form, the first vowel remains unchanged, although an accession be
made to the word; as toPST, ground-form
NOTE. The above rule is pretty general, in respect to nouns and
adjectives. It applies generally to verbs in the praeter, where the ac-
cent is thrown forward by declension, and also in the various cases where
the verb receives suffixes which change the place of the tone. See
126 and the paradigms in 127, particularly Par. XV.
t3. In many cases, particularly in the f utur e (and
sometimes in the pr aeter ) tense of ver bs and in the pr es-
ent par ticiples, when the tone is moved f or war d one sylla-
ble by declension, or by a f or mative or other suf f ix begin-
ning with a vowel, the ultimate vowel of the ground-f orm
f alls away if it be mutable, and the first vowel of the ver b
remains.
E. g. In the praeter of verbs; Vog, feminine In the fu-
ture ; , ^Dp
s
?; Vt5|>7, with suffix In participles; ^ ' p ,
feminine p; plural
As usage in the verb is variable, sometimes the first and sometimes
the second vowel falling away by a change of tone, practice only can
make the student familiar with the respective cases where the one or
the other principle is to be applied.
NOTE. Nouns of the same form as present participles follow the
same rule. E. g. an enemy, plural ( 137. Dec. VII.)
t4. When the tone is moved f or war d two syllables,
both the vowels of the gr ound-f or m f all away if mutable.
E. g. ^31, ; f pj , DPfspt; where both the vowels of the
122 5 7 , 5 8 . VOWELS ; TRANSPOSITION ETC.
ground-form disappear in the suffix-state. But here the suffix must
begin with a vowel; or the word must be plural, and in regimen.
For the manner in which those vowels that fall away are supplied,
see 58.
57. Vowels; transposition*
1. This happens mostly in ver bs with suf f ix pronouns,
wher e the suf f ixes do not take the tone.
E. g. ground-form &3Tg; where Qamets and Sheva are
transposed, and a composite Sheva is substituted for the simple one be-
cause of the guttural.
2. In ver bs Lamedh guttural, instead of a transpose*
tion, ther e is r ather an inser tion of a new vowel.'
E. g. ground-form fax*}?; ground-form
These examples, however, may be better solved by another prin-
ciple, viz. the original vowel in die final syllable of the root is restor-
ed, and prolonged if it be a Pattahh. ( 126. IV. notes 6, 12.)
3* Segholate nouns ( 59. 2) in the plur al, imitate
the tr ansposition in ver bs.
E. g. ^*3, original form or but in plural
Transposition sometimes takes place merely for the sake of eupho-
ny ; as for yny, iuatfns for Hrja.
58. Insertion of new vowels
11. When a vowel f alls away, a Sheva of cour se comes
in its place ( 26. 2); a composite one if the letter be a
guttur al, other wise a simple one. But wher e two vowels
f all away ( 56. 4) and leave the wor d in such a state
that thr ee consonants must come bef or e a vowel, then a
new vowel is inser ted in or der to avoid the impossible syl-
lable which these would make ( 26.1). This new vow-
el is usually Hkireq parvum; but if either of the letter s be
a guttur al, it is then Pattahh or Seghol
E. g. nsn in plur. constr. is instead of ^ S n , both of the
5 8 . NEW VOWELS. 123
vowels having fallen out So instead of from ;
*jena instead of ( 77. 1.)
NOTE. In a few cases the supplied vowel is Pattahh though the
letter be not a guttural; as instead of "'D355, ground-form
two wings.
1*2. If two letter s come bef or e a vowel both having a
Sheva, and the latter is a guttur al r equir ing a composite'
Sheva, the shor t vowel which is contained in the compos-
ite Sheva must also be inser ted under the pr eceding letter .
E. g. instead of i asb (regularly Wb ) ; for
na. (61: 9.)
The r ule may be other wise expr essed. Of two Shevas
before a vowel, if the second be composite, the first is chang-
ed into the short vowel of that composite Sheva.
The older grammarians expressed it still differently. A guttural
points itself and the preceding letter ; i. e. the vowel of the first letter
must be homogeneous with the Sheva of the second.
Thus in the future tenses of verbs Pe guttural, we have a de-
parture from the punctuation which is common where there is no guttu-
ral. E. g. instead of TD5?; nip?* instead of ( 102. 1.)
NOTE 1. In all these cases the guttural is thrown into the succeeding
syllable, instead of remaining in the preceding one, as in the regular
punctuation. E. g. "Ms!?* tftinnddh, but with guttural yd-3><hnodh.
NOTE 2. The preceding rule holds good, though the guttural should
afterwards exchange its composite Sheva for a simple one and be
again united with the preceding syllable, as is not unfrequetftly the
case. E. g. nih-p&kh, with composite Sheva n&rhtphakh,
not and not Two verbs only jake Hhireq
parvum in such cases; viz. fut Niph. J-rrjq; and h*n, f ut
In the fut apoc. Ilaireq parvum often appears; as f ut n i n j ,
apoc. "1)3?; Fnfl, f ut apoc. ^r j \
t3. If r egular ly two Shevas occur in the middle of a
wor d, the f ir st of which is composite, this composite She-
va f alls away, and the shor t vowel in it r emains in its place.
E. g. rtDDfnj instead of iiDDrta; instead oftj^^B; instead
of VW*\ (Comp. nos. 1,2 above.)
134 5 9 . FURTIVE VOWELS.
59. Insertion offurtive vowels
f l . It is contr ar y to the genius of the Hebr ew lan-
guage to admit two consonants af ter a vowel, in any sylla-
ble except at the end of a wor d, and ver y r ar ely even
ther e.
E. g n*]5Q^ 2 pers. sing. fem. praet. of Kal. So also l i s , and a
few other nouns.
1*2. To avoid the concur r ence of two consonants m
this way, the Hebr ews f or the most par t supplied a vow-
el under the penultimate one, which does not belong to the
essential form of the word, but is a mere expedient for the
sake <f euphony. The vowel thus supplied is commonly
Seghol; under penultimate guttur als, Pattahh ; and under
Yodh f inal, Hhireq parvum. ( 34. 2. a. 41. 3 note 3.)
All nouns, adjectives, and par ticiples, in which these
f ur tive vowels ar e f ound, ar e said to have a Segholate form,
and ar e usually called Segholates.
These furtive vowels are supplied in the following classes of words.
() In all nouns, adjectives, and participles, which end in Seghol,
Pattahh, or short Hhireq.
E. g. instead of or -jbb orig. form.
13^ 1*3
s -
rr>2 m i
- IX-
Fem. nouns r n^ s
Participles (Comp. 60.3.)
() In the apocopated future and imperative of verbs Vrb. ( 123.1, d.)
Fut. Kal. apocopated for which is used.
nyj* i n
1
!
Fut Hiph. ^12
Imp. Hiph. n e i n 01:3
n &3
6 0 . VOWELS ; CHANGES PROM EUPHONY, ETC. 125
(c) In die 2 pers. sing. fern. praet of verbs Lttmtdh guttural; as
ntf9 jAd-md-MU for !Wg thd^mdst.
NOTE 1. In Arabic, nouqs of the class a have no furtive vowel
written. They write a king; hot pronounce with a furtive
Seghol, like the Hebrews.
NOTE 2. The Pattahh which is inserted in words of the class e, dif-
fers from the Pattahh furtive treated of in 27, in being pronounced
after the guttural under which it stands. It also differs from the fur-
tive vowel in words of the classes a and b above, in being introduced
merely to facilitate the pronunciation of the gutturals (comp. 27.1);
for in the 2 pers. fem. of all other verbs, no furtive vowel is either
written or pronounced.
60. Vowels ; changes from euphony and from the influence
ofpause-accents,
1. A guttur al with Qamets seldom admits the A
sound, i. e. either Pattahh or Qamets, bef or e it; but sub-
stitutes f or them the kindr ed vowel Seghol*
E. g. m.JTT} instead of V*ni* instead of Vn; instead
of rttvo; instead of (61.3. 68.4.)
But Qamets sometimes remains; as i nt t &c. ( 55. 5.)
NOTE 1. Sometimes, though very seldom, the second Qamets goes '
Into Seghol instead of the first; as instead of 191 for
NOTE 2. Seghol sometimes, though very rarely, stands for Qamets
when a guttural does not follow; as " n ' i i instead of Ps. 4:3.
NOTE 3. So also very rarely, before Hhateph Qamets; as
Instead of t r annt t . ( 61.6.)
2. Pattahh in a mixed syllable is not unf r equently
changed into Seghol; and vice ver sa.
E. g. instead of 0 ^ 2 ; instead of Vice versa, as*
)Y instead of 1t constr. state of ( 142. note 5.)
3. The f ur tive Seghol ( 59. 2) at the end of wor ds,
of ten changes the pr eceding vowels Qamets, Pattahh, or
Tser i of the or iginal f or ms, into Seghol.
17
126 6 0 . VOWELS ; CHANGES FROM EUPHONT, ETC.
E. g. instead of ; ns. fyn for nqhi n; for ; -
fut. Hiph. apoc. al s oi | \ l ; imper. Hiph. nnn, apoc-
B-iH, Seghol-form
NOTE. With gutturals the change is into Pattahh; as YTFFC, Seghol-
form n$M.
4. The Segholate f or ms ar e sometimes contr acted,
ami the vowel thr own upon the penult letter of them,
E. g. nf itip instead of nt$ip; nttXb instead of nt$2ta. ( 47.2.)
5. In a similar manner , composite Shevas with their
pr eceding shor t vowels ar e sometimes contr acted, when
they assume a Segholate f or m in the cour se of inf lection.
E. g. WHKn for 1 afWjfy so- written instead of ; wbofitn for
InbDijn, so written instead of (Comp. 47.5. a.)
6. On the other hand, long vowels ar e sometimes (not
of ten) put f or the shor t ones which usually pr ecede the
composite Shevas; and vice ver sa.
E. g. "fi^rn for }Vnn; for ilbifrh for nbstt. Vice versa,
for if cn;'for *JV.
NOTE. The cases in nos. 4, 5, 6, are quite unfrequent, and are ex-
ceptions to the general rule. The contraction in no. 4 is a Syriasm.
f 7. Vowels ar e of ten changed by the pause-accents,
which may be placed either on the ultimate or penult syl-
lable, even though the or iginal tone-syllable is ther eby
r emoved. ( 34. 2. j . )
A wor d or syllable, on which one of these accents ap-
pear s, is said to be in pause.
The changes occasioned by a pause-accent may be di-
vided into two classes.
(a) When it f alls upon the usual tone-syllable. .
( l ) It changes Pattahh into Qamets; as bOJ?.
Seghol (standing for Pattahh) suffers the same change; as ;
and so of all nouns belonging to the A class of Segholates in Dec. VI.
< 137,)
1
6 0 . VOWELS; CHANGES FROM PAUSE-ACENTS, ETC. 127
(2) It often changes Tseri in the ultimate syllable of verbs into
Pattahh; as l Ef t , I Bf t ; bfej?,
w i t h
suff. ; in^n*:, in*n\
(6) When it f alls upon a syllable, which is not the
usual tone-syllable.
I. On the penult.
(1) When the last syllable begins with a single consonant, and there
Is a vowel already belonging to the next preceding letter, if that vowel
be Pattahh, it is changed into Qamets; as nna*, ftng; ftrur, ftng: but if it
be a long vowel, it remains unchanged; as "'Djij.
(2) When the last syllable begins with two consonants and of course
with a vocal Sheva, then the pause-accent (being on the penult) occa-
sions a proper vowel to be placed in the room of the Sheva. This
vowel is various, according to the nature of the case.
(a) In verbs, the original vowel of the ground-form is restored;
as ftKV from fin"
1
; :i3J2t3, from ; future ibbp?
t ;rr
7
s i t ? r * t . " p '
from 3 pers. i'opp ; from for 132^") &c.
NOTE. In the second and two last examples, the Pattahh of the ground-
form is restored and lengthened into Qamets; which is the usual fact
in all cases of this nature. Even silent Sheva, in some cases, is chang-
ed by the pause-accent, and the preceding vowel removed; as r&nti
with paragogic ft, from in pause tlSfXTD.
(b) In verbs ftb, the Pattahh of the ground-form is not only res-
tored and lengthened, but the Yodh of the root also is restored, in cas-
es where it usually falls out; as :ptD3 from ftD3 = ^03; wa ,
imper. of ft*2 =*
,
?2. ( 122. 1. 123.1, h.)
(c) In nouns, and other parts of speech, simple Sheva goes into
Seghol; as D^Uj, : composite Sheva goes into the
corresponding vowel; as ""'btjt, ^3K where Pattahh is inserted and length-
ened ; ^ n , "'bh where Hhateph Qamets becomes Qamets Hhateph
and is lengthened into Hholem. No instance of Hhateph Seghol oc-
curs.
NOTE. A few anomalies.are found here;
II. On the ultimate.
(3) Here the pause-accent prolongs the vowel, if it be short; as
with Qamets Hhateph in the ultimate, but in pause nb*3 with
Hholem.
128 4 6 1 . VOWELS UNDER THE ARTICLE, ETC.
8. The ef f ect of pause-accents is not unif or m. In a
gr eat number of cases, no change is occasioned by them.
On the other hand, most of the disjunctive accents, and
even sever al of the conjunctives, not unf r equently pr oduce
the same ef f ect in pr olonging syllables, as the pause-accents.
(o) Disjunctive*. E. g. 5
J|*2, I V
K
Ps. 5: 12. &c. &C-
( i j l i nr j n, ^rj s- j ?; r r oi j ,
f p o n &c. &c.
*v* *
From the view of the subject here given, it is sufficiently evident
that all the changes wrought upon the vowels by the accents, are mere-
ly euphonic and arbitrary.
61. Vowels j changes in the punctuation of the article, prepo-
sitions, the conjunction Vav, and the interrogative He
I. Article.
1. The ^ of the Hebr ew ar ticle Vn ( 65) being al-
ways assimilated to the f ir st letter of the f ollowing noun
(41. 1.6), and commonly expr essed by a Daghesh f or te in.
that f ir st letter , the usual punctuation of the ar ticle is Pat-
tahh f ollowed by Daghesh forte.
E. g. ttjnan the serpent, instead of uinj ( 63.3.)
2. The Daghesh not being admissible in guttur als, the
ar ticle bef or e them commonly (not always) lengthens its
vowel into Qamets. ( 46. 1.)
E. g. Me man ; pfcrt the eye ; WKhrt the head. So D\"T^K!l
Ex. 22: 7.
Before Si and H, the Pattahh of the article very generally (not aW
ways) remains; as *p$?riH the darkness, who walks. But Pattahh
in such cases is long. ( 46.1.)
3. If the guttur al have a Qamets under it, the ar ti-
cle commonly (not always) takes Seghol instead of Qamets.
6 1 . VOWELS UNDER PREPOSITIONS, ETC*
1 2 9
E. g* the mountains ; the cloud. ( 60. 1.)
But we have also Vl ^n, a m, an, Ciitn, i n n &c. agreeably
to the common rale in no. 2 above. ( 55.5.)
4. The Daghesh commonly (not always) is omitted be-
f or e a wor d beginning with Mem or Yodh with a sim-
ple Sheva.
E.g. nDDQn (read hd-mekh&a-te) the covering, instead of nDban hdm-
mtkhdse; (read hdryeikdr)the river, instead of nK*n ha^ytutor.
5. In a f ew instances, the ar ticle takes Seghol bef or e
Hhateph Qamets.
E. g. tTttHHS} the months, rna^Ht^ the watte placet. ( 60.1 note 3.)
6. When the pr epositions 3;, 3 , V, ar e pr ef ixed to a
noun which has the ar ticle, the ar ticle commonly (not al-
ways) f alls away; but its yowel and Daghesh ar e attached
to the pr epositions.
' E. g. for for tons; $ for d^. nqb.
The cases where the article and preposition are both retained are
somewhat numerous, particularly in respect to S; as 0i *n3, D*nb,
II. Prtpotiiiont S,
7. The appr opr iate point of these pr epositions is sim-
ple Sheva. ( 157.)
8. Bef or e the ar ticle, they commonly (not always) r e-
move it and take its punctuation. (See no. 6 above.)
In the same manner, they sometimes remove the n of the in
Niphil and Hiphil. (Comp. 88. 3.)
9. Bef or e composite Shevas, they take the cor r es-
ponding shor t vowel; as '['nHS &c.
10. Bef or e a tone-syllable they take Qamets.
() Before monosyllabic or penacuted infinitives, as ntolb
but not when they are in regimen, as * n ^ s .
() Before monosyllabic or penacuted pronouns and suffixes.
(157.3.)
130
6 1 . VOWELS UNDER VAV, ETC.
(c) Before the tone-syllables of nouns at the end of a proposition,
or when they have a disjunctive accent; as Gen. 1: 6 tr) 'pa-
Deut 17: 8 V?.-
But prepositions before monosyllabic and penacuted dissyllabic
nouns, in cases other than a, 6, c above, generally exhibit the punctu-
ation of noe. 7 and 9. But takes Qamets; though not before
the genitive.
1
III. Preposition ja.
11. The 1 of the pr eposition *|t3 ( 157) is common-
ly assimilated to the f ir st letter of the f ollowing wor d; so
that the usual punctuation is Hhireq parvum f ollowed by
Daghesh forte ; as instead of ( 63. 3.)
12. Bef or e the guttur als and Resh, the Daghesh
is omitted and the vowel under the Mem commonly
lengthened into Tser i ( 46.1); as
13. Sometimes when the Daghesh is omitted the
Hhir eq is still r etained, but is lengthened into Hhir eq mag-
num* ( 46. 1.)
E. g. Bfitba; perhaps nl - f i a Ruth 1:12.
14. Bef or e Yodh with Sheya, Hhir eq r emains, but is
pr olonged, because Yodh becomes quiescent (47. 1.)
E.g.
Mem is found with Pattahh 1 Chr. 15:13 nsitDttlaab.
T p f - i
IV. Conjunction 1.
15. The appr opr iate point of the conjunction Vav is
simple She va; as (158.)
16. Bef or e wor ds having simple Sheya under the f ir st
letter , Vav takes Shur eq; as ^37*1.
But when a word begins with \ Vav may take Hhireq, in which
case Yodh becomes quiescent; as Wi , OittH'O, ( 48.2. a.)
When the first radical of the two verbis r r n and f pn would regu-
6 1 . VOWELS UNDER VAV AND HE.
131
larly have ( - ) under it, Vav commonly t^kes Hhireq parvum, some-
times Seghol, and the first radical takes simple Sheva; as
r n Gen. 42: 18. rtW Gen. 12:2. (6 102. 3 note.)
A tl' ~ 5*
J
'
17. ID like manner , bef or e its cognate letter s the la-
bials ( 2 13 B), the conjunction Vav commonly (not always)
takes Shur eq.
E. g. (See no. 19 below.)
18. Bef or e a guttur al with composite Sheva, Vav
takes the cor r esponding shor t vowel; as
But if other letters hare a composite Sheva, Vav before them takes
Shureq; as
NOTE. When words begin with fit, the contraction to which this let-
ter is subject occasions, in some cases, an anomalous punctuation under
Vav prefixed; as CSTbfitJ instead of CJTbN); instead of
(47. 5. a. )
19. Bef or e a tone-syllable, Vav frequently (not al-
ways) takes Qamets; even in cases like those in no. 17.
(a) When the word with which it is joined has a disjunctive accent;
as tagl Gen. 33: 13. A word with a conjunctive accent, does not ad-
mit Vav with Qamets.
(&) Often (but not uniformly) when words are closely connected
In a kind of couplet or triplet; as 1111 IV* generation and generation;
511 aio good and evil; Di" day and night; ntl tinfcl IJJD fear
and a pit and a snare Is. 24:17.
But here the regular punctuation is sometimes also found; as ttTfit
aj'ifiO Ps. 87:6; uJi l ' W ni3T fornication and wine and new m e
Hos. 4: 11. Ecc. 2:26.
1
NOTE. For the punctuation of Vav conversive prefixed to the fa-
true tense of verbs, see 93.
V. Interrogative H.
20. The appr opr iate point of P! inter r ogative is Hha-
teph Pattahh.
E. g. Ysp IJDil an de arbore ? man custos?
132 6 1 * VOWELS UNDER HE.
21. Bef or e a simple Sheva it takes Pattahh; as HD^TlDn.
22. Bef or e guttur als it takes Pattahh, and in a f ew in-
stances Qamets.
E. g. shall I go? rtniJIiT an to sit?
23. Bef or e a guttur al with Qamets it takes SeghoL
E. g. EDnn is he wise ?
24. Not unf r equently it takes Daghesh euphonic af ter
it, and thus appear s tike the ar ticle; f r om which it can
be distinguished only by the sense of the passage, or by
its standing before the pr ef ixes of nouns &c. and not next
to the noun itself as does the ar ticle.
E. g. Gen. 17: 17 So 18: 21. 37:32. Nam. 13:19, 20 &c.
PART IV.
GRAMMATICAL STRUCTURE AND FORMS
OP WORDS.
* 62. Radical words,
1. The Hebr ew and its cognate languages, in their
pr esent state, exhibit a surprising degr ee of r egular ity and
unif or mity, in the constr uction and sound of the r adical
wor ds. This cir cumstance f or ms a br oad line of distinc-
tion between them and all the wester n languages. Al-
most all radical wor ds, which with f ew exceptions ar e
ver bs, consist of only thr ee letter s usually f or ming two syl-
lables ; as he reigned, the earth. Fr om such tr ilit-
er al r oots ar e der ived the var ious f or ms of nouns and
ver bs, which ar e used to expr ess case, number, gender , pei>
son, tense &c. and the dif f er ent f or ms of nouns, adjectives,
par ticles &c. Fr om this general pr inciple of der ivation
as to nouns &c. which was commonly r epr esented by the
older gr ammar ians as universal, ar e to be excepted, how-
ever , a f ew wor ds, which constitute the names of f amiliar
objects; as 2$ father, mother, *1* hand, &c. A f ew
par ticles and pr imitive pronouns also ar e biliter al in their
r oot, and not der ived f r om any tr iliter al wor d.
2. So extensive in Hebr ew is the pr inciple of inf lec-
1 3 4 6 2 . RADICAL WORDS*
tion gr ounded on der ivation f r om a tr iliter al r oot, that
nouns which ar e pr imitive and biliter al, conf or m to the com-
mon laws in their declension; i. e. they ar e tr eated as
though they wer e der ived f r om tr iliter al r oots. Thus
by inf lection becomes as if der ived f r om
; although Dtt is pr imitive.
3. Fr om some appear ances in the Hebr ew language,
it is pr obable that or iginally it contained a gr eater number
of biliter al r oots, than at pr esent; and that its tr iliter al
f or ms wer e, in many instances, constituted by doubling the
second r adical of the r oot, or adding to it one of the vow-
el-letter s, or the semi-vowel Nun.
E. g. and at o to be good, common root UD.
HD3 mo to blow, ns.
MSn, ttDI to thrust down,
In like manner , ther e ar e a consider able number of
wor ds in the Hebr ew and its cognate dialects, in which two
of the r adicals ar e the same, while the thir d is quite dif -
f er ent, and yet the meaning of all the wor ds r emains the
saoie.
E. g. The verb to lick Is either asb, 0?V, 5)5^, yyV,
or ; the letters sb being uniform in all.
But if biliter al r oots wer e or iginally mor e numer ous
than at pr eseut, they had conf or med to the common laws
of the language at least as ear ly as the wr itten Hebr ew now
extant; since the wr itten language ever y wher e pr esents the
tr iliter al f or ms, as pr incipally constituting the r adical wor ds.
4. Quadr iliter al and quinqueliter al r oots ar e ver y
r ar e in the Hebr ew; such as afruitful field, CD/IS
to devour, to be quiet. Those which exist, ar e f orm?
ed by the addition or inser tion of a letter or letter s, to
lengthen the tr iliter al r oot; in the same manner as ti>
6 2 . RADICAL WORDS. 1 3 5
liter als ar e f or med f r om biliter als, as descr ibed above in
no. 3.
5. Ther e is no pr oof that the Hebr ew is a language
der ived f r om any other . So f ar as is known, it appear s
to be original. Yet this must not be so under stood, as to
exclude all wor ds of f or eign origin. _In gener al, however ,
whether these wor ds ar e Egyptian, or Per sian, they ar e
r ecognized as f or eign by their nonconf ormity to the com-
mon laws of the Hebr ew.
6. The par ts of speech, as they ar e called, ar e the
same in Hebr ew as in Gr eek and most other wester n lan-
guages. But as Hebr ew nouns and adjectives ar e mostly
der ived f r om ver bs, convenience of ar r angement r equir es
that the latter should pr ecede the f or mer in a gr ammat-
ical tr eatise. The or der adopted in this gr ammar is the
f ollowing; viz. the article, pronouns, verbs including partici-
ples, nouns, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, in-
terjections.
7. The pr opor tional number of r oots in the var ious
par ts of speech in the Hebr ew may be thus ar r anged.
(a) The ver b is altogether most f r equently pr imitive;
and ther e ar e ver y f ew ver bs which ar e not under ived.
( 69. 1. b, c.)
(b) Only a small number of nouns ar e pr imitive; most
of them being der ived f r om ver bs, or f r om other nouns.
(c) The original pronouns, per sonal, demonstr ative,
&c. ar e all pr imitive. These, of cour se, ar e not ver y nu-
mer ous.
(d) Par ticles ar e some of them pr imitive, and some
ar e der ived f r om other par ts of speech. The Hebr ew
has ver y f ew par ticles.
136 6 3 . GRAMMATTICAL CONSTRUCTION OP WORDS.
#
63. Grammatical construction of words.
1. Ther e ar e two ways in which case, number , gen-
der , per son, tense &c. may be expr essed in any language.
First, by the inf lection of the or iginal wor ds or gr ound-
f or ms ; and secondly, by af f ixing other wor ds or par ticles,
which ser ve to expr ess r elation. The Hebr ews made use
of both these methods. Accor ding to the second, they
connected par ticles with their nouns, and to their ver bs
they af f ixed pr onouns or par ts of them, to designate per -
son and gender . In accor dance with the f ir st, they inf lect-
ed nouns, adjectives, and par ticiples, by annexing to them
the f eminine ter mination H_, and the plur al f or ms
r h &c. which, however , cannot be tr aced to any r oot
All the der ivative conjugations of ver bs, and all der iva-
tive nouns &c. also exhibit the f ir st method of inf lection,
and pr ove by their f r equency that it is extensively com-
pr ised in the Hebr ew language.
2. Composite wor ds, i. e. compound ver bs, nouns &c.
which the Gr eek, Latin, and other wester n languages ex-
hibit, ar e not usual in the Hebr ew. Wor ds pr oper ly com-
posite ar e f ound in Hebr ew almost exclusively in pr eper
names ; wher e, however , they f r equently occur .
3. The Hebr ew also dif f er s f r om the languages of
the west in the mode of wr iting many of its par ticles, and
the oblique cases of per sonal pr onouns. These, instead
of standing by themselves, ar e commonly united with the
ver bs, nouns &c. to which they belong or on which they
depend, so as to f or m with them but one wor d.
6 4 . KINDRED DIALECTS MIXED WITH THE HEBREW. 1 3 7
() Particles are prefixed. E. g. the sun, instead of bn
( 65); n
v
IJfit"T3j in Vie beginning &c.
() Fragments of pronouns &c. are suffixed. E. g. dnbDJ5 thou hast
kitted them, instead of Oft n~D; DD^D their horse, instead of fin 0*0
&c. ( 126, 136.)
64. Kindred dialects mixed with the Hebrew.
!. The Hebrew being kindred with the Syriac, Chaldee, and Ar-
abic ( 1. 2), contains a multitude of words which are common to all
these languages. It is therefore only when a word is in some re-
spects anomalous as a Hebrew word, but conformed to what is usual in
some one of these dialects, that we call it a Syriasm, Chaldaism, or
Arabism.
2. The later Hebrew, written after the captivity, exhibits a con-
siderable number of Chaldaisms or Syriasms, as in Ezra, Daniel, Chron-
icles &c. It is observed also of the poetical books in general, that their
language approximates to these dialects. But whether this is to be
considered simply as poetic costume, or as the remains of the ancient
Hebrew when it differed little from the Syriac, is difficult to ascertain.
3. Arabisms, properly speaking, occur only in a few words, and
relate merely to the form. This, it is probable, is only the result of
negligent transcription. The Arabic language never exercised any
predominant influence over the Hebrew; as the Jews did not speak
it, until after the Masorites had begun to guard against all innovations
on the sacred text. What has often been named Arabism, viz. the
plural ending in , is also an Aramaelsm; and much more probably
was derived from the Aramaean, than from the Arabic. Still, because
the Hebrew has many roots in common with the Arabic, much light
may be borrowed from this latter dialect to illustrate the former.
Above all, the forms, inflections, and syntax of the Hebrew, receive a
great acccession of light from a good Arabic grammar, such as that
published by De Sacy.
138 65, CO. THE ARTICLE AND PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
THE ARTICLE.
* 65.
1. The Hebr ew has but one ar ticle viz. -It cor -
r esponds in a good degr ee, but not univer sally, with the
def inite ar ticle the in English.
2. The ar ticle is always united with the noun to
which it belongs, and its Lamedh assimilated to the f ir st
letter of that noun and expr essed by a Daghesh f or te in
that letter or by some equivalent.
E. g. the rain, instead of b3; tflfitn the man &c. (41.
1.6. 46. 1.)
For. an account of the manner in which the vowel of the article is
affected by the letter or vowel-point which follows it, or by prefix-
prepositions, see 61. 16.
NOTE. That the original form of the article was brt, seems hardly to
admit of reasonable doubt. The b nowhere appears in Hebrew, being
always assimilated to the letter which follows it (as it also is in the
verb n[5b); but the form corresponds to the Arabic article bit, whose
b is frequently assimilated in the same manner. The only difference
is, that in Hebrew the assimilation or some equivalent for it is uni-
versal ; in Arabic, it is usual only before certain letters.^
PRONOUNS.
66. Personal pronouns
t l . The Hebr ew is r ich in per sonal pr onouns; not only
distinguishing the masculine and f eminine of the second and
thir d per sons when they stand as the subjects of ver bs,
but possessing f or ms appr opr iate to the oblique cases which
f ollow ver bs, nouns, or par ticles.
1*2. The f ollowing table exhibits the nominative case
or gr ound-f or m of all the per sonal pr onouns.
1 The solar letters, viz. d, /, #, s ; and also r sod n. De Sacy, noa. 60,108..
6 6 . PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 139
Plurah
1 per s. com. 'M, . ^303^, 1303, *13.
I
-
T R :" "T : *
3. In pause, the pronouns assume the forms r ing, nfi* &c.
( 60. 7). The K in both the third persons singular is paragogic and
in otio. The feminine fitlft is pronounced hi. See no. 6 below.
4. In the first person plural, the form 13 n \ occurs only six times,
and the form 33M only once in Kethib Jer. 42: 6. In the 2 pers. plur.
fem. and in both the third persons plural, the final ft of the right-hand ,
forms is probably paragogic, inasmuch as the tone remains on the
original syllable. ( 34. 2. h. 50. 4.)
5. In the second persons singular and plural, the Daghesh in Tav
is an assimilated Nun; the original words being ftn3$ or nsg, Droit;
as they now are in Syriac and Arabic.
6. The feminine pronoun Kin hi, as it appears in the Pentateuch
of our common Hebrew Bibles, is anomalous. The explanation of the
anomaly is, that the pointing is associated with ftpft, a marginal read-
ing introduced by the Masorites, who appear to have been ignorant
that awn in the Mosaic writings is of the common gender. When it is
feminine, they have written it Nlft Ai, and supplied the appropriate
consonants (iOn) in the margin.
NOTE. There are a few instances of peculiar construction, where
the ground-forms of the pronouns, as here exhibited, stand for oblique
cases ( 184). But in general^hey are used only to designate the
nominative.
17. The oblique cases of per sonal pronouns In Hebr ew,
ar e r epr esented by f r agments of pr imitive pronouns united
with ver bs, nouns, and par ticles so as to make one wor d, in-
stead of being wr itten separ ately, as in the wester n languages.
For an account of these pronominal suffixes as appended to the
above mentioned classes of words respectively, see for verbs 125,
2 mas. 0n, na*
2 f em. rjM,
3 mas. f cttO,
en.
03PK.
t o , r an.
:o, 03o.
i t
3 f em. sr n, Kin
1 4 0
6 7 , 6 8 . PRONOUNS.
for noons 136, for adverbs 166, for preposition* 167, and for in-
terjections 169.
67 Demonstrative pronouns
t l . Ther e ar e ver y f ew demonstr ative pronouns in He-
br ew. The usual f or ms f ollow in the f ir st line below;
those in the second line ar e unusual.
Singular. PluraL
Masc. SIT, f em. DHT, com. tVn, this. Com. nVtf these.
- r v - it, it, -
v * *
2. In the fem. sing, the form Ht occurs a few times in the same
meaning as nttT, and also the form once, Ezek. 36: 36.
68. Relative and interrogative pronouns.
I. Relative.
t l . The Hebr ew has but one r elative pronoun, viz.
nrn'a. It is of all gender s and number s, and answer s to
who, which, what, in English.
2. In the later Hebr ew especially, "TO# f r equently
appear s in a contr acted f or m. The K is dr opped ( 42.
1. a); the is assimilated to the f ir st letter of the wor d
which f ollows (41. 1. c); and the vowel under tt) is some-
times changed. Hence it has the f or ms -D, , ED, .
E. g. *33tia who hath not given us up, instead of
Ps. 124: 6 ; 13^^ which we waited for, Lam. 2: 16 ; Judg.
6: 7; nnKQ? Jodg. 6:17; DHttj Ecc. 3:18. In the three last examples
&c. (HOK) sustains the office of a conjunction, like the Greek on and
the Latin quod.
3. The pronouns f it and M, which ar e usually demon-
str atives, ar e in a f ew instances employed also as r elatives.
6 9 . VERBS ; GENERAL CLASSIFICATION. 1 4 1
II. Interrogative.
t4. The Hebr ew has two inter r ogative pronouns viz.
who, JT0 what. The latter also takes the f or ms DID and 1E.
Before Maqqeph ntt becomes i i ( 32.3. 54.2. b), and is joined
by Daghesh euphonic with the* following word; as maJrtekhct
( 29. 8. a). Before gutturals with Q,amets, ntt becomes 51^ for the
sake of euphony. ( 60. 1.)
VERBS.
* 69. General classification.
]. As to origin, ver bs may be divided into thr ee classes.
() Primitive, i. e. under ived f r om any other wor ds.
E. g. toreign^ to sk, and so of most of the Hebrew verbs.
() Derivative, i. e. such as come f r om pr imitives by
the accession of f or mative letter s. Such ar e all the con-
jugations of ver bs ( 71), excepting the f ir st or KaL
(c) Denominative, L e. those which ar e f or med f r om
nouns (de nomine).
E. g. to live in a tent, from a tent.
These divisions concern the origin of verbs, but not the mode of
inflection. A great number of verbs is comprehended in the class b,
while very few belong to the class c.
2. ID r espect to der ivation and inf lection, ver bs ar e
divided into regular and irregular. Regular ver bs ar e
those which ar e unif orm in their inf lections, and pr eser ve
thr ough all their changes their original triliteral r oot
Ver bs ir r egular ar e either plur iliter al, or those which
dr op or assimilate one or mor e of their radical letter s,
or which exhibit peculiar ities in their vowel-points occa-
sioned by the guttur als and quiescents.
$ Literally, he reigned. The infinitive in English it oed in this work, mere-
ly for the take of brevity, in preference to the praeter which would exactly cor-
respond to the Hebrew root.
19
1 4 2 7 0 . VERBS; CONJUGATIONS*
* 70. Verbs; conjugation#
1. The ter m conjugation, in gr ammar s of the Gr eek,
Latin, and some modern languages, is employed to denote
dif f er ent classes of ver bs, which ar e distinguished f r om
each other by cer tain peculiar char acter istics of f or m or
inf lection, and which ar e ther ef or e said to belong to the
f ir st, second, thir d &c. conjugation. In this sense, the He-
br ew might be said to have sever al conjugations; but this
wor d is not so used by Hebr ew grammarians.
2. In Hebr ew gr ammar the wor d conjugation is ap-
plied to different forms of the same verb, and cor r esponds
in some degr ee with the ter m voice in Gr eek gr ammar , al-
though it is employed in a much mor e extensive sense.
The passive and middle voices in Gr eek exhibit the or ig-
, inal idea of the ver b under cer tain modif ications,-with
some additional shades of meaning. So the pr oper ty of
all the conjugations in Hebr ew is to vary the primary
meaning of the verb, by uniting with it accessor y signif ica-
tions. The Hebr ews wer e thus enabled to expr ess, by
means of their conjugations, all those var ious modif ications
and r elations of ver bs, which in most other languages ar e
expr essed either by composite ver bs or by sever al wor ds.
Thus Kal, the first conjugation in order, exhibits the verb in its
original state and in its simple meaning. The next, Niphal, is formed
from Kal, and gives to the verb a passive sense. Then come Piel and
Paal, formed from Kal, which are active and 'passive to each other,
and usually exhibit the verb in a ccMsatio* sense; and so of all the
other conjugations.
The most convenient arrangement is, to make as many conjuga-
tions as there are forms of verbs, original and derived. These are
presented to view in the following section.
7 1 . VERBS ; CONJUGATIONS. 143
71. Verbs ; table of conjugations*
For a par ticular account of all the conjugations exhibited in this
section, see 7682.
I. Usual
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
Name. Form. Name. Form.
1. Kal
m #
. .
t
i t
2. Niphal
3. Piel 4. Pual
5. Hiphil V^Dpn.
6. Hophal Vtip.n.
7. Hithpael ^ j ? n n .
i t #
t
II. Unusual.
. .
. . .
8. Hothpaal Vapnn.
9. Poel aahft.
10. Poal 33*10.
11. Hithpoel a a i onn.
m
12. Polel oai p-
13. Polal nai p.
14. Hithpolel cittipnn.
15. Pilel
"v?k-
16. Pulal
17. Hithpalel y?ap_nn.
. . .
18. Pealal
19. Poalal
20. Pilpel 30315. 21. Polpal
3030, j
22. Hithpalpal ^ >a n n . also SMD. )
23. Peoel
24. Tiphel
25. Popaal
III. Pluriliteral verbs.
}ip-, no-, Va-ia, cBtn.
- - w . ^D^itizecLby Google jj
144 72, 7 3, 7 4 . VERBS ; CONJUGATIONS, ETC.
#
72. Verbs ; number of the conjugations
1. All the conjugations exhibited in the preceding section are ac-
tual forms of verbs found in the Hebrew language; but only the first
seven are of usual occurrence. As no verb in Greek is ever actually
found in all the persons and tenses of the three voices; so in Hebrew,
no verb is ever found in all these conjugations. The instances are
very rare, in which a verb actually exhibits all of the usual conjuga-
tions. But that so many conjugations exist in the language is certain-
ly not improbable, since actual forms in them occur, and the Arabic-
language exhibits at this day nearly an equal number.
2. The student, however, need be under no apprehension of diffi-
culty from the unusual conjugations. He may safely neglect them at
first, and an acquaintance with the usual ones will lead him easily and
imperceptibly to a knowledge of the others.
* 73. Verbs ; arrangement of the conjugation
1. The forms which are passive are arranged in the table ( 71)
opposite to those active forms to which they respectively correspond.
Niphal is commonly represented as the passive of Kal; and so it some-
times is; but it is so frequently the passive of other conjugations, that
it is here arranged as a general passive without any particular rela-
tion.
2. By the preceding arrangement of the active and passive forms,
the student must not understand, that all of them are exclusively ac-
tive or passive in the manner designated. Most of them participate,
more or less, both of an active and passive sense. The arrangement
has respect to their predominant meaning.
* 74. Verbs ; names of the conjugations.
1. The names of all the der ived conjugations ar e bor -
r owed f r om the var ious f or ms of the ver b which the
old gr ammar ians used in constr ucting the par adigms; and
ar e mer ely the modes of pr onouncing those
%
sever al f or ms.
2. The first conjugation is called Kal, i.e. light; because it is not, like
75, 7 6 . VERBS ; CONJUGATION KAL, ETC. 145
the derived forms, increased by the addition of any letter to the root.
The other names are formed thus; Niph-Val; b?D Pi-Fei, Da-
ghesh forte being excluded by the guttural; Pu&al, Daghesh ex-
cluded ; Hiph-Sil; H&phr$al; b?snn' H&h-p&Vel, Da-
ghesh excluded; and so of the unusual conjugations.
For a full exemplification of the 'names of all the conjugations,
see Appendix F.
* 75. Verb8 ; root of all the conjugations
1. The thir d per son singular of the pr aeter in Kal is r e-
gar ded as the gr ound-f or m or r oot of near ly all ver bs, be-
cause it exhibits the most simple f or m of the r adicals.
In one class ("13?) of ver bs ir r egular ( 117), the inf initive is
r egar ded as the gr ound-f or m, mer ely because it exhibits
thr ee r adicals, while the pr aeter 'has but two. *
2. Many grammarians, however, regard the infinitive mood as the
root in all verbs. It is true that the infinitive is the ground-form of
more parts of the verb, than is the third person praeter. But to de-
cide which existed first, is not in our power. Among the Arabians,
the grammarians of Bassora maintain that the infinitive is the root of
verbs in their language; other grammarians among them generally
give a preference to the praeter. De Sacy Gramm. Arabe, 529.
* 76. Verbs ; conjugation Kal
1. The conjugation Kal is active, but it may be either
transitive or intransitive. These two classes of ver bs in
Kal ar e ver y commonly distinguished by the vowels of the
gr ound-f or m.
E. g. *TJ5B to visit, with final Pattahh, transitive,
to grow old, - Tseri, intransitive.
to be afraid, - - Hholem,
2. Hence ther e ar e thr ee f or ms distinguished by their
f ast vowel, and cor r esponding to tlie thr ee classes of vow-
14C 77. VERBS ; CONJUGATION NtPHAL.
#
els, the two latter of which f or ms ar e usually intr ansitive.
To distinguish these ver bs, they may be named verbs final
Pattahh, Tseri> and Hholem.%
NOTE. Verbs final Pattahh are sometimes intransitive; as Vl* and
bl * to be great. Bat verbs final Tseri or Hholem are seldom transitive.
In Arabic, the above distinction of the classes of verbs b y means of
different vowels, prevails more extensively than in Hebrew.
3. Inasmuch as all intr ansitive ver bs appr oach to a
passive sense, so ver bs that ar e intr ansitive in Kal ar e some-
times r ender ed passively.
E. g. to ascend, also to be elevated.
4. In Kal, the same ver b is not unf r equently both tr an-
sitive and intr ansitive or passive.
E. g. yttt to scatter, also to be scattered.
* 77< Vtrbs ; conjugation Niphal.
1. The char acter istic of Niphal is JSm pr ef ixed; as
Kal Niphal
In Arabic the corresponding conjugation has 2fit prefixed; and
this, or at least its equivalent, appears in Hebrew in the infinitive of
Ni phal ; as ; so that an prefixed was probably
the original characteristic of Niphal, though at present it appears
only in the infinitive.
NOTE. The point under the prefix Nun would therefore regularly
be a simple dlieva; but as the first vowel of the ground-form is dropped,
Nun commonly takes Hhireq parvum; before gutturals, it takes
Seghol or Pattahh. ( 58. 1, 2.)
2. Niphal is used in the f ollowing senses.
(a) It ia commonly the passive of Kal, when Kal is
tr ansitive. But when Kal is intr ansitive or not used, then
Niphal is the passive of either Piel, or HiphO, or of both,
pr ovided they ar e tr ansitive.
| Commonly called middle Pattahh Sic. i. e. the middle letter having Pat*
tahh See. Bat the student ii more liable to mistake in this way, than if the de-
nomination is taken from the final vowel, as above.
7 8 . TXRBS ; PIEL AND PUAL. 141
(b) It is Dot unf r equently intr ansitive, and then it may
agr ee in meaning with Kal intr ansitive.
E. g. Kal nbn to be tick, Nlph. inthe same sense.
(c) It is of ten r ef lexive of Kal; as ^23 to watch,
"tf OtDD to watch one's self. It is also r ef lexive of other
active conjugations.
(d) It is used in signif ications like the f ollowing; viz. to
show one's self as per f or ming, an action, as 1353 to show
one's self honorable; to appear to do or suf f er a thing, as
?33 to appear to be smitten ; to per mit an action, as 1W3
to permit one to entreat, i. e. to hearken to him.
(e) It is employed to expr ess r ecipr ocal action which
implies two par ties; as t3&833 to contend, QH^3 to fight &c.
So ^ to decide, Niph. *73^3 to decide by conferring with
another.
( f ) In some cases it implies a dative of per sonal ad-
vantage, like the middle voice in Gr eek; as to ask,
Niph. ^Nt333
(
to ask for ontfs self. Compar e alrdoftai.
( g) It of ten ser ves to expr ess af f ection and passion,
as r i3$3 to sigh ; being used like deponent ver bs in Latin.
(h) Sometimes it r equir es to be tr anslated by pr ef ix-
ing can, must, may, ought tec. to the cor r esponding ver b in
Eqglish; as Gen. 6: 21. 16: 10. 20: 9.
* 78. Verbs ; conjugations Piel and Puah
1. The char acter istic of Piel and Pual is the doubling
of the middle radical, expr essed by Daghesh f or te in that
letter , or by an equivalent pr olongation of the pr eceding
vowel; as Kal Piel Pual
In Aramaean and Arabic are corresponding conjugations.
148
78. VERBS J HI PHIL AND HOPHAL.
& Piel has the f ollowing signif ications.
(a) It is usually causative of Kal.
E. g. "DfiJ to perish, Piel ISfit to cause to perish i. e. to destroy.
(b) It signif ies to let, help, hold, or show a thing to be
thus and so.
E. g. FPtt to Hoe, Fl*n to let one live ; p15t to be just, p*Jit to shorn
to be just, i. e. to justify ; fit&D to be unclean, to pronounce unclean
(c) It is sometimes intensive of KaL
E. g. to ask, to beg ; to break, 15 to dash in piece*.
(d) It has in some ver bs a privative sense, or denotes
action in opposition to that indicated by KaL
E. g. 153 to know, 133 to misapprehend; fiton to sin, to make
expiation for sin.
(e) It of ten has the same meaning as Kal, or has only
a slight shade of dif f er ence, when Kal is transitive. The
intransitive meaning of Kal is ver y seldom tr ansf er r ed to
Piel.
When the sense of a verb in Kal is figurative, the literal sense of-
ten appears in Piel; as Kal K12 to create, Piel to hew out.
3. Pual is simply the passive of PieL
* 79. Verbs; conjugations Hiphil and HophaU
1. The char acter istic of Hiphil and Hophal is He pr e-
f ixed ; as Kal Hiph. Hoph. or
In Arabic and Aramaean, the characteristic is fit instead of ft.
2. Hiphil has a near r esemblance to Piel in its sig-
nif ications.
(a) It is usually causative of KaL
E. g. to be holy, Hiph. to make holy ; ttjl* to possess,
to cause to possess.
. NOTE. Commonly but one conjugation is used in a causative sense.
79. 8 0 . VERBS : HIPHIL, HOPHAL, ETC. 129
7 9 .
*y '
If Piel have such a meaning, then Hiphil, comrooDly, is not used, or
else is used in a somewhat different sense. The latter case nol un-
frequeotly occurs, in which Hiphil has a slight shade of difference
from Piel; as i n s to be hidden, Piel i n s to conceal, Hiph. TITOI ta
extirpate ; com p. Greek aq>avinv.
(f i) Intr ansitive, as Kal; e. g. and to be
white; tbin and to be silent.
3. Hophal is the passive of Hiphil; but as Hiphil
sometimes imitates Kal in sense, so Hophal imitates Niphal;
and Niphal, we have seen, has sometimes an intr ansitive
meaning. ( 77. % b.) So Hophal; e. g. ^5^, Hoph. Fut.
to be able.
80.
Verbs: Conjugation Hithpael.
1. The char acter istic of Hithpael is Ti l , pr ef ixed to
the Inf initive-f or m of the Conj. Piel. Thus, Piel Inf . b&f i,
Hith. ^Dpnr t.
17
1 3 0
8 0 . VERBS: HITHPAEL.
In Aramaean, n#; in Arabic n, i. e. same as the Hebrew and
Aramaean, save that prosthetic ft or is omitted.
2. The char acter istic Hi"! under goes sever al changes,
in or der to unite with Ver bs. The Hebr ews appear to
have had a dif f iculty in pronouncing D (th) bef or e a sibilant
letter . Hence,
() When a Ver b begun with a Sibilant, they trans-
posed it, and put the D of the char acter istic af ter it
(Comp. 44.)
With 0 Kal blO Hith. ^SPDn instead of VaOnn
o - i n a - "iBnon na a r n
to - aj'a - awt on a a c r n
s - p i s - p"psn pnsnn
In the latter case, (X first radical) the n is not only transposed,
bat changed into its cognate O. Bat this case is very unfrequent
in Hebrew, though common in the cognate languages.
() The n char acter istic in Hithpael is assimilated,
when a Ver b begins with a cognate letter ; i. e. either *T,
13, or D. E. g.
TlttTl instead of n a wn f r om nW
n n t a n n n p n n - n n o
Mn n - r an
This practice appears to have arisen from the difficulty of pro-
nouncing n (th) before its cognate letters. It is general, but not with-
out a few exceptions. (Comp. 41.1. d.)
(c) In some cases, (but f ew,) the pr inciple of assimila-
tion is applied, when Ver bs begin with
3, as instead of
3, as n03H HDSrirt
t, as n.ar nn
as a a i v i * .
M V
8 0 . VI EBS; H1TBPAIL. 1 3 1
In all the cognate languages, the same principle of assimilation
exists, in like cases.
3. The meaning of the Conj. Hithpael is,
(a) Passive of Piel, f r om which it bor r ows its f or m,
(sup. 1.); as Piel IgB to number, Hith. to be mm
* bered. This sense is unf r equent.
(b) Ref lexive of Piel; (the usual sense.) As tD
,
TJ>
to sanctify, O'TjPri!"! he sanctified himself
So the middle voice m Greek is both passive and reflexive.
(c) The gener al idea conveyed by Hithpael is, to
make or shew one's self , to be or do that, which the
gr ound-f or m of the Ver b indicates; as
flSQnft to show one's self cunning ; from QDft to be wise.
to behave one'* self proudly ; from Via to be great.
to represent one's self as sick ; from Jrjbn to be sick.
And so, with little var iation f r om such senses,
fiSftnn to think one's self wise ; from Q^ft to be wise.
toBJinrt to make one's self to be sought, i. e. to conceal one's self;
from fcJDtl to seek.
*
fsnnTI to ask favour for one's self properly, to make one gracious;
from "Jitl to be gracious.
(d) The same with neuter Kal; as to mourn,
f | 3Hnn to be angry.
( f ) Like Niphal ( 77. 2. f ) it indicates af ter it a
Dative of advantage; to get rid of
(g) Active, and tr ansitive, as Kal; e. g. 1 3 ^ 0 to
keep, or observe, i. e. laws, statutes, See.
1 3 2
8 1 . INFREQUENT CONJUGATIONS.
81.
Urtfrequent Conjugations.
1. Hothpaal, f tppTliI or Vt?j?nn) is the passive of
Hithpael, as to f or m; but cannot be distinguished f r om it
in signif ication.
So the passive forms of some of the Arabic Conjugations, (e. g.
Conj. vii.) have an active, passive, and reciprocal meaning.
2. Poel and PoolIn r egular Ver bs, these Conj. ar e
r ar ely f ound. In Ver bs Ayin doubled ( 115.) these Conj.
ar e the usual f or ms, in the r oom of Piel and Pual; though
the latter sometimes co-exist with the f or mer .
(a) The Hholem in and ^plp (Poel, and Poal,)
is impure, and immutable. These f or ms cor r espond with
the active and passive of the thir d Conjugation in Ar abic,
which r eads Vptf p.
(J)) In meaning, Poel and Poal r esemble Piel and Pual;
L e. they ar e causatives of Kal, and sometimes synonymous
with it. But wher e ther e is a Poel and Piel Conjugation
of the same Ver b, ther e is gener ally a distinction in the
sense of them, such as exists between Piel and Hiphil,
when they ar e both f ound under the same Root. ( 79. 2.
a. Note.)
(c) Poal is the passive of Poel.
3. Hithpoel, ( ) stands r elated to Poel and
Poal, as Hithpael to Piel and Pual. ( 80. 1.) It is a r e-
f lexive of Poel; and is subject to all the var ieties of mean-
ing which Hithpael has; also to the same transpositions, &c,
of its f ir st Radical, with the char acter istic DH. ( 80.2. a. b.)
4. (a) Pilel and Pulal ( EEip, Ml p, 117.) ar e f ound
in Ver bs Ayin Vav, ( 117.) and used, commonly, instead of
Piel and Pual, in Ver bs of this class; although the latter
8 1 . UNFREQUENT CONJUGATIONS.
ar e sometimes f ound, together with Pilel, and Pulal. (Vid.
b. supr a.)
(6) Pilel and Pulal (^13 j?, ) ar e quite unf r e-
quent, in r egular Ver bs. They sometimes occur in Ver bs
Lamedh He. ( 123. 6.) Their meaning r esembles that
of Poel and Poal. (Supr a 2. b.)
NOTE. These Conjugations scarcely ever appearing, except in
the forms like Dttip and DEip, the student, unacquainted with He-
brew etymology, and the changes of rowels, might think them im-
properly named. It needs, however, merely to be observed, that
Bip stands for DDip , and OJgip for tJ33]p^, to justify this classifica-
tion. The irregularity of the appearance arises from the nature of
the quiescent 1. The characteristic of these Conjugations consists in
the reduplication of the last radical.
5. Hithpcdelf (VVtD^Tin) stands r elated to Pilel and
Pulal, as the Ref lexives in No. 3, to their cor r esponding
Conjugations.
6. Pedal, doubling the two last Radicals,
is an intensitive Conjugation, giving ener gy to the meaning
of the simple Root.
In Verbs and IS only the two permanent Radicals are re-
peated, to form this Conj.; as baba, from bba ; b5>bs, from b*S;
which also have Reflexives, as babarifj, &c.
7. Psoel, (^D'lDp .) Ver y uncommon. It appear s
to be active, and like* Kal. It r esembles, in f or m, the
twelf th Conjugation in Ar abic, which r eads with
Aleph pr osthetic.
8 Tiphel, ( ) active; unf r equent. Mor e com-
mon in Syr iac and Ar abic.
9. For ms, like > i. e. wher e the two f ir st radi-
cals ar e r epeated, ar e f ound, though scar cely ever ; as Ps.
45. 3. So DSDpH f r om | 0n, with the second radical r e-
peated at the end; Exod. xvi. 14.
1 3 4 8 2 . 8 3 . 8 4 . PLURILITERAL VERBS, ETC.
82.
Pluriliteral Verbt.
1. These, which ar e but ver y f ew, ar e all der ived
f r om triliteral ones, by the addition of another letter ; as
f r om CnED. They ar e declined like Pilel and Pulal.
( 81. 4.)
8 3 .
Denominative Verbt.
These dif f er not as to f orm, f lexion, and meaning, in
the sever al Conjugations, f rom the original Ver bs, unless
it be, that in Piel the privative meaning is more f r equent;
as tdliD a root, tDHtD to root up, to tear up by the roots;
JTEH ashes, to take away ashes ; DDV the heart, Dab to
wound the heart, &c.
84.
Verbt: Flexion.
In r espect to Moods and Tenses, the Hebr ew is ver y
limited. Only two Tenses, the Pr aeter and Futur e, ar e
distinguished by def inite and appropriate f or ms; and ther e
ar e only the Indicative, Imper ative, and Inf initive Moods,
with a Par ticiple present and past. All the other tenses
and moods ar e indicated, by the f orms of those already
mentioned used in some peculiar syntactical connexion, or
with some small change of vowel points. In r espect to
designating number, person, and even gender , the Hebr ew
Ver bs ar e suf f iciently copious, in their inf lexions.
8 5 . VERBS : GROUND-FORM. 1 3 5
85.
Verbs: Ground-form*.
In all the Conjugations, the pr incipal gr ound-f or ms of
all the inf lexions may be r educed to two, viz, the thir d
per son singular Pr aeter , and the Inf initive Mood.
Thus in Kal, ^op
T
is the ground-form of all the persons in the
Praeter; and also ot the present Participle. The Infin. Vop is the
ground-form of the Fut. and lmper. In all the derived Conjugations,
also, the Infin. is the ground-form of the Fut., lmper., and (excepting
Niphal,) of the Participle also. The third person singular Praeter,
is the ground-form of all the persons in the Praeter of the derived
Conjugations; and iu JNiphal, of the Participle also.
86.
Verb*: Flexion of the Praeter. (Vid. Par ad^ 127.)
The gender and per sons of the Pr aeter ar e designated
by f r agments of the Pr imitive Pr onouns, suf f ixed to a
gr ound-f or m.
3 per s. f em. by adding 51 ( i W) f r ag, of she.
2. mas. n Gi n ) nnfct thou, m.
2. f em. n O n ) n a O n a ) / f o w , f .
1. com. i n ( n ) pr obably f r .obs. I.
3. per s. plur . 1 ('p, f cf t) der ivation unknown.
2. mas. fin f r ag, of fin# ye, m.
2. f em. i n ( n a n ) ye, f em.
1. com* *13 j* we.
1
The forms in parentheses are variations from the comma*
forms, and of very unfrequent occurrence. He paragogie, sometimes,
(though very rarely) is added to the forms of the Praeter, but does
not take the accent; as ttnkVea instead of Uttta?
136 87. VERBS ! FORMS OF INFINITIVE.
87.
Verbs: Forms of the Infinitive.
1. The Inf initive, or second gr ound-f or m, is a kind of
Ver bal Noun, and like nouns has two states, the absolute
and construct, ( 135.) with f or ms, in gener al, adapted to
designate them.
See the various uses of Inf. Abs. and CODS, in Syntax, 212,213.
() The In construct is r egar ded as the gr ound-f or m,
being the most simple. Its char acter istics in Kal ar e, She-
va under the f ir st Radical, and Hholem, Pattahh, or Tser i
between the last Radicals; as Vttp, ]r U.
ID the same manner as the Praeter, it has final Pattahh, Tseri,
and Hholem. (Vid. 76. 1.)
() In the der ivative Conjugations, its f inal vowel is
Tser i, Hhir tq, and Pattahh. (See Par ad. 127. Inf in. of
Piel, Hithpael, Hiphil, Pual, and Hophal.)
The irregular Verbs exhibit some variations from the general
rules in a and 6.
(c) The Inf initive, (being a ver bal noun,) sometimes
has a f eminine ending in f l or n.
In regular verbs this is unfrequent, as instead of ; but
in verbs Lamedh He, ( 122.) it is the common form, as rhb* for
instead of the masc. form >):*; also in verbs Pe Nun (& 113.)
* ! | t \3 *
as from which is for > *
n
verbs Pe Yodh, ( 109.) as
l'rom l b , which is for ntif ; and sometimes, Uk0prbs Lamedh
Aleph, ( 121.) as instead of
2. The Inf initive absolute has Qamets under the f ir st
Radical, and Hholem impur e between the two last, as
It is r egular ly of this f or m in Kal, and tr iliter al in
near ly all the kinds of Ver bs.
In verbs Ayin Far, however, Dip stands, by contraction, for DID.
88. VERBS ; FORMATION OF THE FUTURE, ETC. 157
NOTE. TO distinguish the absolute form of the infinitive from the
construct, in those cases where the construct-form ends with Hholem,
the absolute adopts a Tseri for its final vowel. Thus in Piel the con-
struct-fonn is trii9 or nis?, but the absolute FlJ?.
The feminine termination never appears in the infinitive absolute.
For the various uses of both forms of the infinitive, see 212, 213.
* 88. Verbs ; formation and flexion of the future tense.
1. We have seen ( 86) that the per sons of the pr aeter
ar e f or med, by suffixing the f r agments of pronouns to the
thir d per son singular. As distinguished f r om this, the f utur e
is f or med by prefixing similar f r agments to the infinitive ;
and in some cases, by suf f ixing additional f r agments in or -
der to mark a dif f er ence of gender .
Singular.
Inf . const gr ound-f or m.
3 mas.
3 fem. T) deriv. uncertain.
2 mas. VtDprj from rtnfij.
2 f ern, ^ t j p n by suf f i and pr . Fl j
1 com. Vop.f it by pr ef ixing K f rom
PluraL
3 mas. by suf f i and pr . 1 ** deriv.of * uncertain.
3 f em. PIDVcpn - \ B
2 mas. 1 D pref. from
2 f em. n : Vo p n \ n a n
1 com. by pr ef ixing ^ 3 f romVK.
The suffix-forms which stand farthest at the left are occasionally
found, but are not common. Aim paragogic also is often found ap-
pended to those persons of the future which end in 3 or V, as to the
effect of which, see 35. 2. (Comp. 95. 1. a.)
<21
158 8 8 . VERBS; FORMATION OF THE FUTURE, ETC.
2. The f r agments pr ef ixed ar e called praeformatives.
The appr opr iate vowel-point under them is Sheva; which
appear s in Piel, Pual, and their substitute conjugations, Po-
el, Polel &c. But in Kal, Niphal &c. the Sheva under goes
var ious modif ications, accor ding to the laws of vowel chan-
ges as exhibited in 5460. In Kal of the r egular
ver b the pr aef or matives take Hhireq jmrvum, because the
f ir st vowel of the original ver b is dr opped. ( 58. 1.)
These changes will be described in the notes upon the respective
paradigms of the verbs.
3. The pr aef or matives, in conjugations whose char ac-
ter istic in the inf initive is H, usually expel it, and r eceive
its punctuation in the r oom of that which regularly would
belong to them.
Fut. Niphal instead of from inf.
in verbs 1* Dipi. p"? OipH
Hiphil V*?pi3?
in verbs I* D**p*
Hophal
Hithpael -Bpn? btspni"P btgpnn
4. Inasmuch as the f utur e is f or med f r om the inf ini-
tive, it exhibits the same vowels that ar e f ound in the in-
f initive ( 87. 2), viz. f inal Hholem, Pattahh, and Tser i;
usually called f utur e O, A, and E. They ar e used as f ol-
lows.
(a) The future O is the most common one.
(b) The future A is usually found in the following cases, ( l ) In
.verbs intransitive, whose praeter has final Tseri. (2) In verbs with
a guttural in the final syllable; as JElD, future 3^3?. (3) In verbs
'), &, and many off. ( 110. 120.' 113.)
(c) The future E is found in verbs N& with N] quiescent, a few of
and one of "]D; as "jn\ ( 107. 110. 113.)
NOTE. Verbs Hb have Seghol in the future, as ( 122).
Probably this future is one of the class which would regularly have
final A} as nhi" = ' ' br .
* t - i
8 9 , 9 0 . VERBS ; FORMATION OF THE IMPERATIVE, ETC. 1 5 9
* 89. Verbs ; formation and flexion of the imperative.
1. The imper ative is f or med f r om the inf initive; and
like the inf initive and f utur e, it may have f inal Hholem,
Pattahh, or Tser i. The usual vowel is Hholem.
2. The imper ative, like the pr aeter , is wholly f or med
by suf f ixes; but they ar e the same with those which ar e
attached to the same per sons in the f utur e.
Singular.
In const* VDp gr ound-f or m.
2 per s. mas. VtDJ) same as the inf initive.
2 f em. by adding f r om
PhtraL
2 mas. 1 der ivation uncertain.
2 f em. naf cSj> n; f r om nan.
3. The imper ative has n6 f ir st nor thir d per sons. The
per sons of the f utur e ar e used f or these, when they need
to be expr essed.
The imperative, like the future, is subject to apocope and para-
goge. ( 92.)
* 90. Verbs ; formation and flexion of participles.
1. The conjugation Kal has two par ticiples, which
cor r espond in signif ication with the pr esent and past par -
ticiples in Latin; as DnS scribms, scriptum. The
der ived conjugations have each only one par ticiple.
The pr esent par ticiple of Kal, and the par ticiple of
Niphal, ar e f or med f r om the 3 per s. sing. masc. of the
pr aeter , in the f ollowing manner.
1 6 0
9 0 . VERBS ; FORMATION OF THE RARTICIPL.FI.
() In ver bs f inal Tser i and Hholem, and in Niphal,
the par ticiple is commonly of the same f or m with the
pr aeter ; except that in Niphal, f inal Pattahh is chang-
ed into Qamets.
E. g. Praeter and participle in verbs final Tseri as
- in verbs final Hholem as i V.
- in verbs as DjJ.
Common form in Niphal, as praeter Vt3j?3, part
The form which is now used only as a verbal noun or adjec-
tive, was probably an old form of the present participle. So the forms
ttVtt and "ia* above, are noted in the lexicons as verbal adjectives.
() In ver bs f inal Pattahh, the pr esent par ticiple of
Kal commonly inser ts Hholem impur e af ter the f ir st radi-
cal, and Tser i pur e under the second.
E. g. boi p or Vpp with Hholem impure, and of course immutable.
The past, or passive participle of Kal, is probably a remnant of an
obsolete passive voice of Kal. It takes Qamets under the first radical,
and Shureq between the two last; as ViDjP.
NOTE. Intransitive verbs usually have no passive participle; but
use the present participle for it. When they do have a passive partici-
ple as to form, it is active in its signification; as memor, ni&s confi-
dent. Some intransitive verbs have no participle, but use a participial
adjective instead of i t; as CDH trite, from CDn. See a above.
2. In all the other conjugations, the par ticiples ar e
f or med f r om the inf initive mood by pr ef ixing ; which
expels the char acter istic f t wher e it occur s, in the same
manner as do the pr aef or mative ( 88. 3). Final Pat-
tahh, wher ever it occur s, is changed into Qamets.
Verbs yy and fc are an exception to the above rule in Hiphil, form-
ing their participles in that conjugation from the praeter.
The appropriate point under the Mem is Sheva, which appears
in Piel, Pual &c. but in other conjugations it undergoes various chang-
es, for which see the paradigms in 127, and the notes which pre-
cede them. It is sometimes also omitted. ( 95. 2. e.)
3. Par ticiples take a f eminine ending in f l - or ri ,
9 1 . VERBS ; PARAG. AND APOC. FUTURE.
161
( 131. Comp. 128). They ar e ver y f r equently em-
ployed as adjectives, and under go f r om declension the same
changes as nouns and adjectives.
E. g. Masc. ^p*3, fem. r nt f a from *103; masc. at, fem. fDT from
; masc. ?fb', fem. from ^b; masc. fem. nr t f from 2V
( 59.2. 60.3). So const plur. Can* in the sense of tnaignis.
91. Verbs; paragogic and apocopated future.
t l . As the Hebr ew has no optative, subjunctive, nor
conditional mood, and only two tenses in the indicative, it
must be easily seen that the language needed some expe-
dient, by which the var ious shades of meaning attached to
a ver b and designated by the moods in the question, could
be expr essed. Such an expedient, to a cer tain extent, the
Hebr ews appear to have f ound, in the occasional use of
par agogic and apocopated f or ms of some of the per sons in
the f utur e tense, instead of the ordinary r egular f or ms.
In Syriac and Chaldee, there are no traces of such an usage in re-
spect to the future tense. But in Arabic, it appears in full perfection.
The Arabic has no optative nor subjunctive mood ; but has distinct
forms of the future, which compensate for the want of those moods.
Thus the common future in Arabic would be like the Hebrew bep* ;
the subjunctive form btDj?^; the conditional form bttp?; and the par-
agogic or intensive form ; related to each other in sense some-
what as the English, he will kill, that he may kill, if hemight kill, he will
certainly kill. Between the poverty of the Aramaean on the one side
in respect to forms of tenses, and the richness of the Arabic on the
other, stands the Hebrew ; being neither destitute of all variety, nor
furnished by any means with the copious variety of the Arabic.
The paragogic and apocopated forms of the future in Hebrew, ap-
pear to be in an incipient state. Hence they extend not to all the
persons of the future, nor to all the conjugations of verbs; nor have
they that variety and nice discrimination which the Arabic exhibits;
one variation from the common future serving to express all the shades
of subjunctive, conditional, and optative moods.
1 6 3
9 1 . VERBS ; PARAGOGIC FUTURE*
I. Paragogic future.
t2. The par agogic f utur e is constituted by adding
and veiy seldom 1_, to the first per sons singular and
plur al.
ID a very few cases, the second and third persons singular take ft_
paragogic; in these cases the same sense is attached to it as in the
first persons singular and plural
All classes of verbs, and all conjugations, admit the paragogic ft- in
the first persons; excepting verbs passive, verbs with suffixes, and
verbs ftb, in all which it is very rarely found.
3. The cases wher e this par agogic f or m is employed,
may be arranged as f ollows.
(a) It is used as an optative, i. e. to expr ess a wish or
desir e, either af f ir matively or negatively.
E. g. ftnWfit let me die ; JTUiSi* Kb let me not be ashamed; com-
mon forms In this case it is often followed by t o ; as
K3-ftDbit let me go now, common form
(b) To expr ess excitement, ur ging, an appeal to one
to r ouse him, str ong assur ance, solemn deter mination.
E. g. !"Db&5 I must go, common form I will exult, for
; Up! my soul, IITA? let me rise up early, for ;
1*5 ftirm I am determined to speak in my distress, for In
the plural roba let us go, for Sic.
(c) It is employed to expr ess conditional par ts of
sentences; and is thus used af ter the conjunctions condi-
tional 1?b!j and 1 signif ying that, so that; as ]?H
!
5
rnBDK so that I may declare ; give us food r&DfcOl that
we may eat Sometimes it is used in the same manner af -
ter 1 signif ying because ; and sometimes in conditional sen-
tences, wher e the conditional par ticle is mer ely implied.
9 1 . VBRBS; APOCOPATED FUTURE. 1 6 3
(d) Vav conver sive, especially in the later Hebr ew,
of ten connects itself with the par agogic f or m; but no spe-
ciality of meaning is then necessar ily attached to the f or m.
E g. and I said; In earlier Hebrew Ezra 8:
28. Neb. 5: 7*, 8 &c.
//. Apocopated future.
t4. The apocopated f utur e occur s in the second and
thir d per sons sing. masc. and in the 3 per s. sing, f eminine,
when they ar e without suf f ixes. It is constituted by
shor tening somewhat the f inal long vowel of the com-
mon f utur e, and in ver bs by wholly r emoving it.
The first person very rarely admits of apocope. Cases of it in
this person are about as rare, as cases of paragoge in the second and
third persons.
1*5. It does not; like the par agogic f utur e, occur in all
the conjugations of ver bs, but only in those which f ollow.
Reg. verb Hiph. apoc. btaj^ apoc.
Verbs v Kal n w; n wn rifcn.
Hiph. rPtt* r r en nan.
Verbs nb Kal bX] (b^) ban (b$n).
Plel (bv) rfjin i j n &)
Hiph. r ij : ^( Vv; ) JJJQ (isn).
The other conjugations in verbs !"ib may also suffer apocope, and
they follow the same method. ( 123.1, d.)
6. The apocopated f utur e is par ticular ly employed in
the f ollowing cases.
(a) To expr ess command, wish, pr ohibition.
E. g. destroy, common form ke destroy.
-jnon bij hide not, common form *vnOn thou wilt hide.
(b) Af ter *] that, as a conditional conjunction.
E. g. Speak to thine husband that he may tell us.
t
1g4 9 1 . VERBS; APOCOPATED FUTURE.
(c) In dir ect negation, af ter or
E. g. PjOKn t& thou shall not add; bit thou *haU not be pre-
ferred.
(d) Vav conver sive bef or e the second and thir d per -
sons, (but not bef or e the f ir st,) connects itself with the
apocopated f or m, but without any speciality of meaning
necessar ily attached in this case to the f or m.
E. g- and he divided.
7. The apocopated future differs widely from the future with re-
tracted tone and final long vowel shortened in consequence of it,
( 3d. 4). This latter is merely a matter of accentuation or orthoepy,
and depends on Vav conversive, and a particular form of the ultimate
and penult syllable of a verb; it may happen to any verb, and in any
conjugation where this form concurs with the Vav; and it has no ist-
Jhtence on the meaning of the word. But the apocopated future be-
longs only to certain conjugations; can take place without the Vav as
well as with it; and generally has a meaning appropriate to itself. It
is true, that Vav conversive falling upon those forms from which
an apocopated future is constructed, generally reduces them to that
form. But the mere power of Vav conversive to retract the tone and
shorten the final syllables of the future, is exercised indiscriminately
over forms apocopated and forms not apocopated, in all cases where
it can produce its effect E. g. Niph. IfcB?, with Vav a con-
jugation and tense out of the circle of apocopated futures; so com.
fut Blp*, apoc. Bp*, but with Vav vay-ya-qdm. In a word, Vav
conversive often connects itself with an apocopated form when it does
not retract the tone; it is not therefore as retracting the tone that it is
to be regarded when associated with the forms in question; but the pow-
er of retraction and the changes suffered by the verb in consequence of
it, are things to be separately considered. ( 93.)
8. In poetry, and sometimes in the later Hebrew, the apocopated
future is used as the simple future; so that the distinctions above
made are not of universal application, but only show what is general
in prose, and to what the language was tending.
9 2 . VERBS ; PARAGOG. AND APOC. IMPERATIVE. 1 6 5
92. Verbs ; paragogic and apocopated imperative.
J. In respect to paragogic and apocopated forms, the
imperative imitates the future (91). The paragogic
form of the imperative occurs often in Kal and Hiphil, and
is more seldom found in other conjugations.
E. g. Imperative Kal com. form paragogic
Dip, noi p
Piel ^BD, r - nss
2. The apocopated imperative, in some of the con-
jugations of verbs and "|2, is more frequent than the
regular forms.
E. g. Imperative Piel ba instead of nVa ; Hiphil (ba!n) in-
stead of Sllran ; Kal 1: 73 instead of blB.
3. In Hiphil, both the paragogic and apocopated forms
are common, and have almost entirely extruded the reg-
ular form from use.
E. g. Reg. form apoc. Vtipfl, parag.
NOTE. Only the second pers. sing, masculine, or ground-form of the
imperative, is in general susceptible of the paragoge or apocope in
question, as this only ends in a radical letter. If any exception is to
be made from this, it is that a very few forms in the 2 pers. fem. plur.
appear to suffer a kind of apocope; as for Sisyfeaj; ffiHp. for
iisanp Sic.
4. The meaning of the imperative is generally ren-
dered more energetic or intensive, by the paragogic and
apocopated forms.
In some cases however where these forms occur, it is difficult to
point out a definite meaning, distinct from that of the common imper-
ative.
The Arabic has an intensive imperative, but it extends to more
persons than that of the Hebrew.
on
Di gi t i zed bv Google
166 9 3 . VERBS; VAVCONVERSIVE OP THE FUTURE.
93. Verbs ; Vav conversive of the future
t l . To expr ess the imper f ect, or past tense of narra-
tion, the Hebr ews used the f utur e tense with Vav pr ef ix-
ed, having a Pattahh under it and f ollowed by Daghesh
f or te; as
But when the prae formative has a Sheva under it, the Daghesh is
omitted; as ( 45. 6). Before the praeformative K, the Pat-
tahh is lengthened (as Htaj^l), because the Daghesh is excluded from
the Aleph. So inbtj)13 the Pattahh is long under the Vav. ( 46. 1.)
NOTE. Because Vav in this connexion usually gives a preterite
meaning to the future tense, it has been named Vav conversive; i. e.
Vav conversive of the future into the past
2. Vav conver sive is commonly (not always) connect-
ed with the apocopated f utur e, wher e such f or m exists.
Even the first person singular is sometimes apocopated with a Vav
conversive; as fiOfiO instead of ; but this is not very com-
mon. (91.4,7.)
3. Vav conver sive commonly (not always) dr aws back
the tone f r om the last to the penult syllable. ( 35.4.)
Retraction of the tone, however, takes place only in those per- .
sons which end with a radical letter, and have a simple penult syl-
lable. (35.4.)
NOTE. Vav conversive is probably a fragment of the verb NIN to
be. The first letter is dropped, as it commonly is in Syriac; then the
final Si in rn is assimilated to the first letter of the verb that fol-
lows it, like i l l s for We have then in a word equiv-
alent to Le.il was (that) he killed, or he killed.
The Arabians constantly make their imperfect by writing out in
full the verb of existence. The Syrians make theirs by joining the
present participle to the verb of existence.
9 4 , 9 5 . VERBS ; VAV BEFORE THE PRAETER, ETC. 1 6 ?
94. Verbs j Vav before the praeter.
1. Vav pr ef ixed to the pr aeter is mer ely a conjunc-
tion. It f r equently gives to the praeter the sense of the ftb
ture, because it connects it with some antecedent f utur e
or imper ative, expr essed or implied*
As in other languages the conjunction and (or its equivalent) con-
nects like cases and moods, so here it connects or indicates like tens-
es. The solution of the difficulty lies in this, that the Hebrew tenses
are in themselves real aorists, capable of being modified by circum-
stances.
2. As Vav conver sive draws back the tone, so on the
contr aiy Vav bef or e the pr aeter throws it forward*
. g. with Vav But this effect, though usual, is
not uniform. ( 35. 3.)
PARADIGMS OF THE VERBS.
95. Notes on the paradigms in general.
In general, only the usual forms are exhibited in the paradigms.
Uncommon forms &c. which are peculiar to any conjugation or class
of verbs, will be found in the notes on the respective paradigms. But
there are certain departures from the usual forms in the paradigms,
which are occasionally found in all the conjugations and classes of
verbs, and which are therefore collected and exhibited at one view in
the present section.
1. Par agogic letter s ar e suf f ixed.
(a) Atn paragogic. This is occasionally suffixed to any of the per-
sons in the future which end in n or _; as for
Vpi ' i n for Very rarely is it added to the 3 per. plur. prae-
ter ; as for WJ Deut 8: 3, 16. For the effect of Aim on the
tone, and on verbs frV, see 35. 2. 6 123.1, h.
168 9 5 . VERBS ; NOTES ON ALL TBS PARADIGMS*
{b) He paragogic. This is very common in the future and im-
perative (91,92). It is scarcely ever found in the praeter, and
then only in the 3 pers. /eminine; as Niph. ftfitbc:, with parag.
ftnkbea 2 Sam. 1: 26; Hiph. ftJCart?}, with parag. ftnK^nr} Josh.
6: 17. Other instances in the praeter are doubtful. For ft added to
the 2 pers. ting, praeter, see below in no. 3. a.
(c) Aleph paragogic and in otio. The 3 pers. plural sometimes ex-
hibits this; as for Josh. 10:24; f ut MiDS* Jer. 10: 5.
This is an imitation of the Arabic orthography, which in such cases
always employs the paragogic Aleph.
(d) He and Yodh, especially the latter, are frequently added as
paragogic letters to participles, when those participles are in regi-
men. Participles with paragogic He are penacuted; with paragogic
Yodh, the tone is on the last syllable. ( 34. 2. h.)
2. Some f or ms ar e def ectively wr itten.
() Forms ending in in the praeter, future, and imperative, are
occasionally written with Qlbbuts; as praeter for 1 Sam.
13:19; ft*.
1
)? in Kethib for *50 Deut. 21:7; future "^aTM f
r
I K. 12: 7; nST") in Kethib for Ezek. 23: 43. The imperative
appears in the same form as the praeter.
NOTE. Whenever such forms occur in Kethib as ft$B$ and ft3^
above, the consonants appropriate to the punctuation are supplied by
the Qeri in the margin. The forms with simple Qibbute, likewise, com-
monly have the usual vowel Shureq suggested by the Qeri. ( 21.18.)
() Forms ending in n: , viz. the 3 and 2 pers. plur. feminine, not
uafrequently omit the ft; as for for ft2^ttni.
(c) The 1 pen. sing, praeter, which ends m*n, is sometimes written
without the Yodh final; as n W for W2 * ; nto* for W w . ( 86.2.)
(d) The preposition 5, prefixed to the infinitive of Niphal,
sometimes expel the n , and stand in ks place; af VDj>a instead of
Vojvfta. The latter form however is not unfrequent (Comp. 88.3.)
(e) Participles to which Mem praeformative belongs, some-
times omit i t E. g. n j for HfclrS 2 K. 2: 10; for
Ezek. 21: 16,16; ttsnpna for Ps, 139: 21.
3. Some f or ms have a peculiar or thogr aphy.
(o) The 2 pers. sing. masc. of the praeter is notunfrequently writ-
ten with final ft; as ftP^a instead of nnaa; f j w v for nap* Sic.
See the table in & 86. 2.
9 6 . REG. VERBS; NOTES ON THE PARAD. OFKAL. 169
(b) Hi e 2 pen. sing. fan. of the praeter is sometimes written as
for with Yodh tn otto. ( 86. 2.)
(c) In verbs which have ri for their last radical, the second persons
singular and plural of the praeter, whose sufformatives begin with n,
express the former by a Daghesh forte in the latter; as n*ns for
n m s : "Tins for T m s ; r ns a for nmD3; nnu3 for Sinn from
t s * * ' t s -
7
t
J
t * s s
7
t * t :
ma?; ''nyj for 'nntt? ; 2 pers. plur. for finnan from nra.
{d) In Piel and PoZ, in the forms which have a Sheva under the
middle radical, the Daghesh characteristic of the conjugations is not
tinfrequently omitted; as for nr bl j for
for *nVo &c. ( 45. 4.)
(e) Sometimes this omission of Daghesh is compensated by length-
ening the preceding vowel, as Gj^brp for 1 Chr.23:6; or by a com-
posite Sheva under the Dagesh'd letter, as tTtijpb for nnjpb. ( 45.4 n.3.)
I. REGULAR VERBS.
96. Notes on the paradigm
Thus far the observations on verbs have been of a general nature,
applicable with very little exception to all the various kinds of verbs,
regular and irregular. We come now to particulars respecting the
several classes of verbs, so as to show wherein they differ from
each other in the mode of inflection.
The paradigm of the regular verb ( 127) is to be studied in con-
nexion with the following notes. For the anomalous forms and depar-
tures from the paradigms the student must habitually consult the notes.
CONJUGATION KAL.
J. Praeter.
() Verbs final Hholem ( 76.2) retain the Hholem in their inflec-
tion ; as TiVa*; which, when the accent is thrown off, be-
1
' I
1 1
"
comes short, as vfya-gh&r-ta. But some of them conform, out of
the third person, to the common model also.
() Verbs final Tseri ( 76. 2) commonly drop the Tseri in flex-
ion, and are declined out of the third person like common regular
verbs, as yen, naTon; but in pause they retain the Tseri in the 3 pers.
1 7 0 9 6 . REG* YERBS ; NOTES ON THE PARAD. OF KAL.
ring, and plural; as Several verbs have Pattahh when not in
pause, and Tseri when in i t ; as 'jD'j, in pause When the ac-
cent is thrown forward beyond the radicals, by suffixes &c. the Tseri
of the ground-form is changed into its corresponding short vowels, viz.
Hhireq parvum or Seghol; asiy*}*, bljaj' V; i bj , sprnb?; bfcj,
ar^ba. (Comp. 64.)
NOTE. The tone is on the ultimate syllable of the verb, when the
penult is not marked with the accetat in the paradigm. For the uni-
versal laws respecting the tone, see 34,35; where it may be seen
how many causes operate to change the tone-syllable as exhibited in
the paradigm.
II. Infinitive.
() The infinitive absolute with Hholem impure, either fully or
defectively written, is almost universal; as Vt3j3 or biug. With
Tseri, Via Gen.,26: 13; Ex. 12: 9.
() The infinitive construct exhibits various forms; as Vop, bitsp,
bop; fem. or nbtDj?, nbqp; bop (Chaldaism).
NOTE 1. The Hholem of the inf. const is generally pure. But in
verbs with a guttural for the middle or final letter, it appears to be
impure; as p?T, ?ib &c. where it remains unchanged.
The fem. forms of the infinitive are rather unfrequent
NOTE 2. The final Hholem of the infinitive construct is commonly
written without a Vav; but sometimes with one. Being pure it goea
into Qamets Hbateph, when the tone is removed by Maqqeph &c.
(54.4.)
III. Future.
() The prae formative of the 1 pers. sing, being a guttural, takes
Seghol; as b'opit. ( 58. 1. Comp. 88. 2.)
() Forms as b'ttp.?, biBj^ (Hholem pure), bopp. ( 88.4.6). Several
verbs have future O and J3, each having a different meaning; oth-
ers have both forms without any difference of meaning.
(c) Uncommon forms occur, like sib'lOp? 3 pers. plural; ^ t t p n 2
sing, feminine; D^OJ5n 2 sing. masc. with suffix-pronoun, instead of
(d) Also !ibt3pN, l person singular with paragogic. Both
these result from retaining, in some degree, the Hholem sound in the
9 7 . REG. VERBS ; NOTES ON NIPHAL.
171
last syllable of the ground-form; and are imitations of Chaldaic and
Syriac futures, which have the U sound.
For'the changes in the vowels of the future occasioned by pause-
accents, suffixes &c. see 60. 7. 124. IV note 6.
IV. Imperative.
Forms as Jrtop, (Hholem pure), ; with ft parag.
JibtDj?, seldom fibbp. ( 92). Second pers. fern. ^Dp.,
mblrkhH Judg.9:10; 1 Sam. 28:8 with Vav superfluous. Sec-
end pers. plur. masculine ibDp, nVl3J5 seldom; in pause, l-'pj},
V: Participle*.
I. Active, (a) bc i p, Vpp (Hholem impure); very seldom as
i^Oip, l?D^p. With Todh parag. ^Dp, fem. very rarely from
the feminine rtbap. ( 40. 2. 95. 1. d.)
(ib) In verbs final Tseri and Hholem, it has the forms
( 90. l . a. )
NOTE. The final vowels Tseri and Hholem are mutable, and
when the accent is thrown off are shortened into Seghol and Qamets
Hhateph, or are dropped.
For the fem. part see 90.3. 125; and for plural forms, see
Dec. VII of nouns.
II. Patsive. (c) b'lOj?; which however not unfrequently in neuter
verbs, and a few times in transitive ones, is used in an active as well
as passive sense (90. 1. 6, note). This is very common in Syriac.
97. Reg, verbs ; notes on Niphal.
1. The regular praeter has no variety. The infinitive absolute
is, in a very few cases, used for the infinitive construct; vice versa,
more seldom still The inf. abs. has the form to-rca for once
Ezek. 14:3.
2. The final Tseri of the infinitive, future, and imperative, is
shortened into Seghol, when the tone is retracted by a tone-syllable
immediately following the verb ( 35. 6). In some cases this takes
place, without being thus followed by a tone-syllable, as imper. ;
and also with Vav conversive, as
172 9 8 . REG. VERBS; NOTES ON PIEL AND PUAL.
3. Instead ofSeghol, however, Pattahh sometimes appears; as
In cases where the tone is not retracted, bat the fimal syllable
is in pause, Pattahh often appears, as ; especially in the sec-
ond and third persons feminine, as Jiai?an. So wider a syllable with
a guttural, as f t t n^en; or a Resh, as na^nvj ; and sometimes in oth-
er cases where the word is not in pause, nor has a guttural. So that
the second and third persons feminine seldom appear without Pat-
tahh in the tone-syllable. ( 55. 4. 99.1, e.)
4. The future 1 pers. sing, bojjifij is sometimes pointed as
NOTE. For the omission of the characteristic M in the infinitive
after prepositions, see 95. 2. d.
98* Reg* verbs ; notes on Piel and Pual
/. Piel
(a) Praeter bt2p, -)2'9, ITgb. Pattahh often appears before a Maq-
qeph, and sometimes elsewhere, particularly with Resh.
(b) The infinitive absolute in a few cases is distinguished by an'
appropriate form ; as i t P, ND\ In general, it is the same as
the construct form. Once Y\t\. Fem. forms with stiff.
Ezek. 16: 52 ; rr::nb for H35ni Ps. 102:14.
(e) Future for Epi rP 1 Chr. 23: 6. ( 95. 3. d, e.)
(d) Imperative "ITS PS. 68:31.
For the omission of Daghesh forte, see 95. 3. d. e.
NOTE. The Tseri in the infinitive, future, and imperative, is shorts
ened into Seghol when the tone is removed from i t ( 54.)
II. Pual
() Praeter , *7^ Nab. 3:7 with Qamets Hhateph; btglp with
Shureq, which is merely an orthographic mode of the later Hebrew,
in imitation of the Syriac. (21. 19 note.)
() Infinitive absolute 23A Gen. 40:15.
(c) Future once ^{DSri Ezek. 26:31 for with Daghesh
omitted ( 95. 3. d) and a composite Sheva under the praeformative
as if it were a guttural.
{d) Participle and without the praeformative 3D, The
Mem is not unfrequently omitted in the participle. ( 95. 2. e.)
NOTE. The verb bnil in Piel has either VnH orVntt, as if the
middle radical were a guttural; in Pual bnm.
9 9 . REG. VERBS ; NOTES ON HIPHIL AND HOPHAL. 173
99. Reg. verbs ; notes on Hiphil and HophaU
I. Hiphil.
() The 3 pew. sing, and plur. of the praeter always have
,,
-
r
be-
tween the two last radicals Out of the third person, Pattahh appears
there as in Kal.
Forms; 3 pers. as ^0^8$ (Chaldaism). In the
second and first persons, Hhireq parvum sometimes appears between
the two last radicals instead of Pattahh; as qfPnVopft instead of
; but this happens only when the verb has a suffix-pro-
noun.
() Infinitive absolute (Chaldaism). The
form with Tseri without Yodh appears to be sometimes shortened
when the tone is removed; as D^ a e i n s t e a d of Some-
times, though rarely, the inf. const, has the same form as the inf. ab-
solute, and vice versa; as construct fsbb for "psbnb Dan. 11:35;
absolute for Josh. 7:7.
Infinitive construct b*Dpn ; with prefix preposition commonly as
; but also expelling the He ( 95. 2. d. 88. 3).
Sometimes as like the praeter; rarely as the infinitive ab-
solute, for which see above.
(c) In the future the apocopated form is (91. 4), with
Tseri pure and mutable. Very rarely the Yodh of the full form is re-
tained ; as Ta n Ex. 19: 3. In pause, this Tseri becomes Pattahh; as
^9P
{
22 ( 60.7uj 2). When the accent is retracted, the Tseri goes into
Seghol; as ( 55.4.)
In the 3 pers. plural, the of the common future sometimes
(though very rarely) is omitted ; as i i Dj y for
(d) Imperative tjp
t
3 with Tseri mutable, n^Dp
t
n. The regular
form is not in use; the apocopated or paragogic forms only be-
ing found in the 2 pen* masc. singular; for which reason the apoco-
pated form is given in the paradigm. Suffix-pronouns, however, are
appended only to the regular form. The other persons are formed
from the regular b^Oprt, and are as in the paradigm.
() Participle ; fem. n ^ a , once nt t gna 2Chr.
24: 7 ; plur. ErV*0$, as if from Zech. 3:7.
For the tone-syllable of this conjugation, see 34.2. e
23
17 4 100. REG. VERBS ; NOTES ON HITHPAEL, POEL, ETC.
II. Hophal
() Praeter often as Vt3j3!T The same verb sometimes has
both forms.
() Infinitive absolute bt3p,n, Inf. const does not occur.
100. Reg. verbs ; notes on Hithpael and HothpaaL
I. Hithpael.
1. Praeter btsjprin. The praeter, future, and imperative some-
times as which in pause becomes rEjPfiH; as ~Vb1"1N Ps. 5:3.
2. Those persons of the praeter which regularly would have Pat-
tahh between the two last radicals, sometimes take Hhireq parvum
instead of it when the tone is moved forward; as Final
Tseri is pure and mutable.
3. As in Piel and Pual ( 95.3.d), the Daghesh is occasionally omit-
ted, and is sometimes compensated by a long vowel; aslljSBri? Judg.
20:15, for n p e r r .
II. HothpaaL
4. Hothpaal occurs very rarely, especially in regular verbs. The
form 3 for occurs Num. 1:47. 2:33. 26:62.1 K. 20:27.
See no. 3 above.
100 a. Reg. verbs ; notes on Potl,
The conjugation Poel is very rare in regular verbs.' The follow-
ing instances occur, viz. Is. 40: 24, a denominative verb
from radix; in pause Jer. 12:2 from the form with
Pattahh because of the Resh; my judge Job 9: 15, Poel part
from For the manner of declining Poel, see the paradigm of
verbs 99.
NOTE. For the few instances in which the unusual conjugations
PUel, Pulal &c. occur in regular verbs, see 81.6, 11,12 &c.
1 0 1 . IRREGULAR VERBS, ETC. 1 7 5
II. IRREGULAR VERBS.
100 b. J\Jodc of designating irregular verbs
1. In order to mark concisely the different species of irregular
verbs, grammarians have employed, as a kind of technical numerals,
the radical letters of the verb whose forms have also given
names to the several conjugations (74). As D is the first letter of
a verb whose first radical is a guttural,is said to be a verb Peguttural;
and a verb whose first letter is fit, ** &c. is said to be a verb Pe Aleph,
Pe Yodh kc. In the same manner verbs whose second radical is a guttural,
Vav&c. are called verbs Ayin guttural, verbs Ayin Vav kc. because 9
is the second letter of ^56. So verbs whose final radical is tt, ft kc.
are denominated verbs Lamedh Aleph, Lamedh He kc. because b is the
final letter of
NOTE. Verbs 79 are those which have the last two radicals alike,
L e. which repeat the second radical for the third one.
2. In the present grammar, letters which are thus used technically
are indicated by the accent Garshayim, i. e. two strokes placed over the
left hand letter; as ftfe, JiV. These are always to be read by calling
the alphabetic names of each letter; as Pe Aleph, Lamedh He kc.
CLASS I. OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
101. Verbs with gutturals and Resh
1. Under the first class of irregular verbs, I have thought it best to
arrange those verbs which have a guttural for one or more of their
radical letters. They have not usually been thus arranged by Hebrew
grammarians, merely because the old definition of an irregular verb
included only those which
M
change or drop any one of their three
radicals." As the definition however is arbitrary in regard to its ex-
tent, I have thought it more convenient to extend it so as to include
the verbs with gutturals, and have accordingly ranked them as irreg-
ular; a place to which every student in Hebrew instinctively assigns
them, on account of their numerous irregularities in the vowel-points.
If the vowels at the present day are a necessary part of a verb, why
17 6
102. VERBS PE GUTTURAL.
should not their departures from regularity give rise to a correspond-
ing classification, as well as those of the consonants ? ( 69. 2.)
2. Verbs which have Resh for one of their radicals may also be rank-
ed in the same class, because in such case Resh, by rejecting Daghesh
forte where it would regularly be inserted, as in Niphal and in the Da-
ghesh'd conjugations, affects the preceding vowel-points in the same
manner as do the gutturals ( 46. 1). In other situations, Resh has no
very peculiar effect on the vowel-points ( 46. 3, 5). As a final rad-
ical, it sometimes takes Pattahh in preference to another vowel, and
sometimes does not
3. When Aleph is the first radical of verbs, it is sometimes a gut-
tural and sometimes quiescent In die former case, the verbs fall un-
der the present class; in the latter, they are treated of in 107. As
the second radical, Aleph is always a guttural; as the third, it is al-
ways quiescent. ( 120.)
4. Under the f ir st class of ir r egular ver bs ar e to be
compr ehended the f ollowing species of ver bs.
ff y
(a) Par t of ver bs D and all of f t?. See no. 3 above.
(b) All ver bs HD and Si?, and those of in which
f inal He has Mappiq.
(c) All which have H or IP f or one of their r adicals.
(d) All ver bs and 12 wher e Resh would r egu-
lar ly r eceive Daghesh f or te. See no. 2 above.
102. Irreg. verbs ; verbs Pe guttural 4rc.
1. When the r egular ver b has simple Sheva under
the f ir st r adical, ver bs Pe guttural usually take a compos-
ite Sheva. ( 46. 2.)
2. Pr aef or matives take the shor t vowel cor r espond-
ing to the composite Sheva which f ollows, instead of the
usual vowels in the r egular f or ms. The same is tr ue of
the letter s char acter istic of the sever al conjugations. ( 58.2.)
E. g. "to*: instead of*i3p.; *jot instead of pjo*\
102. VERBS PE GUTTURAL. 177
NOTE. The composite Sheva voder the guttural here, is commpnlj
homogeneous with the vowel-point which stands under the praeform-
ative in regular verbs; i. e. the short vowel of the composite Sheva
is of the same class as the regular vowel of the praeformative. Thus
instead of "RJM we have *138*;; for TnyW, VJ>n; for *rrn
&c. To this rule, however, there are very many exceptions.
3. Simple Sheva silent is not unf r equently f ound her e
under the guttur als when pr eceded by a pr aef or mative,
just as it would be in r egular ver bs. In this case the
pr aef or mative takes the same shor t vowel as it would if
the Sheva had been composite; and the guttur al is united
with it so as to make a mixed syllable, us in r egular ver bs.
( 58. 2 note 2.)
E. g. instead of for ; TJfTjJ for
NOTE. Two verbs, viz. FTH to be and J"Pn to lidty differ here from
all other verbs of the class Pe guttural, by adopting the regular punc-
tuation under the praeformative, while the guttural has simple Sheva
silent; as futures njtt* and FPH?; Niph. The verb r r n is
" not found In Niphal, and in Hiphil it conforms to verbs Pe guttural;
as fPnft ( 58. 2 note 2). A few others, which ire also nb, take
Hhireq in their apocopated form; as
4. When the guttur al has a composite Sheva, and in
the cour se of f lexion the letter which f ollows it comes to
have a simple Sheva, the composite Sheva of the guttu-
ral goes into its corresponding shor t vowel. ( 58. 3.)
E. g. instead of 1 t h e latter being an impossible sylla-
ble. ( 26. l!)
5. In cases wher e the f ir st r adical is r equir ed to be
doubled, as in the inf initive, f utur e, and imper ative of Niphal,
the Daghesh being omitted in the guttur als and Resh, the
pr eceding vowel is ther ef or e pr olonged.
E. g. iQtt-T instead of 1$9rr; Ol ^n instead of Otfnn. This is
the only case in which Resh produces any irregularity as a first radical.
NOTE. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael of this class of verbs are altogeth-
er regular.
178
! 0 3 . VERBS PE GUTTURAL.
103. Irreg. verbs ; notes on verbs Pe guttural.
I. Kal.
() Infinitive construct ins, VDK; with a preposition bbtj ;
also as b'sKij. Fem. forms hj?]n, Jlban Ezek. 16: 6.
() Future O as *i)ay\ Fut A as pm; ; and sometimes fut. O as
Some verbs have both forms.
Future O with Sheva simple ; f ut A b^nv Sometimes the sing,
is like V'arn while the plural is as * b i n \ A peculiar form is ^bnn for
( 60. 6). Plurals pers. fern/nanta?* for r ni byn Dan. 8t 22
a form of the fem. plural which imitates the 3 pers. fem. of the Syri-
ac and Arabic, in preserving the Yodh praeformative.
(c) Imperative in verbs KB, sfOK, TJW. With ft parag. ncot| -
Second pers. fem. "HJtofils. 47: 2 Ruth 3: i 5. Plural 2 masc. ^il^.
(d) The Pattahh sound is somewhat shorter than the Seghol-eound.
When a verb Pe guttural has the Seghol-vowels in its ground-form, and
afterwards receives accession at the end, the Pattahh-vowels are some-
times substituted for the Seghol ones, in order to shorten the sound
of the word.
E. g. Sing. Pj'ox^, plural
with suffix n
plural mon: .
II. Nipkal.
() Praeter Est. 9: 1; -iinys-1 1 Chr. 5: 20;
plur. n i n a Cant. 1:6. The form with Pattahh under Nun character-
istic, as nfctsna Gen. 31: 27, seldom appears in the praeter except
when preceded by the conjunction Vav; and in the participle only when
increased, as fem. plur. D^absa. See above in no. I. d.
() Participle once Dinna Est. 8: 8 from Dnn.
III. Hipkil.
(a) Praeter "V0n?j. A peculiar form is ttb*^ tor !fb*n
Hab. 1: 15 ( 60. 6). Vav prefixed to the praeter changes the Se-
ghoi-class of vowels to the.Pattahh-class (comp. Kal and Niphal); as
^nannn, but with Vav
104 . VERBS ATIN GUTTURAL.
1 7 9
(6) Infinitive absolute with const, form Josh. 7: 7. Vice
verm, inf. const with abs. form Dent 26: 12.
(c) Future W , '
(d) Imperative plural 2 K. 2:3, 5, from trbn.
(e) Participle *VBn; pyg for pTKXJ Prov. 17 : 4.'
IV. Hophd.
() Praeter n^' n a peculiar form for ttbsin. ( 60.6.)
() Infinitive absolute Ezek. 16: 4.
104. Irreg verbs ; verbs Ayin guttural fyc,
1. The depar tur es f r om the f or ms of the r egular
ver b ar e less f r equent in ver bs whose second radical is a
guttur al or Resh, than in those of the class Pe guttural
The principal var iation is, that in per sons and f or ms wher e
the middle radical of the r egular ver b would have simple
Sheva under it, ver bs Ayin guttural take a composite
Sheva, which is gener ally Hhateph Pattahh. ( 46. 2.)
2. The f inal syllable of the f utur e and imper ative,
having a guttur al in it, usually takes Pattahh ( 46.3), though
in a f ew instances it has Hholem. The inf initive also,
contr ar y to what might be expected, takes Hholem.
NOTE. Inasmuch as Pattahh in the final syllable of verbs Ayin gut"
tural results merely from the influence of the guttural, the future
A in verbs of this kind does not necessarily indicate an intransitive
verb, as is usually the case with the future Pattahh. ( 88.4. 6.)
3. In the same manner, Piel in ver bs of this kind not un-
f r equently takes f inal Pattahh instead of Tser i.
E. g. 3133, DH3. So also the imperative of Hlphil; as In-
stead of prpfn.
4. In the conjugations which r egular ly take Daghesh
f or te in the middle r adical, viz. Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, the
180
104. VERBS A YIN GUTTURAL*
Daghesh is of cour se excluded by the guttur als and Resh,
and the pr eceding vowel pr olonged. ( 46. I.)
E. g. Piel praet. 1J2, f i t t , ; fut ^ ; Pual
bKi, yn'ii with Qibbuts long; Hithpael &c.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
I.Kal
() Infinitive fem. as nbJiN; sometimes with Qamets
Hhateph, as rtjPJVn; and as !"ij?3>T for rrjt. ( 60. 6.)
() Future *b~pn2P for pHX? Gen. 21:6; probably an effect of
the pause-accent.
(c) The imperative feminine and plural is formed according to the
rule In 58. 2; as masc. p5t, fem. &c.
II. NiphaL
Infinitive absolute Dhba Judg. 11: 25. In other respects Niphal is
entirely regular, with the exception noted in no. 1 above. It Is there-
fore omitted in the paradigm.
III. Piel and Pual
(a) The praeter in Piel with middle - tt, takes either Tseri or
Hhireq magnum under its first radical, as yt$3; with middle 51
and n, usually Hhireq magnum and sometimes Tseri, as JJT?,
; with middle y, usually Hhireq magnum and very rarely Tseri;
as ^51, Judg. 14:20; with middle -i, Tseri, as -pas. The par-
adigm exhibits forms with both vowels. An anomalous form is
rrarr for with suff. n n b m Ps. 51: 7 from Dm.
* ?{
#7
I VS*
(4) In the infinitive, future, Imperative and participle of Piel and
Hithpael, middle N and middle ^ usually (not always) require Qamets
before them, as also Num. 14:11; part ; but
middle ii, n, and are very rarely preceded by Qamets. E. g. 233^,
; but sometimes
(c) Infinitive absolute ytja with Hhireq magnum, for the usual yttt-
(d) Future 1 pers. sing Lev. 26: S3 for
() In Pual the gutturals and Resh require, as compensation for
Daghesh omitted, either Hholem or Qibbuts long; s
Vt n &c.
1 0 5 . VERBS LAMEDH GUTTURAL. 181
IF. Hithpael.
ID Hithpael we have ^nanri , bnsnn; see Piel in b. In pause, Pat-
tahh under the first radical is changed into Seghol, as Ezek.
5: 13 for ( 60. 1. 80. 2. c.) '
NOTE. Hithpoel appears once in these verbs; viz. participle
in pause Is. 52:5, for ffijSriE from ( 80. 2. c.) *
105. Irreg. verbs ; verbs I^amedh guttural.
1. When in r egular ver bs the f inal letter of the r oot
would have a Sheva under it, ver bs Lamedh guttural ar e
near ly without exception conf or med to the r egular model;
as Kal pr aet 2 per son PIPE &c.
But the 2 pers. fem. takes Pattahh furtive under the guttural; as
IWJW instead of ( 59.2 note 2). A very few forms exist like
15M3 for
rt
2. All the f or ms which end with a guttur al letter ,
have Pattahh either pr oper or f ur tive in the f inal syllable.
(a) Pattahh furtive is inser ted, when the vowel of the
ultimate syllable is V, or ^ . ( 27. 2.)
E. g.
The infinitive construct of Kal has Hholem impure, contrary to
the analogy of other verbs; as
(h) The pr oper vowel Pattahh appear s as a f inal
vowel without exception in the f utur e and imper ative of
Kal. So also in the Segholate f or m of the par ticiple f em-
inine.
E. g. Fut ; imper. SHOtt; part fem. nt t t o. ( 59. 2. 60. S
note.)
3. When in r egular ver bs the vowel of the f inal syl-
lable would be Tser i, these ver bs either r etain the Tser i
and inser t a Pattahh f ur tive af ter it, as ; or else ex-
change the Tser i f or the pr oper vowel Pattahh, as JttDtD.
24
188
1 0 6 . SECOND CLASS OF IRREGULAR VERBS, ETC.
The former method is common in the infinitive absolute, and where
a pause-accent falls en the case absolute of participles ( 182. 2. c),
L e. wherever a lengthened form is required; the latter is usual in
the construct state of participles, in the infinitive construct, and in
words with conjunctive accents he. So also in the apooopated forms
of Hiphil; as imperative rfclCH for he.
4. Ver bs Lamedh Resh f r equently take Pattahh in
the f inal syllable, but of ten have other f or ms; as
and na> \ ( 46. 3, 5.)
5. By a kind of apocope the 2 pers. plur. fem. of the imperative
has for once Gen. 4: 23.
CLASS U. OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
106. Verbs with quiescents fyc,
1. Under the second class of irregular verbs are comprehended all
those in which any of the radical letters are dropped, assimilated, com-
muted, or become quiescent
2. These have commonly been divided into verbs imperfect and
quiescent, and that order followed in treating of them which this divis-
ion required. But as all divisions of this nature are merely techni-
cal, I shall adopt that order which seems most simple, and which re-
gards these verbs as irregular in their first, second, or third radical
letter.
3. Under the second class of ir r egular ver bs ar e to be
compr ehended the f ollowing species of ver bs.
{) Ver bs ir r egular in the first r adical; viz. ver bs
with Aleph quiescent, all ver bs **&, and most of
(b) Ver bs ir r egular in their second r adical; viz. all
. a a
ver bs 3??, 1?, and ^7.
(c) Ver bs ir r egular in their third r adical; viz. all
ver bs ver bs Jib with He quiescent, and ver bs r f c.
4. Ther e ar e also many ver bs which ar e doubly ir-
r egular , i. e. which ar e ir r egular in two of their radical
107. VERBS PE ALEPH. 183
letter s, usually the f ir st and Ia*t, because two ir r egular let-
ter s veiy r ar ely stand together . Such ar e ver bs which
ar e both MD and r f c, as ; ver bs and f cf o, as ;
ver bs and as HT; ver bs and ai 6W33;
ver bs and r f V* as f ittt. ( 124.)
5. A f ew other ver bs ar e peculiar ly anomalous; aa
art a, 'n f or &c. ( 124.)
I07L Irreg verbs ; verbs Pe Aleph,
1. In the gr eater par t of the class of ver bs f c*D, the
letter Aleph is a guttur al, and the ver bs in which it ap-
pear s in that char acter , ar e to be inf lected simply as ver bs
Pe guttural ( 102, 103). But in a f ew ver bs, Aleph
appear s in the f utur e of Kal as a quiescent, and assumes
the f or ms pr esented in the paradigm and the f ollowing
notes. It is these latter ver bs only, or ver bs Pe Aleph qui-
escent, which ar e tr eated of her e.
2. The class of verbs KB with Aleph quiescent is quite small, com-
prehending only the five following verbs, vix,
ft Bit, which are inflected only as in the paradigm. The verbs
f t #, tnfit and exhibit in the future of Kal the inflections both
of verbs MS quiescent and fits guttural, and belong to both species.
NOTE. Out of the future of Kal, fit is everywhere considered as A
guttural, and the few instances in which it quiesces in other conjuga-
tions are anomalous, and belong as well to verbs KD guttural as tp
verbs quiescent. They are however exhibited in the notes.
The paradigm gives only the future of Kal.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
J. KaL
(a) The praeter is entirely like verbs Pe guttural; as are also the in-
finitive, imperative, participles, and all the other conjugations, ex-
cepting the forms noted below.
184 1 0 8 . VERBS PE TODH.
(&) lit the future 1 person, the quiescent fit falls out after the prae-
formative fit; as *"ipK instead of ^Jjfit fit. The ground of this seems to be
to avoid the concurrence of two Alephs.
(c) Forms of the future; *"1*3*0, FH without Aleph.
So i i n n for 1 "intin &c. The common form of verbs Pe guttural co-
exists, in some persons of the verbs THfit and S)0fit, with the quiescent
form; as TJlfit'* and THK*; SJDfiO, S)p% and ^Dfit\ The first person from
35M is four times 3Hfit, once Prov. 8: 17; aU the rest are as in
verbs Pe guttural.
(d) The infinitive has fit quiescent only in the construct form Sttfitlb
for which is a peculiarity of Aleph. ( 47. 5. a.)
(e) Imperative for i BHt by a Syriasm. ( 47. 5. b.)
II. Nipkal.
The only example of quiescence in Niphal is Tlifcta for THWtj.
III. Piel.
Future 2 Sam. 22:40 for where Aleph quiesces and
is dr opped ( 47. 2) . So part i ci pl e ^Bt ya f or *3BMt .
IV. Hiphii
(a) Infinitive Ezek. 21:23 for b^fittl, where * is dropped
after becoming quiescent ( 47. 5. o
(b) Future b^fct for after the analogy of the future of
Kal, supra I. b. bXtt'2 for bx&ji with the tone retracted. ( 55. 3.)
(c) Imperative i VjH in pause for 3 nn from ftnij. The it qui-
esces ( 47. 6. a) and is then dropped. For the Yodh, see 123.1, k.
(d) Participle ]***& for 'ptttQ, Aleph quiescent dropped as in c.
V. HophaL
Future for where Aleph goes into Vav in order to
be more homogeneous with the O sound, and then quiesces in the
sound of the Qamets Hhateph under the praeformative, which is of
course lengthened into Hholem. ( 48. 2. 6.)
108, Irreg verbs ; verbs Pe Yodh
1. Under the gener al appellation of ver bs Pe Yodh,
ar e compr ised f our kinds of ver bs, which dif f er f r om each
other in a few cases, with r espect to the mode of inf leo
108* VERBS PE YODH* 185
tion; while the gr ound-f or ms, and many of the f or ms de-
r ived f r om them, exhibit the same appear ance in all.
2. Most ver bs denominated Pe Yodh appear to have
been or iginally Pe Vav ; the Vav being changed into Yodh,
because the Hebr ews gener ally avoided beginning wor ds
with a Vav.
Thus. appears to have been as it now is in the Arabic.
The Arabians have a considerable number of verbs of this form, which
are quite distinct from verbs Pe Yodh. In Hebrew, the class of
Verbs which originally were t o, disclose this Vav in some parts of
their inflection, as an original moveable letter. Thus 1 ^ , Niph. fut.
imp. &c. Some disclose it also in Hithpael; as Hithpael
STinn. In Hiphil and Hophal it is quiescent j as nb'iFl,
3. A f ew ver bs appear to have been originally
so, and r etain the Yodh radical thr oughout, in all the
f or ms of them which ar e extant
This is not to he understood, however, as excluding the defective
mode of writing when the Yodh is quiescent; as for SB
1
", &c.
4. A f ew also assimilate their f ir st r adical Yodh to
the letter which f ollows, in the same manner and. in
the same cases as ver bs Pe Nw ( 113); as nT
1
f utur e
nr ;, Niph. i m
5. Ther e ar e also a f ew ver bs whose f or ms can-
not be exclusively r anked under either of the above clases.
6. Ver bs of all the clases ar e r egular in the pr ae-
ter , inf initive absolute, and par ticiple of Kal, and in the
Daghesh'd conjugations.
This is to be understood with the same latitude as is applied to
common regular verbs; among which, as we have seen, occasional an-
omalies appear.
7. The ir r egular ities, by which they dif f er f r om r eg-
ular ver bs and f r om each other , ar e limited to the f utur e,
inf initive constr uct and imper ative of Kal, and to Niphal,
Hiphil, and Hophal.
186 1 0 9 . VERBS f x YODH ; CLASS 1.
109. Irrcg. verbs ; first class of verbs
]. The f ir st class of ver bs in their origin ar e ID.
The char acter istic of this class is, that in the f utur e the
pr aef or mative expels the radical Yodh, and takes Tser i;
and the f inal syllable, unless it have a guttur al in it, adopts
also the same vowel.
E. g. 5*, fut. 325\ The full future in this class of verbs, as
f ut occurs (as an exception) in two or three instances. With a
guttural in the final syllable, the form is as f ut r v from
2. In the inf initive and imper ative, the radical Yodh
f alls away.
E. g. imper. 52?; inf. ; "lb* inf. feminine IVJ^;
inf. fem. nab.
4. In Niphal pr aeter and par ticiple, Hiphil, and
Hophal, the original Vav of this class of ver bs appear s as
a quiescent.
E. g. n-sZT, Niph. aaita, Hiph. Hoph.
NOTE. The Verbs which belong exclusively to this class are few ;
viz- s v , a.-;, 113:, l b: or n ^ , ttar, rj j ; , 1-3;, a s ; ; in the
whole ten. Others have forms partly according to this class, and part-
ly according to other classes. See general remarks in 112 a.
ROTES ON THE PARADIGM.
I. Kal
(a) Praeter T} f
r
*1*3
o n c e
Judg. 19:11 (42. 1 note);
for Ps. 23:6.
(b) Future with Yodh retained ; first pers. ftsb^K, which is
very uncommon. With tone retracted, as Sii? With n paragog-
ic, as HJHN.
(c) Infinitive absolute &c. Once lavi) Jer.42:10 with Yodh
dropped. Inf. construct a n, fem. nr *; fem. ni b, ni b, by contraction
r b (41. 3. 6); also as n*l\ With suffix, as "'Pin. It is usual-
ly feminine.
1 1 0 . VERBS PE YODH ; CLASS I I .
187
(<*) Imperative *n, rn*\; Ttib, from ? j ^;
with i t - paragogic, from 9JI (92). The paragogic forms are the
ptost common. For the form fO Cant 3:11, see 121.1, e.
ILMphal.
Praeter wkh Daghesh euphoric, from *tb\
III. Hiphil.
() Future 1^*3 with tone retracted. With Vav omitted, n ^ i .
Once for Ex. 2: 9. With if characteristic retained,
yTZ>in\ ( 88. 3.)
() 'Imperative in Q,eri for Gen. 8: 17. So
in Qeri Ps. 5: 9. The first radical in these cases is
treated as if the verb were entirely regular, the form being precisely
the same as The KethJb therefore exhibits the true reading.
IV. Hithpatl.
The verb an* has Hithpael yni nn, retaining the original Vav.
110. Irreg. verbs ; second class of verbs *4>.
ff fl
1. The second class of ver bs also ar e ID as to
their origin. The char acter istic of this class is, that they
pr eser ve the r adical Yodh in the inf initive, f utur e, and im-
per ative.
2. The f utur e has Pattahh in the f inal syllable; the
inf initive takes f inal Hholem.
E. g. Future itc. laf. tffiF, &c. See below in I. c.
NOTE 1. The number of verbs txchsvothf belonging to this class is
small; viz. ; , HV, n*; , *2;, ^ I??, ^ *,
^ or "j 125^; in the whole thirteen.
NOTE 2. Out of Kal, the forms of verbs belonging to the first
and second classes are altogether the same. No paradigm, therefore,
of the second class is needed beyond the conjugation Kal.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
I. Kal.
(a) The praeter besides final Pattahh has final E and 0, but reg-
ular; as ttap, VD\
1 8 8 1 1 0 . VERBS PE YODH; CLASS II*
(6) Future commonly fully written with Yodh, as ; but also
defectively as 3? > which is merely a mode of orthography. Plural
*fitV defectively; and so often in the plural Pattahh is always
found in the final syllable of the future in this class of verbs, unless they
end in N or ; in which case they conform, as to their final vowel, to
the forms in verbs & and rib.
(c) Infinitive always Hholem, wherever it appears; as fem.'
ni r , fem. ; fin*, fem. t u n * ; From n v 'comes
firi v!> 2 Chr. 26:16 with fit instead of n ( 121. IV), and also ni' Vb.
(d) Imperative #TV, fiiV, *"P, UJ'V which appears in the par-
agogic form . The form Judg. 19:30. Is. 8:10 from is
altogether anomalous.
The imperative does not occur except in verbs with final fit or ft,
or with a guttural in the final syllable.
II. Mphal
() Future Ex. 19:13; Gen. 8: 12. The first per-
son sing, in Niphal has Hhireq parvum under the praeformative, in-
stead of Seghol; as not SJfi$ as in regular verbs.
() Participle plural construct **3, as from a praeter ttM3 from
participle with Tseri, from
III. Piel.
Future for from for from ST1\
So n^2,
IF. HiphU.
Future ITjirP instead of yVjV* from ! W; PjDiJT from the
characteristic of Hiphil being preserved. ( 88. 3.)
V. Hithpael
The verb ttV in Hithpael has r mnr i ; inHithpael hasroi nf r;
both preserving the original. Vav.
VI. PopaaL
The verb rtfi* is found once in Popaal, viz. 2pers. I V' c ^ Ps.45: 3.
111. Irreg. verbs ; third class of verbs
1. The thir d class of ver bs appear originally to
have had Yodh f or their f ir st r adical.
2. In the f utur e of Kal they ar e declined like ver bs of
1 1 1 . TERBS PE YODH ; CLASS III. 189
the second class, r etaining their Yodh, and haying Pattahh
and sometimes Tser i in their f inal syllable.
NOTE. NO instances occur of the infinitive or imperative in Kal of
this class of verbs, so that we have no means of deciding the form of
those moods.
3. The only peculiar char acter istic of this class of
ver bs is, that in Hiphil they r etain their original Yodh.
E. g. pa* Hiph. p^ r t , not p ^ i n as in the preceding classes.
But these forms in Hiphil may be defectively written; as f ut
or
4. For ms in these ver bs ar e f ound only in Kal and
Hiphil.
NOTE. The verbs belonging to the above class are very few J viz.
bb*, p2^, "ittj*, pXTfi, and in respect to most of their forms fjVJ
and 122^; in all seven.
The paradigm exhibits only the conjugation Hiphil.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
/. Kal.
There appears to be a future Tseri in some verbs of this class.
Thus *2 from ; y G e n . 50:26. Such futures rank
neither under the first nor second class of verbs "'D, and must be
considered as peculiar to this third class.
II. Hiphil.
(a) Praeter fully written, as *pJq"
,
n; and defectively, as }
(b) Future fully written, as and defectively, as ; also
Prov. 4:25 with Yodh moveable, as if it were a regular verb.
So also Hos.7:12. Comp. 109. III. b.
NOTE. Some futures *VT generis are constructed from and BB^;
as ^ 2 ? > also b ^ r p ; but it is doubtful whether this latter
form belongs here. See the lexicons in b^"\
(c) Imperative forms of this class with Yodh moveable, as IB***}
in Q,eri Ps. 5:9 ; so in Qeri Gen. 8:17. Comp. 109. III. b.
(l) Participle 1 Chr. 12: 2 with Yodh moveable.
2 5
1 9 0 1 1 2 . VERBS PE YODH ; CLASS IV.
112. Irreg. verbs ; fourth class of verbs ^B.
1. The char acter istic of the f our th class of ver bs *D
is, that wher ever in the pr eceding classes the r adical
Yodh becomes quiescent, in this class it assimilates itself to
the letter which f ollows it, in the same manner as the
Nun does in ver bs Pe Nun ( 113); viz. in the f utur e of
Kal, in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal.
2. The f utur e Kal has Pattahh and Hholem, like
ver bs Pe Nun; as 112% f ut. f ut. The other
conjugations ar e also as ver bs Pe JVun. ( 113.)
NOTE. All the forms referred by Gesenius to roots under this
description of verbs, viz. to 03*, ax*, 3 ^ , as belonging exclusively
here; and to "ID*, 10*, ps*, "ND*, as mostly belonging here;
are with better reason ranked by Simonis and Eichhorn under verbs
*}B; for in that case the common laws of the language, as to assimila-
tion, are simply followed. The assimilation of the Yodh is contrary
to the nature of this letter in genera], as it usually quiesces rather
than assimilates. But as the lexicon of Gesenius is constructed upon
a Afferent principle, the grammar is here adapted to i t As to signifi-
cation, it is a matter of indifference whether the student derive these
forms from verbs *JB or *, because the same meaning is attributed to
both roots.
3. The paradigm exhibits only Kal, because in the other conjuga-
tions the forms are precisely like those of verbs in the succeeding
paradigm;as Niphal p$3, Hiphil Hophal pajqt; like |3,
art.
4. The apocopated future p2$*2 1 K. 22: 35 comes from a future
with Tser i Imp. pag 2 K. 4:41 is like verbs f 9. So also the infinitive.
112 a. Vtrbs "*B which do not fall under the foregoing classes.
1. Verbs ^B whose forms cannot be exclusively ranked under either
of the preceding classes, are the following; viz. DIJ*,
vc, ib:, ip.:, e* :> ; fa> u eleven.
2. These, as the student may ascertain from his lexicon, have
forms which would seem to belong to two or more of the foregoing
classes; as Dn^, f ut oil* and D12\ This verb has also3pers.plur. fern*
1 13. VERBS PE NCN. 191
with Yodh praeformative instead of Tav, like the Syriac and
Arabic. So -ip* has f ut and nip"* ; and 3 pers. plur. fem.
with Yodh and Daghesh euphonic, for ( 29. 10). Other
anomalous forms of several of these verbs are noted in the lexicons.
General remarks on all the verbs Pe Yodh.
3. Lexicographers and grammarians differ in the classification of these
verbs, on account of the variety of forms which they present. The
classification, however, is comparatively of little consequence, provid-
ed the student knows how to decline and account for the particular
forms with which he meets. To one or other of the above divis-
ions he will be able to refer all; excepting that here as in regular
verbs, now and then an anomaly occurs, which can be assigned by
analogy to no particular class. E. g. Drr, fut. Dn^ij of class first as to its
first vowel, and of class second as to its second vowel. So also of a
few others; which, however, are mostly noticed in the lexicons.
113. Irreg verbs ; verbs Pe Nun*
1. The ir r egular ity of ver bs consists in this, that
when the yer b r eceives any accession at the beginning, so
that the Nun would r egular ly stand at the end of a syl-
lable and have under it a silent Sheva, it is assimilated to
the letter which f ollows it, and is expr essed by a Daghesh
f or te in that letter .
In the inf initive constr uct and imper ative of Kal,
wher e the Nun would r egular ly have under it a vocal
Sheva, it is in a f ew instances dr opped.
E. g. The verb has f ut A* for UJA3*; Niphal t?A3 for tt)A33;
Hiphil spa?? for UJ-aan; Hophal 23An for or ttjjan; Kal infini-
tive construct feminine n^ji, imperative UJi for 33 kc.
2. Hence the ir r egular ities of these ver bs arising f r om
the Nun, ar e limited to the f utur e of Kal, the pr ae-
ter and par ticiple of Niphal, and the conjugations Hiphil
and Hophal; because in these only would the r adical Nun
r egular ly r eceive a silent Sheva under i t
3. Ver bs ID, which have a guttur al f or their second
1 9 3 1 1 4 . VERBS PE NUN J NOTES.
r adical, ar e inf lected simply as ver bs Ayin guttural, and
have no ir r egular ities arising f r om their Nun; because the
Nun cannot be assimilated to a guttur al and expr essed
in it by a Daghesh.
NOTE. From this observation must be excepted the verbs BnD and
nna ; from which come Niph. Dji3, and fut ni v, Niph. nn3 not nri33.
4. A f ew ver bs which usually take the assimilated
f or ms, admit also the r egular f or ms in a ver y f ew cases.
E. g. PJID, fut. P)1?, onceSpqn Ps. 68:3; 103, f ut -lb*, once KtM?
Jer. 3: 6; nX3, f ut n*X? and five times WX3\ So ?jn3, and pns.
NOTE. The Daghesh which marks the assimilated Nun is some-
times omitted. ( 45. 4 note 1. 95.3. d.)
114. Irreg. verbs ; notes on verbs Pe Nun,
I. Kal.
() In the infinitive construct, the radical Nun is dropped only in
the following feminine forms, viz. n?$, nujJj, nyo, ring, nj^X, nfjip and
for nfijip (47.2) ; once Kito Ps. 89:10; nn for 11515 (
4 1
3
* )
The regular forms ?A3, 5b3 also occur. The infinitive feminine with
suffix is as intpi.
() The future O is found in about two thirds of the Verbs j c, as
VD* ; future A in about one third, as XDi\ Future E is found only in
fn3, as ^FP. The verb has future nn*, plural in pause Job
21: 13 with Daghesh euphonic in Tav (29. 9). Forms with Nun
retained see in 113. 4. In the future especially, the Daghesh Is
sometimes omitted ( 45.4 note 1). Future O as MB
1
? with Hholem
pure. (21. 15 note.)
(c) In the imperative, the radical Nun is dropped only in the fol-
lowing forms, viz. *4, and and 9Q, TJD Ezek. 37 : 9, px,
-rtx Is. 8 :17, Kto, bjp, Gen. 27: 26, fri and tt3R Ps. 8:2.
The regular form SX3 also occurs.
II. Niphal
(a) In those verbs where the Nun is assimilated and the conjuga-
tion Piel takes Pattahh or Qamets in its final syllable, Niphal and Piel
have the same form; as 13, Niphal and Piel ; &U)3, Niphal and
Piel fitips. The verb b3 has in Niphal the form bitt3 Gen. 17:26,27.
(1b) The infinitive absolute appears in the following forms, viz.
pj-*3tt
#
Ps. 68:3; f i mn Jer. 32:4.
1 1 5 . VERBS A YIN DOUBLED. 1 9 3
(c) Participle with suffix ^jtrja, probably from an obsolete form
rrja. (121. II. c.)
III. Hiphil and Hophal.
(o) The radical Nun very rarely appears; the infinitive construct
^nat t occurs Ezek. 22:20. Apocopated future Tan Ex. 19:3 with
Yodh retained.
(b) In Hophal, Qibbuts is the more common vowel of the first
syllable. But Qamets Hhateph appears; as 3pnan Judg. 20:31.
IV. Notes on the verbs and ]n3.
(a) The verb nj?b imitates verbs by assimilating its Lamedh in
the future of Kal, as ; and by dropping it in the infinitive con-
struct and sometimes in the imperative; as inf. fem. ri ng; imperative
nj? and In the praeter it has once the very anomalous form of
JlJ? for np_b Ezek. 17:5. In Niphal, Pual, and Hithpael, it is regular.
Piel, Hiphil, and Hophal do not occur.
(b) The verb ]na is quite anomalous; f ut f r P; imper. fP, nan
Ps. 8: 2; inf. fem. nn for nj l j (41. 3. a), with suffix **nn, the Da-
ghesh in the final Tav being the assimilated Nun, which appears when
the word receives an accession (41. 3). The final Nun of the verb
is also assimilated when it meets with a suffix beginning with Tav or
Nun; as nna for nana; wna for laana; and so nna, oqna, "jrgna &c.
115. Irreg. verbs ; verbs Ayin doubled
1. The ir r egular ities of ver bs Ayin doubled ar e occa-
sioned by a contr acted mode of speaking and wr iting the
last two r adical letter s. The gener al law of the contr ac-
tion in those f or ms which end with a r adical letter is, to
dr op f r om the r egular f or m the vowel of the f ir st r adical
if it have one, to dr op also the middle r adical, and then to
utter the wor d by the aid of the f inal vowel, and the f ir st
and last r adicals of the gr ound-f or m; as 3D f or MD ; 3D
f or HDD &c.
But when the ver b r eceives any accession, the middle
radical instead of being dr opped is expr essed by a Da-
1 9 4
1 1 5 . VERBS AY1N DOUBLED*
ghesh f or te in the f inal one, the contr action in other r e-
spects being the same as bef or e ; as HSD f or f QDO ; im-
per ative 130 f or 123D &c.
NOTE 1. The above law of contraction seems to have been gener-
al in the Hebrew language, wherever it could be applied without vio-
lating some more important principle. In some cases the feebler
consonants were even assimilated, in order to effect contraction. Thus
we have for ; ns for ; nb for ; and without assimi-
lation rnVD for (41.3). In words of this kind also, the as-
similated or contracted letter re-appears as Daghesh whenever there is
any accession; as tatt, &c. The reason why Daghesh is omitted
in such forms in these verbs as 2D, 50 &c. is merely because the let-
ter in which it should be written stands at the end of a word. ( 46.3.)
The same contraction is found in nouns derived from this class of
verbs; as an, pn; with suffix ->*13, *J?n; from aj n and pj?n.
NOTE 2. The above rule for the final vowel holds for all those
persons of the verb, where the tone remains on the same syllable as
in the ground-form. But when the tone is moved forward by acces-
sion &c. the long vowels Hholem and Tseri are as usual exchanged
for short ones; as DljifeOtt. ( 65. 4.)
2. Contr action is excluded in the f ollowing cases.
(a) When either the f ir st or second r adical of the
ver b is f ollowed by an immutable vowel
E. g. Infinitive absolute ; participle active ; participle
passive The first vowel, when immutable, cannot be dropped;
the second, when immutable, cannot be transferred to the first radical.
But Hiphil takes Tseri pure instead of *L., in order to admit con-
traction. See below in no. 5.
NOTE. Hence contraction is excluded from all those conjugations
whose characteristic forms contain an immutable vowel, viz. Poel, Poal,
Hithpoel.
(b) When the middle r adical has Daghesh f or te.
E. g. Piel 5aD; infinitive construct aao. The middle radical
when doubled, cannot of course be united with the final one. Con-
traction is therefore excluded from all the Daghesh'd conjugations.
1 1 5 * VERBS ATIN DOUBLED.
1 9 5
NOTE. Hence, generally, wherever the characteristic law of' de-
clension in any conjugation would be affected By contraction, the lat-
ter is excluded.
3. Io those per sons of the ver b which take suf f or ma-
tives beginning with a consonant, viz. f l, f ], DP, "jr, ID, H3,
an epenthetic *1 or is inser ted between the suif or ma-
tive and the gr ound-f or m of the ver b.
E.g. Praeter 2 pen. sing. instead of na, regular form
f inf ao instead of DnaO, reg. form Dnaao; imperative instead
of nsso, reg. form WahD.
The epenthetic \ is inserted only before the sufformative
IT3; viz. in the second and third persons plural feminine of the future
and imperative. The epenthetic T is of course confined to the prae-
ter. The insertion of these letters is probably for the sake of eupho-
ny ; and prevails in similar cases in the cognate languages.
4. The pr aef or matives and letter s char acter istic of the
sever al conjugations, wher e they would r egular ly have un-
der them short vowels, take long ones in these ver bs.
These long vowels, however , with the exception of Shur eq,
ar e pur e and of cour se mutable.
E. g. Future Kal a*0^ instead of a*at, for which form see no. 5
below; Hiphil aOH instead of a^DH; Hophal a3fi instead ofaaOrt &c.
NOTE. The long vowel in the first syllable results from the usual
short vowel being thrown into a simple syllable. ( 55. 1.)
5. Many of the or dinal f or ms f r om which the con-
tr acted f or ms of these ver bs appear to be der ived, ar e such
as would be unusual f or ms in r egular ver bs.
E. g. Kal f ut aco from a'aD^ instead of 330\
Niph. praet a3 1503 1503.
f ut a$* nao^ aao\
Hiph. praet aon SaOi-? a
f c
i ^n.
Most of these unusual forms are found in other classes of verbs, or
in the kindred dialects. Sometimes also the contracted forms even here
depart from the usual mode of contraction, and are derived from reg-
196
$ 1 1 6 . VERBS A YIN DOUBLED ; NOTES.
uiar original forms; as f ut frm > Niphal bn3 as if f r om
&c.
6. ID these ver bs occur the unusual conjugations Poel,
Poal, Hithpoel; and Pilpel, Polpal, Hithpalpal (81. 2, 3,
9, 10). They sometimes occur instead of Piel, Pual and
Hithpael, though these latter ar e the most f r equent;
sometimes both ar e f ound under the same ver b. When
they exist together , their meaning is of ten synonymous,
though not unf r equently dif f er ent.
For further information respecting these conjugations, see the gen-
eral remarks at the close of the next section.
7. In ver bs wher e the doubled letter is a guttur al or
Resh, Daghesh f or te is of cour se excluded, and the pr e-
ceding vowel pr olonged ( 45, 46). See above in no. 1
and notes.
E. g. nnp, 3 pers. masc. nti, 3 pers. fem. STJT3, 1 pen.
So T}30, 3 pers. fem. instead of JTJJg; 1 pers. in-
stead of &c. The number of these verbs is small; and they
occur in very few forms.
NOTE. For the peculiar tone-syllable of verbs Ayin doubled, see
34. 2. / .
116. Irreg. verbs ; notes on verbs Ayin doubled.
Changes of vowels in declension. In Kal future and imperative,
when the tone is thrown off from the final Hholem by accession, this
Hholem shortens into Qjibbuts; as i a ^ , M^aDn. In Hiphil in the
same case, the final Tseri shortens into Hhireq parvum; as at j n,
niaDH. ( 54. 4.)
Qamets and Tseri under the praeformatives and letters character-
istic of the conjugations, throughout this class of verbs, are pure and
mutable ( 115. 4); and are therefore dropped as usual when the
tone is moved forward; as Kal fut. 3SO*, ns ^ On; Hiph.
ni s on j part naOtt. ( 56.)
1 1 6 , VERBS AY1N DOUBLED; NOTES*
197
LKaL
() In the praeter, verbs final Hholem retain the Hholem in the
contracted forms of the third persons; as i a i contr. for l E1 from
0731, also 173^ from 01; 121 contr. for 1111 from i l l , also 121
from 111 ( 115. 1). For the forms of verbs in which the doubled
letter is a guttural or Resh, see above in 115. 7.
In the praeter and infinitive, the regular forms sometimes co-exist
with the contracted ones; as TTa Ezek. 29: 19 and ta Is. 8: 1. So
iTTa, in pause 1JT2 ; and so usually in pause. The verb is found
only in the third person plural, where it is always regular. SoOE*.D Sic.
The form isart for 13^an, without the epenthetic % occurs Ps. 64:7.
() Infinitive construct 1*0, and regular 110; before Maqqeph
-On, Hholem going into Qamets Hbateph; with suffix ipti, "Van, Hho-
lem going into Qibbuts short
The infinitive sometimes has Pattahh as in regular verbs ( 96. II. 6);
as contr. for ; with suffix Oi l Ecc. 3:18 from i s inf. of
112 ( 55. 1). Occasionally it has Shureq like the infinitive of verbs
4*, as l i a Ecc. 9: 1 from 112 ; see in no. IV. a (l ). It appears also
hi the feminine form, as !fyi from 9$1; sometimes it has a kind of
plural form, as niatf) Ezek. 36: 3 from &&'; ni sn from fan.
NOTE. The Hholem of the infinitive, future, and imperative, is
pure and mutable, and should always be written without Vav; though
that letter is sometimes inserted; as tta for T2 from TT2. ( 21.15 note.)
(c) The future with Hholem sometimes is written with Vav, as
l*ria*; but the Hholem is always pure and mutable, and when the
tone is removed from it, goes either into Qamets Hhateph, as
Ps. 67:2; or into Qibbuts, as Is. 27:11.
The future with Pattahh takes Tseri under the praeformative; as
1EP, on:;
&
l
s
i n: in pause Prov.27:17.
Sometimes the future takes Shureq, like that of verbs 19; as
} W for f l ^ from J31; f I V for f V from f3fc1 Sic. See below in
IV. a (2). For the Chaldee forms, like 10? &c. see below under IV. b.
(d) Imperative once with Pattahh, viz. Mlj? Num. 22:17 with par-
agogic M, for nsijD from 13j?. ( 45. 6 note 1.)
II. JViphal.
(a) In the praeter the usual final vowel is Pattahh, but Tseri and
Hholem are .also found; as n s b : ; lV$3 IS. 34:4. Hence, all the
endings of the praeter in regular verbs are also found here.
26
\
198 1 1 6 . VERBS AVIM DOUBLED; NOTES.
The vowel of the first syllable is usually Qamets, but others are
sometimes found; as bn:, 7133. This last is probably a Chaidaism;
comp. below under IV. 6 (2).
Second pers. fern. sing, nbns Ezek. 22: 16 for nt yns; *n2n: Jer.
22:23 f orni sn: .
(6) Infinitive absolute part with Hholem. Infinitive construct
with Pattahh and Tseri; as 2ri, O^n. The verb b^n has inf. const.
>nn.
(c) Future with Pattahh and Hholem; as from ; th? from
t3Qi. Other peculiarities of the future see below under IV. 6, c.
(d) Imperative with Hholem nann from
(e) Participle as 3C3; from praeter with Tseri as D&3.
III. HiphU and Hophal.
() The Tseri in HiphU is pure throughout, contrary to the
usage in regular verbs, which make their here immutable.
Hence this Tseri is not only mutable, but is not unfrequently exchang-
ed for Pattahh; as p^Sf, bpn, infinitive p n , participle baw.
A guttural or Resh in the last syllable may of course take Pattahh;
as
() Praeter b"*?!l Lam. 1:6 from bbt, the first syllable being
Chaidaism and the second like verbs 19; see below cnder no. IV. a, b.
Second person singular masculine Prov. 24: 28 instead of
rtfncn. Future with suffix *: 50* Ezek. 47: 2, the Tseri going into
Hhireq parvum; so 2 Sam. 22:43. For other anomalous forms,
aee below under IV. b.
(c) Hophal is not particularly anomalous, excepting that the * la
the first syllable is immutable, and stands instead of Qibbuts long; as
30tin for 2Dn, instead of the regular form axon (115. 4). This
and the corresponding case in Hophal of verbs 19, are instances
nti generis of the exchange ofQibbuts for Shureq.
IV. Particular anomalies in the preceding conjugations.
(A) Exchange of forms for those of verbs TP. From an inspection of
the paradigms of verbs 99 and 1;, it is evident that there are many
points of resemblance between them, and some entire coincidences.
In Hophal for instance, the forms in many cases coincide; and so in
the apocopated futures of Kal and Hiphil.
What happens so frequently in the common course of inflection
in respect to verbs 99 and 19, is by usage of the Hebrew extended
J
1 1 6 . VERBS AYIN DOUBLED ; NOTES.
occasionally beyond the common limits, and thus occasions some anom-
alies.
(1) Kal infinitive li aV for l i b from l i t ; i. e. the infinitive of 99
Is of the same form as it would be from a root 112 in verbs 19. So
}piri2 Prov. 8:29 for i pn2 from pH.
(2) In the future "pi? for *} V from ]31; f l l * for y i j from y s i ;
for TiT from i l t t j &c.
(3) Hiphil praeter tt from VVt (III. b). Infinitive Is. 33:1
for from can. Future from DJj'sD; with suffix ] n^n*}
for ]nii? from nnn Hab. 2:17. Comp. 45. 6 note 1.
NOTE. The student should particularly mark these anomalies in
respect to verbs 99 borrowing the forms of i s ; for otherwise he may
at times be greatly perplexed in regard to grammatical analysis. See
further on this subject in no. VII below.
(6) Chaldaicforms of verbs 99.
( l ) Instead of the long vowel under the praeformatives as in the
paradigm, the Chaldee has a short vowel followed by Daghesh forte;
as p i v instead of p*t\ This method the Hebrew has imitated in a
considerable number of verbs Ayin doubled; some following both this
method and that of the paradigm;.and some following exclusively the
Chaldee forms. These are exhibited below in the left hand column.
(45.6 note 2.)
Kal fut. instead of 2*0?
inn? l an* future with Pattahh.
- - Qptn fiinn future with Shureq; see a (2).
Niph. praet. Vns bro Hhireq mag. for Dagh. omitted.
part. D
n
1fi$5 D^IJj: Tseri for Dagh. omitted in fit.
Hiph. praet. "bltl see above in III. b.
fut i bf
- - Vn? bfi? Pattahh long for Dagh. omitted.
i ns? i nr?
Hoph. f ut nDi
n
Qjfcbuts short for Shureq.
- inf. 0i8?l DUJItt Qamets Hhateph for Shureq.
NOTE 1. In almost all the instances where the Chaldaic praeform-
atives occur in those forms which have an accession at the end, the
Daghesh of the final radical and the final vowel of the ground-form of
the verb, are dropped; as 1 an? in pause instead of the usual form 18*;
i ns? instead of inb?; I TT instead of &c. See below in d.
200 1 1 6 . VERBS AYIN DOUBLED; NOTES.
NOTE 2. In two forms, the Daghesh and preceding vowel remain;
as Hiph. fut. from MD, and Hoph. fut from nns.
The paradigm exhibits the usual form of the Chaldee future.
(2) The Chaldee does not insert the epenthetic i or % before the
sufformatives of verbs Ayin doubled. In imitation of the Chaldee us-
age, die Hebrew sometimes also omits those letters.
E. g. Kal praeter ^33an for 131720; for Niphal
praeter 2 pers. sing. fem. nbns for nibn3; Tnrns for ntens. In
the two last examples the Daghesh also is omitted in the final La-
medh and Nun. See above under II. a.
(c) Syriac forms of verbs $9. In Syriac, the active participle of
verbs Ayin doubled, instead of being regular as in Hebrew, inserts
Aleph in the place of the middle radical; as p8ti instead of In
Hebrew, there are a few verbs which imitate this in various moods
and tenses.
E. g. Kal participle with suffix ^p.bataj Jer. 30: 16 probably for
^"023 ; Niph. future Job 7: 6 instead of DOS?; Hiph. future
1 2K.3: 19 probably instead of na*3Dn; perhaps participle
instead of Vi Ot t , though it is usually and perhaps more prop-
erly referred to the root
((2) A peculiar anomaly is the omission of Daghesh in the final rad-
ical of the verb when there is any accession to the ground-form, and
dropping the vowel that precedes the same radical; compare above
in b ( l ) note 1.
Kal fut. Prb23 for ft Vis with ft paragogic.
? ;it
JlttV* IS?*
- inf. twnb dTanb b prep. 0 suffix-pronoun.
Niph. praet. rD03 ftsb: 2 pers. fem.
fut fta-ns 1 pers. pi. with ft paragogic.
A similar usage obtains also in the Chaldaic forms, for which see
above in b ( l ) notes.
V. Poel, Pool, Hithpoel.
(a) These conjugations are common in verbs sometimes instead
of Piel, Pual, and Hithpael, and sometimes along with them. The
latter often occur alone, and indeed are more frequent than the for-
mer ; see the general remarks below. Departures from the forms in
the paradigm are very rare, and arise chiefly from the practice of
1 1 6 . VERBS AYIN DOUBLED ; NOTES. 201
writing the Hholem either fully or defectively; as i rpo or l i b. The
form Til3 occurs Nah. 3:17 with Pattahh, probably on account of the
pause-accent. ( 60. 7. a 2.)
(b) Poal occurs in only three verbs 99 ; viz. bba, Poal part fem.
ttbbnaa Is. 9:3 j *na, Poal part plur. fem. rri -naa IK. 7: 9; b\9,
Poal bte Lam. 1: 12.
(c) Hithpoel is declined after the model of Poel, the r>S"t be-
ing treated as in Hithpael of regular verbs. In verbs with gutturals
and some others, the final vowel is Pattahh; as nnt>, Hithpoel fut
rimn^in for nnt onn ( 80. 2. a). So "rmna Ps. 20: 9.
NOTE. For the names of these conjugations in the lexicons, see be-
low in no. VII. d.
VI. Pilpel, Polpal, Hithpalpal
(a) These sometimes occur in place of the preceding conjugations,
and in a few instances co-exist with them. There are few departures
from the forms in the paradigm. The verb bbj? has bj3 Ecc. 10: 10
with final Pattahh, probably on account of the pause-accent ( 60.7.a 2.)
(b) Polpal occurs in only one verb 92, vi z. , Pilpel 9 w?, Polpal
9V9Z3 from which comes fut 2 per. plur. masc. in pause ns'iiyiun Is.
- -r t * * * -i ri i
66: 12.
(c) Hithpalpal is declined after the model of Pilpel, the ntt being
treated as in Hithpael and Hithpoel. Thus bb* has Hithpalpal 3 pers.
plur. iba^ann; has Hithpalpal future with final Pattahh
on account of the Resh. The participle has final Tseri, as rrart^na
2 Sam. 15:28 from ntt.
* *
NOTE. For the names of these conjugations in the lexicons, see be-
low in no- VII. d.
VII. General remark9 on verbs Ayin doubled.
(a) Inasmuch as the two classes of verbs 99 and "is are subject to
irregularities arising from their middle radical, which in the former is
contracted and in the latter quiescent, they have many resemblan-
ces in their forms and conjugations. Some of these are noted above
in no. IV. a. The conjugations Poel, Poal, and Hithpoel in verbs 99,
are in respect to form precisely similar to Polei, Polal, and Hithpolel
in verbs is. Hence, when there is a root in each class with the same
meaning, it is immaterial to which of them a given form is referred; as
Tito (V. a) may be either in Poel from "M3, or in Polel from "li:; the
meaning of these roots being for the most part synonymous. In this
2 0 2 117. VERBS A YIN VAV.
respect the lexicons differ; and if the student cannot find a given form
under a root 99, he has only to turn to the corresponding root in
verbs 19.
(6) The whole number of verbs, ranked by the best lexicogra-
phers under class 99, is one hundred and twenty four. Of these, twenty
six have one or more of the conjugations Piel, Pual, Hithpael, without
any of the unusual ones; twenty have one or more of the conjugations
Poel, Poal, Hithpoel, without any of Piel &c. eleven have one or more
of both Piel kc. and Poel &c. ten have one or more of the conjuga-
tions Pilpel, Polpal, Hithpalpal, without any of those above mentioned;
two have one or more of these latter conjugations along with Piel
fee. and three have them along with Poel &c. There remain then
fifty two verbs of this class, which are found only in one or more of
the usual conjugations Kal, Niphal, Hiphil, Hophal. Of all these
verbs many are found only once, and few are of frequent occurrence.
(c) There are seven verbs which have ft repeated for their two last
radicals. In two of these verbs, viz. ftftb and ftftJD, final n has Mappiq,
and they are classed with verbs 99; where they are found in Hithpal-
pal only. In the other five the final n is quiescent, and these are class-
ed with verbs ft? quiescent ( 122). The verb bb* is declined only
as a verb Pe Yodh; see 111. II; b note.
(d) The lexicons exhibit great irregularity in the mode of de-
signating the unusual conjugations, both in these verbs and in verbs
Ayin Fov. In some they are all considered as coming under Piel, Pual,
and Hithpael; in others they are marked as Pilel, Pulal, Hithpalel;
and in others still, they have both designations, and very seldom the
proper one. In assigning to such forms their proper appellations, the
student must therefore be guided entirely by their appearance and
characteristic marks, as described in 81.
117. Irreg, verbs; verbs Ayin Fav,
1. The ir r egular ities of ver bs Ayin Vav ar ise f r om
contr action, and ar e occasioned by the peculiar char acter
of the middle radical Vav, which inclines to quiesce in all
possible cases.
Her e, as in ver bs the contr acted f or m is gen-
i i 7. VERBS A YIN VAV.
2 0 3
er ally utter ed by the aid of the f ir st and last r adicals
and the f inal vowel of the gr ound-f or m; in which vowel
Vav becomes quiescent. In or der to e(Fect this quies-
cence in dif f er ent vowels, and in consequence of its r elative
situation in dif f er ent conjugations and tenses, the Vav as-
sumes a var iety of f or ms; and in some cases would seem
to be wholly dr opped.
E. g. D for 0 3 n a for n j a ; H k for from SlK (niit);
D^pa for Dij?3 ; for fee.
In accounting for the anomalies of this species of verbs, the stu-
dent must consider that the final vowel, with which by the preceding
rule the contracted form would properly be uttered, is often hetero-
geneous in respect to the middle radical Vav (23. 2); and therefore
to obtain quiescence^ either Vav must change in order to become ho-
mogeneous with the vowel, or the vowel must change in order to be-
come homogeneous with Vav ( 48.2). Both of these methods are
employed in different forms of this class of verbs.
Thus in the praeter, instead of the regular form dig, the contrac-
ted form D is used, which in theory is equivalent to ; L e. the
Vav in j? being a feeble sound and the tone being wholly on the
last syllable, by the usual tendency of the language to contract the
pronunciation of words, the last vowel came to be uttered as if it
stood under the first radical, and the Vav became quiescent In order
to effect this, it was considered as accommodating itself to the vowel
which was thus made to precede it; which in this example is Pattahh.
Consequently, in theory Vav here becomes Aleph, which however Is
never written, except in one instance; for which see the notes in the
next section. Its influence however remains in changing the vowel
in which it thus quiesces into Qamets, which is hence impure and im-
mutable. See below in no. 7 note 2.
So in na for r na, Vav in theory becomes Yodh ; so that HQ is
equivalent to rpzg; which, however, is never fully written.
The participle active Dj appears to be derived from the obsolete
participial form b&j? ; as Dig, D. (90. 1. a.)
In Niphal we have Otoa instead of the regular fonn &Jpa or Dips;
2 0 4 1 1 7 . VERBS A YIN VAV.
in which case the vowel is accommodated to the Vav, and becomes
homogeneous with i t
In the Hiphil form for the sound of the Vav goes in-
to that of the *- and prolongs it; as appears from its being retained in
flexion out of the third person.
One or the other of these methods of accommodation, enables us
to account for all the phases which verbs assume.
2. Contr action is excluded in the f ollowing cases.
() When the middle r adical Vav has a Daghesh
f or te in it, char acter istic of conjugation.
E. g. Piel l i s from l i s ; -nj? from But even here, Vav
is sometimes changed to Yodh in order to be homogeneous with the
preceding vowel; n instead of ann from aW; D*j5 instead of
Hi j? from D5p.
() When the ver b has He quiescent f or its f inal
r adical, the middle r adical Vav is r egular thr oughout
The reason of this is, that irregularities occasioned by different let-
ters never appear in immediate succession.
NOTE. A few verbs of this class are regular in their inflection;
for which see 118. VI. b.
3. The vowel in which Vav quiesces, is of cour se
impur e and immutable; as Dip, Dip &c.
But the apocopated future and imperative of Kal and Hiphil have
a pure final vowel; as Dp*, dp; Dp^, DJ?H; where Hholem and Tseri are
pure and mutable, as is seen when tone is removed; as Dj?*
r
2 &c.
This does not result from any change of the immutable Shureq or
Hhireq magnum in the ground-form, but from adopting an appropriate
vowel in the apocopated forms, in order to distinguish them from the
usual ones; Hholem and Tseri pure being shorter than Shureq and
Hhireq magnum. ( 52.6.)
4. In the pr aeter of Niphal and Hiphil, in those per sons
of the ver b which take suf f or matives beginning with a conso-
nant, viz. D, D, DPI, ID, 13, an epenthetic *1 is inser ted be-
1 1 7. VERBS A YIN VAV. 2 0 5
tween the suf f or mative and the ground-f orm of the ver b,
as in ver bs J$yin doubled.
In the f utur e of Kal, an epenthetic is gener ally in-
ser ted bef or e the suf f ix nD, viz. in the second and thir d
per sons plural f eminine.
E. g. Niphal praeter nifalp a forn&Vj?3; Hiph. praet. VTb*pH for
ijaajprt; Kal future n r b i p n for n: i pn &c.
In the future of Kal and praeter of Hiphil, the epenthetic sylla-
bles are in a few instances omitted, for which see the notes in the
following section. The praeter and imperative of Kal, the future of
Niphal and Hiphil, and all the forms of Hophal, never receive the
epenthesis in question.
5. Those f or ms of ver bs 15? whose suf f or matives be-
gin with a consonant, and which yet do not take the
epenthetic *1 or , ar e altogether peculiar and dif f er -
ent f r om most other f or ms in these ver bs.
E. g. nfcfc, 'rjaj? &c. with a short vowel in the contracted form.
Imper. fem. plur. naJDjJ with Hholem pure. Hiphil f ut iiaafcn with
Tseri pure; though sometimes as naa^pn with Hhireq magnum. So al-
so Hophal generally; asj aj j m, suap^tt &c.
NOTE. The above forms exhibit an anomaly for which no gramma-
rian has yet been able to account. In Djjsttfi &c. the Vav of the
original root appears to be wholly thrown out The same anomaly
prevails in Syriac and Arabic. We may perhaps consider Hophal as
borrowing its forms from verbs 99. Comp. 116. III. c.
6. The pr aef or matives and letter s char acter istic of the
sever al conjugations, wher e they would r egular ly have un-
der them short vowels, take long ones in these ver bs, as in
ver bs 23?. These long vowels, however , with the excep-
tion of Shur eq, ar e pur e and of cour se mutable.
E. g. &5ip2 instead of for which form see no. 7 below; Hiph-
il instead of ; Hophal OjHH instead of Oipii &c.
NOTE. The long vowel in the first syllable results from the usual
short vowel being thrown into a simple syllable. ( 55. 1.)
27
2 0 6
1 1 7 . VERBS A YIN VAV.
7. Her e, as in ver bs 77, many of the or iginal f or ms
f r om which the contr acted f or ms appear to be der ived*
ar e such as would be unusual f or ms in r egular ver bs.
E. g. Kal inf. Dip from instead of D"ip>.
fut. Dip? di p: riip\
part. Dp di p D^p.
Niph. praet Dipa Dipa Dipa.
NOTE 1. It will be seen on slight inspection, that where the
vowel of the contracted form is Hholem impure or Shureq, the Vav
of the root remains (although quiescent), because it is homogeneous
with these vowels, as Dip, Dip &c. But where the verb must be ut-
tered with a heterogeneous vowel, Vav or its equivalent is not writ-
ten, as Dp, D^prj; sometimes it wholly falls out, as &c. See
above in no. 5.
NOTE 2. The contraction of this class of verbs cannot well be ac-
counted for, on the supposition that the Hebrews pronounced the Vav
(as we do) hard like v. But if, like the Arabians, they pronounced it as
, then most of the contractions can easily be accounted for. Thus
Dip qdrwdm goes easily into Dp. qdm ; Dip^ y&q-vum into Dip? yd-
q&m,/ D ^ f t kiq-wim into D^pH hi-qim; Dipn kuq-wdm into Dp ft
hd-qdm &c.
8. In these ver bs alone, occur the unusual conjuga-
tions Polel, Polal, and Hithpolel (81. 4, 5). They ar e
used instead of Piel, Pu&l, and Hithpael; though the latter
sometimes appear in these ver bs, but ar e seldom used in
conjunction with the f or mer . The conjugations Pilpel,
Polpal, and Hithpalpal, ar e also ver y r ar ely f ound.
See the general remarks at the end of the next section.
NOTE. The forms under which verbs 19 are noted in the lexicons,
as &i p, Sltt) &c. are the infinitive construct This is chosen in pref-
erence to the praeter, because it contains the three radicals of the
verb, while the praeter exhibits only two; the latter being always
written as t ap, fee. ( 76.)
1 1 8 . VERBS ATI* VAV; NOTES.
s o t
118. Irreg. verbs ; notes on verbs Ayin Vav.
Changes of the vowels in declension. Wherever Shureq occurs in the
course of flexion, it is often written by long Qibbut* ( 21.18); as im-
perative Di p and Op ; future SVJT and SEP; l aittT and i 2UP Sic.
Qamets and Tseri under the praeformatives and letters character-
istic of the conjugations, are pure and mutable in these verbs, as in
verbs 99; and are therefore dropped as usual when the tone is mov-
ed forward; as Kal f ut tt^aipn ; Hiphil , n i a ^ n ;
part. CPp.tt,
I. Kal
() Praeter once Dfitg Hos. 10: 14; fem. 2 pers. once Ezek.
46: 17 for ; 2 pers. plur. once Calais Mai. 3:20 for DPOD.
Forms imitating verbs 99 are T? Zech. 4: 10 for TS; HD twice for
fiD, probably on account of the guttural; plur. 3 pers. twice i nv for
Verbs final Tseri are exhibited in the paradigm. The forms nb
>na &c. are by contraction for Sic. for which see 95.
3. c. The 2 pers. fem. sing, and both the second persons plural of
na do not occur.
Verbs final Hholem are sometimes written with Vav; as
3)is; but this is not usual ( 117. 7 note 1). They retain the Hholem
in flexion, as 3 fem. n v i z ; 2 fem. n*J)s; 1 pers. ^nufta; 3 plur.
V2 and WHS; 1 plur. Ilitis &c.
() The infinitive construct has Hholem where the praeter has it;
as "PN, ujis&c. The verb na has both rria and ma . The usual
vowel is Shureq. The infinitive absolute uniformly takes Hholem;
and once has the form SjilN Is. 28: 28 as if from a root \tHK, though
it is joined with the future of s n i . A form like those of verbs *9 is
V| Deut 25: 4.
(c) The future commonly takes Shureq, as in the paradigm. Fu-
ture O occurs in Sic. The form Irian has Tseri under
the praeformative, as if contracted from the regular form
In the second and third persons plufal feminine, the epenthetic \
is sometimes omitted; as nai'&n 1 Sam. 7: 14 or JS&n twice Ezek.
16: 55, where also occurs the full form ftvfygta. These defective
8 0 8 1 1 8 . VERBS AYIN VAV ; NOTES.
forms would seem to come from the apocopated future. Sometimes
the Yodh alone is omitted, as nsrj i an Ezek. 13: 19. ( 46. 6 note 2.)
The apocopated future takes Hhoiem pure, as E3p? (117. 3); and
fe very rarely found as or tDijP. In this latter case, the Vav is
a mere fulcrum, and the Hhoiem remains mutable (21. 15 note).
When the tone is removed, the Hhoiem goes into Qamets Hhateph ; as
^1?/^ i Ks-asjn &c. With a guttural or Resh, the apocopated future
sometimes takes Pattahh when the tone is shifted; as na3, 'iinrn Job
31: 6 for Cftrn : *10* &c.
T- * * T*
(J) The imperative has the forms t ai p, C3J5, n n ; with ft par-
agogic ft*p,. ftSTO, ; apocopated b' Josh. 5:2 with Hhoiem
pure.
(e) Participle plural once 2K. 16:7. The formQKtt (like
praeter tSKj?) is used several times in Ezekiel. The verb jsib has
once ft2b Zech. 5:4, and once plural O^ b Neh. 13: 21.
Verbs final Tseri and Hhoiem retain these vowels in the participle;
as nc, c r a i a .
II. Niphal.
() The praeter is once "WII Zech. 2:17. The student will ob-
serve, that out of the third person the vowel in the contracted form
of the verb is Shureq, and not Hhoiem as in the third person. Shureq,
or its equivalent long Qibbuts, is adopted instead of Hhoiem because it
is rather shorter, and therefore serves to abbreviate the word in pro-
nunciation, when the tone is moved forwards ( 52. 4. a). Sometimes
the Hhoiem remains; as 3iviXB3.
() The infinitive construct is formed with Shureq; as si^nft.
(c) Participle plural Ex. 14:3 with Qibbuts for Shureq,
instead of Ea'Oiai) with Hhoiem.
III. Hiphil.
(a) The praeter is sometimes defectively written, as l ?f t Gen.43:
3. The epenthetic i is occasionally omitted and the forms construct-
ed as in Kal; as nof f t Ex. 20:25 instead of i r i c^f t ; ^nbcni Jer.l6:13
instead of *n/iVt3ft; i soft 2 Chr. 29: 19 instead ofi:Vr:?ft. For forms
like t s naf t from n i s , see 95. 3. c.
( l ) A few forms, out of the third person, take Tseri instead of Hhireq
magnum; as rvib'lft Num. 31:28; ni a' Sn Deut 4:39 ; ^sibjift Mic.
5:4 &c. Hhateph Seghol is also found under the characteristic He ;
as ni Vcr r 1K. 8:18 &c.
1 1 8 . VERBS A YIN VAV ; NOTES. 2 0 9
(2) The verb D has the forms and the latter like verbs
99. The verb 9 n also has 9*j?3 and 2"in, the former like verbs 99
and the latter on account of the guttural. The verb niO has Hiphil
n*on and once rPDft Jer. 38:22, which is a Chaldee form ( 45. 6
note 2; comp. 116. IV. 6 1). The same verb has the feminine sin-
gular 1 K. 21: 26 instead of Snn^bn, as if from a root 99.
(3) Verbs 19 which have Ayin for the first radical, in those persons of
the praeter which receive the epenthetic % take the proper vowel
Pattahh under the characteristic He, instead of the usual Hhateph
Pattahh; as from 119, 2 pers. ni Vs n and ill' I9fi instead of nvpyn;
1 pers. ^nrTWn. So from "n9, 1 pers.^niS'Wi. The verbs H9 and
*119 are the only ones, which occur in the cases where the peculiarity
in question would be exhibited.
(b) Infinitive feminine from masc. Sp3tt. Infinitive absolute
"9H Gen. 43:3 on account of the guttural.
\e) Future once 13^? in Qeri Num. 14 : 36, a Chaldaism
( 116. IV. 6 1). Second pers. plur. fem. tt3a*?n Job 20:10; SiS^nn
Mic. 2: 12 for with \ epenthetic as in Kal, or it is perhaps
fut. Kal from a root DTT. (119. 5.)
The form Ecc. 12:5 is in some lexicons referred to the
root yi a, and in others to the root ygs.
The apocopated future takes final Tseri pure, as ; which when
the tone is retracted becomes Seghol, as Of t ni &
0,
With a gut-
tural or Resh the fut. apoc. sometimes takes Pattahh when the tone is
shifted, and thus exhibits occasionally the same forms as the fut. apoc.
in Kal; as 9nr i , ^5**2 &c.
(d) Imperative 2 K. 8: 6.
() Participle with Chaldee form rPD for rPOa; *pjga for pba.
IV. HophaL
Long Qibbuts is sometimes substituted for Shureq; as ma n for
i n a m; for &c. See at the beginning of this section, and
compare 116. III. c.
V. PoUl, Polal, Hithpolel.
() These conjugations occur in these verbs instead of PieJ, Pual,
Hithpael (81. 4,6). There are few (if any) departures from the
forms in the paradigms.
() Polal occurs in only four verbs, viz. bi n, l i s, fill, 313?; and
has only one or two forms in each.
(c) Hithpolel is declined after the model of Polel, the being
2 1 0
$ 1 1 8 . VERBS A YIN VAV ; IFOTW.
treated as in Hithpael of regular verbs. It sometimes takes Pattahh
in its final syllable, which in pause becomes Qamets; as f at enn Is. i :
3 from ' pa ( 119). So future Prov. 24: 3, also ]9^an Num.
21:27 with the second n assimilated. ( 80. 2. b.)
Participle fem. in pause nnj ai pna Job 20:27; pn& Ps.139:21
with Mem omitted, and prefix preposition. ( 95. 2. d, e.)
NOTE. These conjugations are often marked in the lexicons as
PUelf Puled, HithpaleL
V. Pilpel, Polpalf HithpalpaL
These conjugations occur a few times in these verbs, as well as
in verbs 99. ( 116. VI. 127. Par. XI.)
() Pilpel is found in only five verbs, viz. 91T, bits, bi s , *ni ,
ni p. In the latter it takes the form Num. 24:17 on account
of the Resh. So participle ^^9 Is. 22:5.
() Polpal is found only to bl 2, viz. Spers. plur. ibibfc 1 K. 20:27.
(c) Hithpalpal is found only in the verb bi n, Tiz. f ut 2 pers. fem.
bnbnnn Est. 4:4.
NOTE. For the names of these forms in the lexicons, see 116.
VII. d.
VI. General remark* on verba 19,
() Verbs 19 have in some of their forms a close resemblance to
verbs 99, so that the two classes sometimes interchange forms. On
this subject see 116. IV. a. The forms which the former borrow
from the latter have mostly been given above; as in no. I. a &c.
() The whole number of verbs ranked by the best lexicographers
under the class which has Van for the middle radical, is about one hun-
dred and forty. Of these one hundred and twenty two uniformly take the
contracted forms; thirteen are also verbs Mb, and therefore are not
contracted ( 117. 2. b)\ and sit others are not contracted, for
which no special reason can be assigned. These last are the follow-
ing, viz. 911,11H once Is. 29:22; ni9 (once n i 9 Is. 50:4 in anoth-
er meaning); rnat once Is. 42: 11; rn*l; 9itt only in Piel.
(c) Besides some of the verbs Fib and some of the above mention-
ed verbs regularly declined, there vrejbe verbs 19 which have the con-
jugation Piel, viz. dirt found only in Piel 2 pen. plur. masc. Dna*n Dan.
1: 10; 119, Piel 3 pen. plur. 1*119; bi 9, Piel f ut *119,
Piel *149; DID, Piel 0*P. The two last verbs are the only ones in
1 1 9 . VERBS A YIN YODH. 2 1 1
which Pkl and Pole] co-exist The verb "VI9 has the contracted forms
of Kal in one signification, and Piel in another quite different
(d) The verbs Kia, Mia, Kip are not reckoned in the above enn*
me ration. They have forms peculiar to themselves, for which see
124. 4.
119. Irrtg. verbs ; verbs Ay in Yodk.
1. Ther e ar e about twenty ver bs In Hebr ew,
most of whose f or ms in Kal come f r om r oots which have
Yodk f or the middle r adical.
2. The char acter istic of ver bs is their r etaining
the Yodh with a homogeneous vowel, in the inf initive con-
str uct, f utur e, and imper ative of Kal; as "pS, &c.
In other r espects and in all the other conjugations
the f or ms ar e entir ely the same as in ver bs Jlyin Vav.
This arises from the quiescence of the Yodh, and from its being
commuted for Vav wherever the vowels require the exchange.
(117. 1.)
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
3. The praeter of Kal is declined like verbs 19. Three forms on-
ly are found in which the Yodh is retained, viz. TpVa Dan. 9: 2;
nib*""} Job 33:13; with suffix to UP*? Jer. 16:16. The two first have
also forms like those of the paradigm.
4. The infinitive absolute is sometimes without Vav; as 3").
5. The futures of Kal and Hiphil, whenever both occur, have
the same form and can be distinguished only by their meaning. The
form Mic. 2:12 is for or see 118. III. e.
The apocopated future is like that of Hiphil in verbs 19; as
&c. With a guttural as r r p from n"
,
~) &c. With the tone retract-
ed, b^ni &c. Compare the forms in 118. III. c.
6. The participle is like that of verbs 19. For nab and ta^a^
see 118.1, e. Two verbs in Kal make the participle regular, and
are found only there; viz. part, often; *9, part hi
Oeri 1 Sam. 18: 9.
2 1 2 120. VERBS LAMEDH ALEPH.
7. Four verbs are *9 and fib, viz. TPtt, !"Pn; !Tj5, imper. l
n
p
Jer. 25:27; fut. fern, in pause Deut 32:18 for the
apocopated form, like "WJ.
NOTE. For the other conjugations, see the notes on verbs 19 in
118. As a denominative verb, there appears once future Hithpael
in pause Josh. 9: 4 for l ^St n*!. ( 80. 2. a.)
General remarks on verbs **9.
8. There are very few verbs which are exclusively of the form ^9,
even in those parts of Kal which are characteristic of that form.
Most verbs "9 have also forms as from a root 19; as inf. "pi? and p b ;
and OliD &c. This seems to have arisen from the great facility
i*nd consequent frequency with which Yodh and Vav were inter-
changed.
9. Most of the verbs which Gesenius has ranked under the class
*9, were by the older grammarians and lexicographers assigned to the
class 19; and their forms which retain the Yodh were considered as
belonging to Hiphil. The form pl> for instance was considered as
the infinitive of Hiphil, by apkaeresis for Hence, if the student
cannot find in his lexicon a given form under a root fc, he will be
likely to meet with it under a root 19, and vice versa.
120. Irreg. verbs ; verbs Lamtdh Aleph.
1. The ir r egular ities of ver bs Lamedh Aleph ar e oc-
casioned by the natur e of the Aleph, which, when it stands
at the end of a ver b, is always quiescent.
Wher ever the f inal vowel would r egular ly be Pat-
tahh, it is lengthened into Qamets ( 55.3). Other vow-
els remain unchanged.
E.g. instead oft t SB; Pual instead of ; Kal inf.
part'fiWtto-
. NOTE. The vowels in which final Aleph thus quiesces remain mu-
table, inasmuch as the quiescence is accidental. Thus fem.
; J6, fem. ; i n g , with suffix &c. ( 52.3.)
2. When the f inal vowel is alr eady r ender ed impur e
1 2 1 . VERBS LAMEDH ALEPH ; NOTES.
by the quiescence of Vav or Yodh, Aleph appear s to be
in otio. ( 23. 6.)
E. g. Kal infinitive absolute a ten; Hiphil fiPXntt.
3. In those per sons of the ver b which take suf f or ma-
tives beginning with a consonant, Aleph continues to qui-
esce in the f ollowing manner .
(a) In the pr aeter of Kal in ver bs or iginally f inal
Pattahh, it quiesces in Qamets ; but in the pr aeter of all
the other conjugations, in Tseri.
. g. 2 pers. Kal flfi&n, plural laijKttn ; Niphal flKajna; Piel
nt f s n; Hiphil nat snn &c.
(b) In the f utur e and imper ative of all the conjugar
tions, it quiesces in SeghoL
E. g. Kal imperative plur. fern, nati on, future iliJOgnp; Piel fu-
ture Si3K3$nn &c.
4. In those per sons which take suf f or matives be-
ginning with a vowel, Aleph is moveable and r egular .
E. g. Second person feminine ttfitSn; imperative fem. *MSn &c.
NOTE. The radical Aleph, when quiescent, is sometimes omitted in
writing; as ' n s n Num. 11: 11; T ^ n Job 32: 18 &c.
121. Irreg verbs ; notes on verbs Lamedh Aleph,
I . Kal.
() In the praeter, verbs final Tseri ( 76. 2) retain the Tseri
through their flexion; as &c. Once Dl^ifV Josh.4:24.
The third person feminine sometimes take the Syriac form with
final n instead of n ; as nf in^ Is. 7:14 instead of &c.
Forms defectively written; as^fikn &c. see in 120. 4 note.
() Infinitive construct with fem. ending ST-, as FJNV, rtfiJDrt,
Ttttno. So with Syriac ending and prefix preposition for
n
*P.p.i- from Wig. ( 47. 2 note.)
Infinitive const fem. with Segholate form, as nttbn for rittbn *
&c. In Ezek. 17:9 is found the form nteti&n, which is
' 2 8
214 1 2 1 . v e r b s l a m e d h a l e p h ; n o t e s .
the Aramaean infinitive from Mips. Infinitive masculine sometimes de-
fectively written as Gen.20:6 foriOtsn ; with suffix "I'nKOn Ezek.
33:12. like a verb rib. See in no. IV below.
(c) The future A is the only one in this class of verbs; the regu-
lar Pattahh being of course prolonged into Qamets.
(d) Imperative yeru Ps. 34:10 for IN"]"] yir-Nt2; 2 pers. plur.
fem. Ex. 2: 20, by a kind of apocope for rnanj ? ( 92. 3 note).
The form n3
n
8*X Cant. 3:11 is for from a verb belonging
to the first cias^of verbs ( 109.)
(e) Participle fem. nKSto for n&Xto; defectively written for
Deut. 28:67. With suffix DfcHi Neh. 6: 8 for DapS. ( 47. 2.)
II. Niphal.
(a) The praeter 3 pers. fem. sometimes takes the Syriac form;
as NABC: Ps. 118:23 for JtaVD: &C.
: v :
Forms defectively written as Ont33 Lev. 11:43 &c. Compare
120. 4 note.
(6) infinitive absolute NHp
t
3 2 Sam. 1: 6.
(c) Participle plural ta'WfcUD Ezek. 20: 30,
Josh.l0:17; probably from obsolete forms &c. ( 139. 3 note 3.)
III. Piel and Hiphil.
(ct) Piel infinitive n a n d See no. IV below.
(b) Praeter of Hiphil sometimes defectively written; as "'Dntl
2 K. 13: 6 for KWi *
(c) Infinitive also
n
t3nn Jer. 32:35 for
IV. Exchange of forms for those of verbs Tib.
() As to VOWELS ; as Kal 3 Ps. 119:101 for ; partici-
ple Ecc. 7: 26 for NSta. Piel Jer. 51:34 for fcVtf ; Ps.
143: 3 ; 2 K. 2:21; future 8733? Job 39: 24 ; infinitive
2 Chr. 36 : 21; nafog Ex. 31:51. Hiptiil Kbsn Is. 28: 29 for fiTrcn;
3 pers. fem. with n paragogic nnfcznn Josh. 6: 17. Hithpael infini-
tive n'flUsn for N2nn Zech. 13: 4. ( 80. 2. c. 95.3. d, e.)
() As to CONSONANTS, viz. exchange of final N for H; as Kal imper.
H61 Ps. 60: 4 for ; ttO: Ps 4: 7 for 803 = 8il)3. Niphal infini-
T 5 t j ' t ; T j r 1
M
*
tive absolute rtEP3 Jer. 49: 10 for frt2n3 ; infinitive construct Jer.
19:11 for Piel future Job 8: 21 for
(c) As to both VOWELS and CONSONANTS ; as Kal 2 pers. fem. n3t
Ruth 2: 9 for Ezek. 28: 16 for li&D, and so 1 Sam.
J
T
>
1
7 .
6: 10; future Job 5: 18 for 5l3N^n; participle feminine
1 22. VERBS LAMEDII HE, 215
Ecc. 10: 5 for instead of nttX*; plural with suffix Is. 29: 7
for participle passive Ps. 32: 1 for Kl&S. Nipkal n^aa
Jer. 26:9 for naas ; la^ataa Job 18: 3 for i 3Kao:; 2 pers. fem.
rtnsna Jer. 61: 9 for future HZnl Ps. 73: 10 for 1NX73* ;
Pitifuture nB*V Jer. 8: 11 for INC'V ; Hiphil with suffix Tjrpsar. 2
Sam. 3: 8 for i pn s a n ; participle Ezek. 8: 3 for K^apa. Hith-
pael n^aann 1 Sam. 10:6 for nst sann; infinitive r na: nn l Sam.10:13
for fctaann from fctaa. See also in a.
" I Tf
NOTE 1. The foregoing exchanges seem to arise from the com-
mon tendency of both final Aleph and final He to quiescence; and from
the close resemblance which exists between the two classes of verbs
ttb and Tib on account of this tendency. In some cases there are
corresponding verbs in each class, with an id -ntity of meaning. Thus
Nnj? and H"ij? to meet; ttbs and nbB to be great or wonderful, &c.
In Chaldee and Syriac, verbs ftb and rib fall into one class; and in
Hebrew they would seem to have been tending to a similar result.
NOTE 2. For the forms of the doubly irregular verbs fit'IJA, fitia,
tria, ^p, see 124 and Par. XVII, XIX.
122. Irreg, verbs ; verbs Lamedh He,
1. Under the gener al appellation of ver bs Lamedh He
ar e comprised what wer e originally two distinct classes of
ver bs. Of these, one was numerous and terminated in f i-
nal Yodh, as ^3; the other contained but f ew ver bs and
terminated in f inal Vav, as
* "V
But as the Hebr ews avoided ending a word with
Yodh or Vav as moveable consonants, they substituted
f or them in these ver bs a quiescent H, in all cases wher e
the ver b would end with a radical letter , excepting in the
passive par ticiple. This change led also to a cor r es-
ponding change in the f inal vowels of the ver b.
In this way the two species of verbs, which originally were *b and
l b, were brought to assume the same form, and became so blended to-
gether as to be generally undistinguishable in their inflection. In Ara-
bic, they are sometimes distinctly marked, but in most cases flow togeth-
216
122. VERBS LAMEDH HE.
eras in Hebrew. The only mode of ascertaining, in general, what vert*
were and what were Vb, is by examining the words derived from
them, many of which retain the original final radical; as from
Hj33 = "3; 12^ from rrsj? = &LC. One verb only retains the
radical Vav in its inflection, viz. praet 1 pers.
NOTE. Verbs rib with Mappiq are declined as verbs Lamedk guttu-
ral, the moveable n being the original radical.
2. Thr oughout all the conjugations, f inal H in the sev-
er al tenses and moods quiesces in the f ollowing vowels.
() In the pr aeter it quiesces in Qamets; as Kal
nVa, Niphai nVa.3, Hipha r 6 ) n &c.
() In the f utur e and par ticiple, in Seghol; as Kal
r h v , Niphai r bv &c. Kal par t nH &c.
(C) In the imper ative, in Tseri; as nV*[, nV? &C.
(d) In the inf initive absolute, in Hholem; as r ib5 &c.
() The inf initive constr uct takes the f eminine f or m
n
4
! f or r n ; as f or &c. ( 47. 4 note.)
3. Bef or e the suf f or matives beginning with a conso-
nant, viz. r% n, if ], DP, ]r i, ID, H3, the original r adical
Yodh appear s and quiesces in the f ollowing vowels.
(a) In the pr aeter of Kal, it quiesces in Hhdreq
magnum, as ; but in the pr aeter of all the other
conjugations, in Tseri; as Piel &c.
(b) In the f utur e and imper ative of all the conjuga-
tions, it quiesces in Seghol; as &c.
The original Vav is changed into Yodh in order to admit of this
quiescence ( 48. 2. 6); so that the two original classes of verbs are
here ^indistinguishable. See no. 1 above.
The quiescence takes place in order to avoid ending a syllable
with a moveable Vav or Yodh ; as n ^ a instead of P? r*. ( 48.)
4. Bef or e the suf f or matives beginning with a vowel,
viz. *1, *__, the radical Yodh or Vav f alls away.
1 2 3 . VERBS LAMEDH HE; NOTES. 217
E. g. *b* for vbs ; ""b* for "^b*. la pause the Yodh Is restored;
as^PbJP f or i ba\ ( 123. L h.)
In the same manner the Yodh, or rather He, with its vowel uni-
formly falls away before suffix-pronouns; as ^b* = Tprtba. ( 126 a.)
NOTE. In the 3 pers. sing.feminine, final n is changed into n before
the sufformative r i - ; as Jibs, rmbi . ( 40. 2.)
5. In all the conjugations the f utur e of ten takes an
apocopated f orm ; and in sever al, the imper ative also.
See in the next section, and compare the Arabic futures, which
uniformly take an apocopated form.
123. Irreg. verbs ; notes on verbs Lamedh He.
I. Kal.
() In the praeter 3 pers. sing. fem. by an Aramaeism the sufform&-
tive is sometimes omitted, as nip? Lev. 25: 21 for (comp.
121.1. a). First person by Syriasm Vj a i n Ezek. 43: 27; so also
plur. 1 pers. Jer. 3:22 for Once with final Vav retained
and moveable, viz. "niirtt) Job 3:26. ( 122. 1.)
The forms are sometimes defectively written; as for TP 3 a.
In pause &c. the Yodh is restored in forms where it commonly falls out;
see below in h.
() The infinitive absolute sometimes has the form ibs ; as
Gen. 26: 28; 13a Is. 30: 19. Twice it takes final n like the construct,
viz. rriroa Is. 22:13; nifiO Is. 42:20 Qeri. Like verbs Kb, as fiW;3
Jer. 23:39.
Infinitive construct S"i2jJ> Prov. 16 16; with suffix Ex. 18: 18.
With feminine form and Vav retained Eck28
:
17; by Syriasm
n : n Ezek. 21:15 for ^
(c) The future sometimes imitates verbs fcfe; ( l ) in the final v<m-
eh, as 1 pers. rwiifij, 2 pers. fib^n ; (2) in the final consonants, as
&c. Comp. 121. IV.' By Syriasm r nnn, for rqtt'n
CTn for nj t n Jer. 3: 6 &c. For the appearance of the radical Yodh
in pause &c. see below in h.
The 3 pers. plur. fem. is written defectively in t"l2^*n Job 5:12;
with Daghesh euphonic Judg. 5: 29; and also with both Da-
gbesh and Yodh Mic. 7: 10.
218
1 2 3 . VERBS LAMDH HE; NOTES.
(rf) The apocopated future occurs only in those forms which end
with the radical iT. It is made by dropping both the final ft and the
final vowel. The table below exhibits the mode of apocope and the
forms; the first Hebrew column containing the full forms; the second
exhibiting their appearance after the vowel and final rt are drop-
ped ; and the third displaying them as they usually appear, viz. with
a furtive vowel ( 59. 2. 6). There are some other forms in use, with
an anomalous punctuation and without any furtive vowel. These are
also exhibited in (2).
(l) Forms with a furtive vowel.
Singular 3 pers.
2
1
3
2
3
3
Plural
igutt.
ftVin
rnc:
B gutt
rio
b:p
bVn
DC 3
I t *
s s *
3?nn
I :
"in;
t rt*
sronn
nipj
(2) Forms without a furtive vowel.
Praeter future Jisa* apoc. j an
rrri rrrr
mn n*rr*
^1, Job 27: 8.
~*22, 1^2-
l i b"
**.2
*nrn
"113*2, pause bn * i.
TPS Via, m
*n\ Tn. vm.
inn
T T
rins
sin-I
r n n
T
n a b
*
s-ptti
*r j " !
*ny.
-l> -A*'
W
Job 31: 27.
fi<*V", fit mo<to;alsotf*\*l.
11*1
: : -
2i*2
v
jn Deut. 32:18.
NOTE I . The apocopated forms of I"PN and RRN above, are made
by transferring the vowel of the praeformative to the first radical for
the sake of euphony, and in order that the middle radical Yodh may
quiesce; as for *fT| &c. The form fiWFP Ecc. 11:3 is a Syriasm
for irp the apocopated form of r nn; from rPH = rrrr. Comp. no.
VI. b. 96. 1. c.
NOTE 2. The apocopated forms usually take Vav conversive, but
not always. The Vav is also very rarely found with the full form ;
as n?31 2K. 1: 10; H*13*1 2 K. 6: 23.
For such forms as DV &c. from iit33, see 124. 3. e.
1 2 3 . VERBS LAMEDH HE ; NOTES.
219
(e) Imperative in pause ^ 2 &c. see below in h.
{ / ) The participle active in a few cases takes a feminine form
like Ft*V^a, as if from a masculine form "Via or^bi a like ( 96.
V. a). E. g. Ps. 128:3; Lam. 1:16; plural rri*ry>K Is.
41:23 from ttnfit &c. Masculine form with suffix in pause Is.
22:11 for nicy; see below in h.
v
7
i
(g) The participle passive of verbs originally "ib sometimes re-
tains final Vav moveable; as plural riiTO: Is. 3: 16; rnvsy 1 Sam. 25:
18. This form appears only in Kethib; the Qeri has rri^no: and
Here belong also the forms vs? Job 41: 25 and IBS Job 15:22;
probably for TIUJ? and TJD2C. Some manuscripts read as in the
paradigm.
{h) Yodh radical restored. In all those forms of Kal which
usually drop the Yodh, the radical Yodh is restored and its preced-
ing vowel restored and prolonged, when a pause-accent falls on the
last syllable that contains a radical, or when a paragogic Nun is added;
as praeter VOH instead of 1DP, original form like
a
Vt3J5; fu-
ture VbST for for imperative 5 f o r 152;
participle fem. for "Ob Cant. 1: 7. The same rule extends
to the other conjugations.
With the paragogic Nun, the preceding vowel is sometimes not
restored; as pa'-P Deut.3:13; 7^- p Ps.36:9 for &c.( 20.18.)
II. Mphal.
(a) The praeter, out of the third person, sometimes takes Hhireq
instead of Tseri, like Kal; as W^aa 1 Sam. 14:8 &c. Comp. below
in Piel. In pause the radical Yodh is restored; see no. I. h.
{b) Infinitive absolute nibaa 2 Sam. 6: 20 contrary to analogy;
Jer. 49: 10 for risn:. Infinitive construct rri ann and rifitnn
Judg. 13: 21 &c.
(c) The future in its apocopated form merely drops the final He
and final vowel, but suffers no other change; as for fibs*!.
(d) Participle fibfji like verbs Kir, for Comp. 121. IV. a.
III. Piel and Pual.
() The praeter of Piel, out of the third person, sometimes takes
Hhireq instead of Tseri, like Kal and Niphal; as j3 Ps. 40: 2;
n ^ a Is. 57: 8. Third pers. with suffix once ^auja Gen. 41: 51 for^: JM.
() Infinitive construct fis? Ex.22:22 like verbs Kb; see no.V below.
(c) The future sometimes also takes final Tseri instead of Seghol,
330
1 3 3 . VERBS LAMEDH HE; NOTES.
like verbs Kb, as nlran Lev. 18: 7; see no. V below. With suffix
wfyi } Hoe. 6: 2 with final Yodh radical.
In the apocopated future, the final He and final vowel fall away
as in the other conjugations; and hence the Daghesh of the middle
radical also falls away, because the middle radical then stands at the
end of a word; as b^ l for ( 45. 3). Sometimes the Pattahh
is prolonged into Qamets; as i r r i 1 Sam. 21: 13. (55.2.)
(d) The apocopated form of the imperative Is like Dft Am. 6: 10
for non. So in Hithpael bnnn 2 Sam. 13:5.
(e) The final Yodh radical Is restored in pause and with paragogic
Nun; see no. I. h. Thus, imperative plural Prov. 26: 7; future
Is. 40: 18; with suffix and pause-accent Ex. 15:5 with
Qibbuts for Shureq ( 21.18). In all these cases, the Daghesh of
the middle radical is omitted ( 95. 3. d). Participle with suffix in
pause Hoe. 2: 16 for ftncn.
IV. Hiphiland HophaL
() Praeter of Hiphil out of the third person with Hhireq, as
2 K. 17:26; n^b^n Ex. 33:1; compare Kal, Niphal, and Piel. The 3
pers. sing. fem. has sometimes the Aramaean termination, as in Kal; as
n s n n Lev. 26:34 for ; n^brj Ezek. 24:12 for iTOKbn from
inKb. So Hophal nbatl Jer. 13:19; comp. in Kal.
The characteristic n sometimes takes Seghol, though not followed
by a guttural; as in nKbn above; and with suffix Mic. 6: 3 ;
i i epri Gen. 41: 28; ilbarj Est. 2: 6. *
Several words take a Syriac ending; as ^bnfi Is, 53:10 for fibnfj;
plural Vqn Josh. 14:8 for *lOn &c.
() The infinitive absolute occurs only in the Syriac form with
Tseii, instead of Hholem, which form is therefore placed in the par-
adigm. The verb !"D"1 has inf. abs. both and na"l2. Infini-
tive construct rrixgfi Lev. 14:43 for ni Xj?n.
(c) The future borrows from verbs Kb by Syriasm (no. V); as
K*HC2 Hos. 13:15 for It takes a Syriac ending like the prae-
t er; as'HO 13 Jer. 18:23 for fifTQn.
(d) The apocopated future drops the final He and final vowel, and
usually assumes a furtive vowel as in Kal ( 59. 2. b). Two forms
only are found without the furtive vowel. The following table exhib-
its the full forms, and the usual apocopated forms.
1 2 3 . YURBS LAMEDH RE ; NOTES. 221
Singular 3 pew. S*l^2 Segfaol for Pattahh. ( 60.3.)
Verbs * gvtt. ns n: arri\i
i gutt. b? \ l like the apoe. form in Kal.
The forms without a furtive vowel are Is. 41:2 from
and n! Gen. 9: 27 from
1
Few such forms as &] &c. from J1D3, see 124. 3. e.
(e) The imperative has a few apocopated forms with a furtive
vowel, viz. for for nfcnn; bgfj Ex.33:12 for libtti.
V. Exchange of farms for those of verbs ttb.
As verbs Mb borrow many forms from verbs Tib (121. IV), so
the latter often take forms analogous to those of the former.
() As to VOWELS; as Kal fat. Ps. 119: 117 for JTWSiJ &c.
See no. I. e. and the other notes above.
() As to CONSONANTS, viz. exchange of final n for M; as Kal future
M3UT Lam. 4: 1 for tt?.*.; inf. fitos Jer 23: 39 for rfioa. Piel MSp 2
K. 25:29 for nsttj; PucUfut. Ecc. 8:1 &c, See other forms in
the preceding notes.
(c) As'to both VOWELS and CONSONANTS ; as Kal praeter with suffix
OlMbn 2 Sam. 21:12 in Qeri for D^lbn from Slbn. Hivhilfut.
Hog'13:15 for n l D\
Most of these forms have been already noted above. They owe
their origin to the influence of the Syriac dialect, m which the two
classes of verbs Mb and rib flow into one. ( 121. IV note 1.)
NOTE. In Aramaean ( 1. 2. a), the futures and participles of verbs
Mb and Sib commonly end in M_ or % ; which form the Hebrew ha*
sometimes adopted, as is seen in the preceding notes. The same
remark applies to those forms which end in instead of i n. or
the usual terminations.
VI. Pilel and Hithpalel
() Two verbs originally 4b have the conjugation Pilel (81. 6),
formed by doubling the final Vav and then adopting the usual final Tl.
Thus fiM3 = 1M3, Pilel i"nM2 = iim: ; which appears in the contract-
ed form rPM3, plural nM2 Cant 1:10 and part. ftlMa Cant 2: 14 on
account of the Aleph ( 47. 5. a). The other verb is Pilel
part. phir. cepst Gen. 21:16.
() HithpcM occurs only to the verb mr a ; of which all the forms
in use are given in fee para&gm ( 80. 2. a). Future 3 pen. plur.
29
222
1 2 4 . VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS,
sometimes inrnp? ( 95. 2. a). Apocopated future iftrpZT, for which
the form innUT is In common use like "TT for *!"P ( 123.1, d, note 1).
Chaldaic infinitive 2 K. 5: 18. For the form Dn^nn,
see 124 b.
#
NOTE. Verbs NB are irregular only in those persons which take
sufformatives beginning with n ; in which case the final Tav of the
verb is expressed by a Daghesh forte in the Tav of the sufforma-
tives ; as wys for nri ns &c. See examples in 95. 3; c.
124. Irreg, verbs ; verbs doubly anomalous,
1. Ver bs doubly anomalous ar e those which ar e ir-
regular in two of their radical letter s, usually the f ir st and
the last. ( 106. 4.)
E. g. !tn, *ar, r r v, nos &c.
NOTE 1. It is not common that two irregular radical letters
come together. There are, however, a few cases of such a concur-
rence ; as in verbs both 19 and Mb, for which see below in no. 4.
NOTE 2. The verb "H3, which is both "JD and 99, is inflected in
Kal simply like verbs "JS>; as praeter 3 pers. fem. JTIT:; future TP
Nah. 3: 7 with Hholem, and "nrn Gen. 31:40 with Pattahh. In HiphU
the only form which occurs is 3 pers. plur. with suffix
Job 18:18 like verbs 99. In Hophal the only forms are the participle
"tan 2 Sam. 23:6 like verbs 99, and future TP Job 20: 8 like verbs
f
r 7 - n
fD. The verb 003 occurs only in Poel and Hithpoel, where of
course it exhibits no irregularities. These two are the only verbs
which are both and 99.
In the verbs 1*3 and 913, which are both f D and 19, the Atm is en-
tirely regular.
2. All the ir r egular ities which ar e f ound in the f ir st
and last radicals of ver bs, concur in these ver bs.
See Par. XVI, XVII, XVIII.
In order to find all the forms of a doubly anomalous verb, the stu-
dent has only to consider the anomaly at the beginning as belonging
to the class of verbs irregular D, and the one at the end as belonging
to those irregular ^ , and unite the irregularties of both of these in
the flexion,
124. VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS.
3. The f ollowing examples and notes on the par-
adigms just mentioned, exhibit all the f orms of these ver bs
in which the student is likely to meet with any dif f iculty.
(a) Ver bs and 71^. ( 107. 122 &c.)
Hiphil fut apoc. 1 Sam. 14: 24 for
HDtf, imperative JJDJt Ex. 16: 23 by Syrlasmfor ( 47. 5. &.);
future with suffix i ner n 1 Sam. 28: 24 for iJlENhl.
Fl nit, praeter in pause n antt Jer. 3:22; imperative in pause 3 by
Syriasm for PnK ( 47. 5. b. 123. 1. A); future Deut. 33:21 for
Fin# 2, the first N being dropped and final tt put for H ( 123.V. 6) ;
Is. 41:25 for Hiphil imperative in pause for *"nNn.
(b) Ver bs and &&. ( 108 kc. 120 &c.)
inf. fern. nfiM2 for nfi*2$ ( 47. 4); imper. 8 2 ; see 109 &e.
(c) Ver bs and Par . XVI. ( 108 &c. 122 &c.)
!Yl*, not found in Kal; Pielfut. Lam.3:53 for 11^3. Hiphilfut.
with n retained Neh. 11: 17; first person with suffix P.
35: 18, and in pause Ps. 30: 13.
1 pers. plur. with suffix Dr5 Ps. 74: 8.
apoc. Ezek. 31: 7 ; Popaal Ps. 45:3.
r r v , / t 1 pers. with suffix BVa Num. 21: 30. Hiphil f ut with
suff. D-p 2 K. 17:27 ; Ps. 45: 8 &c.
(d) Ver bs f a and f t, Par. XVII. ( 113 &c. 121 &c.)
The paradigm exhibits in Kal and Niphal the forms of ; in
Hiphil those of because the former does not occur in Hiphil.
Infinitive construct nttto for nijip ( 47.4). Future !"l3t$n Ruth
1: 14 without Aleph. Hiphil fut. P
8
- 55:16 Kethib for fcPar-
(e) Ver bs "JD and Tib, Par . XVIII. ( 113&c. 122 &c.)
The three verbs H73, !"D3 , are all which occur under this
form. The following are all the departures from the forms in the
paradigm.
Kal fut apoc. with Vav 0*1 and ; also 2 K. 9: 33.
Niphal exhibits only the following forms/ viz. from HDD, praet. S
pers. plur. in pause 1^23 Num. 24: 6; fut 3 pers. Zech. 1: 16;
224
1 2 4 . VERBS DOUBLY ANOMALOUS, ETC#
3 pers. plur. 10s? Jer. 6: 4; from SiD:, praet. rtea 2 Sam. 11:15;
l3a Job 30: 8 with N for fi. ( 123. V. b.)
Hiphil future with suffix as 132 2 Sam. 14:6 ; Job 36:18 kc.
Fut apoc. with Vav O' l, ^*1 kc. The imperative also suffers apoc-
ope and takes the forms 0*3, which are of frequent occurrence.
4. Ther e ar e a f ew ver bs of peculiar irregularity.
() The usual forms of the verb fins are exhibited in Par. XIX.
From these there are many departures, resulting from the nature of
the two last radicals. One is, that most of the forms with Hholem or
Hhireq, are written both fully and defectively; as imp. fins and fits fee.
Kal praeter 3 pers. plur. Ififa Jer. 27: 18. The infinitive construct
takes suffixes, as sjjKB, HDfits Gen. 10: 19 kc. and is often thus
used as a sort of adverbial noun. Future with Vav conversive f in 3 *2,
fit's"* n, i 3 n 1 K. 12:12 Kethib. Third pers. plur. fem. twice f ra^bn.
For the forms nnfion, T>K3n, see 124 b.
Hiphil praeter often fiPSiT In the 2 and 1 persons with suffix, an
epenthetic i is sometimes inserted, as lanifipsn, "PniOan &c. So
without suffix anfit'WT First pers. plur. occurs once Num. 32:17, as
in the paradigm. Infinitive K-Sb for ; sometimes with suffixes,
as in Kal. Future 1 pers. "^Sfit.
() The form is the praeter of Kal from a root like verbs
$7. No other form from this root is found in Hebrew.
(e) The verb Mi: is found only in Hiphil, where it is declined
like fins above. Future once Ps. 141:5.
{d) The verb fiOp is also found only in Hiphil, and is declined
like fins.
124 a. Irreg. verbs ; relation to each other.
1. From the similarity of forms and signification in many cases, it
is probable, that all the verbs which have been described above as be-
longing to the second class of irregular verbs, viz. all those which are
irregular in their first, second, or third radical letters, were originally
btiiteral; and were brought to their present form by the addition of fit,
^, 3, and sometimes tt, for a first radical; by inserting 1 or *, or by
doubling the last radical for a middle one; or by annexing one of the
quiescent letters for a final radical. Thus from the biliteral were
formed.^5^, r c i , all having the same meaning. So 32
and 3X5; -VP, and Tn2; finj? and r nf t ; 3iO and 30J fee.
(62.3.) " .
124. VERBS ; MIXED FORMS. 2 2 5
2. Hence, when two irregular verbs of the same signification and
of kindred origin occur, it is often the case that the one is used only
in particular tenses and conjugations, while the other is employed
in the tenses and conjugations where the first is wanting; both roots
thus making out a complete verb. Thus from the biliteral were
formed ^bn and with the same meaning, the former of which is
used in the praeter and participle, as "jbin; while the latter fur-
nishes the infinitive, future, and imperative, as n s j , "lb Sic.
Niphal has from the former. So ai o a verb 19 has a future
as from a verb "MD. In like manner Kal pj5n, but Pual and
Hithpael hjvnnn as from So has future f ^ V and Niphal
y i as from " p i , but Piel &c.
3. This trait in Hebrew verbs is very important, because it affords
an obvious solution for a multitude of supposed anomalies. If in Latin
it be allowable to bring together fero, tuli, latum, as constituent parts
of one verb, although evidently derived from three; and in Greek,
paivto, ftijoa), tpijv, and qptjpco, oiota
y
rjveyxa &c. which are made up in
a similar manner; why should not the same practice be extended to
tiie Hebrew ? This has been done in a degree by Gesenius in his
Lehrgebaude 112,113; but the principle has not yet been fully
adopted in lexicography.
124 b. Verbs ; mixed forms.
There are a few anomalous forms of verbs in the Hebrew Bible,
which the older grammarians denominated mixed forms, because they
considered them as uniting the characteristics and (as they said) the
meanings of different conjugations. Such are the following.
5p"V Ps. 7:6 which is fut Piel in all but its final vowel, where it
resembles Kal.
Ezek. 9: 8 made from Niphal praeter and Kal 1 pers.
future
Deut. 33: 16 and VifiCin 1 Sam. 25: 34 for future 3 and 2
pers. sing. fem. NSifl and but with sufformatives like the prae-
ter of verbs rib.
dryifinttiE Ezek. 8: 16 with the sufformative of the 2 pers. plur.
masc. praeter, but evidently standing for the plural participle of Hithpa-
lel as is read in some manuscripts.
Forms like the preceding are generally noted in the lexicons, and
are probably the result of negligent transcription.
226 1 2 5 . VERBS ; NOTES ON PARTICIPLES.
124 c. Verbs ; forms of plurilitetal verbs
It Was stated in 82 that pluriliteral verbs were declined like Pi-
lel and Pulal. The following seven forms, however, are all that ap-
pear in the Hebrew Bible.
* 1 pers. with suffix !l"
,
nfct3Nl3 Is. 14:23.
b2"]5>, participle 1 Chr. 15:27.
CO"^2, future with suffix Ti P
8
- 80: 14.
toA?, Job 26: 9. fcDuVjob 33: 25.
FH.fi 2 pers. future ST^nnn Jer. 12:5, - participle
Jer. 22: 15.
A few other forms are noted in some of the lexicons, but in othn
ers they are more properly referred to the Pilel form from a triliter-
al root; as Pilel 3 pers. fem. in pause Job 15: 32, Cant 1: 16,
from j3n.
125. Verbs ; notes on the paradigm of participles.
1. The paradigm of participles exhibits the manner in which the
feminine is formed from the masculine, and also the formation of the
masculine and feminine plural. The mode of declining these forms, so
as to designate the relation of case, must be sought among the nouns;
because in all their inflections participles are treated as nouns and un-
dergo the same changes from declension ( 90.3). The declensions to
which the participles respectively belong, are noted in the paradigm.
NOTE. The tone-syllable of participles follows the usage of nouns,
and not of verbs.
2. The Segholate forms of the feminine are mostly limited to those
participles in which the final vowel of the masculine is Qamets or
Tseri pure and mutable. Here they are of frequent occurrence, es-
pecially when the participle is in regimen.
3. The ground of the above limitation is, that the final vowel of
the word which takes a Segholate form, is usually changed by the eu-
phonic power of the furtive vowel ( 60. 3). Hence, when the final
vowel is immutable, the feminine form in H is generally preferre d.
4. Feminine forms in are found, however, in participles, even
where the final vowel of the masculine is Hholem impure: as risca
1 2 6 . VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 2 2 7
2 Sam. 18: 8. In feminine nouns and adjectives, it is Dot uncommon
for the furtive Seghol to be preceded by Hholem; as n &v , ns' ns,
rozpria tic.
6. In Hiphil, the Segholate form of the feminine is derived from
the apocopated form of the masculine; as apoc. ~&p.&, fem.
(^99-I.e.):
126. Verbs with suffix-pronouns.
/ . General remarks.
1. The ver bal suf f ixes, or accusative cases of pro-
nouns af ter transitive verba, ar e par ts of primitive pro-
nouns united with the ver b so as to f or m with it one
word, instead of being wr itten separ ately a9 in the wes-
tern languages. ( 63. 3. 66. 7.)
. g. QnbDJD thou hast killed them, instead of Dfi-nVbj^ &c.
This is the common mode of speaking and writing the accusative
ef personal pronouns in Hebrew, instead of exhibiting the full form of
the pronoun by itself. A trait very similar appears in the Greek
natxriQ ftov for itanjQ ifiov fee. and in the Latin eccurn for ecce emn be.
2. Most of the ver bal-suf f ixes cause the tone of the
ver b to which they ar e appended to be moved forward,
or towards the lef t Hence a change in the vowel-points
of the ver b is, in most cases, a thing which f ollows of
course ( 5458). In a f ew f or ms, ther e is also a
change of consonants in the sufformatives in order to ad-
mit the suf f ix; see below in no. 12.
This change of vowels in verbs, however, is not altogether con-
formed to the laws which regulate the vowel-changes in nouns. The
peculiarities of it are noted in the explanations which follow.
3. Inasmuch as the f orms of all the conjugations ter m-
mate in the same manner as those of Kal, they also f or the
most part take suf f ixes in pr ecisely the same manner.
But f r om the nature of the case, neuter ver bs and f orms
of ver bs with a passive or refiexivt signif ication do not usually
r eceive suf f ixes, because the suf f ixes ar e almost always in
1
2 2 8 1 2 6 . VERBS WITH SUr r iX-PRONOONS.
the accusative, and of course f ollow transitive ver bs.
Hence the conjugations Niphal, Pual, Hophal, and Hith-
pael, are ver y rarely f ound with suf f ixes* In the f ew
cases in which they do r eceive them, they ar e to be ta-
ken in an active sense, or else the suf f ix is employed to ex-
, pr ess a dative of advantage.
Piel differs a little from Kal in the mode of receiving suffixes; see
below in IV note 14.
4. For ms of ver bs in the f ir st and second persons, do
not take suf f ixes of the same per sons; because the recip-
rocal meaning which would thus be conveyed is expr essed
by Hithpael &c.
5. The inf initive mood and par ticiples may take suf -
f ixes either like ver bs or like nouns. But in the mf initive,
the noun-suf f ix is the subject, and the verbal-suf f ix the ob-
ject
9
of the action expr essed by the ver b; as ^jplp my pirn-
ishment, i. e. that which I inf lict; Wpf eV to punish me.
II. Forms of prono/uns used as verbalsuffixu.
6. Most of the ver bal-suf f ixes, or f ragments of primi-
tive pronouns, have at least thr ee dif f er ent f orms, adapted
to the dif f er ent ending or tense of the ver b to which
they are appended.
() The most simple form of the suffixes is that in which they be-
gin with a consonant. In this shape they are appended, through all the
tenses and moods, to forms of verbs which end with a vowel. See note 1.
() To the simple form is prefixed a vowel of the A class, viz.
Qamets or Pattahh. In this shape they are appended to forms of
verbs which end with a consonant, in the praeter only.
(c) To the simple form is prefixed a vowel of the E class, viz.
Tseri or SeghoL In this shape they are appended to forms of verbs
which end with a consonant, in the future and imperative. See also
below in no. 9. c.
NOTE 1. The vowel which is thus prefixed to the suffixes, serves
to connect them more readily with the verb, and is therefore called
i
126* VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 229
the tmion-vvwcL When the verb ends in a vowel, that vowel of
course serves as a union-vowel.
7. Between the suffix and the union-vowel, there is sometimes in-
serted an epenthetic Aun ( 43. 2. 6), which is usually assimilated to
the first letter of the suffix and expressed in it by a Daghesh forte.
In poetry, the Nun is sometimes fully written. This class of suffixes
is limited principally to the singular number of the pronouns, and
to the future tense of verbs.
8. The f ollowing table exhibits the suf f ixes as append-
Sing* Common.
Procter. Future fye.
1.
13- <3l
2m. Sjl
inpanse^J- !J_ 5J&C. n 3 -
2f . *TJ *>3
1 - V ^
3 m. i n l 1 m l "1
r
i n l *i
3 f . n l
sn- r u
* T
*
V
PI. 1. u l
*
13-
M
*
13_
2 m. S3 03
Q3'
2 f . 'JD
1 V 1?
3 m. & poet.'if i. n_n_> poet.hal
T.
D
- ' P
094
"
3f . "J
K V k
3 f . r u
PL 1 . u l
2 m. S3
2 f . 13
3 m. & poet.'if i.
3 f . 1
FU r u
*
13-
DD
1 V
D_D-> poettol
K V
Future with epenthetic Nun.
Future c.
s j t c . n 3 -
^ V ^
w l ' I
n l
*
13_
D3*
n
D_ D_"
v
poe
. t h a i
Sing.l.
2 m. for *| 3- &c
Sing. 3 m. 13- f or inD* also*l3
- 3 f . ns l f or ns l
30
2.10 1 2 6 . VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS.
9. Notes on the table qf suffixes, (a) In a very few instances, the
future has the suffixes **31, 0 . , like the praeter ; and vice versa the
praeter very rarely takes suffixes like the future, viz. ">31 and a few
times ' si.
(6) The original union-vowels would seem to he Qamets and
Tseri, which shorten into Pattahh and Seghol when the tone is re-
moved. Before the epenthetic Nun, the two latter only are found.
So also in ' ol , which in pause becomes "
,
2_.
(c) The 2 per#, sing, fem occurs but seldom ; the more com-
mon form in the praeter is J_, and without the tone as in the
future. The forms with paragogic Yodh occur often in the later
Psalms.
(d) The suffixes 73, never take a union-vowel; nor does the suf-
fix ^ or HD, except in pause. The 3 pers. sing. fem. of the praeter also
takes suffixes without a union-vowel; see below in no. IV note 2. a.
(e) The forms tol, i fcl with a paragogic i , are common in
poetry ( 50. 4. d). The form ^73 is found as a suffix once Ex. 15: 5,
as in Ethiopic j and also the form Deut. 32: 26.
( y) Instead of the feminine suffix 7 of the third person plural, the
masculine D appears after the sufTormative 4, in order that the femin-
ine suffix may not be confounded with the paragogic ] ; as ^2
Ex. 2: 17 for 1 Sam. 6:10, &c.
(g) The suffixes with epenthetic Nun are occasionally found in
the imperative and rarely in the praeter; see a above. In Chaldee,
an epenthetic Nun is always found before the suffixes of the future,
imperative, and infinitive.
{h) Wherever there is a union-vowel, it uniformly takes the tone.
The suffixes and 73 always draw down the tone upon themselves,
removing it two places if necessary, and are on that account denomin-
ated grave suffixes. The others never move the tone more than one
syllable, and are called light suffixes.
The suffix ^ or when appended to verbs ending in a consonant,
usually takes the tone, except in the 2 pers. sing. fem. of the praeter.
See below in no IV note 2. a.
(i) Some of these suffix-forms of pronouns are derived from primi-
tive forms which are still in use; as D, 7, from fin, &c. Others would
seem to come from forms which are now obsolete in Hebrew; as
from fiSK = like ; CD from &3K &c. The form ^ still
appears in Ethiopic as a regular sufTormative in the flexion of verbs.
1 2 6 . VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS. 231
10. Verbal-suffixes are also united, in all their forms,
with certain adverbs and interjections; in which condition
t he j are in the nominative case. See in 156.
III. Forms of verb* as adapted to styfixes.
11. It should be borne in mind, that all the vowel-
changes which appear in verbs with suffixes, occur solely in
consequence of the removal of the tone-syllable which is
caused by the suffix; and that they are entirely conform-
ed to the laws of vowel-changes given in 5458.
12. In a few of the forms, a change is made in the
sufformative of the verb, in order to admit the suffix.
( ) In the praeter 3 sing. fem. n _ is put for J"U
2 - - T] r. or i fi
2 plur. m. ID DFl
The n of the 3 sing. fem. is changed into n because of the ac-
cession ( 40. 2); and the Qamets is shortened to Pattahh because it
comes to stand in a mixed syllable. ( 54. 2. c.)
NOTE. The 2 plur. fem. does not occur with suffixes.
() In the future and imperative, instead of the fem-
inine sufformative Si3, appears the masculine ending ^ .
13. The following are the forms of the praeter adapt-
ed to receive suffixes.
Singular.
i
Plural.
Forms with suffix. Com. form. With suffix. Com.form.
3 mas. com.
%
3 fem.
r f a s j ? n b a p
2 mas.
r f r a p n b a p n b b j ? a n b a p
2 fem. Ti Va p n b a p
(not found) j nbaj ?
1 com. Ti Va p
VjSjfejJ
i ^ a p .
Digitized bv
232 1 2 6 * VERBS WITH SUmX-PRONOtJNS.
I V. NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
Procter of KaL
NOTE 1. Third person singular masculine with suff 'aSttp, without
suffix bDJ?. The tone being moved forward one syllable by the suffix,
the Qameta of the first syllable is dropped ( 56. 2); and the Pattahh
of the second syllable is lengthened, because it comes to stand in a pure
syllable, the final letter of the verb being united with the suffix
( 55. 1). Before and 73 Pattahh remains, as because the
final radical continues in the same syllable; but before ^ it is thrown
into another syllable and takes a vocal Sheva, as
Verbs final Tseri usually retain the Tseri before the suffix, as
; but sometimes have Qamets, as ifitbJD Esth. *7: 5. Verbs final
Hholem are very rarely found with suffixes. The form fnfcD? occurs
Ps.l3:5, where Hholem is shortened into Qamets Hhateph.( 96.1<a.)
NOTE 2. Third person singular feminine "*30? DP, ?JN5T3J3, without
suffix The removal of the tone causes the first vowel of the
ground-form to be dropped and the second to be revived and lengthen-
ed, as in note 1. For the n see above in no. 12. a. The vowel of the
third syllable is Qamets or Pattahh, according as the n is or is not
united with the suffix, as in note 1.
() It is a peculiarity of this feminine form, that although it ends
with a consonant, it yet takes suffixes beginning with a consonant, when
they make a syllable by themselves. Hence it takes but three with
a union-vowel, viz. 0- , "}
T
, and these are shortened to D_,
7_, because the tone is always on the last syllable of the verb and
not on the suffix. ( 54. 3. Supra 9.b.)
() This form of the verb is sometimes contracted, or it assimilates
to its final n the initial n of the suffixes i n and n of the 3 person
masculine and feminine. Thus we have both the full form i r t n j a i
Prov. 31: 12, and contracted i nSa* 1 Sam. 1:24 &c. With the fem-
inine suffix the contraction always takes place; as nnTtitt Jer.49:24 for
&
0
- The final !"j in this last example would seem to be par-
agogic, as if the suffix were Jitt.
NOTE 3. Second person singular masculine "SNLROP, without
suffix . The first vowel is dropped as in note 1; the second is
not affected. The Qamets of the sufformative serves as a union-vowel;
though it is sometimes dropped and the suffixes and i of the first
and third person singular appended to the form rfctap.
NOTE 4. Second person singular feminine ^h! : Dp, withotrt
1 2 6 . VERBS WITH SUPFlX-PrfONOtmS. 233
suffix n^Dp or The vowels of the two first syllables are as in
note 3. This form changes its sufformative in order to admit suffixes
(see above in no. 12. a); and the Hhireq which it takes serves as
a union-vowel. This is sometimes defectively written, as "'arviiP Jer.
15: 10 &c. In a few instances the suffixes and w 1 of the 1 pers.
singular and plural, are appended to the form as Jer. 2: 27.
Josh. 2:17. Cant. 5:9.
NOTE 5. The remaining forms of the praeter, when adapted to re-
ceive suffixes (no. 13), all end in a vowel, and of course take suffixes
without a union-vowel. The changes of their vowels are the same as
those of the preceding forms, which are explained above.
Infinitive of KaL
NOTE 6. The infinitive form (bop
t
) is treated as a Segholate
noun in respect to suffixes, taking them somewhat after the analogy
of the form in Dec. VI. q. Thus, ground-form Voj5, with suffix
&c. The final vowel of the ground-form is for the most part thrown
back to the first radical ( 57), and is in all cases shortened into eith-
er Qibbuts or Qamets Hhateph, because the tone is removed from it
by the suffix. Before d^, 73, and sometimes *|, the vowel remains in
the final syllable, although it is shortened; as BDbDM Gen. 3:5 &c. But
in these latter cases also, the vowel is sometimes thrown back; as
&V)39 Deut. 27:4; 0 ^ * ^ . and Lev. 23: 22.
NOTE 7. Verbs Ayin guttural take a composite Sheva ( ) under
the guttural when the vowel of tfie ground-form is thrown back, in-
stead of the usual simple Sheva, as Sns, my choosing Ezek. 20:
5; 3*5iK, d3fiK their love Hos. 9: 10. Before S3 and they take
the corresponding short vowel, viz. Qamets Hhateph, as D30JM3 Is.
30:12; and so DSS'lj} Deut 20:2 with Resh.
The forms dDKXto Gen. 32:20 and d^Otfjia Am. 5:11 are anoma-
lous, and stand for and ddpitis.
NOTE 8. The infinitive with Pattahh (btjp) retains its form before
03 and 73, but before other suffixes it takes the form btsj? and some-
times bcjd; as fan, d^: : n Is. 30: 18 &c. 9a, d*j>a Am. 1: 13 &c.
Ezek. 25: 6 &c.
N. B. The feminine forms of the infinitive with a furtive vowel,
are treated as feminine Segholates of Dec. XIII; as rrcn, &c.
Future of Kal.
NOTE 9. In futures with Hkolem and Tseri, all those persons which
end in a consonant drop the final vowel of the verb (like nouns in
234 1 2 6 . VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS.
Dec. VII), and receive suffixes with a union-vowel (no. 6. c); as
with suffix "3$t3j^; also Splrp, DCTiri^ Josh. 23:5 &c. Before
4|, fi^, and 1^, however, final Hholem and final Tseii are shortened
into Qamets Hhateph and Seghol, and in that shape retained; as
Is. 42: 6; Jer. 38:16 and often.
Verbs with future Pattahh retain the Pattahh in the preceding
cases, and prolong it into Qamets before those suffixes which have a
union-vowel; because the final consonant of the verb is then thrown
into another syllable; as Dosb? &c. ( 55. 1.) So also the futures of
verbs afe. (121.1, c.)
NOTE 10. All the persons that end in a vowel, viz. In 1 or V (includ-
ing the 2 and 3 pers. plur. fem. as stated above in no. 12. 6), receive
suffixes of course without a union-vowel (no. 6. a) ; as
irtbSNn Lev. 7: 24, where the Shureq is defectively written by Qjib-
buts.
S
( 21. 18.)
The 3 pers. plur. masc. sometimes takes the suffixes after a para-
gogic Nun ( 95. 1. a), but without a union-vowel; as Prov.
1:28 ( 21. 18); ISWi aP Jer. 5: 22. With twice Is.
60: 7, 10.
Imperative o/Kal.
NOTE 11. The 2 pers. sing. masc. with Hholem (B*C3J?) imitates the
. infinitive. The other forms "^op., ibop. and fem. iVtsp (no. 12. b \
remain unchanged and take suffixes beginning with a consonant.
NOTE 12. Imperatives with Pattahh, like the future, retain die
Pattahh and prolong it before those suffixes which have a union-vow-
el ; as *33*7311? hear me. So plural 73113 hear ye me ; ask ye
me Is. 45:11. See note 9 above, and compare note 2.
Participles.
NOTE 13. All the participles imitate nouns in their mode of re-
ceiving suffixes, and the declensions to which they respectively belong
are noted in Par. XX.
Piel.
NOTE 14. The final Tseri of Piel falls away before suffixes with a
union-vowel, as in the future of Kal. Before b^, it is general-
ly (not always) shortened into Seghol or Hhireq parvum; as praeter
Deut 30: 3 ; infinitive D ^ r n Is. 30: 18; Is. 1: 14; fu-
ture Ezek. 28: 16; Job 16: 5; also Gen. 31:
27. Sometimes the Tseri under Resh is changed into Pattahh, as
^ 2 Deut. 2: 7 &c.
1 2 6 . VERBS WITH SUFFIX-PRONOUNS.
235
Whenever Pattahh is adopted in the final syllable on account of a
guttural, it remains before the suffixes sj &c. as Deut. 13: 18.
NOTE. 15. Poel, PoleL, and Pilel imitate Piel, their first vowel be-
ing immutable, and their final one the same as that of Piel. The same
is true of all forms which have the same final vowels in the same cir-
cumstances.
Hiphil.
NOTE 16. In the future and imperative, the suffixes are appended
to the regular forms, and not to those which are apocopated.
A few fornts seem to come from the apocopated future; viz.
1 Sam. 17:25, Ps. 65: 10 for 1 3 ^ ^ - Job
2 0 :
26 for
( 60. 5); Is. 35: 4 for DD5
v
ih\ ' This is perhaps
the effect of Syriasm.
126 a. Verbs fib with suffixes.
1. In all the forms of verbs rib which end in n, this letter and the
preceding vowel fall away before suffixes. The verb thus. apoco-
pated takes or omits a union-vowel before th$ suffix according to its
termination, as in regular verbs.
2. In the 3 person sing. fem. the suffixes are attached to the n of
the verb, after the analogy of regular verbs ( 126. IV note 2).
The tone also remains upon the final syllable of the verb. For the
form irrip* with suffix of the 3 pers. masculine, see 126. IV note 2.6.
3. The sufformative 1 of the 3 pers. plural, before the suffix =in, is
very often defectively written; as ( 21. 18.)
4. In the forms ?pniaa Ezek. 16:31 and Ezek. 6: 8,
which are infinitives of Kal andNlphal with noun-suffixes, the suffixes
are those of plural nouns, which have probably been appended by
mistake.
5. In these verbs, Yodh is sometimes inserted between the suffix
and the union-vowel Tseri or Seghol; as Piel imper. nfJ
n>
*n Hab. 3:2 ;
fat. PS. 140: 10; Hiphil imper. 1 K.20: 35; future
Deut. 32: 26 from itfijs. This would seem rather to be a
restoration of the original radical Yodh, as in pause. ( 123.1, h.)
NOTE. The paradigm (XXII) exhibits only some of those forms
which are of the ,most frequent occurrence. It is, however, suffi-
ciently copious to guide the learner, and enable him to reduce to
the same general principles any other forms which may occur.
2 3 6 1 $ 7 * PAR. I . Regular verbs. ( 9 6 1 0 0 . )
Kal. Kal. Kal. Niphal.
Pr aet . 3 m. 1 3 3
bt i f cj
3 f. 1 3 3
* JIT
J|T
r 6 u p 3
2 m. FH3 3
* - *
rVs*
1
*
n b a p q
2 f. P 1 3 3
r f c l r
T
nVc?p>3
1.
TIVDJ? TO
J - T
T I V S T
! *
TlVtjp.3
PI. 3. VI M
:IT
2 m. nn-j Dj ? a m s s
V
DF&3' '
v ; TJ
Df l bbpo
2 IFIVDP jn.133 I NT O* I R T A P S
1.
I V J
13133
*
1 V f J
I S VS ' '
I v f
T F C B P J
Inf. abs.
V I B H
Tl 3 3
*
VBM. Vn pn
const. V d
P ;
1 3 3
VGGRI
F u t 3 m. Vtap; 133
1
;
toJLI
3 f. Ve p n i s s n
2 m. Vo p n I 3 3 n Vo p n
2 f. " ^ B P N ^ i s p n
^DPFJ
1. VbpK *T33K
PI . 3 m. i Vup; ;
1133?
3 f. N ^ ' O P R I n n a b n
rabbin
2 m. ^ u p n n s s r j iVt3j?n
2 r u Vo p n n s i a a n
n j Va j m
1. VopD 1333
Fut. apoc.
Imp. m. Voj? 1 3 3
^ . P / l
f.
"1M
*?Dpn
PL m. top 1133
f. R O V S P 0 3 1 3 3
j ~ J
n At j g r i
Par t , a c t
Vu' tp " D3
VopJ
pass.
VIOP
4
f 127. PA*. I. Regular vtrbt. ({ 96TOO.) 33 7
Piel. Pual. Htphil. Hophal. HithpaeL
5B Fapn !?apn Veg?nn
n^toj> rf;B n ^ q ^ ' n r t e p n nVo' j yi n
FjVt5j> pbE5_ r i b u p n . s w p n V8>j ?pn
R&BJJ r b u p n fljsjpn r ^ a p n n
r i ^j j n f e a pn "nrf j&pn TiVap.nn
I ^DJ> , ^ B J > I ^ U P N ' FEAPN I VAJ J NN
api.Vttp D$t?j Dr f ?Dpn DnVopn ap.Vtopr in
jn^ojp l ^ V a p n "| $j opn i n ^ a p n n
n&ap 'ttf epf c ^Vapn n^. p
?
n ^Vapnn
Vtap_ | bp
%
^ a p n S o p . n
^bj> ^ a p ' y t a p n '_* __f r a j ? r m
^Bp* Va p ^ ^ o j Vap^ bBp. r' *
Va p n . Vaprt ^opr i Vtgpn Voj>nn
bqpr i Vapjn ^tjj?r r Vop'r j Vapnn
^ e j j r r ' ^ o p n " ^ a p n ^ B g n n
^Dp.tfr bj >k Vr a p * i j a p x ^ a p . f i *
i b a p * n*>B^ *V&p;: i bqp^ iVBjjn?
"3^4
n
3^f j "3^^
s &j y?v <&BjHn i ^ b p n t' Vop.n- i ^ p . n n
m^ u p . n n i V&p n roV&jjn w V u p n n j Vi a p n n
^Bp_ VB^ ^a'p? ^pp3 Vap.n:
^Bp.
^Bj?
i*aj jr
njbaj?
Vapr t
^lapn
r tf i apn
Vapnr t
^ap_nn
n^ap.r in
n a pnn
b a p a Jnagn- V a p a Va p a Vaj j . no
"
!
8li '* '
!
* ' '
gal. Niphal. Hiphil. Hophal.
Pr aet.3 m. TO
l a y s T a y n
HJ *
t
3 HTO
f |T
n i a y j
T VV
m r b y n n i a y n
^ V T
2 m. d t o
"" nr
n n b y a n n a y n m a y n
" T; ^
2
m a y
J "f
n r a y a
; * v# *
n * n n
n a y n
"rj f
1.
w a y
T
ma y s
: ' nv
T i i a y n v n a y n
? r; ^
PL 3. m a y n a y a i T a y n
# M
n a y n
2 m. n m a y a n T a y a c n n a y n c r n a y n
2
v *|
- [ pna y
i n n a j j ]n*7Byn i n S a y n
1. l a ^ a y
* c
i a *f a ya l o n a y n
? ?:
m a y n
rj t
Inf . abs. T i a y
T
'
T a y n n a y n
const. n a y
w n T ' a ^ n
-r;
Fut 3 m.
f a r p i r n TO*
t
M
* r a r
"T't
3 j a y n p r n n
f
"1 - * v
T a y n
T
T a y n TBy n
"Tf
2 m. T a y n p m n T a y n
T' By n n a y n
*f.* t
2 n a y n ^ m n i T a y n
ti*
^ T a y n
<TByn
t V
1. f a y * p t r o i
r: *. - v
TO*
9 |
T B y
-
r *
PI. 3 m.
n a r i p Ti r ^ TO*
!h
M
i T a y
-S-
n a y
f t
3 r. n n & n r a p m n n ^ r w n r t b * n
* *1 " ' "?} V f } I " * "T! f
2 m. i T a y n i p Tn n i T a y n i T & y n
IT -
i i a y n
t
2 naTi ayn n a p t n n n a n a y n n a i b y n n a i f c y n
1.
f a y? pTno
i aya
ft*
Ti a y ?
Fut. apoe.
"ac
Imp. m. *ray p m T a y n n a y n
| -
-ray i p m >T2yn
JIT
"Ti ayn
^ I -
PI. m. m a y i p m i T a y n
1*
i T a y n
n a Ta y n a p m n a n a y n n a i a y n
T "I * 1 * ? -
Par t. i n i y n a y s
TVJV
T B y B
*R;
Hiphil. Hophal.
T B y n . TQJTT
n T a y r i m a y n
n n a y n p * i a y n
n Ta y r i r H a y n
ma yo Tna y n
: " V ? r:
i T a y n n a y n
r* v : r T
T B y n TBy n
- - ~rr
T B ^ TBS
w n nayn
T B y n l a i n
*Tayn 'r ayn
T B y T w a
i T s r n a y
#- - f t
v v ;it f t
2 f. w r i j y n n a p ' mn n s i a y n r m S w n raifcyn
t 1 *M-r? v *> *-! *? : *
i . TWO s t n a i a ? j T^ a y j n a
T r - r r " -r" ' T !
/ f a. a/c. ngsp
imp. m. n a y p t n T a y n T a y n
f .
l,l
TBy ipm 'naVn ^Tay'n
pi . m. n a y i p m i T a y n i T a y n
j f r* * "
f. n : n &> n a p m n a n a y n n : " i h ? n
T ; -I T :
Par t . n a i y i a ? j T a y a T a y a
TVIV *1 - *R.
127. PAR. III. Verbs Ayin guttural* ( 104.) 839
Kal. Piel. Piel. PnaL Hithpael.
Pr a e t 3 m. p?T V w ^ 3 ^ 1 3 n n
3 L n p ? t r f c m n s - i a n a - f c n a i a n r i
' ;IT * * * i * * JN . .
2 m. p p h P V T O r o n a p a n s p a n a n n
2 L p p y j p' Vr o M n a p a n s p a n a n r i
i . v i p y ? T &r w ' n a n a ' p a n s T o n a n n
pi . 3. i ? 7 T ' i Vn s l a n a i a - f c l a - i a n n
' "T t : s IT s
2 m. c p p
s
? t o p V w b p . 3 1 5 BPSi l a o p a n a n n
2 f. i p p j T " j p ^ n j i p a n a j p a - i a j f l s n a n r i
i . 13PJT i s Vr n i s a n a w a n s i s a n a n n
' - 8 - ' " M
Inf. aba.
conet p y t j>ro ^ a y f t t [ - i a n n
F u t 3 m. p ? r ^nr
s
v y
;
n * v w i
3 f. pyj t n Vr o n ^ n a r i sj-ibn ^ n a n n
2 m. p? TP Vn3R ' n a p ^ i b p ^ a n n
2 'mtp "Vn3ri "onap o-iin oianp
- T : r | * t t JIT }
1. p?T Vn.3* T P * -<p_iu T i a n *
p l 3 m. i p j T? s a w <d - p l a - i a n :
3 1 r u p n p n & n w i r u a n a p r o a n i p n s a n a n p
2 m. w m i ^ n s p l a n a p l a - f t p l a - i a n p
f it : ?w : ? : :*r
2 t n a p y t n n a ^ n a n n a s n a n n a a n i n n a a n a n n
t; - * J t * : * : * : ~ t * ,
+*t "! * j t * : * : * ~ * T ,
i . p y ?n,3.3 r p a s ^ - 6 3 * p a p 3
' - -
Fut. apoc. has no distinct form here.
I mp. m. P ? t Vn.3 ^ | i a
f. i p y t " b n : o i a
PL m. i p? T i Vn s i a - i a
f . ropy* n & r n r o a n a
^ - i a n n
o-iar ir i
l a n a n r i
r uanar in
Par t . p y l t >n, 3. a i j n a t i . . T *
k
* p a n n
340 $ 127. PAIU IV. Ftfbt Lnmedk %uttatal+ ( 1M. )
Kat flfiphak
Wet
Pcaet 3 ql-
H W tf D3
i
y a
3 f . WB O
T
n y a o
T
2 m. n y b
JJPDOJ n y f e n
T *
2C
U
p y a p p y a r o s
p y a .
p y a o
p y a d
PL 3. i y n i
i y a o j
w a a '
2 m.
fipyaaj QFi ya o
v : ~
2 j Fi yao i p y a o a j n y a o
1. w h o a i a y |
Inabs. yr ao
const* y ?i
y a . o n
r a n
Pat 3 a.
yWDT
*
yf f s j r
- t *
y a m
* * s
3 y a w n y a n
-r
a n
2 m. y a o n war y
- 5
y a s n
*
2.
<yawv l y a i r v
J IT *
WDon
|
1.
y a a u t y a m s y a o t t
PL 3 m.
wa "
* /
IT
1
i wa b * -
r :
TOyiwirv
f f '
n w b f n
n a y a o n
2 m.
i j a m
J IT *
w a a n
t
2 reywv n a ^ i b e n
T ** ^
n w a n n
" y a ms 1.
y - 1 #
y a ^ i
Jffl3-
n w a n n
" y a ms
Fut. apoc.
Inpe BW
y J Hj y a o r r
j ur a t .
I
15530-
T
>yaon v s a
a i& i y a
IT *
w a s a
v s a
n b
J IT
royasrr
T -T
f i a y a a
Par t, act y n o y a s s
y a a f l
pass. y i a o
**
w
y a a f l
PAR. I V. Verb* guttural. PAJUV. Verbs ( .107.) 241
Hiphil. Hithpael. || Kal. Kal.
r a j j n y a j i a n
n r a a n n y a n a n
p y n o n r y g n a n
n y b a n r y a i i a n
T w a i n * n y | n a r i
l y f c s i n l y a p t i n
a n y a a n n n y a n i n
j n y a n n j p y a n a n
w h a n v y a r i a n
Vs s i a
~ V "" T
(as verbs Pt gutturalJ
y n j o ' n y a n a n
y i a o
,
y a n c r
- : '
y e a n y a n a n
y ^ a a n y a n a n
^ a i n " y a n i r i
r a p * y a p p *
l y a a ; l y a n a
1
;
n w a a r i n j y a p p n
n y a a n l y a p p p
royaa'n n a y a p p p
r a p ? y a p p q
byv nasi
1
*
Vqa' n n a s n
5?3' N - I BSFN
S ? > *i a >
n a i r
roVSitn n n a a i p
, i - * : *
i ^ o wn n a ' n
n b p n n a w n
I S S I S - I BK' J
*S?:
y a a n y a p p n
" yr ba n " y a n a n
l y a a f i l y a n a n
n w a a n n j y a p p n
(as Pe guttural)
y a a a y a n a a 1
" " 32i ' '
iii 127. PAR. VI. Fait *6. Chat I. ( 109.) |
PAR. VII. ">D.
CI N. ( 110. )
Kal. Niphal. Hiphil. Hophal.
Pf aet
3 L
2 m.
2 f ,
1.
PL 3*
2 m.
2 f <
1.
ni rh
r
(regular)
. a a ' u
naaf t
paa'f l
r iaaii
Vl SB' l J
l aaf t a
e r p a i :
j n i a ' i :
' mb ' I J
a^ain
n a ^ n
p a ef t n
p a s f t n
v p c f t n
l a n p h n
o p a a f t n
j par ai n
i s a BS n
a wn
n a d i n
J
r o a m
p a a i n
>na a i n
l a s i n
D P S D I N
j Fi api n
u a a i n
Inf . abs. a'lf ip
*
const. r D a n s n n a ^ a i n n c n n
Fut aa*
3 f. 3 b p
t l
2 m. a d n
*
2 f. *13011
i . a a a
PI. 3 m. l a d? ,
3 f. n s s o n
* "
2 ttl. 1 3 3 P
2 f. n s a a p
i . a d :
a
? l ?
a a i ' n
a d i p
q d i p
a a i *
ladY
1
*
: ?
n M B i p
l a B I P
: IT
n : a a i p
3B13
a' l a' i P
a"
1
l a i j j i n
a ^ K
w a V
nsaat a
W a i n
n s a o i n
*R *
a- i oi a
a d i i
a p i F i
3 d i P
OBI P
3 B1 *
i s d i
1 1
n s s a i p
* "
l a d i p
n n i n
3 0 1 3
Fitt. apoc.
ndi*'
Imp. m. Dp
f . qa
PL m. *Q
f . nsna
M y t
oaj n
^at b' ^n
: *
n a a a i n
a a i n
q- ' a' i n
l a ^ a h n
n a a o ' i n
P a r t a a i i aa' i D a - ' d i a a a i a
Kal.
B3'>
4
T
(regular)
ala^
a a ^
on
1
*
B3T1
B 3 T )
i o a i p
aa^s
l a a i i
:
n 3 B3 Tl
iBavt
n a d a v i
a i ^
d a ^
(regular)
da"
1
II*
PAR. VIII.'e. PAR. IX.'C.
C/ . HI. (6 111. ) CLiv.(112.)
1
I PAR. X. VerbsJFC. ( J 113, 114. ) 2 4 3
Hiphil. Kal.
Kal. Niphal. Hiphil. Hophal.
a ^ n
P * !
V w a s s a ^ a n a a n
n a ' w n (regular)
(regular)
n a a a
T
n a ^ a n n a a n
T J %
(
n a i r n
n p a a n a a n n a a n
n a p ^ n
n p a a n a a n n a a n
T i p a a T i p a n T i p a n
l a ^ t r t j
t a a a l a ^ a n l a a n
a n a p T i
1 *
a n p a a a n p a n a n p a n
J N P A / N
j ri paa i r i p a n
^ n p a n
i s a t r n
:
1 3 3 3 3 i a a a n u a a n
t " \
^ h s :
T
a a a n
T
a ' an a a n
a ^ n r i g s
6 3 a ' an
p' ; r
VE?
T WR
LT
O- IJH
aa
1
)
a ^ n p2Fl V s n
(regular]
> a ' ' a n a a n
a u r n p'SFl Vs n t r a n a a n
l a i t j n p
i
T5 n
i p t j n i p a n
3
i
p
, ,
f>SK
VE a^ast s a a
WE T * i V r ;
i a a ;
n3ap; <n
n a p s n
n ^ Vs n
t
n a p a n n a a a n
* I *U
I pSPl n Ve n l a ^ a n l a a n
n s a c p n
n a p s n r u V s n n a p a n n : p a n
s n a r a
' ' m
V B :
B"a? a a p
so
- 1
;
ps ' . l
^ 4 !
a p T i
VB3 W A N
a a n
o ^ n (regular) (regular) (regular)
i p ^ a r i
#
l a ^ n l a ' ^ a n
n j a b T i
n a a a n
a ^ n
*1
H P
V S I A E 3 3
u n a a a p
Diqitized bv Google
44 $ 117. PiJL XI. Verimlh. (}$ 116, 116.)
Kal. Niphal. Hipfail.
Pr aet 3 m.
3
2 m.
2 i
1.
PL 3.
2 m.
2 f .
1.
3D
n a b
r T a o
rtao
* ^ 3 0
*I3&
o n i a o
j n^ao
i s ' f a o
3D3
n a b :
T - T
t v f a w
r i ' i aoi
vi ' TaM
i a o j
a n l a w
j nt ooi
l i i a e i
a o n
n a b n
-r
M a o n
n t a o n
' XiTaon
i a b n
ozVi aDn
i n ' i a o n
i t f ' a o n
I nil abs.
const
Fut 3 m.
3 f .
2 m.
2 f .
1.
PL 3 m.
3 f .
2 m.
2 f .
1.
a t o p
a o
30H
3D*
a b n
a o n
>a6n
f
a' oj j
130^
w a c n
V % |
i aon
n ^ a c n
a ba
Child. a'DI
a o n
a' sr i
."asFi
a b a
n a a S h
T
i a o n
na a o' n
r
383
a e ;
a o n
a o n
*>aor>
a o
i a %;
n a ^ a o n
* *
l a s n
w i a n
* V
a s :
a o n
S D ;
so*!
a o n
>3bp
1 1
*
30*
T
i s o ;
ro^aop
r v
i a b n
f
. waon
*r v J
303
Fvt. converitoe.
30*2
Imp. m.
f .
PL qa.
f.
30
*30
nab
n a * a o
a o n
* a o n
i aon
r w4&n
a o n
J*
T
, |
aon
i a bn
n a i &n
Par t. a a b 303 30tt
187. PAH. XI. Perk is. ( 116,116.) #48
Hophal. Poel. Poal. Pllpel. Polpal.
a o i n as i o aai o aoao a&ao
n a c n n nr ni o naai o
T
naoao
t ;
naoao
*,
n i l e m naai o naai o naoao napao
ni s pi n nr isio
"
naai o r apaq naoao
^
^ n i a c i n TiaaiD vi aai o Wabao
t
ipabao
i api n
|
naaio
l aai o la'pap l apao
Dni api n Dnaaio
V i
or taaio nnapap nnapao
i ni api n jr aaio jnaaio ipapap inapao
ui aoi n i333io i sasi o
S -
uapap 133030
3 pm aai o aai o apap 3030
? 'v
30V a a i c
aai o; 3030? apao
1
]
s pi n aai on aaier i
apspr i apapn
3pi n aai on
aai on
apapn ao3on
obi n "aaion cal on "3030FJ 'apapn
aoi a aaioj( aai o* 3030M
: - !
absoW
lapi* l a a i c l aa' w
l aoBC 13030*-
nr aoi n
V
J
nsaaion
j
r uaai on
t -
j : - t
r tsabaon
? : S S
nssbson
+ Z ~ Z'u t
l abi n i aai on
taaion
u o s o n i303n
nr aoi n r waaion nsaai on nsaoaon
, J
nsabapn
apis
T
aaios
:
33103 " ap3p3 * aoiaw
3310 3030
*33*10
>3030
laaho
i abap
033310
*
nsabap
s o w 3 3 i o a a s h e n s o s o a a o a o s
T
: * : : ~ : * i \ J
M6 (, 127. Put. XII. Perk V. ( III, 118.)
Kal. Kal. Nlphal. HiphiL
Pr aet 3 m.
0j> r a Dip;
o - Rn
3 f .
nna
nai p: n a ^ n
2 m. =.P-
nnf c
"*
r i hi pj ni a^pn
r f
2
Mp_ vm
j -
ni ai pj
ni a^pn
1.
Tiap. TIB n i a i p j T i a ^ n
PL 3.
1 0 g i nb
1
i ai pj i B ^ n
2 m. or iBp ana BniBipj Dn'ia-'pn
2 f .
W -
i nn
i ni ai pj l ni a-' pn
1. 13 p- u n a laiaips uia^pr t
Inf . aba
ai p
Bipn
OR*!
const.
ni p Bipn D^pn
Fut 3 m.
nip; D
1
^ D^p:
3 I Bipn Bipn B-pn
2 m.
Bi pn Bipn
B<pn
2 f . Bipn "Bipn e^pn
1. Dip* Dip*
B i
PI. 3 m. i ai p; i ai p; w p ;
3 f .
nr ai pn n:apn natr pn
2 m. iBipn i r i pn iB^pn
2 f . nr bi pn njajpn r wr pn
1.
T
wpi
Dip?
' = > ? ?
FtU. apoc. 6p
:
OR:
Imp m.
Dip Bipn
BE"
f .
i ai p 'Bipn ^ p n
PI. m. i ai p iBipn w p n
f . wnp nja^n njapn
Par t
op. na
Blpj D^B
f
187. PAS. XN. VtRB FR ( 117, 118. ) | 847
HophaL Polel. Polal. Kal.
a p i n OBi p OBhp
W
n a p i r t HBBi p naa' i p r u a
na pi n r n b i p paa *ip p)33
*
r m p w PBB'lp naa'ip DD3
:: -
r iap.in T i n a ' t p intjahp
i B p i n I BBI p l a a h p
anapjin n r i BBi p Qnaa'ip DFIJ3 -
\nap_in I f l . aa' i p ' JPBB' lp
1W-
v a p i n w a b i p
t
l 3BB
t
l p 133
113
a p j i n QB'lp
DBhp
T*
Dj JV aa'ip'; aa'ip';
r *
api n
DB' lpFj a a ' i p r i
m
npin aa'ipn aaipr i
re*
i Bp n n ^ BBl pr i -aaipr i
o-an
t
D p i * a a i p * oaSp T*
1Bpl" I BBi p^ '
l a e ' i p i
r uB^in nsabSpp nsaai pn
n r l ' o n
V J
l a p w i B B i p n i Bai pn
i3"lin
n r a p i n n j B B i p n njablpr i
n D ^ r a n
t v }
* o p i 3 * OBi pJ * a a i p j
T*3
i ? :
QBi p
TO
" BBl p
v a
I BB\ P
w a
n j a a i p -
BJ31B DBi p a DB' l pB
R '
24# } 127. P . XIV. Verhfo. ( 120,121.)
KaL Nlphal. Plel.
Pr aet. 3 m. MS B J MS B
3
r iMxa
J IT
nttsa'}
*
NST I B
2 m.
na s a
T f
nMxaa
T
n i a
2
r a s a
V T
nttsai n s a
1. Y I MS B
* V f
VJMXtU
V I MS B
PL 3.
I MS B
IT
1 MXB3 1 MS B
2 m.
B D MS B BLLMSBJ BnNSB
2
1.
I N I A
i i i a
r
I N 2 B 5
l i a i a j
y
J RI KI B
1 3 K S B
In abs.
ttl sa
T
MS B
const.
Msa
t
Mxan MS B
Fut 3 in. MSB-<
f
MS B
1
T
MSB'
3 f .
Msan
T
(tsan
" J
Msan
2 m.
Msan H2BFI
r
Msan
2
T J
notan
ittsan wsa.n
1,
MS BM MXBM MS BM
PI. 3 m.
*MSB?
t
V
,
i t *
1 MS B*
3
wa x a n r uKsan
' J
nsMsan
2 m* m a n
t r
iKxan
V " f
iMsan
2
naxkan
I t
niMsan f i3Msan
s
1 .
" MS XH ' M S B J * MS B 3
Fut. apoc.
I mp. m.
MS B MSBn MS B
f.
* J
>MXB
MSBn ' MS B
PI. m.
1 MS B iMsan 1 MS B
f .
g
. 1 3 MS B
V
| V #
| 1
TOKSBn nsMia
v
j &r t
MSiB
* w a
1ST Put. XIV. Vtrbt &. ( | 0, t i l . ; I 49
Puat. Hiphil. Hophal. riithpael.
M2Q
ar s an Msan Kxann
n* s o
t
r w- s an
naxan
t ?
naxap' n
naxa nMsan
w
naxan
^ *#
#
nt t s ann
r
nttsa nr ctan r wxan naxann
- n*s a - pa s a n Yiakar i - paxann
i xa w" i a n mxar i i'*xar in
%
ont t sa
j
Dnt aan
#,
anaxan
Bnt t sar n
1PM3B I ndi a n
V
t#
,
] p*xan jPKxar in
i 3 sa l i x s a n
niMsan i j axann
" - T
x a n
Msa M-san ttsan
* 5 *
Msann
Msa** t r xai MSB' xan-
r
m a n K-xan ttsan ttSBPFI
Msan tt-san
Kxan
Msann
T \ {
wxan
i *i s an
\
> *sar i
nt xann
ttsati M*>sa MXBN MSBPTT
* "S
: s j
i n a i <mxa-
j v
I K X B P ; ;
nsttsan
V V
r
nMxap
5 *%
n wx a n
naMsapp
V
i s a n
i t r xan
t ~
m a n
1 K X B P P
D3MkaF) r oeoan nattsan nsKkapn
v
K S B J
r v *
* T t t
* V F S .
ttsa:
* V " !
1
Msans
- i -
a xa n axann
w x a n
-
"ssar in
i ar son
laxanVi
nsttsan
V -
x
nsttsann
* v - , .
t t saa
* :
a- xaa * x a a Msana
i
260 187. Pm. XV. rrbt f l V ($ 182,183.)
Kal. NlphaL Pl el Po*L
P r a e t 3 m. rfjM nV3
3 a n S a nni i aa n n Va n r & i
JIT : : * ? * RS
2 m. r r a t v ? a a i r ^ a r v ^ a
2 1 j vVa n ^ a a r i ^ a n ^ a
t s
i . " r yt f a r y ^ a a v y ^ a v r j p a
PI. 3. ' iVa iVaa i Va Vi a
2 m. n n ^ a a n s a ' s B n ^ a Bi r Va
2 i i vVa' i n ^ M i n ^ a
I . i r V' a l a ^ a a l a ^ ' a i r V a
t * :* " ' " *.
i nf. abs. a Va r f t a a a'Va r f t a
cons t ni ba* r f r a n n'Va riVa
*
T
' !i
T u t 3 m. n V r aV>a? nVa
1
n Va
1
3 n Va n a Va n a Va n n Va n
2 m. a ^ a ' n a a n aVar i n ^ a n
2 *an 4 a n ^ a n "Van
i . a Va * n ^ a a Va aVast
V V V V V "
Pi . 3 m. ska* iVa-> i Va
1
1V?
1
* t
3 a a - t f a n n a ^ ' a n w V a n w V a n
* v s * . * * T v ~ : * :
a m. i Van i ^ a n aVan i Van
: * - i t
2 a a ^ a n a a ^ a n a a ^ a n a r f a m
* V T V * * V - J V {
l nba a n b a a a f e a aVaa
Fut. apoc- by
Imp. m. a b a a Va a nVa.
$ <gn ^a
PL m. <fca w r j nVa
n a ^ a ' a r f f a a a r f f a
P a r t a c t a i a a>aa a | a n a ^ a a
pass.
127. PAR. XV. Ferfcrib. ( 122,123.) 261
HiphiL Hophal. Hithpael. HithpaleL
nVan
n n Va n
: i
r r S a n
*n^an
i b a n
Bn * Wn
j r i ^ a n
l a^an
r 6 a n n Va n n
n n S a n n n Va r i n
* ^ f J
4
i r a n ^ a n n
i v Va n n ^ a r i n
v ^ a n
i Va n Ha r i r i
a i r ma n Bi y>Sann
v H f i n i n ^ a r i n
w S a n i r ^ a n n
m n n a n
<r -J -
r m n n a n
* -i - j
n^nn' n
n r ^ n o n
o n ^ n F i i i n
V -I -
n Va n n b a n r f t a n n
rfsan riSan r f t a n n
*
m n n o n
I - !
siVa*
n Va n
n f a r i
" San
w *
' t~
r u^an
r v
i b a n
n r S a n
1^53
n V v n Va / p
n Va n n Va n n
rfjan nV) _nn
$an %n n
r k a a n ^ a n *
tec i Van*
* - :
n a ^ a n w ^ a n n
,V J t v J
an i Va n n
w n r V a n n
^ t t V
nba a nVa na
n j i wr a j ?
n j n n o n
n i n n o n
v - i - i
n i n n s ' M
V *3 - S V
sinno
1
"
n n n o n
-J -
s i i n n o a
V "! -f
-I*}?
n Va n
>an
iVan
w S a n
* V ? "
r &aa nban
r f o nn
"Vann
i Wi n
:
n a f a n n
n Va n a
" l n n o n
i i n n a n
n i n n r i a
K
iR9 & \9H \
f
Put. XvlL Verbs
a t 187- ( U4J.C.) femul v ( m . 3.
Kal. Hiphll. Kal. Niphal.
Hiphit.
Pr aet.
SIT
tT
nTin
w
MTS3
V f
Mi33 K-pn
3
nn- i -
J#T
nnTi n
:
natos
: IT
nB3
* |
w a n
2 m. r v V
T 9
i r nl n
f
(&)
PMQ3
r f Nsn
*
2 r pT
t
i r ni n
n*i33 n x s n
1. Tin
11
f
-r ynin
-ntttM -n f en
PL 3. I T i Ti n
1KB3 IMBf l
2 in.
Bn m
on'n'in
V
Bn*B3
Bnetf n
2
v r i i
jnn'in
}na3 jnsttan
1.
*
l i n i n 13X33 i 3 i n
t
Inf . abs.
r iT Vf f l3
tt'f f lsn
<r
t?n
const. n i T
:
r ni n
Fut. try* n*r n i 40B-
a r r yn r ni n
NBn
2 m. nTn nni n
*n
2 i Tn
n i n
- aon
:
1. !TT* n-n
OT3K
*r V
PI. 3 m.
<nv
5
IJOO;
3 n r TD nr nHn
nsttisn
v
2 m. i r n n i n
w e n IK-BPI
2 nr Tm r enin
f V
n wa n
I. HT3 n^u
*#iB3
i t opoc.
Imp. m. r n* r ni n
ia
T!
nin ^i s
PL DL I T Wi n
i r i s
:
n r V
f V J
r e^'in
-r V
Pf cr t act n r r
nni a Mf 3
" Ms t o
*
1 5 # XVHL Vtrbi PAR. XIX* ^ 253
9
m
- } IP ami tii. ( 124. S. e.) Verb ttii. ($ 184. 4.) \
ZKt
Kal. Hiphit. Kal. HiphU. Hopbal. ||
Pr aet. ntjD n a n
MS t r a n
3 i n
T
3 f. n n w n n a n n l
*
nST371 n a a n
2 m.
(as ri)?)
n^t an
n a
T
n a n n n a a n
T \
2 f. n ^ a n r t N3
T
1. T ^ t a n T 3 n e o n
#
PL 3.
<ian
i 3
r
w a n i 3i n
2 m. o r r t s n
DPN3 o n a a n
If *1
2 jn-' Bn
1
1 . n r e n
133 l i a - o n
- 1
Inf . abs. n b s
**13
const.
:
n h a n
t t ' 3^' 13 a*nr t
Tut. nta*
v
n a * i a * an*
3 f . n e n n a n a i a n t r a n
2 m. n a n n a n Khan i r a n
2 f . lapj
whan
T
1. n o * n a
PL 3 m. IB* IB*
IK' ia
1
'
W 3 i
n xa i "
3 n s ^ a n
t V
n r a n
T V *
n s a a n n s ^ a n
2 m. 1DP
<ian
i * a n w a n
2 n r a n
v
w a n
f V
* *
1. riD3 "S3
N133
4, ,
3?
Fut. apoc. o :
3*1
Imp. m. HD3
n a n
t r t s r a n
(asri i )
" a n
Ni i
T
w a n
T
PL m. *i an
I K' S
w a n
n r n r ?
t 4
T
1 1
Par t act nD3 n a a M3 t T3 B
M
Mann
*
pas IS. ""
-r
Ver bs f inal Pattahh act
Maac.
Vaip
Fem.
nVtaj?
Fem. Segh.
pass*
Vwg nViap
Tseri act "=i
r ao-
Hholem act
nf t- ma'
1
*r
9 gutt.
act.
py>
npr i r ip?;
5 gutt. act yaa nyaa
nr
n ? f &
b
act <=P. nap
hh
act nVh nVSandr r Vi
pass.
-&
*
r w a
JVivhal.
regular nVapa r tap.a
b gutt.
jaw nnaya nnay'a
V VVV
99 303 naoa
b Dip; naipa
put.
nbapa regular ^sp.a nbapa nVapja
t(
19
^- oa ni na a nanaa
V V *
ft n^aa
* ? IT
n'jaa
POEL o f 9 9 aai'ea naal ea naal ea
*
*r *
Fem. Fem. Segh.
nVoj ?
nWap
r n i -
nyno
naj?
r f etand
n- i ba
nam-
npy;
b
m
nbapa
f r r a y j
naoa
naipa
r egular
V
ft
POEL of 99
r egular
Pual.
^ j ? a n b a p a
n n a y a
v vy*v
Piel.
VBJ J B FTAPA
Ti aa ni r i aa nanaa
' -r : T : IT V v *
n Va a n ^ a a
aai oa naal ea naal ea
r egular
& gutt.
0
99
ft
i y
Hiphil.
^ a p a n ^ a p a
f r f a s a
naea
D-SB n o - p a
i - aya
ana
ni a y a
r egular
Hophal.
Va p a n b a p a
r egular
Hithpael.
Vapna nVap.na r iVaj?na
127. PAR. XX. Participles. ( 125.) 2B5
Plur. masc. Plur. fem. Masc. Fem.
B^Bj? niVaj? Dec. VII. 6. Dec.X. XIII.
niVibj? in. c. x.
b W r toa* v. . xi. xiii.
r v n i r i n . c. x .
nipsj nipy't vi l x. xiii.
cyan r hyaa vil. X. xiii.
a^aj? nia^ i. x.
a^> nto ix. a. x.
o ^ i Va n ' n V a III. C. x .
Niphal.
n^Dj?3 n. xi. xiii.
D^aiD iTllBJJ II. XI. XIII.
B^aeo ntaco VIII. X.
B^pi nha'ipi III. . X.
Piel.
b^bjjb ni^tsp_a vn.c. x. xiii.
B*aWaa rrtanaa vil. x. xiil
a^Vaa ni^aa ix. x.
caatea. ntaatea vii.6. x. xiii.
PuaL
cVaf ja niVapa 11. xlxiii.
Hipkil
b^bjjb rrt^apa i. x. xiil
b^ttwb nhnnwa l x. xiil
tr aoa ntaoa vill. X.
ar a^a ma^a ill. x.
HophaL
B^BpB n'lbDpB IL XLXIII.
Hithpael.
B^epjna n^a^na VII. e. x. xni.
256 127. PAR. XXI. Verbt with nffix-prokcmt. (6 126.)
Suffixes, Sing. 1. 2 mas. 2 fern. 3 mas. 3 fern.
K a L
$ *oVap riVcap "l-ap
R,5t3
P.
Pr aetf " ' ' * i nVopj "
r ?
3 f- VriVR W t y V g t y
- ill - - **
m - - 4 $ ^
i . ?pp$Bj > sprfcop. v n ^ a p t r n b a p
pi. 3. qf tap "^Bf > i ni ^ap n ^ u p
2 m. "oin^ap i mr ^ap r nn^ap
i . ' J p ^ a p . ^paJ>op n n i ^ a p n i j ^ a p
Inf .
!
TO
fe-
' top
*k*z
Fut,
3 nt with
epenth.:
PI. 3.
tf pBp? ^bap-
"^ap? w^opi n^ap-
Fut,
3 nt with
epenth.:
PI. 3.
i \ ^ P
:
al ht f
o' f aj p; : ! j ^Bp. ' !
HD^api
^ o p . 1 i nf t ap-
n^ap-
n^a pi
Imp
\=?&P, -
-
Pul > #Bp ,r jbap
^ a p ^Bj? nVap
H v A - f u t ^ a p ^ - q p - i j ^ B p : w V - o p ; n ^ a p -
127. PAR. XXI. Verbs with strfix-pronouns. ( 126.) 257
Phr. 1. 2 mas. 2 fern. 3 mas. 3 fern.
DsVap.
WJJOJJ
ODnVap
13$SP,
nnV'ap
*jnbap
nnbap
v i t o f l j
i:n?ap \
OTf cap.
r ^o p ,
. isTVap
ar nbap-
BDlbap
ttM&ap
jSTlVap DVtJj>
Dlbap
. mnbap
DisVtsp.
pr f cpp
^
u
i
pnbap
^ B p
o: ap;
DSbap,
l ^ E k y t
IsSap
1
) ns^Dp
-1
v t *:
abap;;
ir iVap
1
; oyiVap?
a^aph
- 5 %
obap
*
i t f ap nabap
^ i >
o^ns p; o^ap
1
^;t3p*
CM 1*7. PAIL XXI I . Vai, FFT wiA njfixa. ((, 186 A.)
Suffixes. Sing. 1. 2 mas. 3 mas. Plur. 3 mas.
Kal P r a e t
3 I
2 m.
1.
PL 3.
h f . Ti t o? a n i n y H S i ? ! o n' o y
-S ' i ' I N ? ) * '*
F u t 3 m. " a t f r a t o y . J Sj j v I n t e y
lnT,\ 5 -
i . r t t ey* i n o ? o ' a y a
I v V v; v r ; v
PI. 3 m. 1310*1 s j i ' OR i n i o r D i ' o r
I M P M.
. . . - I
i n ? *
037
I F
PTEI PRAET
F UT 3 M.
3 m. with )
epenth. a $
flVt
*
SJ1S
a t e :
i n i s
i n h i
13?.?'!
w x
Oi l '
1
- t
Hiph. Pr a e t " n r j s H m a n Ds n
" I ^ 3 "l
n
-
"3tBJ ?|TW
"3n'tw
on"?) __
^r vf a? >
t j i f pt e: ?
oi i os s p' oy
i n? DC7
* t * *
i no? or t w
" * - f T
SrrtD* >
, -
k V
i ^ > DJTTDP
i r nvw > *
-I
w t o )
r n r i n
.
n 1
i n i S ? o t t o ?
1 3 8 , 1 2 9 . NOUNS ; GENERAL CLASSIFICATION, ETC. 9 5 9
NOUNS.
* 128. General remarks
1. Most nouns in Hebr ew ar e der ived f r om ver bs;
and in gener al have f or their ground-f orms the inf initive
mood or par ticiples. Ther e is a compar atively small
number of nouns which ar e pr imitive, but they conf orm in
their f lexion to the usual laws which r egulate those de-
r ived f r om ver bs.
2. Declension in Hebr ew nouns dif f er s much f r om de-
clension in Gr eek and Latin. The plural and dual num-
ber s ar e, indeed, distinguished by appr opr iate endings add-
ed to the gr ound-f or ms; but case, pr oper ly consider ed, is
not marked by any peculiar ity of inf lection in the noun it-
self . For the most par t, it is designated by pr epositions
and the construct state of the pr eceding noun ( 135).
The plural and dual endings, however , the suf f ixes, and
in shor t, whatever incr eases the original ground-f orm of
the noun and shif ts the place of its tone, occasion a var ie-
ty of changes in the vowel-points and in the f or ms of
liouns, which may not unaptly be called declensions.
} 129. Nouns ; general classification
t Nouns, like ver bs ( 69), ar e either primitive or deriv
eUtve, Those of the latter class ar e divided into verbals,
or those der ived f rom ver bs; and denominatives, or those
der ived f r om nouns. Thr ee classes of nouns may there*
f or e be r eckoned.
260 129* NOUNS DERIVED FKOM VERBS) ETC.
/ . Nouns primitive.
11. Nouns primitive ar e principally those which desig-
nate animals, plants, metals, numbers, member s of the hu-
man and animal body, and some of the gr eat objects of the
natural wor ld. But among the names of all these, ar e
some of ver bal der ivation.
t2. In r espect to the form of pr imitive nouns, it is not
distinguished f r om that of ver bals ( 62. 2). They ar e
tr eated, in their inf lections, in the same manner as if they
wer e derived. Only a knowledge of etymology, ther ef or e,
can enable the student to deter mine whether a noun is
pr imitive or der ivative; and in some cases, it may be doubt-
f ul to the best etymologist, whether a noun belongs to the
f ir st, second, or thir d class above specif ied.
II. Nouns derived from verbt.
f 3. This is altogether the mo6t numerous class of
nouns. Ver y many of them appear to be der ived either
f rom par ticiples, or f rom the inf initive mood. The f or m-
er most commonly denote the subject or object of action
or passion (nomen agentis vel patientisy, the latter denote
action or passion (nomen actioms vel passionis). The f ir st
class ar e concretes, being used to designate some being or
thing; the second ar e abstracts, denoting simply action or
passion.
Such is the general division of meaning in verbal noons, which re-
sults from their origin, or the manner in which they are derived. But
usage has introduced many exceptions to this general rule, so that the
meaning of the two classes of verbals in question is in some instances
confounded; participial nouns often taking the signification of nouns de-
rived from the infinitive; and vice versa.
4 The usual f orms of the inf initive and par ticiple ar e
ver y seldom r etained in the nouns der ived f r om them; but
1 2 9 . NOUNS DERIVED FROM VERBS, ETC* $61
f or the sake of var iety and distinction, f orms dif f ering f rom
the usual inf initive and par ticiple ar e employed as the
f or ms of nouns and adjectives, in or der that the two spe-
cies of words may be r eadily distinguished f rom each other .
ID respect to the derivation of verbal nouns, as coming from the in-
finitive and participle, which theory was adopted and exhibited in the
former edition of this grammar, see appendix D.
III. Nouns denominative.
1*5. By these ar e meant nouns der ived f r om other
nouns either primitive or ver bal
E. g. t n h a vine-dresser from the primitive a vineyard;
eastern from the verbal j) the east.
1*6. Denominatives ar e gener ally analogous to ver bals
as above descr ibed in their f orms, and also in r egar d to
the signif ications connected with those f orms.
The f ollowing ar e some of the modes of f orming them
f r om other nouns.
(a) By adding to ver bals the masculine and f eminine
terminations and in*- .
This is the usual mode of forming the following species of nouns;
viz. ordinals, as sir, sixth ; patronymics and national denomina-
tions, as a Moabite, from an Israelite from
&c. Several adjectives also are formed in this manner; as fem.
strange, from ^ 3 a stranger ; first, from &c.
NOTE. The addition of Yodh commonly occasions some change be-
sides that which results from shifting the place of the tone. E. g.
from three j *373^ from "p?3^ the right hand. To the fem-
inine n~ and plurals D"
,
_ and ni it is sometimes added without a
change, and sometimes with one; as Vjaya a Naamathite;
D^ina, a man of Bahurim ; 1111125, VihSP a man of Ana-
thoth ; ^rnDfif an Ephrathite, from Composite patronymics are
commonly divided, and the article inserted before the second noun; as
Benjamiie, from ; or the first noun is dropped, a*
a Benjamite.
35
2 6 3
1 3 0 . NOUNS COMPOSITE AND PROPER, ETC*
(6) By adding the termination , which is usually
of the f eminine gender .
E. g. princeps, n'W&^principium. Words of this form are
sometimes defectively written, as nirat for FPipX.
(c) Rar ely by adding the terminations f t-., 5T
r
,
and
E. g. a lion from fire-offering from a
deceiver from ; ^tia a treasury from t
* 130. Nouns composite and proper.
1. Composite nouns ace ver y r ar ely f ound in Hebr ew,
except in proper names. A f ew however occur, which
ar e made up of two nouns, or of a noun and a par ticle.
E. g. rnlbVtt *= nV3 ^2fc shade qf death ; worthless from
not and profit.
2. Pr oper names in their f ormation f ollow the gener al
analogy of ver bals as above given. Veiy many of them
are composite, and consist usually of two nouns, or of a
noun and a ^rerb.
E. g. 32} Benjamin, or o of my right hand ; tTp^lrF Jehoiaktm,
or Jehovah will exalt.
NOTE. TO the first word in composite proper names a Yodh is
usually added, as Gabriel or man of God, from and bfij; *
sometimes a Van, as Samuel or name qf God, from Ott and Vtt.
The name of God, either bfij or rrin^, forms the beginning or the
termination of a great multitude of Hebrew proper names.
131. Nouns ; gender '
tThe Hebr ew has only two gender s, viz. the mascu-
line and f eminine. These ar e distinguished sometimes by
the f orm, and sometimes by the signif ication of wor ds.
1 3 1 , NOUNS; GENDER* 263
I. Gender distinguished by form.
1*1. In gener al, nouns ar e masculine which end in one
of the original radical letter s of the wor d.
t2. The feminine is distinguished by adding to the
masculine the f ollowing terminations.
(a) H- ; as ^ 0 a king, f em. a queen.
(b) H simply, in wor ds ending with a vowel or quies-
cent letter . This f or m is unf r equent
E. g. a tart, fem. nat an; ' w , fem. ; toVe, fem. ntb>
(
Q &c.
(cj I V
o r
f t-* i
n
words ending with a moveable con-
sonant The latter f orm occurs af ter guttur als.
E. g. "nDjs, fem. rntSpj; yniD, fem. nsni n &c.
NOTE. The endings in b and c are in theory the same, because the
vowels in the latter are furtive, and are inserted merely to facilitate
the pronunciation of two successive consonants. ( 59. 2. a.)
3. The following are uncommon feminine terminations.
() K- ; as 3$, by an Aramaeism for natp.
() n . ; as poetic for FHJ3t.
(c) ri-s with the proper vowel Pattahh, and with the tone on the
Ultimate ; as 8 ^ 3 emerald.
II. Gender distinguished by signification.
t4. Nouns which designate objects like the f ollowing,
ar e masculine, though they have a f eminine termination.
() Names of men; as Judah.
() Offices of men; as a governor.
(c) Nations; as ft'Hi'P the nation of Judah.
(d) Rivers; as SfS&ftt Jhnana.
t5. Nouns which designate objects like the f ollowing,
$xe feminine, though they have a masculine termination.
() Names of women; as Vlj'n Rachel.
() Office or relations of women; as mother.
(c) Countries; as Assyria.
{d) Towns; as "3*2Tyre.
2 0 4
1 3 1 . NOUNS; GENDER.
() Female beasts; as ^nfit a*he-at.
( f ) Members of the body by nature double ; as the ear.
NOTE 1. The same word may be masculine in one meaning, and
feminine in another; as Judah or the Jema, masculine; but
VJ*n? the country of Judea, feminine.
NOTE 2. There are some nouns which are feminine, although des-
titute of any distinctive sign of this gender, either in form or significa-
tion ; as 1 fits a well; a talent &c. These can be learned only
from practice.
III. Nouns qf common gender.
t6. A consider able number of nouns are of common
gender . Such ar e gener ally the names of beasts, birds,
metals &c.
These nouns are mostly masculine as to farm. Some of them are
more commonly employed as masculine nouns;others more frequent-
ly as feminine. These can be learned only from practice.
NOTE. What is of the neuter gender in the western languages, is
generally designated in Hebrew by the feminine; as daugh-
ter qf Tyre, L e. city of Tyre.
7. Nouns of the dual number ar e univer sally of com-
mon gender .
IV. Gender qf the pUtral.
t8. In the plural, the appearance of nouns as to gen-
der is in many cases dubious. A considerable number of
masculine nouns f orm their plural as if they wer e f emi-
nine ; while many f eminine nouns have plurals of the mas*
culine f orm. ( 133. 4 )
E. g. masc. 3K a father, plural ntefit. Fem. wheat, plural
6nan kc.
f
NOTE. The gender of the plural, let the form be as it may, is with
few exceptions the same as that of the singular. Some words exhibit
both the masculine and feminine forms of the plural; but the gender
of both forms is the same, viz. it is the same as that of the singular.
1 3 2 . NOUNS ; FORMATION OF THE FEMININE*
295
132* Nouns ; formation of feminine nouns
The addition of the feminine terminations ( 131.2) to the masculine
forms, usually occasions some change in the vowels of the masculine,
because these terminations affect the tone-syllable of the ground-form.
/. Changes occasioned by the feminine ending 51-.
1. The masculine suf f er s the same changes when it r e-
ceives the f eminine ending PI_, as when it takes a light
suf f ix beginning with a vowel ( 136. 4. a.); because in
both cases the tone is moved one place f orward. These
changes ar e as f ollows.
() Generally the penultimate vowel of the ground-
f or m, if it be mutable, is dr opped; as f em.
(56.2.)
() Sometimes the ultimate vowel, if it be mutable, is
dr opped, especially in nouns and par ticiples of Dec. VII;
as njhlD, f em. f ttpto. ( 56. 3.)
(c) In nouns of Dec. VIII, the ultimate long vowel is
usually exchanged f or a shor t one; as DH, f em. S123H;
p a f em. npjl &c. ( 54. 5.)
2. In nouns of Dec. VI, the f eminine ending H is ap-
pended to the original f orm of the masculine, and not to
the usual Segholate f or m. ( 143.)
E. g. Masc. original form fem. naVtt; fem,
fem. &c. In this case also the .original vow-
el of the ground-form is usually shortened.
NOTE. A few nouns of Dec. V form their feminine as if they be-
longed to Dec. VI; as fem. as if from a form
fem. fem. nsajT&c.
3* In nouns of Dec. IX, the f eminine termination Pl_ is
1% *
substituted f or the masculine ending f i-; as HEP, f em. f t&V
NOTE. In a few nouns of Dec. Ill, Hholem impure is exchanged in
the feminine for Shureq; as plfljo, fem. fem.
&c. (6 62. 4.)
266 132. NOUNS ; FORMATION OF THE FEMININE*
4. The f ollowing table exhibits the usual f or mation of
f eminines in SI
Hue. Fem. Muc. Fan.
I. DID nDiD
VI.
ptr i
"PI
Tinnn nahnnn
*
K?
V T
r f ci*
VJ
IL MSID SWS'IB
T T
T*
n r s
III.
i>iTS h^ns-
J
VII.
n- i >
nr nf c
m
nj?ina IjJ.'lB nijsia
nai s?
N
n
f |
n n
una
F
swna
T?
n
*
D-J-B
na-pa
VIII.
en
*
nan
" "
IV.
v .
nsD
V.
IK
1?. H3S
T
K
sw
- T -
pn
m
VI. $ B
rraba
T?
ma
733
- V
' r waa U
r m
IBK nna*
k
/S m o
n!> IX.
w
V F
r
9
nVa*
* : t
n*")a
n nn
' ! *
II. Changes occasioned 6y the feminine endings n, r i i , n
x
.
5. The f eminine ending f t appended to wor ds ending
with a vowel or quiescent letter , pr oduces no change in
the vowels of the gr ound-f or m.
E. g. man, fern. nt an; fem. &c.
The above masculine forms may perhaps be considered as having
originally terminated in a moveable and
n
, as fittaft, ; in which
case the original form of the Segholate feminines would be ngs&n and
Sec below.
1 3 2 . NOUNS ; FORMATION OF THE FEMININK. 2 6 ?
6. The f eminine endings n__ and (like !l_) usually
cause the penultimate r owel of the ground-f orm to f all
away, if it be mutable, although they do not shif t the
place of the tone. The f ollowing changes take place al-
so in the final vowel
(a) With n -
9
f inal Qamets and Tser i, if mutable, ar e
commonly changed into Seghol, through the inf luence of
the f ur tive vowel ( 60. 3). Final Tser i, however , not
unf requently remains.
E. g. 109, fem. n ^ 9 ; bqip, fem. ft&ip; n, fern, .
(6) With r i-. af ter a guttural, the change is into Pat*
tahh. ( 60. 3 note.)
E. g. fem. ?%, fem. n ? i .
(c) If the f inal vowel of the ground-f orm be impure,
it is commonly exchanged f or the corresponding pure and
mutable vowel.
E. g. fem. ; * ^ 4 , fem. n ^ l ; fem.
Segholate rfigna. In the impure i remains.
NOTE. In such cases as fem. ; imsnns, Segholate he.
the immutable vowels \ and } are exchanged for others which are pure
and mutable, in order to bring the words within the appropriate forms
of feminine Segholates, which usually require the final vowel of the
ground-form to be mutable. See on this subject 62. 4,5, and 117.3.
7. The Segholate f orm of the f eminine appears most
f requently in the construct state; while the ending H is
more common in the absolute state.
In feminine infinitives and participles, the endings n ^ and r u are
altogether the most frequent.
NOTE 1. The Segholate forms of the feminine are, for the most
part, attached only to masculines of the second, fifth, and seventh de-
clensions. A very few are fonned from nouns of the first, third, fourth,
268 1 3 3 . NOUNS; FORMATION OF TBI PLURAL.
and eighth; bat none iroin the sixth and ninth, because their forms are
such, that the terminations and n _ cannot be attached to them.
NOTE 2. Those Seghoiates which come from Dec. VHI are formed
by dropping the reduplication of the final vowel; as fem.
nxjixnit, but plural ; so also ttW fix, Segholate rrvy). So
patronymics, as/Dlftta a Moabite, fem. Segholate rTOftto. See no. 6
above.
NOTE 3. Some feminine Seghoiates ending in a quiescent letter,
imitate the Syiiac form of Seghoiates (Dec. VI), and throw the vowel
upon the final syllable; as nitto instead of cto instead of
&c. ( 60. 4.)
The reverse of this is the Arabic form of the Segholate, which
drops the furtive vowel. Some Hebrew feminine participles imitate
this; as rH^
s
, &c. unless these may rather be referred to the
2 peis. sing. fem. praeter of a Poel form of these verbs. ( 100 a.)
183. Nouns ; formation of the plural
f The Hebr ew, like the Gr eek, has thr ee numbers, viz.
the singular, dual, and plural The dual, however , is much
less f r equent than in Gr eek.
The plurals of masculine and f eminine nouns ar e usually*
but not always, distinguished by appr opr iate f orms. For
the vowel-changes which occur in the f ormation of the
plural, see 136. 4. a.
I. Plural masculine.
t l . The plural of masculine nouns is usually f or med by
annexing to the singular the f ollowing terminations.
(a) f c\_; as MD, plur. B W.
(b) D simply, in some wor ds ending in 'L.; as ^53,
plur. E'HSJJ: but sometimes D'
,
_.; as plur. D^. -
NOTE. . The plural ending is sometimes written defectively, as
63^n for ($
24
- 2.)
2. In poetry, and in the later Hebrew, the plural is occasionally
formed with the following terminations; viz. (a) "p-; as plur.
Prov. 31:3 &c. (6) ; as plur. Jer.22:14; and per-
1 3 3 . NOUNS ; FORMATION OF TFLX PLURAL* 269
baps (e) ; as ft, plur. n q Ps. 46: 9 for D
%
iq. The two first forms,
*iz. in a and b
r
are Aramaean.
II. Pluralfemmint,
1*3. The plural of f eminine nouns is f or med in the f ol-
lowing manner.
(a) By changing the terminations t"U, , H- of the
f eminine singular into r f i.
E. g. riyn, plur. rri-tfn; n ^ \ , plur. ; ngfcq, plur^
nt oi t j .
NOTE. The n of the feminine ending singular is, In a few cases,
retained in the plural, as if it were a radical; as masc. fem. r \ \ \ ,
fem. plur. rrinir'i.
(b) By annexing r h to those f eminines which, in the
singular, have a masculine f or m ( 131. 5 note 2); as
-) 3, piur. ninaa.
(c) By changing r T- into f ih*-, and f ll into
as r v w , piur. nT- p*; r v o V a , plur. r r t *$Va.
NOTE 1. The plurals in the case c, appear to be derived from
obsolete forms of the singular in iT*-. and . Nouns of these classes
sometimes also form their plural after the usual manner; as n ^ n ,
plur. DTj':n and n i n n n ; n wt, plur. o^maT.
NOTE 2. The plural ending of the feminine form also, is sometimes
written defectively; as rfrp for ni ^p &c.
III. Peculiar forms qfthe plural
t4. A ver y consider able number of masculine nouns f orm
their {Jural in n'l; while vice versa, many f eminine nouns
f orm their s in D\ - ; but in either case the gender of the
plural is the same-as that of the singular. ( 131. 8.)
E. g. 3* father, plur. ,/bffor* ; fem. plur. fem.
Nouns of this description can be distinguished only by practice. The
present dubious appearance of these words may probably have been
occasioned by the fact, that in the early stage of the Hebrew many
36
970
134* NOUNS ; FORMATION OF THFT DUAL.
words were used both in the masculine and feminine sense, without any
variation qf form; like ^93 in the Pentateuch, which is employed to
express both puer and pueUa, as Gen. 37:2 &c. Gen. 24:14, 16 &c. in
which latter cases the Qeri gives See Gesenius' Lehigeb. 124.4.
1*5. Some nouns, especially those of common gender ,
exhibit two plurals as to f orm, viz. D"
1
-- and n't; but the
gender of both is the same as that of the singular. ( 131.
8 note.)
E. g. 513 a year, pkir. CSS? and rriStt? &c.
t6. Some nouns are f ound only with a plural f orm, al-
though their meaning is of ten the same as if they wer e in
the singular.
E. g. Q':o the facej Cft* days, also a year, or time generally.
f 7. Many nouns have a collective or plural sense, though
their f orm is that of the singular number.
E. g. f\tefowl; P|0 children ; flock* &c.
In Arabic very many nouns are collectives, or nouns of multitude,
with the form of the singular. They commonly belong to the phralis
fractut.
8. In a f ew words, the plural ending D
1
*-. is superadd-
ed to the plural ending P
1
!.
E. g. high-place, plur. rnJDB ancl dTpaa, construct .
The Arabic has also a phralis pluralism, or plural formed from a
plural in. a similar manner.
134. Nouns ; formation of the dual.
f 1. The dual is usually f or med by adding the termina-
tion to the f or ms of the singular in the f ollowing man-
ner .
() To masculines without change ; as DV*, dual -
() To f eminines in af ter changing the f inal H into
n (40. 2> as nST, dual
} 13 4 . NOUNS ; FORMATION o f THE DUAL. 2 7 1
NOTE 1. In the case of Segholate noons of Dec. VI, the dual
ending is appended to the original form of the singular; as orig-
inal form dual Compare 132. 2.
NOTE 2. The following are unusual and probably antiquated forms
of the dual; viz. (a) ^ and *}_ ; as and a proper name
Gen. 37:17. 2 K. 6: 13; (6) - ; as Ezek. 13:18 by apocope for
; (c) 63-; as SnS'v Ezek. 46:19 Kethibh, by contraction for
00 -s >
88
1 Chr. 6:68 a proper name, which is
also written tbs^-and C3 *
Most of these forms occur only in proper names; and the proof that
they are actually duals rests partly on the variety of orthography,
(which is sometimes plainly dual, as 633*, 633*?, t3*V? above), and
partly on comparison with duals of the kindred languages.
NOTE 3. The vowel changes which occur in the formation of the
dual, are the same is in the plural; for which see 136.4. a.
t2. The dual in Hebr ew is used principally to designate
uch objects as ar e double either by nature or by custom.
E. g. 63? ^ ^ hands; 63*J?*3 a pair of shoes &c.
NOTE. The names of members of the human body, which by na-
ture are double, have also a plural as well as dual form; but the dual
is generally taken in a literal, and the plural in a Jigurative sense ; as
hands, rttas handles,
| 3. In a f ew instances, the dual f orm stands instead of
the plural f or a gr eater number than two.
E. g. 63*^359 272? six wings ; ID? three teeth.
It hardly needs to be remarked, that the dual is of course essen-
tially plural, requiring a plural verb, a4jective &c. In some cases, it
is difficult to show the reason of the dual form; as 63^H2Z mid-day &c.
Perhaps it is intensive.
NOTE. The words 63?L$ heavens and waters, though appar-
ently dual, are really plural. They are formed most probably like
Chaldee plurals from singulars in N. ; as Chaldee #, plur.
So probably in Hebrew, sing. plur. 63?fel; sing. N72, plwr.
They are declined like duals of Dec. II; see 161.
t4. The dual is of common gender and is f ound only
among nouns, and not among adjectives nor par ticiples.
5. The dual ending is sometimes annexed to the plural.
E.g. rrijain walls, dual EPnfc'n two walls fee. Compare 6 133. 8.
2 7 2 135. HOUIRS; CONSTRUCT STAT*.
PARADI GMS OF NOUNS ,
135* Nouns ; construct and suffix states.
J. Construct state.
t l . The Hebr ew has no cases, iir thef ense in which
we speak of cases in Latin and Gr eek. But when two
nouns come together , the second of which is to be trans-
lated as a genitive, this r elation is indicated, contrary to
the usual custom of other languages, by some change in
the first noun (if it be susceptible of change) instead of the
second. The f ir st noun sp situated, is said to be in regi-
men, or in the construct state ; while any noun not thus placed
bef or e a genitive is said to be in the absolute state.
Two noons in such a relation are supposed to be ottered nearly as
If they were one word; for which reason the first noon is usually con-
tracted in the utterance (if it be capable of contraction), so that the
stress of voice may be transferred to the second. ( 54. 2. c.)
t2. The f ollowing chaf es ar e pr oduced by the con-
str uct state in the consonants of the ground-f orm or abso-
lute state. For the vouw^-changes, see 136
() In all the classes of masculine nouns singular, the
construct is like the absolute f or m as to its consonants.
() Feminines singular in H change this ending into
( 40. 2); as h k t , const n t . Other f eminines
singular suf f er no change of their consonants.
(c) The plural ending CL. and the dual D
1
)- become
as 0*010, const - 0n0; D"JT, const .
(d) Plur als in HI suf f er no change of their consonants
in the constr uct state.
1 3 5 . NOUNS ; SUFFIX STATE.
2 7 3
For the manner of annexing paragogic 'letters to the absolute and
construct state of nouns, see 60.
II. Suffix state.
, t3. The suffix state is that f or m of nouns to which
ar e appended or suf f ixed f r agments of pronouns, equivalent
in signif ication to our pronominal adjectives in English.
E. g. D4D a hone, with suffix 1D3D his hone itc. So is equiva-
lent to the Latin vox ejus.
Pronouns, or fragments of pronouns, thus suffixed, may be consid-
ered as equivalent, in general, to nouns in the genitive case, andafrput-
ting the noun to which they are suffixed into a kind of regimen, or
construct state (l supra). Frequently the suffix-state requires the
same vowel-changes as the construct state, but not always; as may
be seen by consulting the paradigms of nouns, where both states are
exhibited. Of course it is proper to treat of these states separately,
and to employ different names to designate them.
4* Most of these suf f ixes, like those of ver bs ( 126.
2), cause the tone of the wor d to which they ar e append-
ed to be moved f or war d, and of cour se produce a change
in the vowel-points. For such changes, see 136 and the
notes on the sever al paradigms.
5. Noun-suf f ixes, like those of ver bs ( 126. 6), have
gener ally thr ee dif f er ent f or ms, adapted to the ending or
number of the word to which they ar e appended.
() The most simple form of the suffixes is that in which they be-
gin with a consonant, and are appended to nouns sistgular ending with
a vowel.
() *To the simple form of some of the suffixes, is prefixed a union-
vowel ( 126. 6 note), in which shape they are appended to nouns *-
gular ending with a consonant.
(c) The third form of the suffixes is peculiar to nouns plural
Here all the suffixes take a union-vowel, and all of them, except that
of the first person singular, insert a Yodh between the union-vowel and-
the suffix.
2 7 4 $ 1 3 5 . NOUNS I SUFFIX STATE.
6. The f ollowing table exhibits the suf f ixes as append-
ed to the various f orms of nouns; the f ir st column con-
taining those which ar e attached to nouns singular ending
with a vowel;the second, those which ar e attached to
nouns singular ending with a consonant;and the thir d,
exhibiting the suf f ixes as they ar e attached to nouns plural.
Sever al unusual f orms of suf f ixes ar e subjoined.
Sing. Simple form. With un. vowel fee. Suffi. to nouns plural.
1. my \
2 m. thy pause
2f. % ^
I t .
1?-- ^
3 m. his 1 i n l
"I n m l
v _ i _ poetin
11
!
3 t w n l
n_ n l
t V
n C
V
P1.1. our
*
*0
v l
2m.your DD a r -
2f. your
r?
3m. their OH poet, o n v poet, hai l
3f. their -jri
T T
i-.;- n v .
(a) Unusual suffixes to nouns singular.
Singular 2 masc. Ps. 139: 5; J"D- Ps. 10: 14. 2 fem. ?p-
Ezek. 6:12; Ezek. 23: 28. 3 fem. H- without Mappiq Num. 15;
28 j Ezek. 36: 5 for ri- .
w
r T
Plural % person wL Ruth 3: 2. Job 22 : 20. 2 fem. Ezek.
23: 48. 3 masc. W3 J 2 Sam. 23: 6. 3 fem. 1 K. 7: 37.
-A* : *
(b) Unusual suffixes to nouns plural
Singular 2 masc. 5"P- Nah. 2: 14. 3 masc. Vrf Ps. 116: 12 Chal*-
dak. 3 fem. Ezek. 41: 15 for .
Plural 2 fem. Ezek. 13: 20. 3 masc. Slttrp- Ezek. 40:16.
3 fem. rt3n% Ezek. 1: 11.
1 3 5 . NOUNS ; SUFFIX STATE* 2 7 5
7. Notes on the table of suffixes, (a) When the suffix \ - of the 1
pers. sing, is appended to a noun singular ending with Yodh, one Yodh
is dropped; as with suffix "pa Zeph. 2: 9 instead of . This
suffix draws down the tone upon itself, except in cases where the next
word is either a monosyllable, or is MUel; as nj* Gen. 12: 13;
nng 'inbs Josh. 14: 11 &c. ( 35. 6.)
(6) The Yodh which is inserted in the suffixes of nouns plural (no.
5. c) is sometimes omitted; as Josh. 1: 8 he. for thy
ways / Job 42: 10 &c. for his friends ; Gen. 10: 6
for their nations ; frtsbfi Gen. 4: 4 for the fat qf them.
The form 1- for IV is quite common, both having the same sound.
( 23. 6. A)*
(c) The forms iftl. and of the 3 masc. and fem. are generally
attached to nouns of Dec. IX, and are more seldom found with other
nouns. The forms n , 173% are peculiar to poetry.
(<2) As a union-vowel, Tseri predominates; and as in verbal suffix-
es ( 126. 9. d), so here 0^, 73, and also D!"T ffj, do not take a
union-vowel, except with nouns plural. The suffix ^ likewise takes no
union-vowel except in pause, and with nouns plural.
(e) Wherever there is a union-vowel, it uniformly takes the tone,
except in the grave suffixes ( 126. 9. h). These, among the noun
suffixes, are , D?T|, , which always have the tone, whether
preceded by a union-vowel or not. See 136. 4. 6, note 3.
The suffix ^ without a union-vowel takes the tone only when ap*
pended to words ending in a consonant; as TpSn. ( 34. 2. *.)
( f ) The same form of suffixes is common to plural nouns of both
the masculine and feminine gender or form. But in respect to plurals
in n% not only the epenthetic Yodh of the suffix (no. 5. c) is sometimes
omitted (supra 6), but the suffix itself is exchanged for that of nounft
singular. Thus we have tn'rg my testimonies Ps. 132: 12 for "'IVT*;
thy stripes Deut. 28:59 for Tpnbtt; thy sisters Ezek. 16:
52 for ; Dntatt their fathers Ex. 4: 5 &c. &c.
(g) On the contrary, the suffixes to the feminine singular some-
times assume the epenthetic Yodh (no. 5. c), or rather the feminine
singular takes the suffixes of nouns plural. Thus we have
thy praise Ps. 9: 15 for &c. So the infinitives *phi3a thy build-
ing Ezek. 16: 31 and Ezek. 6: 8; see 126 a. 4.'
NOTE. The anomalies in &,/, g, are probably the result of error in
transcribing.
276 135 HOUHS; s u r n x STATE, ETC.
8. Feminines m in or der to r eceive suf f ixes, change
the f inal H into f t. ( 40.2. Comp. 126. 12.)
9. Nouns dual take the 6uf f ixe& of nouns plur al
10. The plural and dual absolute in or der to r eceive
suf f ixes, dr op their appr opr iate endings and take the suf -
f ixes In their place.
E. g. naf, plural with suffix spni*? &c. SJ5, dual
with suffix &c. ( 137. 3.)
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
11. PAR. 1 exhibits nouns as connected with all the various suf-
fixes which are tmtally employed. The object of the paradigm is
merely to show the manner in which the suffixes are attached to mas-
culine and feminine nouns, without regard to the vowel-changes which
usually occur. For this reason, nouns with Immutable vowels (except-
ing lafit) have been selected for the paradigm.
12. No. I exhibits the usual suffixes in connection with a masculine
noun ending with a consonant A feminine noun with a similar termina-
tion would receive suffixes in the same way.
13. No. II exhibits the manner in which suffixes are attached to
nouns ending with a vowel or quiescent letter. The noun att m its aV
solute state ends, indeed, in a consonant, but it is in this respect irreg-
ular. The construct state and all its other forms have Yodh, as if from
a form "AM ending with a quiescent The suffixes are of course of
the simple form, without a union-vowel. For the form with the
suffix of the first person, see above in no. 7. a. For the forms
fee. see 136.4. b.
The plural of this noun is nfctt, which takes suffixes like the
plural of r n in; or, rather, like the plural of Dec. XL
14. No. Ill exhibits the suffixes In connection with a feminine noun.
The suffixes of the 3 pers. fem. singular and of the 2 and 3 pers. fem.
plural are omitted in the paradigm for want of room; but the forms of
the noun in these cases are precisely the same as those with masculine
aiffixes of the same persons.
For feminines in and with suffixes &c. see 160 and Dec.
XIII in the paradigm.
1 3 6 . NOUNS ; VOWIL-CHANCES IN DECLENSION. 2 7 7
136* Nouns ; vowel-changes in declension*
1. It has already been remarked ( 128.2) that, speaking after the
analogy of the western languages, Hebrew nouns are not declined.
But Inasmuch as the construct state, the suffixes, the plural, and also
the dual, generally occasioA changes In the mutable Towels of the
ground-form, the exhibition of these changes may not improperly be
termed declension.
t2. The changes of the vowels, almost without excep-
tion, r espect the ultimate and penult syllable. ( 53. 2.)
Of the consonants of nouns, only the final one is ever affected by
declension, and this not generally. See 135. 2, 8, 10.
3. The theor y of the vowel-changes in declension is, of
cour se, essentially connected with the shif ting of the tone-
syllable ; and all the changes ar e in accordance with the
laws developed in 5358.
t4. The f ollowing recapitulation and statement exhibits
three classes of changes, which ar e dependent on the r e-
moval of the tone and on the nature of the additions made
to nouns. It includes per haps all the general r ules which
can be given.
(a) When the tone is moved f orward one place by an
accession beginning with a vowel, and f orming a syllable, or
two syllables with the tone on the penult; the penult vow-
el of the ground-f orm, if mutable, gener ally f alls away.
Here belong the following species of additions, viz.
(1) The plural and dual endings D\., D^, rrt; as na*?, &c.
(2) The following light suffixes of nouns singular, viz. ?j-,
n_, wl, D_, 1-; as W, wS*?, d W &c.
' f' t ' t f' t j" r t t ;
(3) The light suffixes of nouns plural, viz. %, V,
; as w , r - m, nrnm &c.
- I TT
7
TT s' ** |
NOTE 1. In a few cases, especially in nouns of the seventh declen-
sion, the ultimate vowel is dropped; as &c.
37
2 7 8
1 3 6 . NOUNS ; VOWEL-CHANGES IN DECLENSION.
NOTE 2. Noons of the sixth declension take the doal ending, the
soffixes &c. upon the original ground-form of the word; as *^52,
&c. The plural takes a different form. See 143.
(6) When the tone is moved f orward one place by an
accession beginning with a consonant and f orming a sylla-
ble, or when the construct state is employed ( 135. 1),
not only does the penult vowel if it be mutable f all away,
but gener ally also the ultimate vowel is shor tened.
This role inclodes the following additions and forms.
(1) The grave suffixes of nouns singular, viz. D}, ]3, Drj, as
m *
(2) The suffix which takes the tone when appended to nouns
ending in a consonant. This is constructed variously in respect to the
final syllable, sometimes shortening the ultimate vowel and some-
times not; as o, Sf2? j ( 64. 2. a, note 2. Compare
126. 9. A.)
(3) The constroct state of nouns singular; as O* word, trn
word of God, where the tone is thrown forward upon the second word.
See particularly 54. 2. c.
NOTE 1. In the constroct state of the sixth and seventh declensions,
the final vowel usually remains unchanged; but b the latter it is
sometimes shortened. In Dec. IX, final Seghol is changed to Tseri
( 55. 5. b.)
NOTE 2. From the above statement it appears that the suffix-state
may have two forms, according as the suffix is light or grave. These
are called the light suffix-state, and the grave suffix-state.
NOTE 3. It will be seen that the grave suffixes D^, of nouns
singular, never move the tone-syllable in nouns more than one
place, while in verbs they often move it two places. The reason of
this lies in the original position of the tone, which in verbs is often on
the penult; and therefore, in order to rest on the grave suffix, must
move forward two places; as ^nbbf?, with soff. D^nbt3; while in
nouns, the tone is on the final syllable, and therefore these suffixes can
move it but one place; as . In nouns of the sixth and
thirteenth declensions, where the tone appears to be on the penult, the
final vowels being merely furtive disappear in declension, and leave
1 3 6 . NOUNS ) VOWEL-CHANGES IN DECLENSION. 2 7 9
the suffixes to constitute the syllable next following the real tone-eyl-
lable, as in other nouns.
The grave suffixes of nouns plural, being themselves composed of
two syllables, of course move the tone forward two places.
(c) Wh e n t he tone is moved f or war d two places, bot h
t he ultimate and penult vowels of t he ground-form, if mu-
table, generally fall away.
This rule includes the following additions and forms.
(1) The grave suffixes of nouns plural, viz. ED\-,
i t - ; ^ w , t j t ' s h
&c
-
(2) The construct state of nouns plural; as 151, D y n .
For the mode in which the vowels that fall away are supplied,
see 59.
t 5. Femi ni ne nouns suffer much less change by declen-
sion t han masculines; because, by t he formation of t he fem-
inine, most of t he changes f r om t he ground-form have al-
r eady t aken place ( 132). A f ew ot her changes ar e
her e noted.
() Feminines, which have a masculine form, are of course declin-
ed like masculines.
() Feminines in !"L_, after changing the ii into n( 135. 8), either
retain the final Qamets, or shorten it into Pattahh according as the n is
or is not joined to the suffix ( 126. IV note 2). The construct uni-
formly has final Pattahh.
(c) Feminine Segholates in n_ or n_ follow the analogy of Dec.
VI. For a particular account of their vowel-changes, see 150 and
Dec. XIII in the paradigm.
(ti) Plurals in ni follow the general rules in no. 4 above, as to
their mutable vowels. The final Hholem, being impure, is of course
never dropped.
t 6. Th e following general rules for t he suffixes of t he
plural ar e deri ved f r om t he foregoing principles.
( a ) In plurals of t he masculine form, light suffixes ar e
Di qi t i zed by Google
2 8 0 137. NOUNS ; ARRANGEMENT or DECLENSIONS.
attached to the absolute state,-grave suf f ixes to the con-
struct state.
(b) In plurals of the f eminine f or m, all the suf f ixes ar e
attached to the construct state.
137. Nouns ; arrangement of the declensions.
1. The general principles of declension in Hebrew nouns have been
developed in (be preceding section. But such is the great variety of
changes which occur in the course of flexion, arising from the nature
of the vowels In the ground-forms considered as immutable, mutable,
furtive fee. that it has been found most convenient to arrange the nouns
into thirteen distinct classes or declensions; of which the first nine com-
prehend nouns of the masculine form, while the your last include nouns
of the feminine form. These declensions are exhibited in 154 PAR. II;
and the intermediate sections are designed to aford a particular ac-
count of eaoh. A paradigm of nouns dual (III) is also subjoined.
Jote. It must not be supposed that all the nouns in the Hebrew
Bible can be definitely assigned to some one of these declensions.
Very many nouns occur only in one or two forms, and may therefore
not exhibit the characteristic marks df any declension. In such cases
all the actual forms are commonly noted in the lexicons.
2. The object of the paradigms is to exhibit nouns, both singular
and plural, in all their four states; viz. the absolute, construct, light
suffix-state, and grave suffix-s&te. These are arranged across the
pages, in the manner best adapted to assist the memory of the learner.
All suffixes, of whatever kind, are attached to nouns in the same way as
those Of a similar nature exhibited t the paradigms.
3. In the notes on the several declensions, contained in the follow-
ing sections, a particular account is given of the vowel-changes in each
declension. These, of course, are merely the applications of the prin-
ciples stated in 6 136.
1 3 8 . NOONS ; FIRST DECLENSION. 281
138* Nouns ; first declension
t l . The f ir st declension of nouns compr ehends all,
whether monosyllabic or polysyllabic, whose vowels are all
immutable,, whatever those vowels may be.
E. g. v*, bj?, ans, yvyt, n &c.
The single circumstance that the vowels are immutable, marks this
declension; not the kind of vowels, nor the number of syllables.
2. In many cases it is easy to decide whether the vowels are im-
mutable, in others not. Thus in Vip, ttnab Sic. the vowels are obvi-
ously immutable; but the vowels in ttj^D &c. can be known to
be immutable only from a lexicon or from a knowledge of etymology.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. All the vowels of the ground-form being immutable, all
the additions, as suffixes &c. are in general attached to the ground-
form without change.
NOTE 2. A very few nouns whose vowels are generally immutable,
sometimes suffer a change; as Hi'}, const an Ezek. 26: 10; J**?,
const 111 Ps. 68:6; const Ex. 28:11. Is. 44:12,13; "IKJX,
const Jer. 28: 10, 11, 12, 14. Such words may be said to be-
long, by usage of the punctaton, both to the first and second declen-
sions.
NOTE 3. A few nouns whose vowels are immutable in the singu-
lar, appear in the plural as if their vowels were mutable. Thus
has the plural ; but it is more probably derived from an obso-
lete Segholate form with a pure vowel ($ 132. 6. c). So the
plural construct form which is usually assigned to the ground-
form probably comes from a form
NOTE 4. Nouns of the form c in the paradigm, sometimes exchange
the impure Hholem for Shureq, as being rather shorter. ( 52. 4. a.
Compare 118. II. a.)
NOTE 5. In the case d the final guttural, being thrown into the
same syllable with the suffix ( 36 rule 6), loses of course its furtive
Pattahh, and takes the vowel of the suffix if there be one, or other-
wise a composite Sheva. ( 46. 2.)
2 8 2 1 3 9 . NOUNS ; SECOND DECLENSION*
{139. Nouns ; second declension.
1*1. The second declension includes nouns with final
Qamets or Pattahh pure and mutable, whether monosylla-
bles, or polysyllables with their pr eceding r owels immu-
table.
Only a few nouns with final Pattahh are declined after the mod*
el of this declension. See note 2 below.
2. In the construct state singular, bef or e the gr ave suf -
f ixes, and sometimes bef or e tj, f inal Qamets goes into Pat-
tahh ( 136. 4. by In the plural, the f inal vowel f alls
away in the construct state and bef or e the gr ave suf f ixes.
( 136. 4. c.)
The penult vowel, being immutable, is of course not affected by
the rules in 136. 4.
3. In many nouns of this declension, especially in those derived
from irregular verbs, the final vowel is of doubtful appearance; and
the mutability of it can be determined only by the lexicon or etymol-
ogy. In monosyllables, the final Qamets and Pattahh appear like the
similar forms in Dec. VIII; and it is only by the form of the suffix
state, by the plural, or by etymology, that the student can distinguish
in some nouns, whether they belong to the second declension or to the
eighth. Thus tn, plural IHM is of Dec. II; but IP, plur.
Dec. VIII.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. In the case a in the paradigm, 0323would by analogy
be 03233; but such is the form in Gen. 9: 6, probably from a ground-
form Ul. So *P the hand before a suffix beginning with a consonant,
has both D3* and ( 136. 4. b.)
NOTE 2. Cases like c and d occur very seldom, and are to be re-
cognized as belonging to this declension only by their forms in the
suffix state and plural.
NOTE 3. Participles in Niphal of the form BTTJPA fall regularly un-
der this declension; but several of them form their plurals as if they
1 4 0 . NOUNS ; THIRD DECLENSION. 2 8 3
were of Dec. VII; as plur. &c. Such plurals are
probably derived from forms iike ttQCa. See 121. II. c.
140. Nouns; third declension,
f l . The thir d declension compr ises all nouns which haye
an immutable vowel in the f inal syllable, and Qamets or
Tseri pure and mutable in the penult
It makes no difference whether a word be dissyllabic, as T*p.D ; or
polysyllabic, as &c.
2. Out of the ground-f orm or absolute state, the mu-
table vowel of the penult f alls away. ( 136. 4.)
The final vowel, being immutable, is not in general affected by the
rules in 136. 4.
3. In many nouns of this declension also, it requires the aid of the
lexicon or of etymology to determine the mutability of the penult vow-
els. Thus rp-ja would seem to belong here, while it really belongs to
Dec. I; because it stands for n
rr
)5, and the Qamets is therefore im-
pure and immutable. ( 23. 7.)
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. The examples in a, &, c, give the usual forms of this de-
clension. In the cases d and e also, the penult and final vowels con-
form to the rule in no. 2 above. But in another respect, nouns of these
forms undergo a change which is sui generis, viz. the Daghesh forte of
the ground-form is dropped in declension; as const. instead of
&c. ( 45. 4 note 2.) -
Some nouns, of the above form, beginning with a guttural, after
dropping the Daghesh as above, assume Seghol under the guttural in-
stead of Hhireq parvum; as IVtn, const. Job 33: 15;
plur. Lev. 14: 10 &c. This change probably arises from the
influence of the guttural ( 58.1); though other words of similar
form neglect it; as const. 1^X9 Sic.
NOTE 2. Some nouns of the form/, especially those derived from
verbs 19, exchange the impure Hholem for Shureq out of the absolute
state. Compare 6 118. II. o, and 6 138 note 4.
2 8 4
1 4 1 . NOUNS; FOUBTH DECLENSION.
NOTE 3. In example g, the Tseri of the penolt under the initial
Aleph, is by custom immutable in the singular; the orthography being
modelled after the Syriac pronunciation ( 47. 5. b). The plural con-
forms to the general rule in no. 2 above.
NOTE 4. In example A, the construct form with Qamets Hhateph
occurs only before a Maqqeph and is very unfreqoent, being against
the general anal ogy of the declension and of the language. The fol-
lowing are probably all the instances of this form which occur viz.
Ps. 145: 8. Nah. 1: 3 Qeri; - 3 ) E x . 21: 11; - nno Job
17: 9. Prov. 22: 11 j Ex. 30: 23. So with a pure suffix
DDWiir Ezek. 5: 7. Compare 145, and Dec. VIII in the paradigm.
NOTE 5. The word has the plural form with Vav
moveable, like nouns of Dec. VI. ( 143. note 18.)
NOTE 6. In some words, particularly those with a guttural or Resh
for the penult consonant, the punctuation is inconsistent with Itself; the
penult vowel being treated sometimes as mutable and sometimes as
immutable. E. g. O^nD, const D^D as of Dec. Ill; plur. CO^O as
of Dec. I; plur. const and as of both declensions. This
probably arose from uncertainty, whether or not the vowel was pro-
longed and rendered immutable before the guttural or Resh. ( 24.7.)
141. Nouns ; fourth declension.
t 1* The f our th declension includes all dissyllabic nouns
with Qamets pure in the ultimate, and Qamets or Tseri pure
in the penult
2. The vowels of both syllables of the ground-f orm
being mutable, the r ules f or the r owel-changes in 136.4
apply to nouns of this declension in their f ull extent
() Out of the ground-f orm, the penult r owel always
f alls away.
() In the construct smgular, bef or e the grave suf f ixes,
and sometimes bef or e 5| , the final Qamets shortens into
Pattahh. ( 136. 4. b.)
(c) In the plural construct and bef or e the plural
gr ar e suf f ixes, both the r owels of the ground-f orm f all
1 4 2 . NOUNS ; FIFTH DECLENSION.
285
away ( 136. 4. c); and then a new vowel, viz. Hhir eq
or Pattahh, is inser ted. ( 58. 1.)
3. The same difficulty occurs here, as in the preceding declen-
sions, in respect to determining what vowels are really mutable. See
138. 2. 139. 3.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. The examples a, 6, exhibit the regular forms of this de-
clension. In the plural construct and grave suffix state of c, the ini-
tial letter being a guttural takes Pattahh instead of Hhireq ( 58. 1).
In the same parts of <2, the penult guttural takes a composite Sheva,
and of course determines the vowel of the preceding letter ( 58. 2).
A few nouns with gutturals, however, assume Hhireq in these cases,
like nouns without gutturals. One of these is exhibited in e.
NOTE 2. In a few nouns also without gutturals, the supplied vow-
el in the plural construct and grave suffix state is Pattahh; as (|3d,
plur. const 'MMIj &c. ( 58. 1 note.)
NOTE 3. In nouns derived from verbs th, the final Qamets fa treat-
ed as if rendered immutable by the accidental concurrence of the ft
( 52. 3); as MIX, const fee. This happens in the singular and
in the plural in Q\-; but has likewise a plural in ni ( 133. 5)
in which the Qamets is mutable; as plur. nifiOJE, const rrifiOX, with
su ontanac &c.
NOTE 4. A very few nouns, like those in A, t, exhibit in the con-
struct and part of the suffix state singular a Segholate form, like nouns
of Dec. VI. In other respects they conform to the model of Dec. IV,
142. Nouns ; fifth declension.
t l . The f if th declension compr ehends dissyllabic nouns
with Tseri pure in the ultimate, and Qamets pure in the
penult.
2. The vowel-changes arising f r om declension ar e in
gener al the same her e as in Dec. IV ( 141. 2), with
tte f ollowing exception; viz. that in the construct singular,
38
286 142* NOUNS ; FIFTH DECLENSION.
bef or e the gr ave suf f ixes, and sometimes bef or e tj, the
f inal Tser i is exchanged f or Pattahh. (136. 4. 6.)
This exchange of Tseri for Pattahh instead of its usual correspond*
ing short vowel Seghol, is what distinguishes nouns of this declension
from those of Dec. IV.
3. Nouns of doubtful appearance occur here, of course, as well as
in the preceding declensions.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. The example in a gives the regular forms of the declen-
sion; that in b exhibits forms with a guttural.
NOTE 2. The examples c, d, present cases of a Segholate form of
the construct singular; the latter having also a regular form. All the
other forms of these nouns, and of the few others which resemble
them in the construct, are conformed to the usual laws of this declen-
sion. Compare 141 note 4.
NOTE 3. As in Dec. IV ( 141 note 3), so here; the final vowel of
nouns derived from verbs Kb is treated as immutable on account of the
final 8. An example of this kind is given in e. Such are
N'V &c. A few other nouns also form their construct state singular
in the same manner, viz. fV, const Ps. 69: 3; fit*, const
Ps. 27: 12; foe, const SJTjn. These last are not found with suf-
fixes, nor in the plural.
NOTE 4. In a few words whose final Tseri, from their derivation,
would appear to be pure, this vowel is nevertheless retained in de-
clension as if it were impure. Thus in example f , J*, plur.
&c. So fDH, HDID, and JlQto which has the plur. const
Ps. 3 5 : 26,'and PATOI S. 2 4 : 7. *
NOTE 5. The noun retains the final Tseri, except in the con-
struct plural. Here the regular form is like ; but it is twice
written with Daghesh euphonic ( 29. 10) *{9 Gen. 49: 17. Judg.
5: 22. So Is. 58: 3 if derived from 32*; but Gesenius in hi!
lexicon derives it from a form
143. Nouns} sixth declension,
t l . The sixth declension compr ises dissyllabic nouns
which have the tone on the penult and a furtive vowel in
the f in?] syllable.
143* NOUNS; SIXTH DECLENSION. 2 8 7
In other words, this declension includes all Segholate noons of two
syllables; excepting a few nouns and infinitives with the feminine end-
ings n-j, n_, which belong to Dec. XIII. The furtive vowel of the
final syllable is Seghol, Pattahh, or Hhireq parvum. ( 59. 2.)
NOTE. All Segholate forms are factitious and merely euphonic
( 59. 2). They appear only in the absolute and construct states of
the singular; for all nouns of this species, when they receive any ac-
cession, neglect the furtive vowel and develope their original state,
which is a monosyllable ending with two consonants; as
with suff. &C.
2. The f ollowing ar e the r ules f or the vowel-changes
ike. in declension.
(a) The construct singular is gener ally the same as
the absolute.
The construct state retains in general the ftortive vowel, for the
same reason that it is inserted in the absolute, viz. to avoid the se-
quence of two final consonants without a vowel. ( 59. 1, 2.)
(f i) The suf f ixes of the singular ar e usually appended
to the original f orm of the noun; see note under no. 1.
(c) The plural absolute assumes a f orm like that of
nouns of Dec. IV.
(d) In the plural construct and bef or e the gr ave suf f ixes,
the penult vowel of the plural absolute is dr opped, and
the original vowel of the ground-f orm is r estor ed.
NOTE. The plural absolute of this declension is quite anomalous,
qnd cannot be derived from either the original or factitious forms of
the singular, by any of the usual laws of declension.
3. Nouns of this declension are mostly derived from verbs ; and of
course exhibit the radical letters of the verbs from which they spring.
Hence, they may be divided into regular and irregular, Segholates; the
former comprehending all those which have their three consonants
moveable, as be; the latter including those in which
one of the radicals becomes quiescent, either in the absolute state or in
the course of declension, as njb, const, nt a; rp\, const n' t &c.
Segholates of this latter class are limited to those derived from verbs
w or and rib; see V below.
288 1 4 3 . NOUNS; SIXTH DECLENSION.
4. The original vowel of the monosyllabic ground-forms is pore
in all cases and sometimes short, and is either of the A, E, or O class; as
nop or ^5, pbri, p'lp, &c. In the factitious forms, the origin-
al vowel is often changed to Seghol by the influence of the furtive
yowel ( 60. 3), or if short it is lengthened.
5. Segholate nouns may be divided into thr ee classes,
according to the original vowels of their gr ound-f or ms; and
may be called Segholates of the A, E, or O class.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
/. Regular Segholates of the A class.
NOTE 1. The example a presents a genuine Segholate of the A
class with all its forms throughout. The penultimate Seghol stands
uniformly for Pattahh (4 supra), and is commonly changed to Qamets
by the influence of pause accents ( 60. 7. a). For the omission of
Daghesh lene in &c. see 29.15. a.
NOTE 2. The examples in b, c, give the usual forms when the pe-
nult or final radical is a guttural, and where the furtive vowel is of
course Pattahh ( 59. 2). A few nouns with gutturals, however, con-
form to the model in a ; as firi, DTV}, &c. The noun yi h with the
article is always ( 55. 5. a); and Uie names of several letters
of the Hebrew alphabet also have a like form; as 5)^1$, nb^J &c.
NOTE 3. In the construct state of c is exhibited the form 9*NT,
which a few nouns of the A class assume; compare the construct of
Dec. V. So "HH, const,
NOTE 4. A very few words of this class occur in their original mon-
osyllabic state; as **18* a proper name.
//. Regular Segholates of the E close.
NOTE 5. The examples d, , give the regular forms of the E class;
and those in/*, g, give the usual forms with an initial guttural. A few
nouns with gutturals, conform to the model in d; as p*?.* &c-
The noun makes 2 Sam. 22 : 36 and sjytp* ^
8
*
8 5 :
*
NOTE 6 . The example h exhibits the forms with a final guttural,
and also another form of the construct which 9 few nouns of this class
adopt, viz. Sic. Compare note 3 above.
NOTE 7. In cases like e and g, the Segholate forms of this class re-
semble those of the A class; as ^bfe kc. The suffix state,
however, at once exhibits the distinction between them, by present-
1 4 3 . NOUNS ; SIXTH DECLENSION.
2 8 9
Ing the original vowels of the monosyllabic forms; as
m
a)rn &c.
1
*
NOTE 8. A very few words of this class occur in their original
state; as aon, V-i: &c.
* *
NOTE 9. Nouru qf both the A and E classes. A very few nonns adopt
in some cases the forms both of the A class and of the E class. Thus
l i n (note 3) makes in the suffix state singular i l i n, but with n_
paragogic and in the construct plural it is and So 1)^
and ^n. In like manner has the fem. and
/ / / . Regular Segholates of the O class.
NOTE 10. The example i presents the usual regular forms of the
O class. A few nouns, as in j, have Qibbuts in the suffix state instead
of Qamets Hhateph.
NOTE 11. The forms with a guttural are given in Jfc. A Syriac
form is also exhibited which sometimes occurs in the suffix state of
these nouns, viz. instead of ( 60. 6). The suffix form
is common in this kind of nouns, instead of or rather SB
by 58. 3. This form is even found in some nouns without a guttu-
ral; as^Dj?&c.
NOTE 12. The example I exhibits a composite Sheva, viz. Hhateph
Qamets, under the first letter of the plural absolute. This is follow-
ed only by the nouns and Ynfcfc, all others plurals having simple
Sheva. See the next note.
NOTE 13. Several anomalies occur in nouns of this class.
() In the vowel-points; as plur. shb-rd-shim ;
plur. q&-dhdrshim and plur.
by Syriasm for &c. ( 47. 5. 6); but plur. const ^bsntee &c.
() In formation; as frta, plur. nis'tta ; nisrias ; n?*3,
rrifba. These plurals probably come from forms like ria3, nb3.
The noun C3U?p Prov. 22:21 exhibits the original form of this class*
IV. Syriac Segholates.
NOTE 14. The original form of the Hebrew Segholates, as above
stated, is , ICO, 1JP2 &c. As distinguished from this form, Se-
gholates in Syriac throw the vowel between the two last letters of the
word; as &c. These forms are imitated in the following
Hebrew words; viz. ajyi, in pause D^jB, all the known forms
of which are given in m and n; and "13* once Ps. 18 : 26.
The nouns and IfiJB have forms like words of this class in-
2 9 0 1 4 3 . NOUNS ; SIXTH DECLENSION.
the construct plural, viz. but all their other forms are
of Dec. I. For see note 22 below.
NOTE 15. All infinitives construct in Kal, except those with a fem-
inine ending in some classes of irregular verbs, have the forms of Syr-
iac Segholates, and receive suffixes in the same manner. These have
been fully described and exhibited in 126. IV notes 68, and 127
Par. XXI.
V. Irregular Segholates.
These may be arranged according to the kinds of irregular verbs
from which they are derived, like regular Segholates, they exhibit
the forms of the j3, E, and O classes.
(a) Segholatet from verbs 19 and ^9.
NOTE 16. Segholates of the A class from verbs 19 and "*9 assume
two forms.
(1) They exhibit a moveable Fav as their middle radical, which
out of the absolute state becomes quiescent in Shureq or Hholem, and
presents the forms in o and p of the paradigm. Out of the absolute
state, therefore, these nouns belong to the first declension. The only
exception is b}3?, which has the Vav moveable throughout, and is de-
clined like
(2) They exhibit a moveable Yodh as their middle radical, which
out of the absolute state becomes quiescent in Tseri or Hhireq mag*
num, and presents the forms in q and r of the paradigm. Hence,
these nouns also, out of the absolute state, belong to Dec. I. The only
exception is, that a few of them have a regular plural with Vav move-
able, as in r. These are b?n, yg a fountain, niav; *^9 a
young ass, JFV9.
NOTE 17. In the E class, these nouns are like f a for and
for 1*;\, having the radical Yodh quiescent in the absolute state,
and therefore belonging wholly to Dec. I.
NOTE 18. In the O class, the radical Vav is quiescent in the abso-
lute state and throughout the singular; as for lyi, and lit!) for
Of course the singular of all nouns of this description belongs
to Dec. I. The plural also, in some nouns, has the Vav quiescent,
and belongs to Dec. I; while in others it has the Vav moveable and
takes a regular form, as in s and t.
(6) Segholates from verbs fib.
NOTE 19. The Segholates from verbs RIB are of course of the form
b or 4b ( 122. 1). In consequence of having a quiescent for their
1 4 3 . NOUNS; SIXTH DECLENSION. 2 9 1
final letter, they do not take the genuine Segholate form with a fur-
tive vowel; but either throw forward the vowel of the ground-form
between the two last radicals and conform it to the final quiescent, as
instead of "JIB or ; or else conform the furtive vowel to the
final quiescent, as 3STB instead of 1^2 ( 48. 2. a.). It is onl y in the
suffix state and plural that nouns of the former kind OlD) develope
themselves to be of the sixth declension instead of the Jirst; while
those of the latter form are not found in the Hebrew Bible out
of the absolute state.
NOTE 20. The example u belongs probably to the A class, and pre-
sents the usual forms and also the form of the absolute in pause. Light
suffixes beginning with a vowel are commonly preceded by Hhireq
under the first radical; while before *|, Seghol is usual. These forms
are all anomalous. The examples v, w, exhibit the forms of the E
and O classes.
NOTE 21. Few of the Segholates from verbs lib have plurals. Of
those which have them, the usual form is given in x; and in y is exhibited
the double form of the plural which four or five nouns of this sort as-
sume, by exchanging Yodh for Aleph. ( 39. 2. c.)
VI. Segholates with anomalous plurals.
NOTE 22. Several Segholate nouns, in the plural absolute, drop the
appropriate vowels of that form and take the usual vowels of the con-
struct ; as plur. instead of ; *5^, Cttn; *&n,
D'JTCJn; *to, D^bte; for ; Ynttifit &c. Prov.
25: 11; ; tT30a; which five last come from ground-
forms which do not now occur; TO. 1 # , W>'*, Bpjj, 1?ri, re's.
NOTE 23. In the plural construct several forms occur with Daghesh
forte euphonic; as pbn, for ^jJbn; nips, rria* for rriatf*.
So also ibat> for ibao; n^njyp with a composite Sheva without the
Daghesh, for rrtrijPUj'. ( 2 9 . 1 0 . )
NOTE 24. The paragogic H. when appended to Segholates, is at-
tached to the original form of the word, like light suffixes; as y "&
btl, nb; | ; &:?, &c. But the tone uni-
formly remains on the penult syllable. ((> 34.2. h.)
Those nouns denominative also, which are derived from Segholates,
are formed by attaching their formative endings, viz. rn,
to the original monosyllabic form of the Segholate. These endings
always take the tone.
2 9 2 1 4 4 . NOUNS; SEVENTH DECLENSION.
144. Nouns ; seventh declension.
t l . The seventh declension compr ises those nouns with
f inal Tseri pure which ar e either monosyllabic, or have the
pr eceding vowels immutable.
This declension includes most of the present participles masculine
of regular verbs; see the paradigm of participles, 127 Par. XX.
2. The f ollowing ar e the changes f rom declensioa
() The construct singular is gener ally like the abso-
lute ; in a f ew cases it exchanges f inal Tser i f or Pattahh.
() Out of the absolute state f inal Tser i gener ally f alls
away, except in the plural absolute of monosyllables.
(c) Bef or e suf f ixes beginning with a consonant, wher e
the f inal letter of the noun takes a vocal Sheva, a new
vowel arises, viz. Hhir eq, Pattahh, or Seghol. ( 58. 1.)
3. In this declension, also, many nouns occur whose vowels are of
doubtful appearance ; and which can be distinguished as belonging
here, only by the suffix or plural forms.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. The example in a presents the usual forms of mdnosylla- '
ties; final Tseri before Maqqeph being sometimes shortened to Seghol.
Those in b and c exhibit the usual mode of declining all participles of
regular verbs which fall into this declension. The participles of
verbs with a final guttural make their construct state in Pattahh, like
d and e.
NOTE 2. The example in d has final Pattahh in the construct
Several other nouns, even without gutturals, take the same form; as
"JBDJg, const neDft; &c. A few others, besides the
Pattahh in the construct, exhibit in the first syllable an exchange of
Pattahh for Hhireq parvum; viz.
These are found only in the absolute and construct singular.
NOTE 3. In E is an example of nouns, which before 3 , &C. adopt
1 4 5 * NOUNS; EIGHTH DECLENSION. 2 9 3
Seghol instead of Hhireq parvum (2 supra); as 33^, &c. The
noun D23N has with Tseii; and MD3 makes and
dropping the Daghesh forte and neglecting the vowel. ( 45. 4 note 2.
Compare 140 note 1.)
NOTE 4. The forms i n/ are those of some monosyllables which re-
tain Tseri throughout, except in the construct and grave suffix state of
the plural. Some polysyllables also imitate monosyllables in retain-
ing the final Tseri in the plural absolute; viz. D
n
?sn, ntofci,
D^nao, fi-OVjB, DHDaaK. The monosyllable an retains
Tseri throughout, and therefore falls under Dec. I. So (from
?) has the const plur. but with grave suffix Ezek.
7: 19.
Anomalous form*.
NOTE 6. (o) The noun n? ton, with Pattahh in the absolute state,
has once "H2 Prov. 3 1 : 2, as of this declension. So JT, plur. D*2T;
and trntt men from the obsolete n.
(6) Several nouns with final Hholem assume the forms of nouns
of this declension; viz. VS'ijfiJ, plur. n'pnj?, and
ntoa, B
n
nas, ; see 133. 8.
145. Notms / eighth declension.
f l . The eighth declension includes all nouns which in-
ser t Daghesh f or te in the f inal letter of their ground-
f orms, when they r eceive accession.
The nouns of this declension exhibit different final vowels, and they
all have Daghesh forte implied in the final letter of the absolute state,
although it is never written; as tT for BP = D232; SJN for b*t from
KC. ( 45. 3). Hence, it is only the suffix or plural form that
distinguishes words as belonging here; because in case of any addi-
tion the Daghesh is developed; as o*, plur. ; s|k, with suff. *ib<$.
2. The f ollowing ar e the changes f rom declension,
(a) The construct state is gener ally the same as the
absolute; but bef or e Maqqeph the ultimate vowels Qa-
39
294
145. NOUNS; EIGHTH DECLENSION.
mets, Tser i, and Hholem, ar e usually shor tened to Pat-
tahh, Seghol, and Qamets Hhateph. ( 54. 4.)
(6) Out of the ground-f orm and construct singular, the
Daghesh f or te of the f inal letter appear s ; and f inal Qa-
mets, Tser i, and Hholem, ar e usually shor tened to Pat-
tahh, Hir eq parvum, and Qibbuts. ( 54. 5.)
(c) Penultimate vowels, if mutable, conf orm to the
r ules in 136. 4.
3. The following classes of words fall under this declension.
() 'Nouns derived from verbs 99; as p'n, is &c. ( 115.1 note 1);
and also the participles of those verbs in Niphal, Hiphil, and Hophal.
() Other words in which the penult letter is dropped or assimi-
lated to the final one ; as zb for 33b; infinitive nn for risfr &c.
(c) Some words which are either primitive or derived from a
Pilel form of verbs; as bBS, &c.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. The examples in a, 6, c, present the usual forms of
monosyllables with Qamets or Pattahh. The construct 0? is found
only in the proper name P)30 D* ; while 0^ occurs in ni \ 3 Num.
34: 11; comp. 2 K. 25: 13 &c. The noun A3 always has the con-
struct aa. A few nouns have both Qamets and Pattahh in the abso-
lute state; as 05 or &?, 51 or 51 he. and all these have Pattahh in
the construct The exchange in c of Pattahh for Hhireq parvum is
quite anomalous, and is found in the following words, viz. P)D, nD, Ts,
which are all declined like
NOTE 2. The forms in d are the usual ones of monosyllables frith
Tseri. The construct here (as also in e and f ) has two forms, accord-
ing as it is or is not followed by Maqqeph ; see above in no. 2. a. In
the suffix state he. a few nouns of this sort anomalously exchange
Tseri for Pattahh; as 1$, ; ng, with suffix **89, but with M para-
gogic tiny &c. Nouns with final Seghol shorten it into Hhireq parvum;
- t l ? )
NOTE 3. The examples in e and f give the forms of nouns with
Hholem pure. The noun f? in f varies as to its forms; having them
sometimes with Qamets Hhateph as in the paradigm, and sometimes
with Qibbuts; as DSt* &c. Once WtV Ps. 81 : 2 with Shureq
for Qibbuts.
1 4 6 . NOUNS; NINTH DECLENSION. 395
NOTE 4. In g and h are examples of nouns with pennlt vowels;
of which that of the former is pure, and that of the latter impure. In i
the construct is always *n before the word but is
n
n before
other nouns, probably for the sake of distinction; as 519") D *<n Gen. 42:
15. So also *<3, const "H. A few other nouns ending with Yodh have
the plural like that of'n; as "olb, d li?; &c. ( 133. 1. b.)
NOTE 5. When the final letter which would by analogy be doub-
led is a guttural or Resh, the Daghesh is of course excluded and the
preceding vowel lengthened ( 46. 1). Hence, nouns which would
otherwise belong here assume forms which cause them to fall under
other declensions; as nig, with suff. derived from -HiC, but hav-
ing forms like those of Dec. II. So n"b, plur. tPHo like Dec. I &c.
NOTE 6. A few nouns have forms partly of this declension and
partly of others; as nfij a ploughshare, plur. > but also
tPn$ of Dec. I. See also in the lexicons and
also the plurals of nouns ending in Yodh. See note 4 above, and
133. 1. b.
146. Nouns ; ninth declension.
*f l. The ninth declension compr ises all those wor ds
ending in which ar e der ived f rom ver bs f lV-
2. The f ollowing ar e the changes f rom declension.
() In the construct singular, f inal Seghol is chaf ed
to TserL ^
() With suf f ixes See. the ending H-. is dr opped.
(c) Penultimate vowels, if mutate, conf orm to the
r ules in 136. 4.
NOTE. In the construct, Seghol remains in a few cases; as
1 K. 4 : 5; so Jer. 17: 18. The usual change to Tseri is quite
anomalous ( 65. 6. b). With suffixes, these nouns imitate the verb*
from which they are derived. (6 126 a.)
296 1 1 7 , 1 4 8 . NOUNS ; TENTH AND ELEVENTH DECLENSIONS*
147. Nouns j tenth declension
1*1. The tenth declension includes all nouns with the
f eminine ending H- , which have the pr eceding vowels
immutable.
2. In the constr uct state H- becomes D- ; bef or e
suf f ixes it becomes IV or D-- ( 136. 5. by The plural
is usually in IY1.
NOTE. When it is said above, that nouns which belong here have
their vowels immutable, the remark applies to the vowels in thefemi-
inine forme of nouns simply, and not as compared with the vowels of
masculine ground-forms. Thus NBIIA, TOP), NJPH &c. exhibit no
change of penult vowels in the course of inflection, and are therefore
assigned to this declension; but a change has already taken place
in deriving these feminines from the masculine forms Mia, En, p'rt.
( 132.)
148. Nouns ; eleventh declension*
t l . The eleventh declension compr ehends all nouns
with the f eminine ending H-, which have a mutable Qar
mets or Tseri in the penult.
The same remarks on the vowels apply here, as in the preced-
ing section. ( 147. 2 note.)
2. The changes f r om declension ar e the same as in
Dec. X ; except that her e, the mutable vowel of the pe-
nult f alls away in the constr uct state and bef or e suf f ixes.
( 136. 5.)
3. There is a considerable number of nouns apparently belonging
to this declension, and which from their derivation would seem to have
their penult vowels mutable, but which do not suffer any change in
those vowels from inflection. Such are &c. and
so nbts, iVbh, niDia &c. all of which belong to Dec. I. Indeed, of
nouns of this sort with penult Tseri, the greater number have it im-
mutable in all their forms.
1 4 9 . NOUNS; TWELFTH DECLENSION. 297
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. The examples in a and b give the usual forms. Those
in c, d, e, exhibit forms where a new vowel arises, according to the
rules in 68. 1.
NOTE 2. There is a considerable number of nouns which, out of the
absolute state, do not exhibit the usual forms of this declension, but
substitute for them the Segholate forms of Dec. XIII. Thus in the
example in f the forms fee. are used instead of
roiraa, &c. So ftnettto, const nijBttMq &c. Nouns of this
description are mostly noted in the lexicons.
NOTE 3. A few nouns are treated in declension as if they belong-
ed partly here, and partly to Dec. X; as const ntn, but with
ufF. const r^$3, but with suiT. ; so
149. Nouns ; twelfth declension*
t 1. The twelf th declension includes only thr ee f emi-
nine nouns in tl_ which ar e der ived f rom Segholates of
Dec. VI.
The feminine ending is attached to the original form of the Seg-
holate ; as fern. nsVn &c. so that these nouns have the appear-
ance of belonging to Dec. X.
2. Nouns of this declension ar e declined pr ecisely like
those of Dec. X, except in the plural absolute; which,
in all but the termination ni, is f or med like the plural of
Dec. VI.
E. g. Masc. fem. rteVfc ; masc. plur. fem.plur. rnDbJO.
Hence, it is only the plural absolute which serves to distinguish
these nouns. Thus rnxtt from its form might seem to belong here;
but it has the plural rmxfc, which shews it to be of Dec. X.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. The example in a is derived from a noun of the A class
( 143. 4); those in b and c from nouns of the E class; and that |n d
from a noun of the O class. The forms in e are those of a noun with
a penultimate guttural.
NOTE 2. In two nouns which have Vav moveable in the penult of
$98
1 5 0 . no uns ; t h i r t e e n t h decl ens i on*
the singular, the V&t quiesces in the plural; as masc. fem.
nil?, fem.plur. and sing, with n parag. Hnb ; so i-Tlb, const
n^b, plur. ni^ib.
150. Nouns ; thirteenth dtcknsion.
t l . The thir teenth declension includes all f eminine
Segholates in r u" and n _ L e. all those which have
the tone on the penult and a f ur tive vowel in the f inal
syllable.
The furtive vowel here is Seghol or Pattahh. The Segholate forms,
like those of Dec. VI, are factitious and appear only in the absolute
and construct state; compare 143. 1 note. The final vowels of the
original state of these feminines, being always of the A, E, or O
class, and generally pure ( 132. 6. c% are often changed by the
influence of the furtive vowel ( 60. 3); but they always reappear,
as in Dec. VI, whenever the word receives any accession. *
NOTE. All feminine infinitives and participles in n., or n_ fall un-
der this declension.
2. The singular number is declined as in Dec. VI.
The plural absolute is quite anomalous, sometimes drop-
ping the original f inal vowel of the ground-f orm, and some-
times retaining it
E. g. niaDJq, plur.abs. rni*053&c. but nirns, plur. abs. ninnis
Sic. The lexicon must be consulted for each noon; as the appear-
ance of the singular will not determine the mode of forming the plural.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. These nouns, of course, have the forms of the A class, as
in o; of the class, as in 6, c; and of the O class, as in d, e. Nouns
of the O class take Qamets Hhateph before suffixes &c. when they
come from an original masculine form with Hholem; as masc. urtr,
fem. n$a, with suff. TOta; but those which come from a masculine
with Shureq, take Qibbuts before suffixes &c. as masc. fem.
with raff. Sic.
NOTE 2. In f and g are examples of feminine infinitives in n_ &c.
These all belong to the E class of Segholates.
1 5 1 , 1 5 2 . NOUNS; DUAL AND IRREGULAR FORMS. 9 9 9
NOTE 3. A few nouns which are properly of the E class some-
times take Pattahh before suffixes &c. as nj^
i
P from with suff.
*np
i
2
s
n ; inf. has once Ps. 23: 6. So n ^ .
151. Nouns ; paradigm of nouns dual*
t l . Nouns dual of the sever al declensions, ar e exhibited
in their absolute and construct states in Par . III.
2. The construct state of the dual, is the same as that of plurals in
tT_ . Of course, the grave suffixes of nouns plural are attached to
the dual in the same manner as to the plural. ( 135.9,10. 136.4.a.)
3. Dual nouns are not frequent, and none are found in the ninth
declension. Of those which do occur, some have no singular and oth-
ers are not found in the construct; see the paradigm.
NOTE. The plural nouns and D*|N are declined like dual
nouns of Dec. II. ( 134. 3 note.)
152. Nouns irregular in form and declension*
t l . The Hebr ew exhibits quite a number of nouns which
ar e irregular, either in consequence of some change in
their radical letter s, or of borrowing their oblique f orms
f r om some other r oot.
Such are fit* brother, nlnfij sitter, "iPN man, JTO' N woman,
son, ns daughter &c. &c. all the forms of which are noted in the
lexicons. To them, therefore, the learner is referred.
2. The Hebr ew numerals also present a var iety of
anomalous f orms. In the wester n languages, this species
of words usually have an adjective signif ication; but in He-
br ew, they ar e mostly primitive nouns. Their usual f orms
are exhibited in Par . Ill and in the f ollowing explanations
and notes.
I. Cardinal numbers.
3. Fr om one to ten the f orms of cardinal numbers have
the distinction of gender , and gener ally also that of the
30 0 152* NOUFFS ; CARDINAL NUMBERS, ETC.
absolute and construct states. Fr om three to ten, how-
ever , the primitive f orms ar e of the Jetmnine gender ;
while the der ivative f orms ending in 51- and ri ar e of
the masculine gender .
The forms of int| are used as adjectives; all the others are nouns,
and are sometimes put in the construct, and sometimes In apposition or
adverbially with the nouns to which they relate. ( 177.)
3. Fr om eleven to nineteen, the cardinal numbers ar e of
a compound f or m; viz. they ar e made up by joining to
f orms of the nine units the wor ds "ItD? in the masculine
and r niS? in the f eminine, without an intervening con-
junction. ' The numerals thus f or med have no construct
state, but ar e put in apposition or adver bially with other
nouns. ( 177.)
The words and are found only in the above connex-
ions and are evidently derived from ten ; somewhat like the ter-
mination teen for ten in thirteen, fourteen &c. /
4. Fr om twenty to ninety, the cardinal numbers which
expr ess the tens, ar e the plural f orms of the cor r espond-
ing units; except that the f orm f or twenty is the plural
of the f orm f or ten. These f orms ar e of common gen-
der , and have no construct state.
When intermediate units are to be expressed, they may either pre-
cede or follow the tens; as B'ya = 93yh = 77. ( 177.)
4. Hundreds are expr essed by the f orms of the word
pr eceded by the nine units; thousands, by the f orms
of with the same units; ten thousands in a similar
manner by the f orms of HM"), 12H, or
In expressing a sum of hundreds with intervening tens and units,
the smaller numbers may either precede or follow the hundreds; as
rtsig SINE
5
) D*Ptt = 162 years Gen. 5: 18 ; or rnfita
= 372, Ezra 2: 4. The latter mode prevails in the
later Hebrew.
i
1 5 2 . ORDINAL NUMBERS, ETC.
In expressing thousand* with intervening smaller numbers, the for-
mer are placed first; as DTjbp* *3rn nabtt s 8580,
Num. 4: 48. *
U. Ordinal numbers.
5. The ordinal numbers extend only f r om two to ten.
Beyond this number, and sometimes also below it, the car*
dinal numbers ar e used as ordinals.
The ordinals are derived from the cardinals by annexing to them
the termination ( 129. 6. a). Most of them likewise Insert % In
the final syllable of the ground-form. The form *9^^ fourth loses
the prosthetic ft of the ground-form. The ordinal for five has two
forms, viz. and
* * * **
NOTE. The ordinals have a feminine form In rp-., and sometimes
in rp- . In this shape they are commonly employed to denote part;
as rV"Vit)9 the tenth part.
NOTES ON THE PARADIGM.
NOTE 1. No. I exhibits the usual forms of the cardinals from one
to ten. The feminine nHN is for ITjnwt ( 41. 3. &). The Aramaean
form *13 for occurs Ezek. 33 : 30. The form Is the dual
of the absolute ; the feminine for D^ro is also dual from an
obsolete root S13U).
t
NOTE 2. There Is a dual form of these cardinals, which is used ad-
verbially; as D^nJWM? sevenfold Gen. 4: 16,24 &c. four-
fold 2 Sam. 12:67' '
NOTE 3. The plurals of some of these forms likewise appear; as
Gen. 27: 44; rri-lto* tens Ex. 18: 21, 25 &c.
NOTE 4. A few of these cardinals are also found with suffixes; as
both ofm; ye three he.
NOTE 5. No. II presents the forms of cardinals from eleven to nine-
teen. Those for eleven and twelve have two forms. The word
in the former is derived by Simonis from rug* to think, but with
no satisfactory explanation why it should be employed as a numeral.
In the latter, the forms C2U} and coincide with the Ara-
maean dual ( 134. 1 note 2, dj. The form n:bvj for eighteen
occurs once Jpdg. 20: 25.
4 0
3 0 2 153. ADJECTIVES) ETC.
Method of notation.
NOTE 6. The Hebrews made use of the letters of the alphabet to
denote numbers, like the Greeks, they divided the letters (including
the final ones) into three classes; of which the first denoted unite;
the second, tens ; and the third, hundreds. To express thousands and
higher numbers they began the alphabet anew, placing two dots over
each letter. When more than one letter was employed, the accent
called Garshayim or Double Geresh was sometimes used to mark them
as numerals. These modes of representing numbers are all exhibited
in the paradigm.
Fifteen is denoted by = 9+6 = 15; never by ST*, because this
last is the contraction for the word Fn!T\
In designating composite numbers in this way, the letters which
represent the larger numbers are placed first; as D3fi = 429; riF)%
= 4898; 1823.
153. Nouns ; forms of adjective nouns.
t l . Hebr ew adjectives have DO peculiar and appropri-
ate f or ms, but only such as ar e common to nouns. The
f eminine f or m of the adjective is der ived f r om the mas-
culine in the same manner as the f eminine nouns ( 132).
The dual number does not occur . ( 134.4.)
Whatever has been said of the forms of nouns in the preceding sec-
tions, applies also to adjectives; so that the latter do not need to be
treated of separately.
2. Comparison is formed with adjectives by a periphrasis, for which
see 175, 176. The construct state of adjectives appears most fre-
quently when they are used as nouns, or with a noun understood; as
the upright of heart Ps. 6: 11.
164. PAR. I . AOWM with taffixa. ( 135. ) 3 0 3
Suffixes. Noon dug. Noun plural.
J. Nom TMUculitte aiding with a consonant.
Sing. DID a horse. Q^OID horses.
1. ''DID my horse. "WO my horses.
2. m. JJD1D thy !p010 thy
2. I ^DID thy ^016 thy
3. m. 1010 his V&1D his
3. f . R&10 her f TD/lD her
PL 1. 13D1D our our
I
2. m. DDD^D your your
2. f . IpD^O your "jp^CnD your
3. m. Dt^D their OJTWD their
3. f . "[DID their jWOVO their
II. Noun masculine ending with a quiescent.
Sing. father. M father.
1.
,
D my father. PI. 1. our father.
2 m. thy 2 m. DD/'SN your
2 f .. thy 2 f .
,
| 3'Q your
3 m. i ms * , V3 his 3 m. aJTO* their
3 f . r P3* her 3 in'O* their
T T % - #
III. Noun feminine.
Sing. STVin a law. n'n'lFl laws.
1. TinhFl my law. TIlT'in my laws.
2 m. sjr ni n % spn'n'iFi %
2 f . 'qivr tn thy ^ni i ' i n %
3 m. hr n'in his v i r ni n his
PL 1. IMTYiFI our ir K'n'in our
2 m. Bin/Yin your B5VlWlR your
3 m. nr i-l'lft their Br PJl'n'in their
T F V
3M
f IM. Pm.IL Ad^i
Coast. Ugf ct ^ Grave
DB. L '-..hiii ( i *)
()
CIO 8*0 "O'D MOID
(f t)
-n33
-2a
nisa Ki t e *
(<) BiEO ClSO t f s o nr qHcp
(<f Ri^K prsV vr f c* Bar r f c*
Dmc. IL Sdscui . ( 139.)
() nr ; eaa-*
(f t)
3313
n?i3
taato
Baa^o
( 0 *313 7Ti3
yaia
aa^a'ia
(-0 TD *TD
"H
aano
()
Dec. UL Sf sccLUL (6 140.)
()
TJ TB
TE.
aaTf sB
(f t)
f - ^a
T * *
r s^r i Bar ^o
() S* P.
f yojj aaViap,
(-0
V"! f n3T o'haT BaaVttT
(')
TO
T'ln.
aabinh
(/ ) *\3V o v a oi i a Batnia
(g)
oha* ens* t f l a* 830^3*
(A)
Vr o Vn3,-Vr a ^Vo
a a ^i a
De c . IV. SUSOUE. (6 141. )
Go
-m
*
w aa-ian
(f t)
aa$ -aa;
aaaaS
( 0 Ban
W *
as n
*
Ban
Baaar i
(<0
wo
t
"173
T
1153
v -
wwt f
( 0
m
J
-pa?
<r ~1
aapa?
</>
m m
B3SJ3
(*)
tax
11
itax
* 5
<*21
* r
v - z
Ba*as
v t
154. PAE.IL tkclennoiu qfnouni. 305
Plural aba. light 8uf f .
v
Const Grave suf T.
Dec. I. PunuL.
QiDIO
& 'DID a r e i o
a nt e s
niaj nhaa
BSWI'M
V
a-> qiDo
iQIBtt) ttr aci a a / we o
DVF TK
r:
B?
,
'b.^
Dec. II. Pl ural .
iOT
w B 5 W
oate *aata a^apt o
a v a i s va t a
Ba;?a'i3
o-naj
*
Vlf f l *1X0 B^i
Dsc. III. PunuL.
Tf i
"TO?
aa^TpD
tr api rrbv r r t yj aar r bB
a^i aj j ' aa^iap"
B^-DT
TFI-DT ar s i i ai
n w m
(as Dec. X.)
V z *
,
FF'MM
i&iDa tD'on
aa^oisa
B^a a *Bia*
i
"D'QM
i
v J
Banana*
V -1
DlC. IV. PlABAL
1
a n a i
HOT HOT
oa-na^
v
a^naV
T
*aV
" T
.
aab
V
aa-oaV
a ^ a n
- J
man
*
>aan
t
ayapn
a n? o
n;pti
*
n p o
1 -
asn?B
V
M #
| " *; -
a ^a y
"MS
aa^ay
CS33 1&33 *>033
*"
WTOD
T
n ^ a s
(at Dec. XI.)
306 154. PAIL II. Declension* qf noun*.
Sing. abs. Const Light sofT. Grave soft
(A)
1',
i p s . i a ?
( 0
j ^ s
*
v Vs
DEC. V. SINGULAR. ( 142. )
0 0
IE! IE!
IJJJT
B3DJJT
(A)
- i s n
<T
"i sn nan
1
0 3 i s n
( 0
m
t i r e
*s>re &3&r e
0 9
133
t
133, 133
<133
B3133
( 0
ba
*
K^a
i 66a
i* * *
&3t>a
V J
( / )
Tfc
DEC. VI . SINGULAR. JI c&ut. ( 6 143. )
()
$1%
oi>a B33^B
(4)
i ?3
in?:
B31?J
( 0 JIT n i , n t
>y-|T B3*-| T
v s J -
E das*.
(<9 1B& "iBb .
>1B0 D31B0
( 0
1*E
*l3j?
,P
)=!P.
-RP
(/> P B H
P ^ . -tin
B3 ^n
(*) i & NI J N ^ n
V
B3 ^n
v : v
(A)
n s j N * 3
>nxa 83033
V I
O clan.
( 0
" 0 "TP*
0
? ! ? a
( i )
Y #
i xag B3xag-
(*) J>?S
V? I D
B3$7B
V J *
( 0
01j>
^ " P .
nso'ij?
154. PAR. II. Declensions of nouns. 30 7
Plur. abfl. Light suit * Const Grave stiff.
mm l a w w o w
- r -j : - v : -
b i y v s r & s m v f r *
DEC. V. PLURAL.
B,
?E! rijjt
a - n s n n s n n s n s a n m
"I - - 1
_
V : -
niDnS (as Dec. XI.)
b " h 3 3 >133 *133 b 3
v
1 2 3
c v a "wipa * s 6 a s y s t v a
q ,
391 \
3
.!p?
DEC. VI . PLURAL. A class.
D"oba *oVa -oVa a a ^ a
t "T # V
M
"
c t o n ? 3 "-i53 a a - n y j
- : - i - v
m WT WT f iW
-r; - -r. v : -
class.
bi - l bo " ' i bb b 3 i " l b d
- -R %
a - n a p - n a p n a p . b a n a p
b ^ n ^ > n . a a ^ v n .
b n v n (tc.
* + 1
b ^ n s a ras v m b a t i x :
- : * 5 :
o ctaw.
a n p a "npa njja B3np
;
a
b ^ s a j ? ">sbf> t m j j b a ^ s a ^
b ^ j b ^ 5 b "^s b 3 ^ y d
" f i
e
^ " i
908 164. PA*. II. tkcUnsitn* qf noINU.
Sing. abs.
Syriae Segholates.
(m)
Sing. abs. Coast
Light sufll Phml ate.
(m)
"
xim
mm
0 0
nam s a p tBa'o
Irregular Stgholatm fran ntrit IS and ' 5.
(o) nm
V *
ni B (m Dec. I.)
GO
r j hn ( Dec. I.)
(?)
(at Dec. L)
(') -p? (Sing, as Dec. I.) fiiT?
t 1
()
111 (Sing, as Dec. I.)
t
0 )
-I'lO (Sing, ai Dec. I.) d n i o
Dec. VIL Singular. (6 144.)
Sing. abe. Const Ught suff. Grave suff.
0 0
0 3 d o , " d o
t
i a o
d d d o
(A) a^
OI'IN oaa^K
( 0
Vapa tyop_B Ba$Bj?B
GO
nana r aws TISTB Dar iar o
v -i -
() Vpa bpn "^pB. aabp.B
( / )
V - V -
12? tias?
Dec. VIII. Singular. (6 145.)
0 0
c
V
ijji
nasi
v r
(4)
m \*
tM sac*
0)
IB
*TD B3TO
09
a?~
V
0)
pn P'n ,yn
>pn
( / ) t>
aat?
V* *
to
00
W
135B
na B
( 0
T?
VI
DEC. I X. SINGULAR. ( 6 146. )
0 0
nth nth 'th
oath
V
()
m' o
V t
nniD
niia
T
oaito
V *lT
154. PAR. II. Ihciensionf if nouns.
3 0 9
()
n e )
4 * *
me
00
2 Ti n
(0)
f cn)
w
r tn
f
(*)
r% "
(y)
ox
t
Light auff. Grave suff.
m e TO}
> a n n e f
t i n
i ^ n
Plural abs.
(*)
(y)
na
o s
Plural tlx.
1t 1b0
b ^ i *
DEC. VII.
Light auff.
i n i b p
<*
r i n s t o
n ^ n
j j vj y
'if inaia
(as Dec. XIII.)
PLURAL.
Const.
r r t a o
^ a p _ a
nhnar a
h2j>
b - ^ n
T*
a wi a
0 ^ 2 2 )
b v o i f
Grave snff-
a a ^ t i b i p
n a - q ' n a
b a ^ e j y a
d s i n ' i n a t a
na^a?
V
d i e x
a n a
nha*j
n^pn
a^aa
b i j j b
a i n
DEC. VI I I .
"'b?
i e *
* t o
-r ^aV
E"
' VAA
mb
n
PLURAL.
fck
to
t t i a ^
i p n
^aa
l as a
b v h
a n t e
41
DEC. I X. PLURAL.
n ' o n ' o
b a r s ?
da' i b
n a n a
bavr t a! ?
a?T>Vaa
V *
a a ^ a a
aanh
ban^i b
310
154. Par. II. Declension* qf nmtiu.
Sing. abs. Const Light suff.
DEC. X. SINGULAR. ( 147. )
(<*)
r ni n
r
nnin ir nto
(*) r &ina
T
r f r ina vi Vva
DEC. XI . SINGULAR. (& 148. )
>N3B
() r us
T X
NJFFL >N3B
(*) N S O n:a
inja
(')
"SI*
n
? - i *
v\jnt
(d)
naan
^ *2
naan
inaan
0 )
WW 4
"1
TO?
( f )
nabaa
naSa'a
w
ir obaa
(g)
nr jBoa
nnl oa
. TirjBf f lB
DEC. XI I . |
o
c
o
09
naVa naVa voVa
( I )
r f r aV
t
nVato VFCAI O
(<) r m
t j v
ne m T B m
09
nam
t *
nam
-
nam
t *
() r r w
t - j -
r r w
" T O
DEC. XI I I . SRAETILAB. ( 160. )
(")
nnaqa nn| qa ip-ra&a
&)
r nss r naa
ip-iai
( 0
N P I T
net* inns
09
nana
v *%
nsina 1P3P3
t*.
#
0 ) n o m r o h a ippnj
(/) N
? I
na<=
ipaV
v
00
r a o naa i p a a
154. PAR. II. Declensions of nouns. 311
Grave fluff. Plural abs. Const Suffix.
DEC. X. PLURAL.
oami n
v
tTiTin
nTr tn
n'n'in
Banana nt ona ni^ina n^na
DEC. XI . PUIRAI_
aanao
rrtaai niaqj ivon
Banjo
ntao
n'iDo
*>ni3p"
nanj?*7S
r r tpw n'ipis
"tVipis
aanaan niaan r r taan "nhaarj
aan!>
<R
nf ta* rrtVw
i n^jy
(as Dec. XIII.)
(as Dec. XIII.)
DEC. XI I . PLURAL.
Banana
rrtaVa r r taba nha^a
aanWa rrtVato niVato nvf caf o
aanenn
T I
ntenn
nto-in
i ntem
- : v
aana-in nhain r f iann
f
v e i n
V
aannyj
v : --i-
T T;
r r tlM
*:
n"nys
-1-
in'nM
DEC. XI U. PLURAL.
aam&a
v : r :
r f i-iaoa
: :
ni-iaoa
'n'naoa
-r
rjnwN, jjnotj.
sjrnrja
nhsna
t; V
#
r f ana
r
pri ons
Slf 154. Par. III. IMumm% qf mwi ekaL ( 151.)
Sing. abs. Dual abs. D.conat
i .
t r h j n
Denton
i l
o *
a ^ h ^ n
ill.
i v .
c e c d
- T 5
a ^ n r s vn
v.
v l
B?$n ^Jn
b r h a c n a
t w n a " wi s
b">$t3 ^ 7 3
*r
A
E
Q
dv
nta")
t
Sl
3E?
b a n
>b33
i r i i
r
a- nns
"TJ T
Stag. aba. Dual abs. D.consL
T& Q^V?. T ?
v\b o^nV
: - * :
v i i .
a s t e r n o n t o
v i i i .
t | 3 b ^ b s ^ 3
1 9 b ^ f f l ' 33
x .
n b m b ' o t b k
* * "
x i .
ntto BTf ito
t * * *
j l k b fffw
x i i .
n 3 t b n i s t
n a p . i a y i b j p
x i i i .
nans Bir iom
v S J
"t l bj o
t k b
; "
v i 3 t
154. PAH. IV. JVmural nouns be. ( 152.) SIS
I. Cardinals fa .from 1 to 10.
No. Signs. Masc. abs. Const. Fem. aba. Const. Ordinate.
1 M ^rot n m n n
2 S Bi n s
"OB
3 A nf t B n a S a BVB
T
s Vs
J
4 i n w i *
f T
?3_1 M-I*
iTan
# 1
J
5
n ns a r r
-J
n s a n
V -5
Ba n
*
Btin
*1
>Bian
6 i h b b
r
n s s
V
am
a s
">SB
7
t
w o o
r
n j a p m b ; s n i yi aa
8
n n a bs
n a b s
-
n a b s
V 1
sj i Bp
9 D n ? a n
*
mm n
y o n
? o n
>y>sn
0
10
i
nn' oy n^ i w liBJ
II. Cardinals from 11 to 19.
Masculine. Feminine.
n -itoy i m miDy n n
# V - -
-I's* Ta j ?
* t
HTB?
,
<nB>
12 zS "lis? c a s n-ito? DTi s
itoy *>3 i nnt w n n i
13
v>
I' B? n s Vo
* Y
n-ito? n&fi
14
*
n t o w a n *
* * T t -
nntoV m*ij*
15
ft lioy nt san
* * T
mt oy aa'n
# . v - j
16
ir
V n o ? n a s
t * f
m o ? b b
* .
v
17
p
i t s? n b m o ? m b '
V
18
TV*
* * * .
itoy naba
T f T
nnte? n a b s
19 CP i ' s y n*Bn
* * * !
m o ? j o' n
314 154. PAE. 1V. Mmural noims. ( 152. )
III. Cardinals from 20 to 90.
20 d b f i p l 60 0
30 b BipVo 70 y a^ap'
* *
40 a cyan* so b a^ap"
so j Qian 90 s niyon
. . -j . . .
IF. Hundreds.
100 p
200 1 d w
t
soo e ntea t f t o
:
400 ri ni*a ya-i
500 pn(^) n wa o a n
600 - i n (b) n'lkboo
700 on C1) nt eayap
oo r in (C|) ntea najbp"
900 pnn (y) n"i*a ypn
V. Thousands.
1,000 m p| b*
2,000 a
3,ooo 5 c b V k naf to
7
"r*5 V
4,000 i' b^bV* riya-is<
5,000 r i b*b^>k noar t
7
t I V -I
6,ooo i' B"Va na o
' <r I V
7,000 if b*>b^m nyao
10,000 naai, ta-i, Ktan
* t
20,000 n'la-i *>np
30, 000 n'la-i oVa'
* 2
40, 000 M'la-i yan*
(120,000 tai n i p y n^na
^or 12 times 10,000
6oe,ooo pf e* ntea op
155, 156* PARTICLES, ETC. 3 1 5
PARTICLES.
155. General remarks
tl . Under the gener al appellation of particles, ar e com-
pr ehended adver bs, prepositions, conjunctions, and inter-
jections.
t2. Like nouns, some of these ar e primitive, but most
of them derivative. Of the der ivatives, some have an
ending appropriated solely to the f orm of par ticles, as
03X5# truly f r om truth ; while most r etain the f or m
of ver bs, nouns, or pronouns.
3. Composition of words is more frequent among particles than in
the leading parts of speech. Apocope is also more common; all the
prepositions &c. which consist of only one letter, being doubtless apoc-
opated words; as b for for "JE &c.
4. The older grammarians have, for the most part, considered all
the particles as derivative nouns; but this is not probable, as primitives
are found in all the other parts of speech. It is, however, very difficult
to draw the exact line between the primitive and derivative forms,
as the etymology is often much obscured by the changes which the
particles have undergone.
156. Adverbs.
1. Pr imitive adver bs ar e the f ollowing.
YK then ; where ? 'pfc, Cpktt) whence ? whither ? DM an,
nonne ? rfo, H3, H33 thus ; not; VlB when ? He, IB, MB here ; DID
there.
Also the interrogative prefix an, nonne ? for the punctuation of
which see 61. 20.
2. Some der ivative adver bs have appropriate adverbial
endings, viz.
() In d- ; as tKOtt truly from truth.
() In D-; as DfctnD suddenly, instead of D?n from the wink
of an eye.
(c) In "U; as from TK then.
3 1 6 157. PREPOSITIONS*
3. Many der ivative adver bs have the f or ms of other
par ts of speech, viz.
() Of nouns with a preposition; as before, upwards, Sic.
() Of nouns in the accusative; as sing. nttjj, securely; plur.
uprightly. Some of these forms are no longer used as noons; as not.
(e) Of adjectives; as masc. at a well; fern. quickly,
twice; plural rrtfioia fearfully. These are used in a neuter sense,
like multum, noXXa tic. ( 162.)
(d) Of the infinitive absolute, especially in Hiphil; as again,
literally redeundo ; much, lit. rmdtiplicando ; 05HBH early. Some-
times with a preposition; as ^ilb abundantly.
() Of pronouns; as fit here ; ita how, &c.
4. Some adver bs ar e compounded of other wor ds.
() Of prepositions and adverbs; as T3~b? wherefore; how
long? ' " ~
() Of two adverbs; as ilCiJ where, from ^ and rib Sic.
5. Sever al adver bs r eceive af ter them verbal suffixes
( 6& 7. 126); in which connexion the suf f ixes ar e gen-
er ally in the nominative case.
E. g. I am yet, he is yet; he is not; 1*8 where is
he? Gen. 3: 9 nS'N for *T where art thou? The suffixes are
usually those with an epenthetic Nun which belong to the future tense.
NOTE. The forms "NIB, TALB &c. have a noun-suffix, and are thus
used as nouns, signifying J alone &c~. literally in my being alone Sic. So
f pya Ps. 104 : 33. 146 : 2, lit during my continuance Sic.
I $7. Prepositions.
1. Pr imitive prepositions ar e the f ollowing.
3 in ; 5) as ; b, b$ to, for ; from ; nij with, in suffix state ;
nK the sign of the accusative case, with suit
The prepositions s, 53, b, are always prefixed to the words which
they govern; as rTOttHa in the beginning. So also 173 is generally
prefixed and its final Nun assimilated. For the punctuation of all these,
see 61. 714.
The prefix S often has the sense of a conjunction.
157* PREPOSITIONS. 317
2. Many der ivative pr epositions have the f or ms of oth-
er par ts of speech, viz.
() Of nouns singular in the accusative or construct state; as
causd, on account qf ; before ; nnr j under, &c.
() Of nouns plural in the construct state; as bif, to, for, po-
etic ; fq, &c. Several prepositions take suffixes upon dual or
plural forms; as nnrj, ^nnn, l^nn, but also onnn &c. So V? upon,
plur. const poetic, with suff. DD"
1
^ ; see no. 3 below.
(c) Of nouns in the construct state with prefix prepositions; as
*P by; ^2tb before, &c.
(d) Of adverbs with prefix prepositions; as JVJB, Tjbsb without;
*K30 since &c.
(e) Of adverbs followed by a preposition, so as to denote but one
Idea; as b MO around; b above; "J30 y^n without, &x.
( f ) Of a double preposition; as D37J3 from with ; ]^2|J9 between ;
nnn bt under; like the French cPaupres, de chez &c.
(g) Of a paragogic letter or suffix, viz. H_ towards, to ; as
towards- Sodom ; to the ground &c. So also H., and are, in
a very few instances, appended to words with a similar meaning; as
WHO to Syene Ezek. 29: 10; to Nob 1 Sam. 21: 2.
3. Sever al pr epositions which have the f or m of nouns,
r eceive af ter them noimrsttffixes ( 66.7. 135. 6); in which
connexion the suf f ixes ar e usually in the genitive case.
Inasmuch as prepositions have the forms of nouns both in the sin-
gular and plural, they also receive suffixes both as singular and plural
nouns; as ^ 2 between me and thee ; between us. See.
above in no. 2. b.
NOTE. The following instances occur of prepositions with verbal
suffixes, viz. ^rnn 2 Sam. 22: 37, 40, 48; Jisnnn Gen. 2:21;2*1^3
Ps. 139: 11.
4. Most of the primitive pr epositions ar e quite ir r egu-
lar in their mode of r eceiving suf f ixes, and ar e ther ef or e
f ully exhibited her e.
(a) The pr ef ix 3 takes the f ollowing f or ms.
Sing, "*a; Sja, in pause ?JX; fem. ta; MS. Plural D^B;
31 8 1 5 7 . PREPOSITIONS.
NOTE. The prefix b takes suffixes precisely tike a, with the addi-
tion of the 2 plur. fern, ilibb, and 3 plur. masc. poetic tab. Once 2
pers. dog. nsb Gen. 27 : 37.
(6) The pr ef ix S usually takes the par agqgic tD bef or e
suf f ixes. The f ollowing ar e its f or ms.
Sing, spfea; S^S. Plural ia:D; D^S, seldom
Drjs, Dna, seldom
NOTE. The prepositions a, b, a, sometimes take the paragogic fa
in order to render them independent words; as Ps. 11: 2
for b$&a. See Ges. Lex. under ^za.
(c) The pr eposition ]!0 bef or e many of the suf f ixes
takes the f or m pr obably signif ying a parte, de la part
de &c. The f or ms ar e as f ollows*
Sing. poetic and ; *|73, in pause j ko; ?|5?;
poetic ^ina^and Plural qs^JD; D$; 73a; DJya, po-
etic ansa; fna.
(d) The pr eposition n&, when it is the sign of the
accusative, becomes n'ltt bef or e suf f ixes, as f ollows.
Sing. Yii, in pause and ; fem. -ynfi*; iKfit;
ftrfo. Plural ttnfit; Dsn, ; on, fflnnfcj, Drjnte; n:irifit,
(e) The pr eposition DM with sometimes takes suf f ixes
like the pr eceding, especially in the later Hebr ew; but
its appr opr iate f or ms ar e the f ollowing.
Sing, -nit; sjna, in pause fem. ?jnK, *jn; in#; nn.
Plural 13n; DDFifit; Dnfit.
( f \ The f or ms of t39 with ar e the f ollowing.
Sing. ">735; ^739, in pause fem. n. Plural
; D^jd* ; drjay, ozay. The form also occurs, but only with
the suffix of the fii*t person singular; see Ges. Lex. under 09.
NOTE. The pronouns and JT1J3 sometimes take prepositions
before them without change; as Jlttna Ex. 36: 1; Gen. 41:
19,- Ecc. 12: 12, toe. toe.
158, 159. CONJUNCTIONS, INTERJECTIONS. s i 9
158. Conjunctions.
1. Pr imitive conjunctions ar e the f ollowing.
b3M but; lit or; -JM only ; bfc that not; 5]fi$ also ; DM i f ; *b \f ;
lest; iWJ expletive, now, then.
Also the copulative prefix "J and; for the punctuation of which,
see 61. 15 fee.
2. Sever al der ivative conjunctions have the f orms of
other parts of speech, viz.
() Of pronouns; as ^ M (-^) because, that; like on, quod &c.
() Of pronouns preceded by prepositions; as because ;
until, be.
(c) Of a double conjunction; as ^ OS although; DM **2) but, unless.
159. Interjections.
1. Inter jections, being simple exclamations occasioned
by joy or sor r ow, ar e mostly primitive. Such ar e the
f ollowing wor ds.
JIM, nSIM, Mr* alas! *M, MM, S"P1M, *DM, ^)?M wo ! nMft aha,
euge! fil, nsfl to, ecce! M3 quaeso. So M|tf ah, quaeso! from Hi$
or Wjm and M3.
2. A f ew der ivative interjections have the f orms of
other parts of speech, viz.
() Of verbs in the imperative, both of the singular and plural
fofms; as nan age! plur. ten, from 3TV; on hush, be still/ plur.
*D!1, in Piel f r im non; idov, ecce !
() Of nouns; as ""71^ O the blessedness qf! Ps. 1: 1 &c.
far be it from, God forbid / hear I enough, hold!
3. The interjection nsn takes after it verbal suffixes in the nomin-
ative case; as "^sn, *s\sn ecce ego! flan ecce tu! &c.
PART V.
SYNTAX.
160. Order of Syntax.
In the etymological part of the preceding pages, it was thought
proper to foHow the natural order of the Hebrew language, and con-
sider, first, the pronouns whose ground-forms are all primitives; sec-
ondly, the verbs, which for the most part are primitive; and thirdly,
nouns and other parts of speech, which are mostly derivative. But
in the syntax, as the subject of a sentence, or nominative case, natu-
rally comes first in order, it seems more proper, first, to consider the
noun, pronoun &c. and then, the verb and other constituent parts of a
sentence.
SYNTAX OF NOUNS.
16!. Nouns used in the place of adjectives
The adjectives of the Hebrew, when compared with those of the
occidental languages, are very few in number. In consequence of
this, substantives are very frequently employed in the place of ad-
jectives.
t l . When two nouns come together , the f ir st of which
is in the constr uct state, and the second of cour se in the
genitive, one of them is ver y of ten to be taken as an ad-
jective.
(a) Commonly the second noun qualif ies the f ir st.
E. g. *^5) vessels qf siker L e. silver vessels; DVte pos-
session of eternity L e. everlasting possession; Is. 24: 10
city of desolation i. e. desolate city ; Gen. 34: 30 ->D0E men qf
number i e. which can be numbered, or which are few.
1 6 1 * NOUNS USED AS ADJECTIVES* 321
NOTE. This construction is a very common one in all languages;
and the Hebrew, as well as others, not unfrequently adopts it when
adjectives might be employed; as ]n's priest of the head i. e.
high priest, instead of Even adjectives themselves are
sometimes constructed as nouns in the genitive, following the noun
which they qualify; as *1 a woman qf evil I e. an evil woman,
instead of nan ^ waters of fullness L e. full streams, in*
stead of tT. See the next section.
(6) Sometimes the -f irst noun qualif ies the second.
E. g. WW rift'tp the tallness of his cedars i. e. his tall cedars;
the fatness qf his flesh i. e. his fat flesh; D^ttn-bs the
whole of men L e. all men.
NOTE. Instances of nouns used as adjectives before the genitive are
rather unfrequent, except in respect to bs, which is usually found in
this construction.
2. When two nouns ar e in apposition, one of them is
not unf requently to be taken as an adjective. ( 168. 2.)
Here, too, sometimes the first noun is to be construed as an a f f e c -
tive, as Is. 45: 23 righteousness sentence L e. righteous
sentence ; but more commonly the second, as Prov. 22: 21 rtiJK
words truth L e. true words; bN^to*, Israel the whole qf him i. e.
all Israel. Compare Ps. 71:7, &c.
t3. When two or more nouns ar e connected by the
ver b of existence (tlNl) expr essed or understood, those
which designate quality ar e usually employed as adjec-
tives.
E. g. Gen. 1: 2 the earth *rin was desolation and emp-
tiness L e. desolate and empty. Ps. 10: & highness
are thy statutes L e. they are high, out of sight Job 8: 9 bfon
HrifN yesterday are we i e. of yesterday, hesterni sumus.
4. Nouns with pr epositions pr ef ixed ar e sometimes
used as adjectives.
E. g. Ps. 77: 14 in holiness is thy way i. e. thy way
is holy; 1 Chr. 2 6 : 1 4 a counsellor with wisdom L e. a wise
counsellor; Ps. 17:9 3 ^ 2 my enemies in respect to life L e. my
deadly enemies.
3 2 2 1 6 1 . NOUNS USED AS ADJECTIVES.
5. Of two nouns connected by a conjunction, one is
sometimes employed as an adjective.
E. g. Gen. 4: 4 iattat of the firstlings of his
flock and of the fat qf them i e. of the fat firstlings &c. Gen. 3: 16
thy pain and thy conception L e. thy painful conception.
Perhaps Ps. 119 : 168.
NOTE. This construction is called Hendiadys, i. e. tv did SvoTv.
6. The .Hebr ews sometimes used a circumlocution to
expr ess qualities, which in other languages ar e usually de-
signated by adjectives.
For this purpose they employed the following nouns in the con-
struct state before other nouns.
(a) ttTfit man; as a man qf word* L e. an eloquent
man ; a man qf piety L e. a pious man.
(b) DVlfc men ; as YjJO men of hunger L e. hungry men.
(c) b?? lord, possessor ; as "Vto possessor qf hair L e. hairy;
n
n
na possessors of a covenant i. e. bound together by covenant
(d) 73 son and na daughter ; as son of strength L e. a hero;
rn>3-]$ son of death L e. condemned, worthy of death; 73 son
qf a year L e. a yearling. So rfl3a the daughters of song L e.
the singing birds, Ecc. 12: 4.
The word 73 son is not always employed with the like significan-
cy, but sometimes loses its appropriate meaning. Thus, ton* of the
poor means
1
the poor'; sons of foreigners means
4
foreigners'; son qf
man means
4
man'; son of nobles means
4
a nobleman.
1
So in Homer,
vltt 'Ajamv is the same as \A%au)L The nature of the passage,
therefore, must determine the manner in which the term son is to be
taken.
NOTE. The first noun in constructions of this kind is sometimes omit-
ted, and can be supplied only from the sense of the passage; as Job
31: 32 rn& way for n*3$ son of the way Le.a traveller ; Prov.
17: 4 *1^ falsehood for a man'qf falsehood L e. a liar. So Gen. 16:
2 pip 731 for son of Damascus Le.a native of Damascus.
162, 163. NOUNS; INSERTION o r THE ARTICLE, ETC. 3 2 3
162. Adjectives used as nouns
tThe Hebr ew, like other languages, of ten supplies the
place of nouns by adjectives taken in an abstract or neu-
ter sense.
E. g. Joe. 24: 14 tftan integrity, lit upright, innocent; Job 20:
22 trouble, lit troublesome &c. Ps. 10: 10. Compare 161. 1.
a, note. So in Greek, TO xaAov, TO ooqnv, &c.
NOTE. In this way some adjectives are constantly used as epithets
of persons or things; as "VOM strong for ' God'; Vafit strong for ' bull,
horse
1
; nan hot for' the sun'; naaij white for
6
the moon
1
fee. So
for God we say in English the Almighty, the Omnipotent kc. in French,
VEtemel fee. This is called the epitheton ornans.
163. Nouns ; insertion of the article
f l . In gener al, the Hebr ew ar ticle ( 65), like the in
English, is used in speaking of a def inite, bef ore-mentioned,
well known, or monadic object.
E. g. the king; Gen. 2: 7 tHttn the man before mentioned;
the sun ; y^ n the earth, &c.
NOTE. In poetry, definite objects are often designated without the
article; as Ps. 48 : 3 the city ^ of the great king ; Ps. 72:1. In
a similar manner the earlier Greek poets, particularly Homer, omit
the article where the Attic prose writers insert it
1*2. The ar ticle is commonly, but not always, used in
constructions like the f ollowing, viz.
() Bef or e the genitiye.
E.g. y^t t n the kings of the land ; n&fiban the men of
war i. e. the warriors. (6 161. 1. a.)
() Bef or e a noun of multitude in the singular.
E. g. arcnn the wicked ; p*ian the righteous ; W5>n the Co-
naanite.
(c) Bef or e gener ic nouns, when used with a particular,
individual signif ication.
324 164. NOUNS J OMISSION OF THX ARTICLE.
E. g. the river L e. the Euphrates; the desert i c.
the Arabian desert; "JOteil the adversary L e. Satan, duzftokoe.
(d) Bef or e the vocative.
E. g. Deut. 32: 1 D-JgtBn O heavens! Ps. 114: 5 Dn O sea! &c.
t3. The ar ticle is sometimes used as a pronoun, either
demonstrative or r elative.
E. g. this day ; this night ; this time. So also
Jos. 10: 24 the warriors infit Kisbnf} who accompanied him; Judg.
13: 8 the child which is born, &c.
4. The Hebr ews sometimes employed the ar ticle with
an indefinite signif ication, like tlie English cr or an.
E. g. 1 Sam. 17: 34 a lion ; Num. 11: 27 a youth Ac.
So in Is. 7: 14, may, in conformity with this rule, be render-
ed a virgin, and not the virgin, as Gesenius and others have translated
it In cases of this kind, however, the article is usually omitted; as
Job 1: 1 there was 3PK a man ; Ex. 2:15.
NOTE. The indefinite article a or an is sometimes expressed by
108$ one; as 1 Sam. 1: 1 there was tfvt a man, &c. This con-
struction is the usual one in Chaidee and Syriac. So in Greek, Matt
21: 19 ovxij ftia a fig-tree; Mark 14 : 61 eTg tig vtaviaxog a young
man &c.
164. Nouns; omission of the article
The article is commonly omitted in the f ollowing con-
structions, viz.
1. Bef or e proper names, especially those of persona,
countries, r iver s, mountains, and plaees.
To this principle, however, there are so many exceptions, that it
can by no means be regarded as a general rule In the language. Thus
we find n^O Euphrates always without the article, and ^ *^
or
"
dan almost always with it So ^3*0 Sinai, Sion &c. always
without; but Lebanon, Carmel tic. often with the article.
2. Bef or e a noun in the construct state f allowed by a
genitive.
| 1 6 5 . ARTICLE BEFORE ADJECTIVES. 3 2 5
*
E. g. rrtfi* "Ol the word of Jehovah, instead of &c. But
there are exceptions enough here to show that usage is variable Thus,
when the following genitive is a proper name which excludes the ar-
ticle, the first noun may take it; as Gen. 31: 13 Vttn the God
qf Bethel; Gen. 24:67 H^ip tnbnfcH to the tent qf Sarah So where two
genitives come together; as Ezek. 45: 16 ywn bb all the peo-
ple of the land ( 172.3.6). In afew other cases, it is also used by way
of emphasis &c.
3. Bef or e a noun which has a suf f ix pronoun.
But here also the article is sometimes used, especially with a gen-
itive or for the sake of emphasis &c. as Josh. 7: 21 ^bnan ?pna m
the midst of my tent, &c. The reason of the usual omission in this case
and the preceding one is, that the genitive or suffix pronoun gives suf-
ficient de/initeness to the meaning of the preceding noun, without the
use of the definite article.
4. Bef or e the pr edicate of a sentence.
E. g. Ps. 10: 5 Spp.B1p loftiness are thy statutes ; Ps. 36: 6
their way is darkness. So in the Greek. Compare
165. SLb.
165. Article before adjectives.
1*1. In gener al, wher e a noun has the ar ticle, the adjec-
tive or pronoun agr eeing with it must also have the ar-
ticle.
E. g. Gen. 10: 12 the great city; Num. 11:34
tnnft tampan this place.
NOTE. In a few cases the noun has an article and the adjective
omits it; as Gen. 29: 2 Sibil* the great stone.
2. The ar ticle is usually omitted bef or e adjectives in
the f ollowing constructions, viz.
(a) When the noun to which the adjective belongs
omits the ar ticle.
E. g. Jer. 11: 19 a tame lamb, &c.
NOTE 1. When the noun omits an article required by the sense,
merely through the influence of a suffix pronoun or genitive which
43
3 2 6 166, 167. NOUNS ; NEUTER GENDER, ETC*
follows it ( 164. 2, 3), the adjective which belongs to it may still
take the article; as 2 Chr. 6: 32 sjjoflj thy great name ; Dent
11: 7 bVl|!3 the great work qf Jehovah.
NOTE 2. The adjective sometimes has an article when the sense
of the noon does not require it, as 1 Sam. 19: 22 "na the great
cittern; Jer. 27: 3. 38:14 &c. In these cases, however, the article
may perhaps be regarded as a relative ( 163. 3), and we may trans-
late, cistern which is great.
(6) When the adjective is the pr edicate of a sentence.
E. g. at e God is good ; nji-r 0!3 blessed be the
name of Jehovah. Compare 164. 4.
166. Nouns ; mode of expressing the neuter gender fyc,
tThe Hebr ew having no neuter gender , commonly
employs the f eminine to expr ess it, but sometimes the
masculine. ( 131. 6 note.)
E. g. Ps. 27 : 4 / have asked n)3$ one thing ; Ps. 12: 4 rriH*M great
things ; Gen. 42: 30 ni&j? hard things, &c. Less often the masculine;
as Prov. 8: 6 D"
,
*p33 noble things.
NOTE. The feminine is also sometimes used in a collective sense
for objects which are properly masculine; as Mic. 1: 11,12 rnUJV*
inhabitress L e. inhabitants; Mic. 7: 8, 10 for enemies. So ytfi a
tree, a grove of trees, &c. So in Arabic the phratisfractus, which
is used as a collective, very often has a feminine form.
* 167. Nouns of multitude andpluralis excellentiae
1. The Hebr ews of ten employ nouns of the singular
f or m in a collective sense, especially national denominations.
( 133. 7.)
E. g. the Canaanite i. e. the inhabitants of Canaan, &c.
2. For the sake of emphasis, the Hebr ews commonly
employed most of the wor ds which signif y Lord, God, &c*
in the plur al f or m, but with the sense of the singular .
This is called the pluralis excellentiae, and is f ound in the
f ollowing words*
1 6 8 . NOUNS; APPOSITION.
327
() Lord in all the forms of the plural, except my mas-
ten ; but the form is always used with the sense of the singular
for God. (6) God in all the forms of the plural, (c) by a lord
in all its forms, (d) the most Holy One Hos. 12: 1. Prov9:
10. 30: 3. Jos. 24: 19. (e) the Almighty is probably of the plu-
ral form ( 133. 2. b). ( f ) D^D^n household god as singular 1 Sam.
19: 13,16. (g) Occasionally in a few other words; as Job 35: 10
God
m
y maker \ Ecc. 12: 1 thy Creator. See also Is. 22:
11. 42: 5. Ps. 149: 2; and
4
anomalies in the concord of verbs.
1
3. The plural, especially in poetr y, is not unf requent-
ly used instead of the singular.
E. g. Job 6: 5 the sand of the seas i. e. the sea. Even in ca-
ses where only one can possibly be meant, is this the case; as Judg.
12: 7 he was buried ^ ^ a in the towns of Gilead i. e. in a town; Gen.
8: 4 the ark rested on the mountains of Ararat L e. on a moun-
tain. Job 21: 32 rrtiaat the graves i. e. the grave.
168* Nouns ; apposition
t l . In Hebr ew, as in other languages, two nouns desig-
nating the same thing ar e placed in apposition.
2. In Hebr ew, nouns ar e not unf requently put in ap-
position, in cases wher e the second noun in other langua-
ges would be a genitive. (161. 2.)
E. g. Prov. 22: 21 n&tt tPn&N words which are truth i. e. words
' T 1
of truth; Zach. 1:13 D**ttri3 ITnai words which are consolations L e.
words of consolation; Ex. 24:5 tPnaT offerings which are
peace-qfferrngs.
3. Nouns ar e usually put in apposition which designate
weights, measures, time &c.
E. g. 2 K. 7 : 1 nbb MitD a seah of fine meal; 2 K. 5: 23
two talents of silver ; Gen. 41: 1 two years of time;
1 K. 7: 42 D'-HD "TO two rows o( pomegranates ; Ezek. 22: 18
anq dross of silver. Compare 176. 6.
None. These last instances may be explained, also, by suppotfrur
328
169. wocvs; Riprrrnoji.
the Utter noon to be in the accusative and used adverbially, as it fe hi
Arabic; or which amounts to the same thing, we may say that the
latter noon is in an oblique case and governed by a preposition under-
stood ; as two talents in silver tic.
4. Sometimes nouns ar e put in apposition wher e the lat-
ter noun designates a whole or genus, of which the f or mer
designates only a part or species.
E. g. Judg. 5:13 09 the nobles of or among the people.
5* Some examples occur of apparent apposition, in
which ther e probably is an ellipsis of a noun.
E. g. [^nbfit] njn^ Jehovah God of hosts. So probably Is.
30: 20 f ig] D*5g water water of trouble; iBK [nan] nan the glow
the glow of his anger. The Hebrew noun, which probably is omitted
in these phrases, Is supplied in the brackets.
* 169. JVotm# / repetition
1. The Hebr ews f r equently employed a r epetition of
nouns without the copula *] f or the f ollowing purposes, viz.
() To denote multitude.
E. g. Gen. 14: 10 ^ati pits of bitumen L e.
many pits, &c.
() To denote distribution.
E. g. Gen. 32:171^5-, flock flock by itself i. e. each flock
by itself.
(c) To denote all, every.
E. g. Deut 14: 22 nsti nattf year yearL e. every year. Some-
times also with a copula; as Deut 32: 7 THI generation and
generation i. e. all generations; see no. 2 below.
(d) To denote intensity.
E. g. Ecc. 7: 24 pfc* pfe* deep deep i e. very deep. So earnest-
ness in warning or threatening, in grief, joy &c. is usually expressed
by repetition.
NOTE. In order to denote intensity, it is not always necessary that
the same word should be repeated: but a synonymous word, or a word
170. NOUNS ; GENITIVE CASE.
329
of similar sound and signification, is often substituted with the same
effect, as Ps. 40: 3 clay mire i. e. the miry clay; Job .30: 3
ruti wasting and destruction L e. great wasting &c. ( 178.2.)
2 Repetition with the copula usually denotes diversity.
E. g. Deut. 26: 13 *t
ne an
^
stone e
* different stones
or weights; Ps. 12: 3 i b] with a heart and a heart L e. different
hearts, with deceit
170. Nouns; mode of expressing the genitive case.
Although the cases of nouns in Hebrew are not distinguished by
appropriate forms ( 128. 2. 135.1), yet they are properly designat-
ed, as in the English and French languages, by the relations which
nouns sustain in a sentence. Thus, a noun which is the subject of a
sentence is always in the nominative case;a noun which expresses
the relation of property, possession Sac. is in the genitive case;
while those nouns which mark the object of any relation, may be said
generally to be in the objective case; or specifically to be in the geni-
tive, dative, accusative, or ablative, according to the species of relation
of which they are the objects.
t l . Most commonly the genitive case is made by a
noun pr eceding it in the constr uct state ( 135). The
noun itself in the genitive under goes no change.
2. The genitive is of ten expr essed also by cir cumlocu-
tion, viz.
() By b which belongs or is to.
E. g. 1 Sam. 21:8 the overseer of the herdsmen bW'ijb which be-
longed to Saul i. e. of the herdsmen of Saul; Ezek. 41: 9 the breadth
qf the wall $bizb which belonged to the side L e. of the aide-wall.
This kind of circumlocution is more frequent in the later Hebrew, and
is common, with little variation, in all the kindred dialects.
NOTE. This mode of expressing the genitive is most commonly
used, when two or more genitives follow each other in succession;
as Cant. 1.1.
() By b simply.
E. g. 13 the son qf Jesse ; lrpiD the shrub qf the earth
This occurs particularly in the designation of time; as Gen. 7:11
3 3 0
1 7 1 . NOUNS; OENITIVK CASE.
t* the siaXh hundreth year n5"*^nb qf the life qf Noah. Also In desig-
nating an author; as TH*? ITTaTQ a p$akn of David. Or in describing
the materials of a thing; as Ezra 1:11 0^3 vessels of gold.
Instances like those in 6 are common in the kindred dialects, and
, not unfrequent in Hebrew. All of them may be resolved into the
case a, excepting that there is in & an ellipsis of the relative pronoun
as [rrn the son which is to Jesse; so lYiD
ynctb the shrub which belongs to the earth ; the 600th year which be-
longed to the life of Noah, &c.
(c) By *[53 denoting origin.
E. g. Job 6:26 the reproof from you L e. your reproof!
This is unfrequent
NOTE. The genitive in regimen is generally placed immediately
after the noun &c. which causes it to be put in the genitive; but in a
few cases, some word closely connected with the clause is inserted
between the genitive and its antecedent Thus, Gen. 7: 6 rPrt ^353
D* a flood of waters was, Heb. a flood was of waters; Hos. 14:3
N\pn
m,
b2 thou wilt forgive all transgression, Heb. all thou-wilt-for-
give transgression; Is. 40:12. Job 15:10. One can scarcely refrain
from believing that such cases, so contrary to the common usage of
the Hebrews, must have originated from error in transcribing.
171. Nouns ; use of the genitive case,
1. The genitive marks a gr eat var iety of r elations and
dependencies in Hebr ew, which can be better exhibited
by examples, than taught by r ule.
E. g. Judg. 9 : 24 bga'V *22 DftH the violence qf [towards] the sons
qf Jervbbaal. Prov. 20:2 n72*% the terror qf the king L e. which he
causes. Prov. 1: 7 Hilrp the fear of Jehovah i. e. reverence to-
wards him. 1 Sam. 14: 15 Cnbi* the terror of God L e. that
which God hath sent. Is. 26: 11 D9"TJN3p_ jealousy qf [for] the people.
Lev. 26: 45 rP^a covenant of [with] the elders. Ps. 35:16
31923 mockers of [for] dainties i. e. to obtain them. 1 Sam. 16: 20 "fan
D]V. the ass of bread L e. which carries bread. Ezek. 35:5 r &r
1
?
the sin of the end i. e. which brings consummation. Is. 34: 5 o?
the people of my curse i. e. whom I have cursed. Is. 54:9 fib *23 the
waters qf Noah i. e. of the time of Noah.
1 7 2 . NOONS; CONSTRUCT STATE.
331
In short, the connexion and nature of the case must decide the
shade of meaning which the genitive designates; as is evident from
the above examples. Instances of this nature might easily be multi-
plied.
2. In Hebr ew, the genitive f r equently stands wher e
we might naturally expect apposition.
E. g. rHB "tH3 the river qf Euphrates i. e. the river Euphrates;
1 K.10*.l& the men of the merchants i. e. the merchantmen.
3. The genitive sometimes f ollows adjectives which
expr ess qualities belonging to the genitive noun.
E. g. 2 Sam. 4: 4 fQS lame of feet L e. in his feet; Ps.
24: 4 ^p.3 pure qf hand* L e. of pure hands; Prov. 6: 32
deficient of [in] understanding. So in Latin, integer vitae, scelerisque pw
rus &c.
4. Sometimes the genitive f ollowing an adjective is
used as a noun of multitude, and the adjective then de-
notes a part of this multitude.
E. g. Prov. 15: 20. 21:20 ^05) the foolish of men L e. fool-
ish men. 1 Sam. 17:40 Jive d**3att smooth of stone* i. e. smooth
stones; Job 41: 7 D'Utt die strong of shields i e. strong shields.
172. Nouns ; construct state vaithout a genitive, <c.
The reason why the vowels of a word in the construct state are
shortened, is the close connexion in which such word stands with the
genitive that usually follows it ( 135.1). But as close a connexion may
exist in some other forms of expression, and of course produce the
same effect upon the vowels of the former noun. Some of these
forms are exhibited below.
t l . The form of the construct state is sometimes f ound
wher e ther e is no regimen, i. e. no word dir ectly govern-
ed by it; as in the f ollowing constructions, viz.
() Before s; as Is. 9: 2 nn^tp the joy in [of] harvest; Is.
0: 11 "Ipsa who rise early in the morning.
() Before b; as Is. 66: 10 Dttb lovers of shsmber.
339 $ 173. mo m; comt kdct st at e.
(e) Before V5; U 14: SO T; i ' gig <i" to
tke stones of the pit
(J) Before Fi*; as Jer. 33: 22 ike Levites ^n'tt tsho serv-
ed me.
(e) Before *po; as Jer. 23: 23 ^1^30 a God near at hand.
( / ) Before b?; as Judg. 6: 10 ^f j f b? "^bin who go on the way.
(g) Before ; as Lev. 4: 24 Oipn the place which. So
also even if is only implied, as Is. 21: 1 *m ttsn n-")p. the city
[where David dwelt, n^-Jp being in the construct form.
{h) Before "] copulative; as Is. 33: 6 MHI n!QDn wisdom and
knowledge. So even where 1 is omitted, as Is. 28: 16.
(t) Sometimes before adjectives; as 2 K. 12: 10 one
cqfer ( 161.1. a, note); Is. 17: 10 *903 pleasant plants.
2. In a veiy f ew cases, the constr uct f orm seems to
stand f or the absolute; or r ather ther e is an ellipsis of
the second noun.
E. g. 2 K. 9: 17 I see n?Dtj a multitude L e. the multitude of Je-
hu, as the preceding part of the verse shows. Ps. 74: 19 give not
n^nb to the beasts i. e. to the beasts of the forest (n9*n), or to the
wild beast So in Ps. 16: 3, k probably for f
M
supplied from the preceding part of the verse.
Vice versa, for the use of the absolute instead of the construct see
168. 2, 5.
t3. The constr uct state has r ef er ence solely to the
r elation of two nouns to each other , and not at all to the
case of the former of those nouns ( 135. 1.) Hence the
noun in the construct state may be in the nominative,
genitive, dative, accusative, vocative, or ablative case, just
as the other part of the sentence demands.
() In the nominative; as 1 K. 12: 22 DYfbNn ^5"* the word qf
God came to Shemaiah.
() In the genitive; as Job 12: 24 the heart
of the princes qf the people qf the land, where is in the genitive
fai regard to 5b, and in the construct as it respects 09 ; while 09 fc in
the genitive in regard to TON*!, and in the construct as it respects
n n .
173* NOUNS; OBLIQUE CASES.
333
(c) In the dative; as Job 3 : 20 to those who are grieved
in spirit, where the former word is in the construct state and also in
the dative.
{d) In the accusative; as 1 Sam. 9: 27 that / may show thee
Clnbit the word of God, where is in the construct state and also
in the accusative.
(e) In the vocative; as 2 K. 1: 13 O man of God.
( / ) In the ablative ; as Ps. 17 : 4 by the word of thy
lips, where the first noun is in the construct state and also in the ablative.
173. Nouns ; mode of designating other oblique cases.
1. The dative is marked by b signif ying to or for.
NOTE. In a few cases ^ stands before the nominative; as 1 Chr.
3:2 the third was Absalom. Sometimes before the accusa-
tive ; as Ezra 8: 16 / sent Eliezer &c. The latter case is
Syriasm.
f 2. Tiie accusative is sometimes designated by DM; oth-
er wise it is without any distinctive sign.
NOTE 1. The use of nit with the accusative is limited (a) to nouns
with the article; (6) to nouns having a genitive or suffix after them;
(c) to proper names. Consequently it is used only in cases where a
definite idea fe conveyed by the noun. The particle DfiJ is much more
frequent in prose than in poetry.'
NOTE 2. But nft is sometimes used before the nominative, as 2 K.
6: 5 bjna-ruil and the iron fell into the water ; especially before the
nominative of passive verbs, as Gen. 17: 5 thy name shaU no
more be called Abram. Sometimes before the nominative of neuter
verbs; as 2 Sam. 11: 25 let not this matter displease
thee ; Ezek. 35: 10 the two nations are mine.
It is most probable, that originally nij was a pronoun signifying this,
the, the same. So the Rabbinic Hebrew uses it, as irriita on the
same day; see Ges. Lehrgeb. p. 684. Allowing it to be a pronoun, we
may account for its being placed before the nominative &c.
3. The vocative gener ally has the ar ticle.
4. The ablative takes *j!D from, out of; 2 in, by ; 03?
with &c.
44
334 174,175. NOUNS ; USE or THE ACCUSATIVE, ETC.
174. Nouns ; use of the accusative case
t l . The accusative commonly, as in other languages,
denotes the object of a transitive ver b.
t2. The accusative, in a gr eat number of cases, f or ms
adverbial designations of time, place, measure &c. and is
also used in all those cases wher e the Gr eeks understand
*crra, and the Latins, secundum, quoad f r c.
Hence circumstances like the following are usually put In the ac-
cusative case.
() Place whither; as 2 Chr. 20 : 36 tZTttnp to goto Tar-
shish.
() Place where; as Gen. 18:1 bnk?l~nn$ at the door qf the tent.
(c) Time when and how long; as tn the evening ; in the
morning. So Gen. 27: 44 during certain day*.
(d) Measure; as Gen. 1: 20 the water* rose fifteen nK cubit*.
(e) The material of which any thing Is made; as Gen. 2:7 Godform-
ed man qf dust from the earth. See 197. ,
( f ) Cases where Hard would be implied in Greek; as 1 K. 16:23
lame as to hi* feet ; Ps. 3: 8 thou hast smitten ail thine en-
emies as to [on] the cheek bone.
(g) Cases where a noun is taken in an adverbial signification; as
Deut 23: 24 n2*J2 voluntarily ; Ezek. 11:19 THfiJ 2b unanimously ;
Ex. 24: 3 b^p unanimously, &c.
3. The accusative is sometimes put af ter ver bal nouns
of an active signif ication, and is gover ned by them.
E. g. 2 K. 4: 1 rhn^-n^ K*V fearing Jehovah ; Is. 111 9 n^J
nHn^~nt$ the knowledge of Jehovah, lit the state of knowing Jehovah.
175. Nouns ; cast absolute
tl* By case absolute is meant the case of a noun which
stands in the beginning of a sentence, without any ver b or
pr edicate dir ectly belonging to it
2. The case absolute is commonly the nominative;
and it is sometimes connected with the r est of a sentence
in the f ollowing manner.
1 7 6 . NOUNS ; CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS* 3 3 5
() By Vav copulative; as Job 36 : 26 Kb] Y*3 as to
the number of his years, surely there is no computation (f it.
() Tbe nominative absolute is often found where the sense
requires an oblique case, and then the oblique case is most commonly
made by a pronoun, viz. for the genitive, as Ps. 18:31 ISHU Cttn btttt
as to Oodf perfect is his way, instead of
4
the way of God is perfect'; for
the accusative, as Ps. 74:17 fin* as to summer and
winter, thou hast made them. So Jer. 6:19 H3 'nnin as to my
law, they have abhorred it.
(c) Sometimes a participle is joined with the nominative, which
makes it like the English case absolute; as 1 Sam. 2:13 H3T iB-it-blD
any man offering a sacrifice, the servant of the priest came, &c.
NOTE. Pronouns are found in the case absolute, as well as nouns.
3. The case absolute is sometimes made by the oblique
cases.
() By the accusative ; as Gen. 47 : 21 as to the people,
he led them from one town to another.
() By the dative; as Ps. 16:3 D-ttrtlpb. as to the saints who are in the
land, all my delight is in them.
(c) By the ablative; as Gen. 2:17 Site ns^rr fajTj as to the
tree of knowledge <f good and evil, thou shaM not eat qf it, &c. '
176. Nouns ; construction of numerals fyc.
1. The cardinal numbers f rom two to ten, ar e common-*
1y constr ucted with plural nouns in the f ollowing manner ;
the gender being usually the same as that of the noun.
(a) In the construct state with nouns to which they
r elate. _
(b) In apposition, or per haps adverbially, with the
nouns to which they r elate, and either bef or e or af ter
them.
E. g. three sons; flrtbtt) rn32 three daughters.
The method of putting the cardinal after the noun Is less com-
mon, and belongs rather to the later Hebrew.
NOTE, The forms of one are commonly adjectives. ( 6 162 3*)
336 176. NOUNS; CONSTRUCTION o r NUMERALS.
2. The cardinal numbers f rom eleven to nineteen ar e put
in apposition, or r ather adverbially, with nouns either sin-
gular or plural, and commonly stand bef or e the noun, but
sometimes af ter it The gender is usually the same as
that of the noun.
E g. Num. 1: 44 VVti twehe men; 2 Sam. 9: 10 iTBSTt
D^:i ntor fifteen sons, be.
3. The tens, or cardinal numbers f r om twenty to ninety,
ar e of common gender ; ar e put in apposition with nouns
either singular or plural ; and may stand either bef or e or
af ter the noun.
E. g. Judg. 11: 33 V* twenty cities ; Gen. 32: 15
ta^toy twenty rams.
4. Number s composed of tens and units, such as 26,
34, 48 &c when standing bef or e the noun, r equir e it to be
in the singular ; but when the noun pr ecedes, it is in the
(Jur al In both cases, the gender of the smaller numeral
is the same as that of the noun.
E. g. Dent. 2:14 ftsu} njintth thirty and eight yean / Joe.
19: 30 &*"!* cities twenty and two, &c*
5. The numerals Htttl hundred and thousand may
be put in either the absolute or construct state with
nouns either singular or plural, and may stand either be-
f or e or af ter the noun.
E. g. Gen. 17:17 a hundred yean; 25: 7, 17 ntfD
a hundred of yean; 2 Chr. 3: 16 100 pomegranates; Is. 7:
23 a thousand of vines ; Ezra 8: 27 D^b-jn 1000 Darics.
NOTE. Numbers composed of thousands and smaller numbers fol-
low the same rule as composite numerals in no. 4 above.
6* In many cases, the numerals ar e used alone to de-
signate weights and measur es in common use, the noun
being omitted. (211.)
176. NOUNS ; CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS, ETC* 3 3 7
E. g. Gen. 20: 16 a thousand shekels of siher ; Ruth 3:
15 0^9 to six measures qf barley ; 1 Sam. 10: 4 two
loaves of bread. The word naK cubit commonly takes the preposition
s after the numeral; as Ex. 27: 18 rnaNl SINE one hundred in cubits
i. e. 100 cubits.
7. The cardinal numbers beyond ten ar e also used as
ordinals ; and ar e either put before the noun and in ap-
position with it, or ar e put in the genitive after the noun.
E. g. Gen. 7:11 Qi'
1
-ito? d* seventeenth day; 1 K. 16 :
10 *5^1 njipa in the year of twenty seven L e. the twenty sev-
enth year.
NOTE. For the ordinal numbers below ten, see 152. I I .
8. The cardinal numbers below ten ar e also used as or-
dinals in designating year s and days of the month.
E. g. 2 K. 18:10 ttfti n3 the sixth year; Gen. 8: 5 nna
on the first day of the month ; Lev. 23 :32 ttJMpna on the ninth
qf the month, &c.
9. The cardinal number s ar e used distributively by r e-
peating them without a copula.
E. g. Gen. 7: 8 two and two, or two by two; 7:3 JVili
iTJpip seven and seven, or by sevens
10. The answer to the question how often? is made
by a cardinal number joined with step, time, either
expr essed or under stood.
E. g. Jos. 6: 3, 11, 14 nn$ &9D once ; Ex. 34 : 23 D*SD*&
three times ; 2 K. 6: 10 nnf tt once ; Gen. 4: 24 seventy
seven times.
11. Fr actions of number s ar e expr essed by T part
joined with cardinal number s.
E. g. 2 K. 11: 7 two third-parts = | ; Gen. 47: 24
r n*Vf l four fifth-park ~ tic. In Zech. 13: 8 two thirds are
expressed by The denominator of the fraction Is usually to
be gathered from the context
3 3 8 17 7 , 1 7 8 . ADJECTIVES; COMPARISON.
SYNTAX OF ADJ ECTI VES.
177* Adjectives / comparative degree.
f l - The compar ative degr ee in adjectives is made by
using It) prce, in comparison of, af ter the adjective and be-
f or e the noun with which the comparison is made.
E. g. Judg. 14: 18 pt as sweeter than honey ; Ps. 19: 11.
t2. In the same manner also, *Jt3 is used to make a
comparison af ter nouns or ver bs signif ying condition or
quality.
E. g. Is. 52: 14 hit visage ntTCJTa was marred more than amy
man's ; Gen. 41:40 ^ 8 / will be greater than thou.
3. The par ticle of comparison *|23, when used bef or e
the inf initive mood, implies a negative, and may be tr ans-
lated so that not, or than that, according as the sentence is
constructed.
E. g. Gen. 4 : 13 fclitoitt "*2*15 my iniquity is great so that it
cannot be pardoned, or greater than that it can be pardoned.
NOTE 1. Sometimes the adjective necessary to make out the compar-
ison is omitted; as Is. 10: 10 their gods were more powerful
than those of Jerusalem.
NOTE 2. In the Rabbinic, comparison is made by more. In
Arabic it is made by prefixing t, both for the comparative and super-
lative degrees. In the New Testament the positive degree not unfre-
quently is used for both the others, in imitation of the Hebrew.
178. Adjective* ; superlative degree.
t l . The Hebr ew has no appropriate f or m nor con-
struction to mark the super lative degr ee of adjectives j
but expr esses it by various circumlocutions in the f ollowing
manner.
(a) By the article prefixed to an adjective of the positive degree;
as 1 Sam. 17: 14 David was *}Dj^n the smallest. The Arabian makes
his superlative by prefixing the article to the comparative form.
178. ADJECTIVES ; SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 3 3 0
(6) By a genitive or suffix following the adjective; as 2 Chr. 21:
17 v: a the smallest of his sons ; Mic. 7: 4 the best of them.
(c) A superlative of intensity is formed, when a word is repeated
and put in the genitive plural; as CSHjDH d'lp holy of holies i. e. most
holy place; Ecc. 1: 1 D^an Vatt vanity qf vanities i. e. exceedingly
vain. So 1 K. 8: 27 heaven if heavens L e. the highest heaven; Gen.
9: .25 servant of servants L e. a most abject servant; Deut 10:17 God
qf gods L e. the supreme God &c.
(d) The comparative degree sometimes necessarily expresses the
sense of the superlative; as Gen. 3: 1 now the serpent was baa WW*
nn cunning above all the beasts qf the field i. e. the most cunning
of all."
(e) Some nouns necessarily imply a superlative; viz. (l) ttfiH
heady as Ps. 137: 6 Yin&ip TCfiO the'head of my joy L e. my highest
joy; (2) "lisa first born, as Is. 14 : 30 0*^1 -"1132 first born qf the
varetchedi. e. most wretched; Job 18: 13 nj a the first born qf
death L e. the most terrible death.
2. Besides the above modes of expr essing a superla-
tive, the Hebr ew exhibits a var iety of methods by which
intensity of meaning is denoted.
() By very or "16M3 very very ; as Gen. 7: 19 the waters
increased Ttttt IKS very exceedingly &c.
() By repeating the same word; see 169.
(c) By two synonymous words see 169. d, note.
{d) By repeating the same word and putting it in the genitive
when repeated; as Hos. 10: 15 the evil of your evil i. e.
your base wickedness. Sometimes a synonyme is used in the genitive
instead of the same word being repeated.
(e) The name of God placed after a noun is intensive; as Jonah
3: 3 a great city DTlb&6 before God i. e. really or truly very great;
Gen. 10: 9 Nimrod was a mighty hunter ttjrp before Jehovah i. e.
exceedingly expert in. hunting. So Acts 7 : 20 Moses was dare tog n?
Stop fair to God L e. very fair; Luke 1: 6 righteous ivamov tov
Beov before God i. e. really or eminently pious.
$40 179. ADJECTIVES QUALIFYING NOUN?.
179. Adjectives qualifying nouns
t l . Adjectives used as epithets, or simply qualif ying
nouns, generally agr ee with the noun in gender and number .
What is said here respecting the adjective, is applicable almost
universally to participles and pronominal adjectives when they modify
nouns.
NOTE. For the use of the article with adjectives, see 165. For
the use of adjectives before a genitive, see 171. 3.
2. The pluralis excellentiae commonly, but not always,
takes an adjective singular. ( 167. 2.)
E.g. Is. 19: 4
a
hard master; but also Jos. 24: 19
D^Bf tp
$
a holy God.
3. Nouns of multitude in the singular commonly, but-
not always, require a plural adjective.*
E. g. Jer. 50: 6 niTS# ffite a wanderingJlock.
4. Dual nouns take plural adjectives.
E. g. Is. 35: 3 0*T weak hands.
f
5. Nouns of common gender , having more than one
adjective, admit both the masculine and f eminine f orms in
the adjectives.
E. g. 1 K. 19: 11 pTTVj ftbilt a great and strong wind.
t6. Adjectives qualif ying nouns are usually put after the
nouns which they qualif y.
The number of apparent exceptions to this rule is so very small,
and some of them so equivocal, that it appears dubious whether real
exceptions are to be admitted. See however Ps. 89: 51
D"MC? all the numerous peoples; also Is. 53: 11. Jer. 3: 7, 10. 16: 16.
NOTE. The pronominal adjective this not unfrequently precedes
the noun with which it agrees.
7. When an adjective ser ves to qualif y two or more
Notb. When the concord it directed by the sense, as in nos. % 3, rather
(ban by the grammatical form of the noun, it is called conttrvctio ad sensum.
1 8 0 . ADJECTIVES AS PREDICATES. 3 4 1
nouns, it is usually put af ter them; and the gender of it
may be either masculine as the more wor thy, or the same
as the gender of the last noun.
E. g. Neh. 9:13 rhx&i good laws and statutes; Ezek,
1: 11 ninno dn."*: their faces and wings were separated.
Here niT^B a participial adjective is feminine, as is the noun also
which next precedes it
180. Adjectives as predicates
t l . When an adjective is the pr edicate of a sentence,
and the ver b of existence is omitted, the adjective
stands regularly bef or e the noun and is usually without the
ar ticle.
E. g. Gen. 4: 13 Vila great is my iniquity.
In a very few cases it stands after the noun; as in Gen. 19 : 20.
1 Sam. 12:17.
t2. When an adjective is the pr edicate of a sentence,
it gener ally agr ees in number and gender with the noun
to which it r elates.
The exceptions to this genera] rule are quite numerous in He-
brew ; but they may probably all be explained on the principle, that
when adjectives are used as predicates, they are often to be taken in
an abstract sense as nouns of the neuter gender. Thus Ps. 73: 28
O^nVi* approach to God id to me delightful i. e. a pleasant or
delightful thing; the noun being in the feminine and the adjective in
the masculine standing as a neuter noun ( 162). So Gen. 27:29
VT"!^ the cursers of thee are cursed i. e. an accursed thing; the
noun being in the masculine plural and the adjective in the masculine
singular for the neuter.
So Virgil Aen. iv. 569 varium et mutabUe semper femina ; Statius
Theb. n. 399 btandum potestas; Achill. Tat. novrjQQv piv yuvi?. So
TO NF, VD napxu the universe, rational or material.
3. When it is necessary to use the ar ticle bef or e an
adjective employed as a pr edicate, the ver b of existence
( mn) or its equivalent the pronoun is usually insert-
ed.' '( 183.)
4 5
342 181,182. PRONOUNS; USE or THE PRIMITIVES, ETC.
E. g. 1 Sam. 17: 14 11*? David was the smaUest L e. the
youngest. In cases of this kind, the adjective is placed after the noun
to which it relates.
4. In like manner, par ticiples used f or the pr esent tense
of ver bs, sometimes stand as pr edicates af ter the noun,
and take the ar ticle. ( 203.)
E. g. Deut. 3: 21 *JT?
tfline see
'
SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS.
181. Pronouns ; concord with nouns.
t l . In gener al, pronouns agr ee with the noun f or which
they stand, in number, gender , and per son.
2. From this general rule there are several exceptions of not unfre-
quent occurrence, which may be arranged in the following order, viz.
() As to number; as Deut. 21: 10 when thou goest forth against
thine ENEMIES and God ISNA gives HIM into thine hand; Deut
28: 48. Jos. 2 : 4 and the woman took the two MEN and secreted HIM,
&c. See the note below.
() As to gender; as Ezek. 13: 20 onfig and Ruth 1: 22 iTTBt} re-
ferring to women; Ex. 1: 21 and God made Dnb for them i. e. the
midwives; Judg. 19: 24. 21 : 22. Is. 3: 16. So vice versa Deut 5:
24. Ezek. 28:14 and 2 Sam. 4:6. Jer. 60:6 fiSH referring to men.
(c) As to both number and gender; as Job 39: 14 iTWi
SHE leaveth HER eggs, where the antecedent is 0^33^ in the plural mas-
culine ; Is. 3b: 1 in the dwelling CSF) of the jackals and rT213'l in HER
couching place, where is plural and masculine; Job 6:20. 14:19.
NOTE. In cases like the above, the pronoun is to be regarded as
teed sometimes in either a collective or distributive sense ( 167. 1.
188. 4), and sometimes in an abstract neuter sense ( 180. 2).
These anomalies are common in Arabic, and were probably intro-
duced into written language from the expressions of common life.
182. Pronouns ; use of the primitives
t l . The pr imitive personal pronouns ar e usually, but
not always, in the nominative case. ( 66.)
$ 1 8 3 * PRONOUNS USED FOR THE VERB, ETC. 3 4 3
2. When a pronoun of any f orm is to be r epeated f or
the sake of emphasis ( 178. 2), it is done by using the
pr imitive f or m; which may then be in any case r equir ed
by the nature of the sentence.
() In the nominative; as Ps. 9: 7 ISfit the memory qf
them of them has perished L e. the very memory of them &c.
() In the genitive ; a s l K. 21: \9 the dogs shall lick
D the blood of thee even of thee.
(c) In the dative; as Hag. 1: 4 0!dV rtiT is it time for you
yourselves ?
(d) In the accusative; as Gen. 27 : 34 *: Ett 'srnj bless me even
me.
(e) In the ablative ; as 1 Sam. 25: 4 ^38 with me even me
be this evil.
NOTE. The primitive pronoun is sometimes placed first; as Gen.
49: 8 Jttdah *pJJ$ Hni* thee even thee shall thy brethren praise.
3. The pronoun is sometimes used by way of empha-
sis, instead of r epeating a noun. ( 169.)
E. g. Gen. 4: 27 TjC DJ and to Seth even to him was
born a son.
NOTE. The construction described in this section is very common
in Arabic; although in Hebrew it has been in a great measure over-
looked, until the publication of Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar.
* 183. Pronouns used for the verb of existence.
1. When a personal pronoun is the subject of a sen-
tence, it implies the ver b of existence between it and
the pr edicate. The ver b itself is usually omitted. (211.)
E. g. Gen. 42: 11 righteous are we ; Gen. 29: 4
Dn whence are ye? Gen. 3: 10 naked am /.
2. Personal pronouns of the third person sometimes
stand simply in the place of the ver b of existence.
E. g. Gen. 9: 3 every thing which moves "*n fit i n which is alive ;
Ps. 16 : 3 the saints who are in the land; Zech. 1:
9 iron ilB what are these ?
344 184. PRONOUNS ; use or THE surrix PRONOUNS.
NOTE. This sense of the pronoun of the third person is still more
plainly exhibited when the subject of the proposition is in the first or
second person; as Zeph. 2 : 12 ye Cushites, victims of. my sword Dntf
Sran are ye! 2 Sam. 7:28 D^rfbNH anirnntf thou art God; Ezra 6:
11 the servants of God iran are we, these words being Chaldaic
and answering to the Hebrew Man In Syriac and Arabic, this
use of the personal pronoun is very common. /
184. Pronouns ; use of the suffix pronouns.
t l . In gener al, the pronouns suf f ixed to ver bs ar e in
the accusative case ( 126.1), while those suf f ixed to nouns
ar e in the genitive case. ( 135. 3.)
2. Ver bal suf f ixes ar e sometimes used in the f ollowing
constr uctions, viz.
() In the dative; as Jos. 15: 19 thou hast given TO me;
Zech. 7 : 5 "
L
23N7325TR have ye footed FOE me FOR me i. e. on my ac-
count ( 182. 2. c); Job 10: 14 if I sin then ikon watchest it
FOR me i. e. on my account; Prov. 13: 20 nO'lfc i^rr-Zi he seeks FOR
him correction; Ps. 94: 20 is it bound TO thee ?
() To denote relations which are usually expressed by particles;
as Is. 65: 5 I am more holy THAN thou; 1 K. 21: 10
and caused them to testify AGAINST him ; Ps. 42: 5 D^S* I mowed along
WITH them, &c. This usage is more frequent in Arabic.
3. The suf f ixes of nouns ar e sometimes used in the f ol-
lowing constr uctions, viz.
() In the dative ; as Ps. 116: 7 D! 3 " * 3 > t h e y have hands
they have feet, for 3^b hands are to them, &c.
() Instead of the preposition b?; as Ex. 15:7 those who
rise up AGAINST thee, instead of 'spV* S"V3|2. So Ps. 53: 6
t4. The suf f ixes of nouns may have either an active or
a passive sense.
() Active; as ''CCll my violence L e. that which I do; tny
book i. e. that which I possess. This sense of the suffixes is the com-
mon one.
() Passive; as Jer. 51 : 35 my violence i. e. done upon me;
Ex, 20: 20 in&JV his fear i. e. which he inspires; Is. 56: 7 'nbBn my
$ 1 8 5 . PRONOUNS ; PLACE OP THE SUFFIXES. 3 4 5
prayer I. e. offered to me; Ps. 66: 13 thy vows i. e. made to
thee; Is. 21: 2 ftnnsM her sighing i. e. a sighing over her. Compare
171.
NOTE. For the pleonasm and ellipsis of personal pronouns, see -
210,211.
185. Pronouns ; place of the suffix pronouns
t l . When a noun in the genitive is used mer ely to
qualif y a pr eceding noun ( 161.1. a), the suf f ix pronoun,
which as to the sense belongs to the first noun, is usually
placed af ter the second.
E. g. Dan. 9: 24 "i** thy holy city, lit the city of thy holi-
ness ; Is. 2: 20 "IBDD his silver idols, lit the idols of his silver;
Zeph. 3:11 proud exuUers, lit the exulters of thy
pride, &c.
NOTE. In a few cases the suffix is attached to the first noun; as
Ps. 71: 7 fyiDnq my strong refuge, lit my refuge of strength.
2. Suf f ix pronouns ar e usually placed in a sentence
after the noun f or which they stand; but sometimes this
noun is not mentioned until af ter the pronoun, either im-
mediately or per haps at the distance of sever al senten-
ces ; and sometimes it is to be supplied only f r om the
gener al sense of the passage.
E. g. Ps. 87:1 "'Vina its foundation U on the holy moun-
tain L e. Zion's, as appears from v. 2; Is. 8: 21 ns 129 he passes
through it L e. the land, see v. 22; Ps. 9:13 when he taketh vengeance
for blood "OT Dnitt he remembereth them i. e. the afflicted, as in the
second part crfF the parallelism; Ps. 65: 10. 68: 15. 18: 15 D3piJ* he
discomfited them i. e. the enemies, as in v. 18. So Job 37: 4 after it
[lightning] roars the thunder 03) 5?^ nor he suffer THEM to delay
when his voice is heard, where THEM must mean the row, hail &c. which
follow thunder. See also the book of Nahum, which is wholly an or-
acle against Nineveh, although that city is first mentioned in c. 2: 9;
unless the inscription of the book is to be taken as part of the prophe-
cy. In Is. 45: 13 is a prophecy respecting Cyrus, as appears from v.
11 compared with c. 44: 28. 48: 14, 15.
3 4 6
1 8 6 . PRONOUNS; NOUNS USED AS PRONOUNS*
NOTE. Sometimes, although the pronoun is immediately preceded by
a noun, it does not refer to that noon, but to one which most be sap-
plied from the sense; as Ps. 44: 3 by thy hand thou didst drive out the
nation* and didst plant THEM i. e. the Israelites, as appears from
v. 2. So Ps. 81: 16 comp. v. 14. Ps. 105 : 37. Gen. 10: 12, where
probably refers to Nineveh in v. 11.
* 186. Pronoun* ; ttte of noun* in place of personal pronouns
1. ID addressing a super ior , the Hebr ews commonly
avoided using the pronouns of the f ir st and second per -
sons, and employed f or the f ir st the words SpD? thy ser-
vant, thy handmaid &c. and f or the second, the wor d
*21*18 my lord, &c.
E. g. Gen. 44: 16 what shall we say to my lord ? God hath discov*
ed the guilt of thy servants ; lo, we are servants to my lord. Verse 19
my lord asked his servants &c. i. e. thou didst enquire of as.
2. The place of the personal pronouns, especially
when the sentence is r ef lexive, is of ten supplied by the
most distinguished and essential par ts of either the exter -
nal or internal man, as f ollows.
() By soul most frequently; as Job 9: 21 *$? *3$ rib /
know not myself; Ps. 7: 3 lest like a lion h* rend me ; Ps.
3: 3 "Wab to me; Ps. 11: 1. 16:10. 36: 3. Amos 1: 8 Jehovah
hath sworn iUHDSB by himself.
() By D^aB person ; as Prov. 7: 15 to seek thee ; Ezek.
6 : 9 WTOM 3&3p3 they abhor themselves, kc.
(c) By heart; as Ex. 9: 14 thyself i Ps 16: 9 /
myself, &c.
(d) Occasionally by several other words; as life; Ps. 7:6.
16: 9 -riSS heart, soul; Is. 26: 9 ttn spirit; Ps. 6: 8 eye; Ps.
16: 9 flesh; Ps. 17: 14 belly; Ps. 6: 3 D3 bone,'be.
NOTE. The same usage prevails very extensively in Aramaean and
Arabic.
187, 188. VERBS; CONCORD WITH NOUNS, ETC. 347
* 187. Pronouns; use of the relative.
1. T h e r el at i ve pronoun is used wi t h ant ece-
dent s of all persons, number s, and genders. ( 68. )
NOTE. When the pr onouns FIT and =1T ar e used as r elatives ( 68. 3) ,
they imitate "HDSt in being of alt per sons, number s, and gender s; as
Job 19: 19 "'nsnf ij }-IN and THOSE WHOM I have loved.
2. T h e r el at i ve "TON is of t en used wi t h ot her words,
mer el y to give t he m a relative sense.
() With nouns and pr onouns; as Gen. 13:16 IttJSt which
dust; ib to whom; ir itt whom; Deut. 28: 49 iSWb IIBK
whose language; Ps. 1 : 4 which the wind scatters, &c.
() With adver bs; as DUi where ; D1ZJ23 "nUiiSt whence, &c.
NOTE 1. The wor d HpN is commonly, but not always, separ ated
f r om the wor d which it qualif ies, by another wor d.
NOTE 2. The wor d which "V#** ser ves to qualif y is of ten omitted;
as Ezek. 21: 35 in the place [5a] where thou wast crea-
ted; Ex. 32: 34 [Oip ] to what place; Is. 43: 4 [n] IttNJD
from what time, &c.
For the ellipsis of 111)8*, see 211.
SYNTAX OF VERBS.
188. Verbs ; concord with nouns.
In this section ar e exhibited those gener al r ules of concor d, which
the Hebr ew has in common with most other languages. For anoma-
lies in concor d peculiar to the Hebr ew, see the next section.
t l . In general , a ve r b agr ees wi t h its nomi nati ve case
in number , gender , and person.
t 2 . Nouns of mul t i t ude in t he singular of t en t ake a
ver b in t he plural.
E. g. Gen. 33: 13 then all the flock will die. See
179. 3 note*.
NOTE. Sometimes none but ver bs in the singular ar e employed af ter
nouns of multitude ; in other cases a sentence begins with a ver b sin-
gular and pr oceeds with plur al ver bs; as Ex. 1: 20. 33 : 4. Is. 2:
20. Ps. 14: 1, &c.
Di gi t i zed bv
34Q
189. VERBS J ANOMALIES IN CONCORD.
3. When sever al nominatives, either all masculine or
of dif f er ent gender s, ar e connected, they usually take a
ver b in the plural masculine.
E. g. Ex. 17: 10 and Moses and Aaron and Hur 3^9 ascended ; Pa.
85: 11
fMre
y
an
d truth are met together ; Gen. 8:
22, &c.
For exceptions to the above general rule, see 189.9.
4. When the subject and pr edicate of a sentence ar e
connect ed by the ver b of existence (r W), the ver b of ten
agr ees with the latter .
E. g. Gen. 27 : 39 "Satifc rich countries shall
be thine abode ; 31 : 8. Lev. 25:33. Ezek. 35: 15, &c.
5. Dual nouns take ver bs like nouns plural.-
189. Verbs ; anomalies in concord
I. As to number.
t l . The pluralis excellentiac commonly, but not always,
takes a ver b in the singular. ( 167. 2.)
E. g. Gen. 1: 1 God created; Ex. 21: 29 nV
his owner shall be put to death.
NOTE. The pluralis excellentiae, In a very few cases, takes a verb
in the plural, viz. Gen. 20: 13. 31: 53. 35: 7. Ex. 32: 4, 8. 2 Sam.
7: 23.
2. Plural nominatives of the f eminine gender , which r e-
late to beasts or things and not to persons, f r equently take
a ver b singular, whether it pr ecede or f ollow them.*
E. g. Ezek. 26: 2 rrtr&T broken is [are] the gates ; Joel
1: 20 any?3 niaj^a the bouts cry ; Gen. 49 : 22. Jer. 4 : 14. 48 : 41
51:29, 56. Ps. 119: 98. Job 27 : 20, &c.
NOTE. The 3 pen. fern, plural of the future seems to be used, in
some cases, for the 3 pen. fem. singular of the same; as Ex. 1: 10
when there shall happen war; Judg. 5: 26. Job
17:16.
* NOTE. This construction of the feminine plural with a verb singular is
technically called the pluralis inhvmanu. Compare in Greek the neater pin*
rals joiued with verba singular.
1 8 9 . VERBS ; ANOMALIES IN CONCORD.
349
3. When a nominative plural is used in a distributive
sense, viz. to denote each or every one of the subjects in
question, it of ten takes a ver b in the singular.
E. g. Ex. 31 : 14 nttO SvlrbJifc every one who profanes it [the sab-
bath] shall be put to death, lit. they who profane it; Prov. 27: 16.
28: 1, &c.
4. When the ver b pr ecedes a plur al nominative, it is
not unf r equently put in the singular .
E. g. 1 Sam. 1: 2 h33s)b and there was to Peninnah
children i. e. Peninnah had children; Is. 13: 22 tP'tt !132> the jackals
shall howl; Deut. 5: 7. Judg. 13: 12. 2 Sam. 21: 6. Ps. 124 : 5. In
all such cases, the verb is used in a kind of impersonal way, like the
French il vient des hommes, there comes some men.
NOTE 1. Sentences often begin in this manner with a verb angu-
lar, and proceed with a verb plural; as Gen. 1: 14 rrilJta TP let
there be lights in the firmament and let them be for signs &c. Num.
9: 6. Ezek. 14:1. Esth. 9 : 23. *'
NOTE 2. In analogy with the above rule, when the verb follows
a plural nominative, it is in a very few cases put in the singular ; as
Ecc. 2: 7 r r n 'as there were slaves to me i. e. I had slaves;
Gen. 46: 22 these were the sons of Rachel which [there was]
were born to Jacob ; Gen. 35 : 26. Dan. 9 : 24. Is. 64 : 10.
II. As to gender.
5. Feminine nominatives, either singular or plur al, some-
times take a ver b masculine, whether it pr ecedes or f ol-
lows them.
E. g. 1 Sam. 25: 27 SjnnDtp thine handmaid brought; 1 Chr.
2: 48 the concubine bore ; Judg. 21: 21 niaa DK if
the. daughters go out; Ruth 1: 8 the Lord shew kindness unto you even as
YE [Ruth and Orpah] DIJ'W have done to the dead ; Is. 57: 8
and thou hast made for thyself a covenant, where the subject of the
verb is feminine as the context plainly shews. So Lev. 2:8. 11: 32.
1 K. 22: 36. Ecc. 7:7. 12: 5. Jer. 3: 5. Cant 3:5. 5:8. 8 :
4, &c.
6. In a ver y f ew cases, a masculine nominative is f ol-
lowed by a ver b f eminine.
16
350
1 8 9 . VERBS; ANOMALIES IN CONCORD.
E. g. Ecc. 7: 27 rf^'p saith the preacher, where the verb
follows the grammatical form of the nominative, rather than the sense
of it; Judg. 11: 39 pH'Tini and it became a custom in Israel, where
pn may be perhaps of common gender.
7. Nouns of common gender take either a mascu-
line or f eminine ver b, and sometimes both in the same
constr uctioa
E. g. Is. 33: 9 nbbttN biN the land mourns and is withered;
14:7. 2 Sam. 22: 8 Qerl * Job 20 : 26. Jer. 2: 24.
NOTE. There are many more nouns of the common gender in He-
brew, than has been generally supposed (Ges. Lehrgeb. p. 472);
which accounts for many supposed anomalies of gender.
8. Nouns of multitude f r equently take a ver b f eminine,
and in some cases admit no other .
E. g. Ex. 5: 16 nttttn thy people have sinned. The names of
nations often take a feminine verb; as Ps. 114: 2. This construction
resembles that of the pluralis fractus in Arabic, which often takes a
verb feminine, whatever the sense of the noun may be.
9. When sever al nominatives of dif f er ent gender s ar e
connected, the ver b sometimes agr ees with a masculine
noun as the most wor thy, and sometimes conf orms to the
noun which stands near est to it.
() With a masculine noun; as Prov. 27 : 9 lab nato*
ointment and perfume make glad the heart; Hos. 9: 2, &c.
() With the nearest noun j as Num. 12: 1
then spake Miriam and Aaron ; Num. 20: 11 rtttjni and
the assembly and their cattle drank; Gen. 7: 7. 1 K. 17: 15. Esth. 9 :
29, &c.
For the general rule respecting composite nominatives, see 188.3.
NOTE. Where there are several nominatives connected, and the
sentence begins with a verb singular, it commonly proceeds with a
verb plural; as Gen. 21: 32. 24:61. 31: 14.33: 7. (Supra 4 note 1.)
III. As to both number and gender.
10. Feminine nouns of multitude in the singular of ten
take a ver b in the plural masculine.
190. VERBS IMPERSONAL AND INDEFINITE. 351
E. g. 1 Sam. 2: 33 all rpaltt the increase of thy house shall
die ; Jer. 44 : 12 rp'HiS'ij the remainder of Jtidah who Wuj set their fa-
ces ; Zeph. 2: 9. Gen. 48: 6. This is the constructio ad sensum.
( 179. 3 note * )
11. Plur al nominatives of the f eminine gender some-
times take a ver b in the singular masculine, whether
they pr ecede or f ollow the ver b.
E. g. Job 42: 15 Dips Mb there were not found women
so beautiful; Jer. 48 : 15 Jlbi? 'pi* her towns ascended in the flames;
Ex. 13 : 7. 1 K. 11 : 3. Is. 17 : 6. *Mic. 2: 6. Hab. 3: 17. Ps. 57 : 2.
Job 22: 9. Compare no. 4 above.
12. When the subject of a ver b is a noun in the. con-
str uct state f ollowed by a genitive, the ver b sometimes
agr ees with the second noun, or genitive.
E. g. 2 Sam. 10: 9 and Joab saw that rWftbE the front
of the battle was against him, where the verb agrees with nnfibjq; Is.
22: 7 ittbtt the choice part of thy vallies i. e. thy choice
vallies shall be fiUed, where the verb agrees with So Job 29:
10.38:21. Is. 2:11. Jer. 10: 21, &c.
190. Verbs impersonal and with indefinite subjects
t l . Imper sonal ver bs ar e made in Hebr ew by the
thir d per son masculine or f eminine of either the pr aetcr
or f utur e tense.
E. g.
an
d & happened ; ^ it is bitter to me ; ^ ft =13^ I am
quiet, lit. it is quiet to me; ^b I3t or ib 1^*2 it was grievous to him ;
1 Sam. 30: 6 THb 12$rQ and it was grievous to David ; Job 4: 5 and
now ttian it comes upon thee.
In Gen. 4: 26 the passive form is used impersonally; viz. then
blW7 it was begun to call upon the name of Jehovah, for men began fa.
NOTE. Impersonal verbs commonly take after them a dative case
with the preposition b. If we translate them as personal verbs, the
subject of the verb is to be made by rendering this dative case as t
nominative; as ^b lit / am grieved, lit it is grievous to me.
3 5 2 190. VERBS IMPERSONAL AND INDEFINITE.
t2. Id Hebr ew many ver bs of ten belong to indef inite
nominatives, such as tPK, &c. which ar e sometimes
expr essed, but ar e mor e f r equently omitted.
This construction answers to the use of on, taut le monde &c. in
French, or to the Greek fo'yovot &c. and is quite common in Hebrew.
The following are examples.
E. g. Gen. 11:9 one called ; Gen. 48: 1 "^ri^l and one told /
1 Sam. 26 : 20 at one pursues a partridge ; 16 : 23. Is. 9: 5. 64 :
3 from everlasting rib they have not heard ; 47 : 1 rib
they shall not call thee 4*c. Dan. 1:12. Hosea 2: 9.
NOTE 1. When a nominative is expressed, it is sometimes tt'W &c.
and sometimes the active participle of the verb is employed; as Is.
16: 10 ^ treader shall tread i. e. one shall tread; Is.
28: 4 the seer sees i. e. one sees; 2 Sam. 17: 9. Deut.
22: 8. So in the plural; as Jer. 31 : 5 the planters shall
plant L e. one shall plant; Nab. 2: 3.
NOTE 2. The 3 pers. plural is often to be rendered passively in
such cases, in order to represent the meaning in English; as Job 34:
20 "PSN *"^02 d*
6 m
*ghty
one
** removed, lit. they remove the mighty
one; Prov. 9:11 for by me V are increased [lit they increase]
thy days, and years are added [lit they add] to thee; Job 4: 19.
7 : 3. 17 : 12. 19 : 26. 32 : 15.
Sometimes, perhaps, the 3 pers. singular may also be rendered
passively; as Is. 28: 2. Job 38: 11.
The idiom described in note 2 is not unfrequent in the New Tes-
tament ; as Luke 12: 20 Ttjv \\svyr\v GOV uixat,TOVOIV thy soul shall they
require, i. e. thy soul shall be required; 16 : 9 that, when ye die, tur-
ret* ye may be received [lit. they may receive you] into everlasting habi-
tations, &LC.
3. Occasionally the second per son of the ver b is em-
ployed, instead of the thir d per son with an indef inite nom-
inative.
E. g. Is. 7: 25 rtasj Minn rib one shall not come there, lit thou shait
not come; Job 18: 4. Lev.2: 4. Also in the common phrase with
the infinitive until thou earnest, i. e. till one comes. ( 124.4. a.)
1 9 1 , 1 9 2 , VERBS; USE OF THE PRAETER, ETC. 3 5 3
* 191. General use of the tenses,
1. As the Hebrew has but two distinct forms of tense, and as it
must, no doubt, have expressed all those shades of tense which are
common to other languages ; it is obvious that the two tenses in ques-
tion must have had a diverse, various, and extended use.
2. The pr aeter and f utur e tenses, as they ar e called,
can be used in a gr eat many cases indif f er ently to expr ess
the same idea. Both of them ar e made aorists by the
use of Vav conversive ( 93) and some other par ticles pla-
ced bef or e them; so that with this Vav pr ef ixed, they
expr ess the same time a that which is designated by the
leading ver b or par ticiple in the sentence.
Still, the predominant use of the pr aeter is to expr ess
past time of some shade or other ; and the predominant
use of the f utur e is to designate some shade of f utur e time.
192. Verbs ; use of the praeter tense.
The pr aeter tense of ver bs is used in the f ollowing sig-
nif ications, viz.
1. For the per f ect tense. This is its appr opr iate use.
E g. Gen. 3: 13 what is this which rrip* thou hast done ? 3: 11
who "Pan has told thee ? 3: 14, 17, 22.
.2. For the pluper f ect tense.
E. g. Gen. 2: 2 God finished the work which he had made;
2: 5 Jehovah & had not caused it to rain.
3. For the past tense of narration or histor ic tense.
E. g. Gen. 1: 1 God created; 1: 2 the earth was desola-
tion ; 29 : 17 Rachel *M$'rr~nD^ nn?n was beautiful.
NOTE. It is common, when this historic tense is used, to place the
nominative before the verb; but this usage is not without many ex-
ceptions, as in Gen. 1:1,2. To make variety, the future with Vav
conversive ( 93) commonly follows the praeter in the same sentence
or in a succeeding one. This usage saves the necessity of repeating
the praeter. Compare Gen. 4: 25. 1 Sam. 7: 15, 16.
9 5 4 192* VERBS ; USE OV THE PRAETER TENSE.
4. For the pr esent tense in cases* like the f ollowing, vi z.
() In verbs signifying quality or condition j as b"iS he is great ;
OSH he is wise, &C.
() When the object of the verb is rather to express a st at e of
acting, than to assert any one particular action; as Ps. 119: 28 my
soul weeps for trouble ; 119: 30 the way of truth "'n^na I choose ;
Is. 1: 15 your hands Ifijbtt are full of blood.
(c) In general propositions, where the object of the verb Is not
to designate any particular time of action, but action at any time ; as
Ps. 1: 1 blessed is the man who Mb walketh nottfl
1
! treadcth
notS3T ^ sitteth not.
5. For the f utur e tense in cases like the f ollowing, vi z.
{a) In prophecies, protestations, and assurances; as Is. 9: 1 the
people who have walked in darkness IK*} shall see a great light ; Is. 2: 2
and it shall come to pass ; 2: 3, 4, 11, 17, 19.
(6) When a future tense (with a future meaning) precedes the
praeter, in the same construction; as Is. 1: 30, 31 ye 9Tin shall be as
an oaife-fon^ and the mighty man shall be $c. 3: 25, 28 thy
men *bi>? shall fall by the swordand her gates ^b^JO WJO shall mourn
and lament. -
NOTE. In cases like these, the conjunction Vav ( 94) is prefixed
either to the verb itself, or to the nominative of it, when tins nomina-
tive precedes the verb. See above for the former case; for the lat-
ter which is very frequent; see Job 19: 27 I shall see wn and
my eyes shall behold L e. 1 shall behold, where siO is made future by
the Vav before its nominative. There are a few cases in which there
Is an ellipsis of the Vav, or where poetic license drops it; the sense of
the praeter remaining the same as if the Vav were expressed.
(c) When any word expressive of future time stands at the begin-
ning of any construction, it requires the praeter that follows it and has
a Vav prefixed to be rendered as the future; as 1 Sam. 2: 31 behold
the days are coming, 'W'nai when I will cut off fyc.
So the praeter is made future, when it follows an infinitive con-
struct having a future sense; as Deut. 4: 30 *jb 1S3 when thou shall
be troubled and these things shall overtake thee ; Gen. 2: Jo. So
also Ex. 17 : 4 D9& yet a little time ^bj^D^ and they will stone me ;
Ex. 16:6 at evening ye shall know.
1 9 3 . VERBS J USE OF THE FUTURE TENSE.
I,
35o-
6. For the imper ative mood in cases like the f ollowing.
() When an imperative precedes, and the praeter is connected
with it by Vav; as Gen. 6: 21 take for thyself PDDiO and coir
lect. Compare above in no. 5. b.
() Sometimes when Vav is prefixed without the preceding im-
perative ; as Gen. 33: 10 if I have found favour in thine eye$,
then take fa. Ruth 3: 9. Gen. 47: 23. Deut 29: 7, 8.
7. For the subjunctive mood in all its tenses; especial-
ly when a f uture tense with a subjunctive meaning pr e-
cedes in the same construction. ( 193. 5. b.)
() For the present; as Gen. 3: 22 lest he put forth hit
hand, nj^bl and [lest he] take, bSfiO and [lest he] eat fa. where the
first verb is in the future and the others in the praeter, but all have
a subjunctive sense.
() For the imperfect; as Is. 1: 9 we should be as Sodom,
5)2^731 we should be like Gomorrha ; Gen. 33: 13 should
one hurry them, then they would die; Ruth 1: 12. Judg. 8 : 19.
(c) For the pluperfect; as Is. 1: 9 unless Jehovah had Irft
us a remnant fa. 2 K. 13 : 19 then tVOft thou wouldest have smitten the
Syrians. Job 10: 19. Num. 22: 33.
(d) For the futurum exactum or future perfect, as It Is named; as
Ruth 2: 21 17 until they shall have finished; 3: 18. Is. 4: 4.
Gen. 24:19.
193. Verbs ; use of the future tense
The peculiar forms which the future tense sometimes assumes In
order to mark diversity of meaning, are treated of in 9193. It re-
mains in the syntax to describe the various senses which the future
form conveys, in cases where peculiarity of structure is not concerned.
The f utur e tense of ver bs is used in the f ollowing sig-
nif ications, viz.
1. To indicate f utur e time. This is its appr opr iate use.
2. For the pr esent tense.
E. g. ynit Kb I know not; bSIK fcib / cannot; "pita whence
earnest thou ? tfjaanHa what seekest thou f This sense of the future kt
very common, and agrees with the common use of it In Arabic.
3 5 6
1 9 3 . VERBS ; USE o r THE FUTURE TENSE.
NOTE. The future is often used for the present in general proposi-
tions, where there is no precise limitation of time; as Pro v. I d : SO a
wise son riTgto? makes glad his father, i e. it is a general fact t hat he
does so at all times. ( 192. 4. c.)
3. To designate past time.
(a) When preceded by particles that indicate time past ( l ) By
TFIT then; as Jos. 10: 12 TN then spake he. (2) By D^ O not yet ;
as Gen. 2: 6 was not yet, or before it was. But sometimes a
future sense is attached to a future form after both of these particles ;
as Ex. 12:48. Job 10: 21.
(b) Sometimes, though not very frequently, it indicates the pas t
time of narration or the historic tense ; Gen. 2 : 6 and a mist went
up 4c. 2: 10 and thence it was divided fyc. 2 : 25 TOttJisrp
r
^ I ! Z
and they were not ashamed.
NOTE. With Vav conversive, the future forms a common historic
tense ( 93). But in the simple form, as above, it is specially employ-
ed to denote habitual or continued action; as 1 K. 5: 25 thus much Sol-
omon ]r)? gave to Hiram yearly ; Job 1: 5 thus nip3?^ did Job continu-
ally ; 2 Sam. 12: 31. 2 Chr. 25: 14.
4. For the imper ative in cases like the f ollowing, viz-
() Always where the first or third person of the imperative is
needed ( 89.3); as Gen. 1: 26 tni$ let us make man ; 1: 3
let there be light, &c.
NOTE. Where excitement, determination, urging, pressing entrea-
ty &c. is to be expressed, the future, and for the most part the para-
gogic future ( 91), is employed; as let me rejoice now ; SlJMpW
let me arise now.
() In prohibitions; because the Hebrew imperative is not used
with negatives; as Ex. 20: 15 S'-an steal not, lit. thou shalt not
steal.
5. To expr ess all the various meanings of the optative
and subjunctive moods.
(a) For the optative, especially when the par ticle
is subjoined.
E. g. Ps. 7: 10 O that it might come to at\ end ! Cant. 7:
9 tW-W O may they be! 1 K. 17: 21. Is. 19: 12. 47: 13.
1 9 3 . VERBS ; USB OF THE FUTURE TENSE. 357
For the optative use of the paragogic and apocopated future, see
91.
( 6) F o r t he subj unct i ve, especi ally af t er part i cl es sig-
nifying that, so that, in order that, &c.
The following are the particles which usually precede the future
in its subjunctive sense, ( l ) that; as Gen. 11: 7 lyf cliT tih "VON
that they may not understand, &c. (2) 11 that; as Gen. 27: 4 ^1553
"des that my soul may bless thee. (3) "1 that; as r 73^ that he
may die. (4) that ; as Gen. 38 : 16 what wilt thou give me f cOSn **3
that thou may est come in unto me ? (5) b that ; 1 K. 6 : 19 f nr ib that thou
mayest place. (6) "ittN in order that; as Ezek. 20 : 26 nigSt
in order that they may know. (7) that not; as tt'Vn be not
ttfraid?or that thou be not afraid. (8) b? that not; as Ps. 10: 18 bs
IIS that one may no more continue, &c. (6) "JSS that not; as Lev.
10: 7 1 Wan 1*2 that ye may not die.
NOTE. The f utur e of ten f ollows par ticles like the above, even
when the subjunctive sense is not r equir ed.
(c) Fo r desi gnati ng all t hose shades of meani ng, whi ch
we expr ess in Engl i sh by t he auxiliaries may, can, must,
might, could, should, would, &c.
E. g. Gen. 3 : 2 we may eat ; 30 : 31 what shall
[must] / give thee ? Judg. 14 : 16 my parents have I not told f it tjbl
and should I tell thee? Pr ov. 20 : 9 who can [will] say? So
also Job 10: 18 S13Nt I should have died; Gen. 31 : 37 that /
might take my leave of thee ; 29 : 8 until that all IBDfrO shall have been
gathered, comp. 192. 7. d.
6. Wh e n t he f ut ur e wi t h Vav conversi ve, whi ch com-
monly indicates past t i me ( 93) , is used as a pr oper f ut ur e,
t he Va v must be r egar ded mer el y as a conjunction.
E. g. Is. 9 : 5 to us a son shall be given, and the government "nrn
shall be upon his shoulder fa. Is. 9 : 10, 13, 15, 17. 51 : 12, 13.
NOTE 1. In like manner , the f utur e with Vav is sometimes f ound
in the f ollowing senses, viz.
() For the pr esent indicative; as 2 Sam. 19: 2 be fto Id the king
weeps and mourns.
() For the pr esent subjunctive ; as Jos. 9 : 21 let them live
ttnd let them be fa. or may they be fa. Job 14 : 10.
47
Di qi t i zed by Google
3 5 8 1 9 4 , 1 9 5 . VERBS ; USE OF THE IMPERATIVE, ETC.
NOTE 2. The very small number of instances in which the above
use of the future with Vav is found, would almost lead one to suppose,
that the punctuation of Vav copulative has been exchanged by mistake
for that of Vav conversive.
194. Verba ; use of the imperative mood*
The imperative mood and the future tense are evidently very
nearly related to each other, and in many sentences are used almost
indiscriminately. For the use of the future in an- imperative sense,
see 89.3. 193. 4. The imperative, besides its proper sense, is em-
ployed for the future in the following constructions.
1. When two imper atives immediately succeed each
other , the latter of ten has a f utur e sense, and the f or mer
a conditional one.
E. g. Gen. 42: 18 do this and live i. e. on condition ye
do this, ye shall live; Prov. 3: 3, 4, 7. 4:4. 7:2. 9:6. 1b. JB : 9.
36: 16. 45: 22. 55: 2.
2. When an imper ative is connected with a f utur e in
the same construction, it of ten has a f uture meaning.
() Sometimes when it stands before the future; as Is. 45: 11
^2 LB IT WILL ye enquire of meand will ye prescribe to me frc.
6: 9.''
() When it stands after the future; as Gen. 45: 18 and J
will give you the best of the land of Egypt ibSMi and ye shall eat the
fat of the land ; 20: 7. Is. 54: 14. Ruth 1:9.'
195. Verbs ; construction of finite verbs with cases.
t l . The Hebr ew has no ver bs f or med, as in Gr eek
and Latin, by prefixing pr epositions to them, so as to
make composite ver bs. But it possesses an equivalent
mode of varying the sense of ver bs, by inserting a pr e-
position between them and the noun with which they ar e
constr ucted.
Different prepositions, of course, will give different shades to the
195* VERBS ; CONSTRUCTION WITH CASES. 3 5 9
meaning of the same verb; and in this way a great variety of forms of
verbs are made in Hebrew, Aramaean, and Arabic, which may be
called composite; almost exactly as we may say in English, put, put
by, put up, put in, put down, put aside, put away, &c.
E. g. bt>3 to Jail; b? b3 to fall over to, to fall away ; to
leave, to depart from ; "^Bb b3 to fall down before any one.
to call; a to call <o, to invoke ; b to name.
bs$U> to ask, with an accusative of person; b**tB to demand, with an
accusative of the thing demanded; a btttt to consult any one.
The f ollowing ar e some of the principal cases in which
ver bs ar e constr ucted with prepositions bef or e their nouns.
2. The preposition 3 is of ten put af ter ver bs of the
f ollowing classes, viz.
Generally, verbs signifying to be angry, to trust, to hold, to sin against,
to reprove, &c. More particularly, verbs signifying to pray to or in-
voke, to worship, to testify against, and verbs of sense, viz. those which
signify to look upon, to hear or listen to, to smell, to touch, &c.
3. The pr eposition b is of ten put af ter ver bs of the
f ollowing classes, viz.
Verbs signifying to make, to attain to, or to become any thing; as
2 Sam. 7 : 1 4 / will be to him 2Mb for a father [a father] and he shall
be to me ]AB./br a son [a SOD] ; 1 Sam. 4: 9 D^FIJLB be ye for men
i. e. be men, act courageously; Gen. 2: 22 and Jehovah made the rib
SUBfitb/or a woman i. e. a woman. The later Hebrew often inserts
in cases where, in the older books, the verb is directly followed by an
accusative; as Jon. 4: 6, comp. Ex. 12: 27, fee.
4. The pr epositions 3, ^3, *723,
&c. ar e also of ten put af ter ver bs, and ser ve to modif y
the simple meaning of the r oot
NOTE. It is of great importance to study diligently the peculiari-
ties of verbs, as thus constructed with prepositions; since the knowl-
edge of these is essential to an accurate and critical acquaintance with
the Hebrew language. Practice, however, and" a constant use of the
lexicon* are the only meant of acquiring such knowledge.
3 6 0 1 9 6 . VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE*
196* Vtrbs governing the accusative,
f l . Active tr ansitive ver bs gover n the accusative case.
t2. Many ver bs ar e both transitive and intr ansitive; and
consequently ar e used either with or without an accus-
ative af ter them.
E. g. rids to weep and to bemoan ; to go and to pats through
Gen. 2: 14; dwell and to inhabit Ps. 22: 4; nxft to ting and to
celebrate with praise ; so JS*^, ^*^3, &c.
3. In Hebr ew, many ver bs gover n an accusative di-
r ectly, without any intervening pr eposition, which we can
tr anslate only by inserting a pr eposition bef or e the noun.
E. g. to bring good tidings TO any one ; !"H73 to be refractory
AGAINST any one ; an* to give a pledge FOR any one, &c.
In this way some whole classes of verbs (with occasional excep-
tions) take the accusative directly, where in our language we must
generally supply a preposition.
() Verbs of putting off and on, of ornamenting ; as to clothe
PS. 6 5 : 1 4 ; to unclothe ; ntK to gird on ; to adorn WITH HOS.
2 : 1 5 ; NTT* to wrap up one's self WITH PS. 1 0 4 : 2 , &C.
() Verbs of plenty and want; as to be full Ex. 1: 7;
to be abundant; to satiate with drink; yne to overflow ; nCH to
lack Gen. 18 : 28; to bereave 27: 45, &ci
(c) Verbs of dwelling in or among ; as aDttj to inhabit Ps. 57: 5 ;
m to dwell 120: 5; IrDT to dwell Gen. 30: 20; to sit or dwell Ps.
80: 2. 107: 10, &c.
(d) Verbs of going out and coming in, coming UPON, happening TO ;
as Mia to come Ps. 44: 18; MX& to befall Jos. 2: 23, &c.
(e) Verbs of overflowing, overspreading &c. take the accusative of
the thing with which they overflow &c. as Ex. 3 : 8 a land which
3bn naj overflows with milk and honey; Joel 4: 18. Jer. 9: 17.
Lam. 3: 48.
4. Neuter ver bs sometimes take an accusative case.
E. g. an to celebrate a feast; iTVn l l t t to propose an enigma^
&c. Such cases resemble the English phrases to run a race, to fight a
fight, f ee.
1 9 7 . VXFTBS GOVERN1NO TWO ACCUSATIVES. 3 6 1
NOTE. This construction is in common use, when other words are
added which are designed to give intensity to the expression; as Gen.
27: 34 rntt*
aru
*
cr
*
w
*
a
and bitter cry
L e. he wept aloud and bitterly; Neh. 2: 10. Ps. 25: 19. Jer. 16: 4.
1 Sam. 20:17.
197. Verbs governing two accusatives.
f l . In gener al, all ver bs which have a causative mean-
ing may gover n two accusatives, the one usually of a per-
son and the other of a thing.
E. g: Ezek. 8:17 OW ynKtt-rHJ they filed [caused to be
full] the earth with violence ; Gen. 41: 42 ttjSJ-'Haa irii* and
he clothed him with [caused him to put on] garments qffine linen, &c.
2. As the conjugations Piel and Hiphil usually have
a causative meaning ( 78, 79), so they of ten gover n
two accusatives, especially in ver bs of the f ollowing clas-
ses, viz.
Verbs signifying to put on or o f f , to cover, to adorn, to JiU, to give
or bestow, to take away or deprive, to teach, to shew, kc.
3. Many ver bs in Kal of ten have a causative meaning
or one kindred to it, and may ther ef or e gover n two accu-
satives, especially ver bs of the f ollowing classes, viz.
All those verba mentioned under no. 2 above; also verbs signify-
ing to anoint, to sow, to plant, to stone i e. cover with stones, to nourish,
to furnish, to rob, to do good or evil to any one, to call or name, to com-
mand, to convert one thing into another ; as Job 28: 2 ntBina pIX?
stone he fuses into brass ; Ex. 30 : 35 Pink thou shall make
it incense, or thou shalt make with it [of it] incense. So Gen. 2: 7 God
made man nffWtn 'J30109 with dust [out of dust] ,/rom the earth, where
is the accusative of the material, as grammarians speak. ( 174.
NOTE. The intervention of appropriate prepositions, s, V, J&, V?, &c.
before the latter noun in cases like the above, is not unfirequent; so
that the Hebrew often exhibits both methods of constructing a sen*
tence, viz. either with or without an intervening preposition before
the latter noun, when a verb is followed by two accusatives.
3 6 2 1 9 8 . VERBS; CONSTRUCTION o r THE PASSIVE WI TH CASES.
198* Vtrbs ; construction of passive verbs with cases,
1. With ver bs of a passive sense, the agent or subject
of the ver b is commonly designated by b pr ef ixed.
E. g. Ex. 12:16 this only must be prepared DDb by you ; Prov. 14 *
20 he is hated even by his associates.
Sometimes JO is used instead ofb ; as Cant 3: 10. Ecc. 12: 11.
2. The passive f or ms of ver bs which gover n two ac-
cusatives, r etain but one of them; the other being usual-
ly made a nominative.
E. g. Ps. 80: 11 the mountains were covered with
the shadow of it; In the active voice it would be, it covered the moun-
tains with the shadow of it. Ex. 25: 40. 28: 11.
NOTE. The same rule holds true when one of the cases of the ac-
tive verb is a dative or other oblique case; as Gen. 2: 23 fitnj?*] ntftb
tVSt* [Dig] the name woman shall be given to her, the word rn&tt being
in apposition with D33 understood; comp. v. 20 where the same words
are employed in the active construction.
3. Sometimes ver bs of a passive f or m have an active
sense; and in this case they may gover n an accusative
like active ver bs.
E. g. Job 7: 3 *nbr33il I have inherited months of vanity, where the
verb is in Hophal; Ex. 20: 5. Deut 13:3.
199. Verbs ; use of the infinitive absolute
t l . The inf initive absolute in Hebr ew answer s to the
Latin gerund in do of the ablative case.
E. g. 1 Sam. 24: 21 regnando regnabis i. e. thou wilt
SURELY be king. It is probably to be taken, in most cases, like the Lat-
in ablative of manner.
t2. The inf initive absolute is usually put bef or e a f inite
tense of the same ver b, and ser ves to qualif y its meaning
in the f ollowing manner, viz.
(a) It marks intensity of various degrees; as 1 Sam. 23 : 22 fi'l*
199. VERBS ; USB OP THB INFINITIVE ABSOLUTS. 3 6 3
it 3ft very subtUely will he deal; 20: 6 bn\p3 bfctllfa he has urgently
requested ; Amos 9 : 8 "P&SJit tkb / will not utterly destroy fa.
Gen.31: 30. 43 : 3, 7 JH3 could we indeed know ? 37 : 8 ?jbJ3!l
shalt thou indeed reign ? 19: 9 D1D3) D| and now he would
fain act even as a judge among us.
(b) It denotes assurance, certainty; as Gen. 2: 17 nwn nta thou
shalt surely die ; 3 : 4. 37 : 33 PJlfa 5pt3 he is surely torn in pieces;
Judg. 15: 2 infct surely I thought, or said.
(c) It marks continuance of action; as Is. 30: 19 tib tea
thou shalt not always weep; Ex. 34: 7. Jer. 23: 17. Especially is con-
tinuance denoted, where two infinitives absolute are used; as 2 Sam.
15: 30 rib? they went up continually weeping; Gen. 8: 7
and it continued going and returning ; Jer. 7:13. 11:7. 25:
3. 26: 5. In such cases, a participle is sometimes used for the sec-
ond infinitive, as in 2 Sam. 16:5; or a noun, as Is. 29: 14.
{d) In general, it gives intensity, energy, animation, vivacity, or
some coloring of this nature, to the expression; although it is difficult
always to express it in an English version. In a similar manner, the
intensive particles of the Greek, German &c. cannot be well express-
ed in any translation.
NOTE 1. In regard to the choice of conjugations from which the
infinitive absolute is taken, it may be remarked, that commonly it is of
the same conjugation as the finite verb, with which it is joined. Some-
times however it is of a different conjugation; as Job 6: 1 btt$? b^ptf
where the infinitive absolute is in Kal, but the finite verb in Niphal;
Ezek. 16: 4 rib brjffli where the infinitive is in Hophal and
the finite verb in Poai.
NOTE 2. The infinitive absolute is not always derived from the
same root as the form of the finite verb with which it is coupled. It
is sufficient if the meaning be synonymous; as Is. 28: 28
he will thoroughly thresh him, where the verbs are derived from
and ttm, both signifying to thresh.
NOTE 3 . In Arabic, the infinitive absolute Is put after the finite
verb; in Syriac, before it; but in Hebrew, before or after, though most
commonly before. Between the infinitive and the finite verb there is
sometimes placed'a particle of negation, as Mb; or some affirmative
or expletive particle, as D|; or even a preposition, as Ezek. 7:14
rfpn* <w.
3 6 4 1 9 9 * VERBS ; USE OF THE INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE.
3. The inf initive absolute is sometimes used instead of
an adver b. ( 156. 3. d)
E. g. ye*
1
#! bene faciendo for bene ; 1 Sam. 3: 12 Vntn tn-
cipiendo et finiendo L e. from beginning to end, utterly.
Note. In a few cases, instead of the infinitive absolute, the infini-
tive construct seems to be employed; either adverbially, as Is. 60 : 14
ttinijj incurvando for nifi ; Hab. 2: 10 niSp
s
for ttXj?or with a fi-
nite verb, as Num. 23 : 25 ^ thou shah not curse at all, for
aia; Ruth 2: 16 for ; Ps. 50: 21 for
&c. In Is. 22: 13 the infinitive absolute may perhaps be used
for the infinitive construct.
4. The inf initive absolute is sometimes f ound in the
place of a f inite ver b. In this case, ther e is probably an
ellipsis of the f inite ver b, with which the inf initive would
be coupled. ( 211. 9.)
E. g. Deut. 5:12 fbr the full form Deut. 6 :
17 ; Ex. 20: 8 IT ST for -&TIJ -QT Deut 7: 18;' Job 40: 2 2hrr an
contendendo ? for ^ Sh!l Judg. 1U 25.
The following are examples of this use of the infinitive absolute.
() For the praeter, when the praeter precedes; as Dan. 9: 5
*1^01 me have rebelled and apostatized ; Est. 9 : 6. Jer. 14: 5.
Gen.' 41: 43. Judg. 7: 19. Ecc. 8; 9. 9: 11.
So without a preceding praeter; as Ezek. 1: 14 the living cre
tares NiX*} ran and returned ; Ecc. 4: 2.
() For the future, when the future precedes; as Jer. 32: 44 fields
shall they buy S'irDI and they shaU write bills of sale, Olnni and
they shall seal them!and take witnesses $c. Num. 15: 35. Deut 14:
21. Is. 5 ; 5.
So without a preceding future; as Ezek. 11:7 you APXin will I
bring out 4>c. 1 K. 22: 30. 2 Chr. 18: 29.
(c) For the imperative ; as Deut 5: 12 keep; 1: 16. Jer.
2: 2 go ; 13: 1, &c. Num. 25: 17. See the first examples above.
NOTE. The infinitive absolute is, in some cases, to be translated in
a passive sense ; as Prov. 12: 7 the wicked are to be destroyed.
This is elliptical; the full phrase would be -jicn. So in
Prov. 15:22.
For the construction of the infinitive absolute with cases, see 6 202%
2 0 0 . VERBS ; USE OF THE INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT. 3 6 5
* 200. Verbs ; use of the infinitive construct.
The inf initive constr uct, being- a sor t of ver bal noun ( 87. 4), is
used in all the cases like a noun, so f ar as the constr uction, position,
gover nment, and even f or m of the wor d is concer ned; only it has,
f r om the natur e of the case, no plur al. The f ollowing ar e examples
of its use in the sever al cases.
1. In t he nomi nat i ve case.
E. g. Gen. 2 : 18 DlNn the being (inf . of of the man
alone is not good; 29: 19 Tin my giving (inf . of ]nD) is good; 11:6.
30 : 15.
2. In t he geni t i ve case.
E. g. Gen. 29 : 7 n? the time of collecting ; 2 : 4 nvU3> D1
,,
2
in the day of making fa. Num. 9:15. Ps. 128 : 2, et passim.
3. In t he dat i ve case.
E. g-. Num. 7 : 5 "i3J"b spr p and let them be for serving i. e. let
them ser ve, 8: 11; Ezek. 30: i6 ?j&2nb it shall be for pierc-
ing through i. e. it shall be pier ced thr ough; comp. 201. 1.
4. In t he accusat i ve case.
E. g. 1 K. 3 : 7 / knew not NliT the going out or coming in ;
Jer . 5 : 3. Gen. 21: 6.
NOTE. The accusative her e commonly has b bef or e it; as Gen.
11:8. Ex. 2: 15. Comp. 201. 1.
5. In t he abl at i ve case.
E. g. Ps. 39: 2 / will guard my way 81 Write from sinning, &.C.
6. T h e infinitive const ruct , like nouns, t akes preposi -
tions bef or e it and suffixes af t er it.
In tr anslating the inf initive in this constr uction, we must f or the
most par t give it a finite sense, as in the f ollowing examples.
(a) With 2; as Gen. 2: 4 OJOSf r a when they were created, lit. in
the being cr eated of them ; Ex. 16 : 7 because he heard; Is. 1: 15.
(b) With 3 ; as Gen. 44 : 30 ""{OS when I come ; 39:18 "*73
when I lifted up.
(c) With b ; Gen. 2:3 tniD^b when he made it; Is. 7:15 ininb un-
til he know ; 1 K. 16 : 7 to provoke him by his doings RPTTB in that he
was fa.
Di gi t i zed bv
3 6 6 2 0 1 . VERBS ; INFINITIVE CONSTRUCT WI TH LAMKDH.
(d) With ; Deut. 7: 8 *3 because Jehovah
laoes you, Ut. because of the loving of Jehovah you. The preposition
]23 hat often a negative sense in such cases; as Gen. 27: 1 kit eyes
were dim so that he could not see, lit from seeing; 16: 2. Ex.
14: 5. For )S3 before the infinitive in comparisons, see 177. 3.
(e) With 19; Judg. 6: 18 1? until thou retumest; 3: 26.
( y) With V?; Jer. 2: 35 because thou sayest / Job 10: 7.
(g) With J$5gb ? as Gen. 37 : 22 that he might save ;
Ezek. 21: 15.
(A) With nt i n; as Is. 60: 15 W]n because that thou
wast forsaken SfC,
(t) With ^na, &c. as Gen. 50: 14 i"D ^TNt after he
was buried.
#
NOTE. In a very few cases, the infinitive construct h used for the
infinitive absolute; see 199. 3 note.
201. Verbs ; idiomatic use of the infinitive construct with b.
t l . The inf initive construct with the pr ef ix !?, in ver y
many cases, answers pr ecisely to the English inf initive pr e-
ceded by the par ticle to,
E. g. Gen. 2: 5 and there was no man *fes?b to till the ground ; v.
10 and a river went out from Eden nipttnb to water the ground; 11:6
all which they may purpose nitons to do, &c.
NOTE. When the negative "nba comes before an infinitive, the
preposition b is put before the former; as Gen. 3:11 which I com-
manded thee bSN Tbsb not to eat.
t i
2. The inf initive construct with the pr ef ix b and with
the ver b of existence expr essed or implied, consti-
tutes a periphrasis expr essing the meaning of sever al f orms
of the f inite ver b, viz.
(a) Of the praeter; as 2 Chr. 26: 5 DTfbK TP} and he
sought God, lit. and he was in seeking God; Gen. 15: 12 and the sun
fctfab Wl was about to go down, lit. was in going down; 2 Chr. 11:
22. Ezra 3: 12.
2 0 2 . VERBS } INFINITIVE WITH CASES* 367
(b) Of the present; as Is. 44: 14 ib~rri-Db he hews down
for himself cedars, lit. [he is] in hewing down &c. Prov. 19: 8 he that
is wise ai o fiOt&b findeth prosperity, lit. is in finding; Is. 21: 1.
(c) Of the fature ;' as Is. 38 : 20 ":Jpipinb [ n v r ] r.^rn Jehovah
will deliver me, lit will be for the delivering of me; Ps. 25: 14 Jeho-
vah ttsnnin!? [!"t*Jl?] will teach them, lit. will be for the teaching of
t h e m4 9 : 15. 62: 10. Ecc. 3: 14.
(d) Of the passive; as Jos. 2 : 5 and it came to pass SiDb
when the gate was to be shut, lit. in the shutting of the gate; Deut. 31:
17 and they shall be devoured, lit. and it shall be f or de-
vour ing them; Is. 6: 13.
(e) Of the Latin par ticiple in dus, or the English auxiliar ies shall,
can, must, &c. as 2 K. 4 : 13 nVL'yb [r Pn] HH what is to be done for
thee? 2 Chr . 19: 2 ST?b [r T~] y'2j"jbn should one help the wicked?
Judg. 1 : 19 tf pninb [r pn] f if e he could not dispossess them; Hos. 9:
13. Amos 6 : 10. 2 *Chr.
T
20 : 6.
* 202. Verbs ; construction of the infinitive with cases,
1. T h e infinitive const ruct gover ns nouns in t he ob-
li que cases, li ke finite verbs. ( 195198. )
The accusative, of cour se, occur s the most f r equently in this con-
str uction. Her e also belong the cases in which the inf initive constr uct
takes ver bal suf f ixes. ( 126. 1, 5.)
NOTE. The inf initive absolute also, in a ver y f ew cases, takes an
accusative af ter it; as Is. 22: 13 1U)a VbiO f tti: ^j5a Jhn cae-
dendo boves et jugulando (rots et edendo camera 8,'C.
2. T h e subject of t he infinitive const ruct , correspondi ng
to t he nomi nat i ve case of finite ver bs, is usually put in t he
geni t i ve case af t er t he ver b.
E. g. Judg. 13: 20 asYbn nibsa in the lighting tip of the flame i. e.
when the f lame lighted up; 1 Sam. 23: 6 n"123 in the flying
of Abiathar i. e. when Abiathar f led; Ps. 66: 10.
Her e belong the cases in which the inf initive constr uct takes noun-
suf f ixes. ( 126. 5. 135. 3.)
NOTE 1. The inf initive constr uct of ten takes the cases of both the
subject and object in the same sentence; as Gen. 2:4 rrit!JJ> 01^2
i
n
the day of Jehovah's making the earth and the heavens i.e.
Di gi t i zed by
1
3 6 8 J 2 0 3 * VERBS ; USE OF PARTI CI PLES.
in the da j when Jehovah made fee. 1 K. 13: 4 5731233
tj^tt when the king heard the word of the man fa. b. 58 : 6 a day r r ii?
toD3 OHM when a man will afflict his soul, &c.
So with the subject and two accusatives; as Gen. 41: 39
IliiT~b3~nfi$ fi^rrbfi* since God?* shewing you all this L e.
since God hath shewn &c.
NOTE 2. The genitive usually stands next to the verb, but in a
very few cases the accusative is put first; as Is. 6: 24 "p&b 2j b3K?
as the flame of fire devours the stubble ; 20: 1. Gen. 4:15.
* 203. Verbs ; use of participles
Active par ticiples ar e of ten used in the place of f inite
ver bs, viz.
1. For the pr esent tense.
E. g. Ecc. 1 : 4 one generation ^bh passeth away and another gen-
eration M3 cometh ; 1: 7, 8. Ps. 1 : 6. 3: 2. 4: 7. Is. 1: 7.
NOTE. In this manner, participles are used with pronouns of any
person, instead of verbs, in order to express the present tense ; as JfV
3iK I fear ; ttnK thoufearest; WHaa we fear, &c. In in-
transitive verbs this use is very common.
2. For the past tense in all its gradations.
E. g. Gen. 2: 10 and a river NIP issued from Eden ; Deut. 4 : 3
your eyes nifiHri have seen; Gen. 41 : 17, 18, 19.
3. For the f utur e tense in all its var ieties.
E.g. Gen. 17: 19 Sarah shaU bear a eon fyc* 19: 13 we
tFrpnlitt are about to destroy the city ; 6 : 17 behold I will cause
to come a flood ; 48 : 4. Ex. 9:18. 1 K. 11 : 31. 14: 10.
NOTE 1. Participles, when used as verbs, are subject to all the ano-
malies of concord which are found in verbs ( 189). Thus Gen. 4:10
SpHit bip the voice of thy brothers blood cries; where the
participle agrees with the second noun, &c. ( 189. 12.)
NOTE 2. The two Hebrew participles, active and passive, often
have the sense of the Latin participles in rus and dus; as Gen. 19:14
rn!-T rPnp)D Jehovah is about to destroy the city ; Ps. 76 : 8
metuendus ; Ps. 18 : 4 bb^E laudandus, &c.
4. When the ver b of existence (u^n) is added to the
par ticiple, an imper f ect tense descr iptive of continued ac-
tion or condition is designated.
2 0 4 . VERBS ; PARTICIPLES WITH CASES. 369
E. g. Job 1: 14 the cattle nittJin nTl were ploughing ; Neh. 1 : 4
bbsnJOl D TIKI I was fasting and praying ; 2 : 13, 15. 2 Chr. 24 :
14. 36 : 16. Gen. 4: 17. Deut 9: 22, 24.
5. T h e adver bi al wor ds CT there is and "pfct there is not,
ei t her wi t h or wi t hout suffixes, ar e of t en connect ed wi t h
part i ci pl es, and t hus f or m a peri phrasi s f or t he pr esent
t ense of t he finite ver b.
E. g. Judg. 6 : 36 if Jpajifc thou savest; Gen. 24: 49. 43: 5
if nV'-j'? thou dost not send away ; Ex. 5: 16 straw "jna "ptl is not
given ; Lev. 26: 6.
204. Verbs ; construction of participles with cases
t l . Act i ve part i ci pl es may gover n t he same cases as
t hei r verbs. ( 195197. )
f 2 . It is a more common construction, t o put t he act i ve
part i ci pl e in regi men wi t h t he noun t hat follows it. ( 135. 1. )
E. g. Ps. 84 : 5 inhabiters of thy house ; Ps. 28:1
112 the descenders [those who go down] into the pit; 5: 12 *>5^^
the lovers of thy name ; 19 : 8. Pr ov. 2 : 19.
NOTE. The genitive af ter the active par ticiple, constr ucted in the
manner just descr ibed, is capable of all the var ieties of r ender ing
which belong to the genitive af ter nouns ( 171); and sometimes also
pr epositions kc. inter vene between the par ticiple and genitive, as in
the case of nouns. ( 172.)
3. T h e part i ci pl e passive is const ruct ed wi t h cases in
t he following manner, viz.
() With an accusative; as Ezek. 9 : 2 clothed [with]
linen garments ; 1 Sam. 2: 18 "JiBK Haf t girded [with] an ephod. So
in Gr eek dvacdeitjv imiifti'vog II. a. 149.
() With the genitive; as Ezek. 9:11 TDIlb clothed [with, of ]
linen garments; Joel 1 : 8 girded [with, of ] sackcloth; Ps.
32: 1 pardoned [of , f r om] sin 4rc.
NOTE. When ther e is but one f orm of the par ticiple, as f r om
ma to die, this f or m is capable of all the meanings and constr uctions
of both the active and passive par ticiples.
Di ai t i zed bv
3 7 0 I 2 0 5 . VERBS USED AS ADVERBS.
205. Verbs used a* adverb#
1. It is a f r equent case in Hebr ew, that when two
r er bs immediately f ollow each other , either with or with-
out the copula between them, the f ir st of them ser ves
mer ely to qualif y the second, and must be r ender ed ad-
verbially,
E. g. 1 Sam. 2: 3 'HJHn bi$ do not make much and speak
i. e. do not say much; Job 19:3 *2521} fitb ye are not asha-
med ye stun me I. e. In a shameless manner ye Stan me; den. 26: 18
Swpi 2ttj*1 and he returned and dug i. e. he again dug; 19:22. 27:20.
30 : 31. 31: 28. Hos. 1: 6. Ps. 51: 4. 71: 20.
The verbs most commonly used thus, are the following, viz.
to do well used for well, skilfully, Ps. 33: 3.
IpDin to add again, once more, Gen. 4:2. 8: 12.
nbS) to end adjinem, entirely, Gen. 24: 15.
to hasten hastily, quickly, Gen. 27: 20. Ex. 2: 18.
iTTS'lil to increase much, qften, 2 K. 21: 6. Ps. 61: 4.
23U3 to return agatn, 1K.19-.6. Job 7: 7.
Other verbs are-also occasionally found, which may be rendered
adverbially; as Gen. 37: 7 aao ; 31: 27 wherefore n'-Db nfiWna hast
thou fled secretly ? Compare in Greek the adverbial use of the verbs
lav&avto, xvy%avtn, q&avo), with participles.
NOTE. In some cases the second verb Is In the Infinitive; as Gen.
27 : 20. Ex. 2 . 18, &c.
2. The manner In which the Hebrews express the idea of
suddenly, unexpectedly, in a manner unforeseen or unprovided for, is pe-
culiar. They say 3>V Jib he knew not, or they knew not; or
they use other equivalent expressions. Thus Job 9: 5 he removes the
mountains tkb they know it not i. e. suddenly; Ps. 35: 8 destruction
comes upon him 5YJ ^ unexpectedly ; Prov. 5: 6. Cant. 6: 12. Job 4:
20 "^2*3 no one considering i e. suddenly, tmexpectedly.
2 0 6 . ADVERBS.
3 7 1
SYNTAX OF PARTI CLES.
206* Adwrbs
1. Adver bs in Hebr ew ar e of ten used in the place of
nouns, and ar e t hen const ruct ed in t he following manner.
(a) In apposition with the nouns which they qualif y ; as Gen. 18 :
4 a little water; Neh. 2: 12 t3J3 few persona; Is.
30 : 33 f i sni l much wood, &c.
(b) In the genitive af ter nouns; as 1 K. 2: 31 D50 innocent
blood; Ezek. 30: 16
,,
12 daily persecutors; Deut. 26: 5 "'nTa
Uy33 _/**> men, &c.
2. Adver bs standi ng in pl ace of nouns somet i mes t ake
preposi ti ons bef or e t hem.
E. g. Ezek. 6 :10 Dsn bi* gratis ; 2Chr . 29 :36 DNnB2 suddenly ;
1 K. 22: 20 HD3 so lit. in the so; Esth. 4: 16 ]22 so; Neh. 9: 19
ttf li-a daily.
3. T h e repet i t i on of adver bs mar ks intensity.
E. g. Gen. 7: 19 "JN73 very much; Deut. 28: 43 !"tea
higher and higher, TftiD SIB ft deeper and deeper ; 1 K. 20: 40 J"!3n
r tani hither and hither L e. her e and ther e, all around.
4. Th e r e is in He b r e w no a dve r b of affirmation, cor-
respondi ng t o our yes. It s pl ace is suppli ed as follows, viz.
() By a per sonal pr onoun; as Gen. 27 : 24 art thou my son Esau ?
and he said, ''Si* / am, that is, yes.
() By a per iphr asis f or the per sonal pr onoun ; as 2 Sam. 9: 6
ar t thou Mephibosheth ? and he said ^",25 ni n behold thy servant!
( J 86. I . )
5. T wo negat i ves in He b r e w ser ve t o st r engt hen t he
negati on.
E. g. 1 K. 10: 21 29T13 f iib S)S2 *pNt silver was not at all regarded.
In the par allel ver se 2 Chir. 9: 20 Kb is omitted. Ex. 14 : 11 ^b.2 n
"pN because there were no graves fa. Zeph. 2 : 2, &c.
NOTE. A negative par ticle is sometimes jobed with nouns and ad-
jectives to qualif y the sense of them ; as Deut. 32: 6 D3n f iib not wise
i. e. f oolish; Ps. 43: 1 VOTI tfy mmerciful; Job 30: 8 Dip dis-
Di qi t i aed bv
3 7 2 2 0 7 , 2 0 8 . PREPOSITIONS, CONJUNCTIONS.
graced; Deut 32: 21 not God, not a nation i . e. not
worthy of this appellation ; Is. 31: 8 TblK'ttV not a mortal; lO : 15
yy-N'b no wood at all, kc.
6. A negative is f r equently implied in an inter r ogative
sentence, as in English.
In this way interrogative particles often come to imply a nega-
tive sense, viz.
(a) ft: as 2 Sam. 7: 5 wilt thou build me an house ? i. e.
^ / *1 ' v * "i
thou shalt not; as in the parallel verse 1 Chr. 17. 4. So Is. 27: 7.
Prov. 24: 28. Ezek. 18 :23, comp. v. 32. 1 K. 8 : 27. Gen. 30 : 20.
(b) what; as Job 16: 6 \f I keep silence ?jlrr -what
quilt me? i e. I am not relieved; Cant. 8: 4. Prov. 20 : 24. X>ao.
1: 10.
207. Prepositions.
f l . Pr epositions gover n the oblique cases of nouns,
pronouns, &c. ( 170, 173.)
2. Composite prepositions, in many cases, do not dif f er
in sense f rom the simple f orms.
E. g. Jer. 9: 21. Eec. 10: 14 L q. ; Esth. 3: 1. Pa
108 : 5 i. q- V?; Judg. 19: 3 0 L q. &c?
3. Vice versa, the simple f orms of pr epositions some-
times take the sense of compound f orms.
E. g. Num. 5: 20 nnn I. q. r>nn&; Ezek. 23: 6. So Hos. 12: 1
i. q. Bra ; and Is. 45: 9 rtt$ i q.
For the pleonasm and elliptit of prepositions, see 210. 211. 12.
208. Conjunctions.
Since the Hebrew language possesses bat very few conjunctions,
some of them are necessarily employed in a great variety of significa-
tions. This is particularly the case with the copulative 1; the various
uses of which are best learned from the lexicon and from practice.
For some peculiar uses of Vav, see 211. It note, 13 note. For
the ellipsis of conjunctions, see 211. 13.
2 0 9 , 2 1 0 . PLEONASM, ETC. 373
209. Interjections.
1. Interjections expressive of calamity or imprecation,
often take a dative after them.
E. g. 1 Sam. 4: 8 wo to / Ezek. 30: 2 nn wo to
O T
<Zay /
2. Interjections which have the forms of other parts
of speech, take after them the cases required by those
forms. #
E. g. Ps. 1 : 1 with a genitive j 29: 1, 2 'lif t with an accu-
sative, &c.
F I GURE S OF S YNTAX AND RHE T ORI C.
210. Pleonasm.
I. Of personal pronouns. *
1. Verbal suffixes are not unf'requently pleonastic, be-
ing immediately followed by the noun to which they
have relation.
E. g. Ex. 2 : 6 she saw him the child ; 1 Sam.
21: 14 iJ33;tj~ns 13123M he changed it his understanding ; Job 33: 20
Dnb ir pn sjnnnt his soul abhors it bread. Such is the pr edominant con-
str uction in the Chaldee and Syr iac.
2. The suffixes of nouns are sometimes pleonastic in a
similar manner.
E. g. Is. 17 : 6 J"!**") D f lS02 in the twigs of it the fruit tree; Pr ov.
14: 13 nnaip nn^r w the end of it joy; Cant. 1: 6 "73-D my
vineyard which is to me. Such also is the gener al usage of the Chaldee
and Syr iac.
3. The dative case of pronouns after verbs, and espe-
cially verbs of motion, is often pleonastic.
E. g. Gen. 12: 1 go for thyself i. e. go; Cant. 2: 11
i b it has gone for itself i. e. has gone; Gen. 27: 43 ^bTna flee for
thyself i. e. f lee ; Is. 31 : 8 Vp D3 he has fled for himself i. e. he baa f led ;
49
Di gi t i zed bv
3 7 4
2 1 1 . ELLIPSIS.
Job 39: 4 ifcb touj-fltb they turned not hack for themselves L e. turned
not back. So also Cant. 2: 17 *^b HE! compare for thyself i. e. com-
pare; Job 12: 11 the palate relishes for itself L e. reli shes;
15: 28 houses which iftb *2ttT~itb they do not inhabit for themselves
L e. which no one inhabits; Pro v. 13: 13 'lb ban?, he shall perish for
himself 1. e. shall perish; Job 19 : 29 Q^b ^'ttsyear./br yourselves L e.
fear ye.
NOTE. The Arabic has the same idiom; and it is also very com-
mon in Syriac.
4. The dative pleonastic also occurs af ter par ticiples
and adjectives, but more seldom than af ter ver bs.
E. g. Hos. 8 : 9 a wild ass ib lonely for itself i. e. alone or
lonely; Amos 2:13 ftb rtfijbtt full for itself L e. full; Ps. 144 : 2
my deliverer for me i. e. my deliverer.
//. Qf prepositions.
5. The prepositions 3 and are sometimes pleonastic.
(a) S; as Ex. 32 y 22 thou knowest this people that 9*^2 they
are,evil, lit that they are in evil; Hos. 13: 9 ^"1T52 my help
is in thee, lit in respect to me [I am] in thy help; Ps. 29: 4. Prov.
3: 26. Is. 26: 4. 45 : 14 b$ only thou art God; Job 18 : 8. Ez-
ra 3: 3. In the three last examples, it stands even before the subject
of a sentence. This is technically called Beth essentiae.
NOTE. The name of Beth essentiae is also extended to the use of
a in cases like the following; as Ps: 118: 7 iiirp Jehovah is
among my helpers; 54 : 6. 99 : 6. Job 24 : 13. Judg. 11: 35. This
mode of expression, however, is common in the western languages.
([b) : as Deut. 15: 7 when there shall be with thee a poor man
one of thy brethren, lit of one of thy brethren; Lev. 4 :
2. 5: 13. Ezejc. 18: 10. This idiom is common in Arabic.
211* Ellipsis.
I. Of nouns.
1. The nominative case is sometimes omitted bef or e
ver bs.
E. g. Gen. 31: 36 ib it was hot to him viz. S)K anger, i. e. his
Anger burned, or he was angry; 34: 7, &c. So 1 Sam. 24: 11 Dnrfl
2 1 1 . ELLIPSIS. 375
Sp)j3? and it pitied thee, i. e. mine eye pitied; comp. Gen. 45: 20. Dent
7: 16.
NOTE. The word is not unfrequently omitted, in cases where
the sense requires it as the subject of a sentence; as Prov. 10: 24
the desire qf the righteous he will grant i. e. Jehovah will grant;
12: 12. 13: 21'. 21: 13. Job 3: 20. Ecc. 9 : 9. Ps. 10: 4, comp. v.
13, and see below in no. 8.
2. The accusative case, after several verbs which are
in frequent use, is often omitted, as being unnecessary to
render the language intelligible.
E. g. r nb* she bore i. e. children ; r HS he concluded i. e. n
n
^3 an
agreement; 11132 he inclined or spread i. e. the ear, or the tent ;
NiI53 he lifted up i. e. bip the voice ; ^ 9 he arranged i. e. 0*^*3 words
in pr ayer , &c. These omissions occasion little dif f iculty, and ar e soon
r ender ed f amiliar by pr actice.
3. When the subject of a proposition is required by
the sense to be repeated in the predicate with some ad-
dition, the actual repetition of it rarely takes place.
E g. Cant. 1: 15 0*3
:
P thine eyes [ar e the eyes] qf doves;
Ps. 18 : 34. 48 : 7. 55: 7. Is. 52 : 14.
4. In the designation of weights and measures, the or-
dinary words which express the standard of them are
commonly omitted. ( 176. 6.)
E. g. CI 05 Sjbf i} a thousand [shekels] of silver ; Snt ten [shek-
els] of gold ; Cl bi p six [ephahs] of barley ; "Pip two [loaves]
of bread.
5 In expressing the day of the month, the word tfp
day is commonly omitted; see 176. 8.
II. Of pronouns.
5. The personal pronouns are often omitted, as follows.
() In the nominative case most commonly, as in Gr eek and Latin.
() In the genitive af ter the inf initive mood, or af ter a noun. E. g.
Gen. 6: 19 nvnnb to preserve them alive fyc. instead of Dn^nnb;
Ex. 15: 2 Jehovah is my strength f HOp and my song, f or Tl l St l ;
Ps. 40: 10, 11. 60, 6, &c.
-*steiitized bv
3 7 6
2 1 1 . ELLIPSIS.
(e) In the accusative after verbs; as Ex. 2: 25 God looked upon
the children qf Israel, and God 5*1^1 observed them, for ; Ps.
137: 5 let my right hand TXstimforget me; 139: I. 17: I I . Gen.
9:22,&c.
6. The r elative pronoun "IS# is of ten omitted in the
f ollowing constructions, viz.
() In the nominative; as Gen. 15: 13 in a land 0!rib rib which
is not theirs; Is. 40 : 20. 51 : 2. 54: 1. 55 : 5. 61 : 10, &c.
() In the genitive after a noun in the construct state; as Ex. 4 :
13 send by the hand of him whom thou wilt send. See
179. 2. " ' "
(c) In the accusative; Prov. 9:5a* wine which "
l
n3D73 I heme,
mingled; Gen. 3: 13 rPil)J> what is this which thou hast done ?
(d) When used to qualify other words; as Ex. 18: 20 the -may
na hi which they go ; Job 3: 3 perish the day
ta lb 1 fit in which J was born ; Ps. 32: 2. Is. 1 : 30 : 23 : 7, &c. Ecc-
1 : 5 and the sun hastens to the place Qtt? Wn whence he
arose. The word which would qualify is also often omitted; as
Is. 29 : 1 the city TV"l Srt2n [fta in which David dwelt; Ps. 4 : 8
more than in the time Dttii 035*1 [is in which their corn
and new wine increase, &c. See 187. 2 note 2.
(e) In the sense of that which, he who, those who, &c; as Job 24 :
19 Shedl takes away litDtl those who have sinned; Ps. 12 :
6 I will place in safety ib [^2?N-ni$] him whom one puffs at L e.
who is contemned.
( / ) In an adverbial sense; as 1 Chr. 15: 12 ^b "Ttf 3*Din bi$
to the place which I have prepared for it. ( 187. 2 note 2.)
NOTE. The omission of Tijat is much more common in poetry
than in prose. In prose, it is generally inserted after a definite noun,
and omitted after an indefinite one, as in Arabfc. (De Sacy, Gramm.
Arabe II. 363.)
III. Of verbs.
7 . The ver b of existence ( " PN) is commonly omitted
between a subject and its pr edicate, especially when the
pr edicate stands f ir st. ( 180* 1.)
E. g. Gen. 3: 11 ">p3K naked am J; 4:13 'ft 1*
great is my iniquity, Sic.
2 1 1 . ELLIPSIS* 3 7 7
8. When the wor ds of any one ar e r epeated, the ver b
"VON* which marks quotation, is ver y of ten omitted, and
must be supplied f r om the sense of the passage.
E. g. Ps. 8: 4 when I behold the heavent ISM] I exclaim,
Lord, what is man SFC. 10:4 the wicked in his pride ["t^M] has said
snn^bs [flJrT] Jehovah will not punish; comp. v. 13 where the el-
lipsis is supplied, and see above in Ho. 1 note; 52: 8, 9. 59: 8. Job
8: 18.
9. When a f inite ver b would be pr eceded by an in-
f initive absolute of the same ver b, the f or mer is some-
times omitted.
For examples, see 199. 4.
NOTE. Besides the above particular cases of an ellipsis of the verb,
there occur many other, especially in poetry, which cannot be made
the subject of definite precept, but must be filled up in conformity
with the context Such are Job 39: 24. Is. 66 : 6. Ps. 3: 9. 4 : 3.
6:4. 7: 9. Jer. 11: 15. 2 Sam. 23: 17, comp. 1 Chr. 11: 19. 1 K.
11: 25. 2 K. 6: 33. Hoe. 8:1. Prov. 6: 26. See below in no. 15 note 2*
IV. Of adverbs.
10. The inter r ogative H is of ten omitted.
E. g. Gen. 27 : 24 "^a nt JtriM art thou my very son, for JlPiMtt ;
then that, for ^3D PJMfi; 1 Sam. 16:4. 30: 8. 2 Sam.
9 :6 :18 :29. Job 40: 25.
NOTE. This ellipsis of n often takes place in a negative interroga-
tion, before Mb ; as Jon. 4:11 &3HM Mb "OMI and should not I spare
Nineveh f instead of Mb!?,; Lam. 1:12. 3: 36. Ex. 8: 22. 2 K. 6:
26. Job 14: 16 for now thou numberest my steps, Sfttpn Mb] and
wilt thou not keep watch over my sins ? So also before bM 1 Sam. 27:10.
11. When two negative propositions f ollow each other
in the same construction, especially in poetic parallelism,
the negative adver b is sometimes omitted in the second
proposition, and must be supplied.
E. g/ 1 Sam. 2: 3 speak not proudly, pn* let not any rash
thing proceed from your mouth ; Ps. 9 : 19 for he will not always forget
the poor; the expectation of the afflicted shall not always perish; Job
28 : 17. 30 : 20. Is. 23: 4. 38 : 18. See below in no. 15. d.
37 8
2 1 1 . ELLIPSIS.
NOTE. When a negative is expressed in the first member of a par-
allelism, and the second has a Vav prefixed to it, that Vav should he
rendered disjunctively, viz. nor, but, &c. E. g. Ps. 44: 19 our heart
has HOT turned back from thee, Oni NOR our steps declined from
thy paths; Is. 41 : 28 / looked and there was MO man, qf them NONE gave
counsel, I inquired of them NOR did any answer, or BUT none gave
answer ; Job 3: 10. Is. 28 : SrDeut. 33: 6. ( 208.)
V. Of prepositions.
12. The prepositions 2, !?, &c. ar e not unf r equently
omitted wher e the sense requires them.
(a) The prefix a; as Ps. 66: 17 vVfi* I cried to him
with my mouth for "CB; 12:3. 17:10,13,14. 60:7 help me with
thy right hand; 108: 7. 109. 2, kc.
NOTE. The prefix D, when taken as a conjunction ( 157. 1), usu-
ally excludes a; as Am. 9:11 DM? 'EPS as in the days qf old, for ^ 3^ 3.
(b) The prefix V; as Prov. 27: 7 to the hungry soul,
any bitter morsel is sweet, for ; 13: 18. 14 : 22. Jer. 9: 2.
(c) The preposition ; Ecc. 2: 24 nothing is better for a man
^2#*$ than that he should eat, for
VI. Qf conjunctions.
13. Conjunctions which would expr ess some par ticular
r elation of the latter part of a sentence to the f or mer , ar e
of ten omitted, or their place is supplied by the copulative
Vav*
E. g. Gen. 19: 23 and the sun was rising tta ofcl and [when] Lot
entered Zoar; Prov. 11: 2 pride cometh and [then] cometh shame,
or does pride come ? and [then] shame will follow ; Gen. 44: 4. Ex.
3:18. 16:21. 17:6. Ps. 148 : 5.
NOTE. The copulative Vav is here rendered when, then, &c. mere-
ly from necessity, the appropriate conjunction being omitted. ( 208.)
14. Conjunctions which ser ve to connect words and
phr ases ar e of ten omitted.t
NOTB. In technical language, that part of the sentence, which in cate*
like the above precede* Vav, is called protasis; that which follow*, aptdosis.
t NOTB. This is called the constructs cuyndctica i. e. without the ovvfoopot
or conjunction.
2 1 1 . ELLIPSIS* 3 7 9
(o) The copulative Vav; as Gen. 31: 2 yesterday and
the day before ; Judg. 19:2 a year and four months ;
Hab. 3: 11 TVi sun and moon; Nah. 3:1. Is. 63: 11. Ex.
15:9. Judg.~5: 27. Ps. 10:3.
NOTE. The asyndetic construction occurs principally in the ex-
pression of intense feeling in poetry; or in the phraseology of com-
mon life, which it is the custom of all languages to shorten.
(6) The disjunctive 1 or to or ; as 2 K. 9: 32 .TOblb 0*3tt> two or
three eunuchs ; 1 Sam. 20: 12. Is. 17:6.
(c) The sign of comparison 3 or ?K3 as; Is. 21: 8
he will roar as a lion ; Ps. 11:1 vna^y to your mountain
as a bird ; Is. 51: 12 the son of man who shall be made as grass ;
Job 24: 5. Ps. 40: 8. Nah. 3: 12, 13. Especially, when the follow-
ing member of a sentence has "J5 so, is a as omitted before the first
member; as Is. 55: 9 for as the heavens are higher than the earth, *J3>
so are his ways above 4rc. Ps. 48: 6. Job 7: 9. Judg. 5:15.
{d) The conditional particles *3 and tttf i f , provided that, although,
fee. as 4s. 48 : 21 they shall not thirst, provided that he
should conduct them through the desert; Job 19: 4. Ps. 139: 11. Gen.
42 : 38. Ex.4: 23.
(e) The particles *3 and signifying that; as Ps. 9: 21 the naf
tions shall know njafj that they are mere men; 50: 21. 71: 8.
Job 19: 25. Lam. 1: 21.
VII. Ellipsis in poetic parallelism.
15. ID poetr y, a noun, pronoun, ver b, adver b, or pr ep
osition, expr essed in the f ir st member of a parallelism, it
not unf requently omitted in the second member.
(a) A noun; as Ps. 24: 1 Jehovah's is the earth and all that
is in it, [it^Pb] Jehovah's is the world and they who dwell therein.
{b) A pronoun; Ps. 22: 6 "
,
32fi< / am a worm and no man, [^32**]
I am the scorn of men ; so nntt in v. 10.
(c) A verb; as Ps. 22: 3 O my God I call all the day, but
thou dost not answer ; and all the night [it"}^] do I call &c. 13: 3 15
rPttjfit rt3K how long shall I have [place] anxiety in my soul, [rWK"*!?
rPttta] how long shall I have [place] sorrow in my heart all the day ?
see below in d ; Is. 49: 7 kings shall behold and rise up, princes
[itf-P] shall behold and do reverence, &c.
(d) An adverb; as Ps. 10: 5 rmb why, Jehovah, standest thou afar
e j f , [nab] why hidest thou thyself; 13: 3 see above in c; 22: 2, &c.
380
*
2 1 2 . CHARGE o r CONSTRUCTION
For the omission of the negative lib in similar cases, see above in
no. 11.
(e) A preposition; as Job 12:12 with the aged is wisdom,
TV
11 aTU
* f k understanding ; 15:3. Is. 28 : 7
44: saying to JerusalembS'W and to the temple, for ; 28 :
6. Job 34: 10. Gen. 49: 25 b*JE,/rom the God of thy father""2 n1
and from the Almighty, for n&E; Ps. 22: 2 why art thou distant
from the words of my cry, for Job 30: 5. Is. 46 : 9. 49 : 7.
61 : 7.
NOTE 1. Vice vena, a word is sometimes omitted in the fiiet mem-
ber of a parallelism, which is supplied in the second member; as Is.
48: 11 for how shall [my glory] be profaned, when I will not give
"H'23 my glory to another ?
NOTE 2. No one thing in all the badness of sacred philology and
interpretation requires more judgment, skill, nicety of grammatical
knowledge, and thorough acquaintance with the Hebrew and poetic
idiom, than the application of the principle just exhibited above. A
multitude of obscurities in the English translation of the Old Testa-
ment might be removed by the aid of it, and much light diffused over
the sacred writings. The application of the principle, however, in a
multitude of cases, is not properly the subject of any definite rule, but
must be Greeted by critical tact and sound discretion.
* 212. Change of construction in the same sentence.
1. When a sentence begins with a ver b in the inf ini-
tive pr eceded by a pr eposition and used in a f inite sense
( 200. 6), it of ten pr oceeds with a finite ver b.
E. g. Ps. 60: 2 2 1 8 * 1 w h e n he strove and returned ; Gen.
39: 18 wfo*
1
Jrowed my voice and cried; Is. 18:
5. 30: 12* 49: 5 Qeri. Amos 1: U. 2: 4. Gen. 27: 45. Job 28 : 25.
29: 6. 38: 7.
2. Sentences of ten begin with a par ticiple, and pr oceed
with a finite ver b. ( 203.)
E. g. Prov. 19: 26 0$ SK"T7U}73 he who abuses his father,
and chases away his mother; 2: 14. Is. 5: 11. 48: 1. 57: 3. Geq.
27:33. Ps. 15: 2, 3, &e.
2 1 3 . CONSTRUCTIO PRAEONANS.
381
3. Sentences of ten exhibit a change of person, especial-
ly in poetr y, viz.
() A transition f rom the third person to the second;
and vice versa.
E. g. Is. 1: 29 for THEY be ashamed qf the groves, which YE
have loved ; Gen. 49 : 4 THOU wentest up to thy fatherbedHE went
up to my couch ; Mic. 7: 18. Mai. 2: 15.
() A transition f rom the f ir st person to the thir d.
E. g. Is. 42 : 24. 44; 24, 25 / am Jehovah who made the universe,
HE frustrates the signs fa. This transition, however, is unfrequent,
and for the most part is altered in the Qeri.
NOTE. The same changes of person occur also in the use of suffix-
pronouns, a transition being often made from the first or second per-
son to the third, and vice versa; as Prov. 8:17 Kethib / [wisdom]
love her lovers i. e. those who love me j Mic. 1: 2 hear ye peo-
ple oil qf them, L e. all of you; Job 18: 4. Is. 22: 16, &c.
213. Constructio praegnans.
The name of consiructio praegnans is applied to phra-
ses which imply more than the wor ds liter ally expr ess,
although ther e is no dir ect ellipsis.
E. g. Ps. 22: 22 ^2n">25 "^50 hear [and deliver] me
from the horns qf the wild bulls, comp. v. 13; 32: 8 ftXPHt
I will counsel [and direct] to thee my eye ; 74:7 f ^ b
to the earth have they [cast down and] defiled the dwelling qf thy name ;
1 Sam. 10: 9 2b and Ood cAanged [his heart and
gave] to him another heart; 1 Chr. 12: 17 ^^b ^nia^b but if to de-
ceive [and betray] me to my enemies ; Ps. 118:5. Is. 38 :17. Jos. 4:18.
2 Sam. 18 : 19. Hos. 1: 2, &c.
NOTE. The following constructions, which are sometimes ranked
here, are rather to be considered as cases of direct ellipsis; viz. Num.
14:24 Fnn] [n^bb] Kbtt completely [to follow] Jehovah (J 206);
Ps. 13: 4 n)n lest I sleep [the sleep of] death. See
211. 2, 9 note.
5 0
382
214, 2 1 5 . ZEUGMA, HENDIADYS.
214. Zeugma.
1. The name Zeugma is applied to a construction wher e
two subjects have a ver b in common, but this ver b ex-
pr esses action &c. which can with pr opr iety be pr edicated
of only one of the subjects.
E. g. Job 4 : 10 the voice qf the lion and the teeth of the young lion*
are broken out i. e. the roaring of the lion [is made to cease], and the
teeth &c. Gen. 47 : 19 wherefore should we die, we and our land, i. e.
our land [become desolate]; Is. 55: 3. Hos. 1: 2. Jer. 15: 8. Est.
4:1.
2. The f igur e Zeugma also includes those cases wher e
nouns ar e grammatically connected with pr eceding nouns,
when in r espect to sense such connexion cannot be ad-
mitted.
E. g. Ps. 65: 9 thou makest 'WSti JQ the outgoings of the morning and
the evening to rejoice, where outgoings cannot be predicated of eve-
ning; Gen. 2: 1 the heavens and the earth and all OMK the host qf
them, i. e. the host of the heavens, viz. the stars. Compare Neh.
9:6.
215. Hendiadys.
The name Hendiadys is applied to a construction in
which two nouns ar e put in the same case and connected
by a copula, while in r espect to sense one of them must
be taken as a genitive f ollowing the other , or as an adjec-
tive qualif ying the other . ( 161. 5.)
E. g. Gen. 1:14 and they shall be for signs and for sea-
sons i. e. they shall be for the signs of seasons &c. 3: 16 / will multi-
ply thy sorrow and thy conception 1. e. I will multiply the pains of thy
conception; Job 10: 17 misfortune* and a host i. e. a host of misfor*
tunes; 4:16 stiUness and a voice i. e. a low voice, comp. 1 K. 19: 12.
2 Chr. 16: 14. Jer. 29: 11. .
For the name, see 6 161. 5.
216* PARONOMASIA.
3 8 3
216. Paronomasia.
1, The name Paronomasia is given to an expression
which contains two or more words selected in such a man-
ner, that they may resemble each other in sound, while in
sense they may differ.
Paronomasia is a very favorite figure of rhetoric among the He-
brews, and is common in all the oriental languages. It differs from our
rhyme, inasmuch as the words which constitute it do not necessarily
stand at the end of parallelisms or strophes, but may be placed togeth-
er in any part of a sentence, and are found in prose as well as poetry.*
2. There are various modes of constructing the Paro-
nomasia, of which the following are the principal.
(a) By placing together like sounding words; as Gen. 1: 2 IJin
desolate and empty ; 4: 12 3?3 a fugitive and a vagabond;
18 : 27 IBi? dust and ashes ; Job 30 : 19. Is. 28 : 10, 13 IScb 122
* - T FF '
law here and law there, precept here and pre-
cept there; 24: 17 JtBI nnDl IPC terror and a snare and a sling;
Ps. 18 : 8. Lam. 3 : 47. Jer* 48 : 43. Is. 24 : 3, 4.
(fe) By using like sounding words in different parts of a sentence ;
as Hos. 8 : 2 the stalk yields no 7173p. meal; Is. 5: 7 and he looked
BE'IJEb for equity and lo nB'JJQ shedding of blood, for righteous-
ness and lo the cry of the oppressed ; 7 : 9 if fiib ye will not
believe, then fitb ye shall not be established; 61 : 3 he shall ap-
point HDN nnn 'liJD beauty instead of ashes; Ps. 40 : 4. 52 : 8. 68 : 3.
Zech. 9 : 5. Gen. 42: 35. Amos 5: 26.
(c) By changing sometimes the ordinary forms of words, in order
to produce similarity of sound; as Ezek. 43: 11 Vfijaia:) Tfijxin,
where N3173 stands forfirtaa ; Ps.32:1 rmun'IDS where
^iB2 stands for See Mic. 1 : 8. Ezek. 7: 11. Amos 5: 26.
(d) By employing, in some cases, a word sounding in some degree
like another; as Joel 1 : 15 it shall come as destruction
from the Almighty; Jer. 51: 2 / will send against Babylon D^T barbari-
ans tt'HT'l and they shall scatter her; Is. 32: 7 vVs *^5) the armour of
* Besides the name TtaQOvopctoia, the Greek rhetoricians also called
this figure naprjrtjaie and Tiaoojvufua; and the Latins, agnominatio.
.digitized by Google
3 8 4
2 1 6 . PARONOMASIA*
the crafty is evil; Ezek. 7: 6 y*j?Sl K2 KB yj? the end is
come, come is the end, it is waked up against thee ; Is. 1 : 23
thy princes are revolters, comp. Hos. 9:15. Is. 57: 6. Amos 8 : 2.
(e) By repeating the same word In a different signification; as Ecc.
7: 6 like the noise [crackling] qf thorns under VOrt a pot;
Judg. 10: 4 Jair had thirty tons, and they rode upon thirty attest'
colts, and had thirty cities ; 15: 16 with the jaw bone "riJafitt of
an ass have / slain "IIEn one heap two heaps ; 1 Sam. 1: 24
and the lad was yet a lad; Jer. 1:11,12 what seest thou, Jerer
miah ? Ans. A rod "TjJSJ of the almond tree. Then God said, Well, for /
watch over fa.
( f ) Proper names are frequently made the occasion of Paronoma-
sia; as Mic. 1: 10 4San bN tes in Acco weep not, STntsb n
%
2a In Beth
Leaphra roll thyself "It* in the dust; 1: 14 the houses "qf Achzib
3T2ttb are liars; Zeph. 2: 4 W3> Gaza it forsaken; Gen. 9:
27 God n$;b nD] will enlarge Japhet; 49 : 8 O Judah thy breth-
ren shall praise thee ; 49: 16 "p
1
^ Dan shall judge; 49: 19
la Gad, a host shall press upon him ; Ruth 1: 20. Neh.
9: 24! Num. 18: 2. Is. 21: 2. Jer. 6: 1. 48: 2. Ezek. 25: 16. Hos.
2: 25. Amos 5 : 5, 6.
NOTE. Paronomasia is a very common figure in the New Testar
merit; as Mat. 8: 22 aqpee rove vfxpovs &dyai rove istvraiv vexgovg
let the dead bury their own dead ; see above in e. In Latin are found
capiatur Capua, cremetur Cremona; and Cicero exclaims (in Ver-
rem IV. 24) quod unquam hujusmodi EVERIUCULUM in provincia ullaJuU.
In the writings of the monks of the middle ages, and of the older Eng-
lish divines, Paronomasia abounds to excess.
APPENDIX.
A. p. 41.
In 10. 5 (p. 41) Is a reference to appendix A. In the progress
of the work, it was thought best to transfer to the body of the gram-
mar the matter which formerly stood in this place. The student is
therefore referred to 152 note 6 (p. 302), and 154. Par. IV.
B. p. 42.
Hebrew and'Greek alphabets.
The common assertion of writers on the old Greek alphabet has
been, that it consisted originally of only sixteen letters. The infer-
ence has been drawn from this, that when Cadmus left Phenicia, the
alphabet of his country comprised only this number of letters.
But this assertion in respect to the original number of Greek let-
ters, is built upon no definite and certain testimony. The oldest wri-
ters, Herodotus (5. 58) and Diodorus Siculus (5. 24), who relate the
story of Cadmus, say nothing of the number of letters; and the ac-
counts of later times disagree. Aristotle makes eighteen (Plin. Hist.
Nat. 7. 56); another account seventeen. (Plut. Sympos. 8 quaest. 3.
Isidor. Orig. I. 3. Potter's Greek Antiq. P. III. 8, 237 &c.)
A comparison of the Hebrew and Greek alphabets will make the
subject plainer. This may be made with probability, as follows.
s a n n u n u i s b a j e y s s p i D n
ABT A E(*F)Z H 9 IK A MN O J7(**)(t) P(.[) T
Upsilon and Omega seem to have been added later; and /?ai,
Ao7T7ra, and Zuvtit to have been rejected from the common alphabet,
as being superfluous, and retained merely as numeral signs. In the
Latin alphabet, taken from the old Greek, Bav passed into F, and
Kornia into Q. In the place of the corresponding composite letter
S was introduced.
* ZZmotjftov Bav, Digamma /", Latin F. ** avn7.
t KoTinft, Latin Q. 1 2uv, an old Greek S, Herod. 1. 139
Di ai t i zed bv Google
38 6 APPENDIX C, D ; VOWELS, ETC.
As the Greeks adopted a different mode of writing and reading
from that of the Phenicians, beginning at the right hand and proceed-
ing towards the left; so the old Phenician characters (Alph. third
column, p. 39) seem to have been reversed by them. Thus 3 of the
Phenicians, in Greek is written E; Sf the Phenician R is written P in
Greek &c. The four Gutturals , n, n, passed into vowels of ea-
sier sound, and were written as the consonants and in a line with
them. This fact renders it probable, that the strong guttural sounds
given by many grammarians to 9 are incorrect, and that n itself In
certain positions had a mild sound. Jerome calk n a vowel.
A comparison of the Greek and Hebrew alphabets in respect to
the names of the letters, renders it highly probable that they are of
common origin. There can scarcely be a doubt, that the Greeks re-
ceived their alphabet from the Phenicians.
C. p 60.
The names of the vowels are Chaldee, and of course indicate the
late origin of the vowels. They are probably significant; but the ex-
planation is attended with some difficulty. The following exhibits the
most probable account of this subject.
signifies collection or contraction of the mouth in uttering it.
nnB opening of the mouth.
fractio, or dividing of the mouth.
cluster of grapes, from the shape (v ).
p*VVj o creaking sound.
Dbin fullness or strength of sound,
fjttn means short, hurried.
a hissing sound.
Visp compression of the mouth.
D. p. 261.
In the first edition of this grammar, the theory of Gesenius was
adopted, who derives the great body of the Hebrew nouns from the
infinitive mood and the participles of Kal, and a few from the Infin-
itive and participles of other conjugations. This theory appeared,
at first view, to be very specious; and if it be well grounded, a prop-
er knowledge of it is, no doubt, very desirable. Much pains was ta-
ken in the first edition, to arrange and exhibit a regular series of these
various forms of derivative nouns. Subsequent examination, howev-
APPENDIX D ; DERIVATION, ETC. 3 8 7
er, has satisfied me that the theory is true only to a moderate extent,
and that it is of very little, if any, practical utility to the student. The
Arabic language, to which Gesenius appeals for a complete parallel
in respect to the derivation of nouns from the infinitive and partici-
ples, will by no means support the theory which he maintains. In
Arabic, the nomen actionis or infinitive forms, and the nomen agentis or
participial forms, actually comprise but a very small part of the nouns
and adjectives in that language; immeasurably the greater number
being formed by varying the vowel sounds, or by prefixing, inserting,
or suffixing, in a great variety of ways, some of the formative letters,
which correspond to the Hemantiv ( vns f t s n) letters of the Hebrew;
and the use of which, no grammarian has ever attempted to reduce to
rule, because it is too complex and multifarious to be capable of any
such reduction.
Still less can any definite peculiar meaning be always attached to
individual forms of nouns in Hebrew. So much as this is doubtless
true, viz. that certain forms more usually have a certain signification.
Thus nouns and adjectives which have a Daghesh forte in the middle
radical, more commonly signify habitual quality or action; as
righteous, 4*53 n a sinner. So nouns with a prefixed often designate an
instrument of action ; as nnCJg a key from fins to open. But such mean-
ings are very far from being exclusively attached to such forms. They
are even less so, than in the case of certain significant forms in our
own language, viz. words ending in ish, able, &c.
In a word, the exceptions to the theory of derivation and meaning
which Gesenius proposes, and which was followed in the first edition
of this grammar, are so very numerous; the introduction of unknown
forms of the infinitive and participles (unknown at least in any of the
Hebrew now extant) into a language so simple as the Hebrew and
not at all abounding in variety of verbal forms, in order to carry
through and render probable the theory in question, is so objectiona-
ble ; that after repeated investigation and consideration, I have thought
it best to exclude the whole subject from the grammar, as laborious,
difficult, and comparatively of very little use in practice.
The only effectual method of becoming acquainted with the signifi-
cation of nouns of any form, is practice and the use of a good lexicon
and grammar; for all grammarians and lexicographers, not excepting
Gesenius himself, now concede, that the signification of any given noun
can never be determined with certainty from the mere form of the
word.
Diaitized bv Google
3 8 8 APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS*
E. pp. 85, 86.
f l . Table of the accents.
The accents marked In the following table with (*) belong excl ur
sively to poetry; those marked with (t) belong exclusively to prose;
the others are common to both. The letters 2 and 0 are used merely
to shew the position of the accents. The names are all Chaldee.
I . DISJUNCTIVES.
Class I; pause-accents.
1 $QD SILLUQ, L e. stop, pause ; or, with the two points at
' the end of the verse, p^DB Pj'lOB p^Vo pause at the end of
a verse; called also prolonged in reading or can di-
lation ; and mugitus L e. loud sound.
2 3 ATHNAHH, i. e. respiration, time to breathe; called also
^ none impulse of the vt>ice.
3 MERKA MAHPAKH ; composite; see 23, 25.
Class II; used occasionally as pause-accents.
4 fQD flfjcn TIPHHHA posterius, L e. palm qf the handy from the
(
shape; called also buckler, from the shape;
retardation, from its office; strong, when next be-
fore Silluq and Athnahh; going on. It is used in
poetry, but merely as a conjunctive; see 30.
5 *M TIPHHHA anterius; pRAEFoernvE.
6 t 3 ZAQEPH QATON, L e. elevator minor.
7 t 3 biia ZAQEPH GADHOL, i. e. elevator major.
8 f i NnbiD SEOHOLTA, i. e. cluster qf grapes, from its shape.
Class III.
9 t 3 V2n TEBHIR, L e. interruption, breaking of f .
*
:
10 D 5*^*) REBHIA, i. e. resting upon or over.
11 *D2 T23"\* REBHIA GERESH ; composite, and the Geresh PRAE-
}
POSITIVE; s e e 10, 15.
12 KNTTJC PASHTA, i.e. expansion of the voice; poarrposmvE.
13 M #p
r
")l ZAR^A, i.e. dispersion ; POSTPOSITIVE. In poetry, when
not postpositive, it is used merely as a conjunctive; see 31.
14 t t o YETHIBH, i. e. sitting, stopping ; called also Cipna "slfi
" tuba anterior, and tuba inferior ; PRAEPOSITIVE.
APPENDI X E ; ACCENTS. 3 8 9
(
Class IV.
15 F 3 GERESH, i . e. expulsion; called also &*np buckler; and
KbDK staff, rod.
a *
s
16 J Hi GARSHAYIM, i.e. double Geresh; called also tTO^n
and dual and plural of D^n; see 15.
17 t CD JIURBN TELISHA GHEDHOLA, i. e. evulsio major ; called
also Httjbn (eradicator ?) and NO"in buckler; PRAEPOSITIVE.
10 3 Q
ARf f E
PHARA, i. e. the two horns of a heifer, from
^ the shape.
19 D PAZER, i. e. disperser.
20 |C!2 PESIQ, i. e. cessation ; called also fctjPOB separation; nev-
er used alone, but always preceded by a conjunctive on
the same word. See below in 1T 5. d. 1T 6. 6, note.
I I . CONJ U NCTIV ES.
21 3 nsi E MUNAHH, i. e. joined; called also ^2 ascent; bs'lDTa
sieve; *Y13* straight trumpet; "IP/D walking
trumpet. In poetry it is inferius or superius, L e. written
either below or above the line, as a or 3.
22 3 ***?"! QADMA, i. e. before ; also fitb TN going on ; b2?$
a
cord.
23 3 *3"!*? MERKA, for prolonging; also or^
%fc
JJtJ
3
prolonging ; fitbtNE proceeding.
24 T 2 FlblE3 MERKA KHEPHULA, i.e. Merka doubled; also
u
called "p'ntain ]"nn two threads.
25 3 MAIIPAKH, i. e. inversion ; called also crooks
ed trumpet; "psn inverted trumpet. In poetry it is
^ inferius or superius, as 3 or 5.
26 2 nV'JJBUJ SHALSHELETH, i. e. a chain ; called also elevat-
ing the voice.
27 | DARGA, i. e. steps, a ladder.
s *
28 "{"CD TEUSHA QETANNA, I.e. evulsio minor; POST-
POSITIVE.
2 9 3 YERAHH, i.e. moon ; called also RN^ the moon
y
a day old ; NVAY round ; BSBA a wheel.
30 * M TIPHHHA postering, a conjunctive in poetry; see 4.
(
3 1 * u 5 ZARQA, a conjunctive in poetry when not postpositive; see 13.
5 1
Digitized bv Google
390
APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS.
IT 2. Number qf the accents.
The different signs used as accents amount only to about twenty ;
but the accents made by compounding or doubling these signs, may
amount to nearly twice that number. Some reckon only twentyjive ;
others make five or six more; but the number above given is, per-
haps, as convenient as any.
IT 3. Similar accents distinguished.
() Athnahh (_.) and Yerahh (_) are similar in figure, but are
counterparts as to position.
() Rebbia (J.) should be over the middle of a letter as 5; while
the vowel Hholem should be smaller in size and placed over the side
of the . letter, as 2* or fit. In common printing, however, the size and
position of Rebhia is often the same as that of Hholem; and they are
to be distinguished only by practice and a knowledge of forms.
(c) Tiphhha (-) and Merka (_) are counterparts in form. So al-
so Pashta or Qadma (L) and Geresh (L).
(d) Pashta (l ) and Qadma (-) have the same figure; but Pashta
is always postpositive (T 4. b); while Qadma is scarcely ever so.
Doubtful cases may always be determined by the consecution ; see
the tables in T 7.
(<) Yethibh ( ) and Mahpakh (
r
) are similar in figure; but Ye-
thibh is always praepositive; while Mahpakh is scarcely ever so.
( f ) Telisha Ghedhola (J) and Telisha Qetanna (1) lean in oppo-
site directions.
T 4. Position qf single accents.
() When a single accent is placed on a word, the general rule is,
to put it upon the tone-syllable, and over or under the letter to which
the vowel of that syllable belongs; see below in 6, note. If the vow-
el does not interfere, the accent is put over or under the middle of
that letter, as I?*, . If the vowel and accent are to be placed
together, the latter is usually put on the left side of the former, as
; but sometimes at the right of Hholem, as 1J. If a syllable be-
gin with a Sheva, the letter with Sheva is disregarded in locating the
accent, as Oton.
() Six disjunctives and one conjunctive are marked in the table,
as befog distinguished by their peculiar positions, viz.
APPENDIX E ; ASCENTS.
/. Postpositive. II. Praepositioe.
Tiphhha anterius 02 \ placed only
a s s ' s :
TelishaGhedhola 0a j word.
Segholta W\ placed only
Pashta Oaf over the fi-
Zarqa gal nal letter of
Telfeba Qetanna i '
a wo r A
These accents always retain their position, excepting in a very
few cases where that position is occupied by other accents, and they
are thus forced from it Cases of this nature are to be distinguished
by a reference to the usual consecution. Zarqa is sometimes crowd-
ed out of its- place in printing; as Ps. 43: 4, where it could not
be put over b on account of its form. So sometimes with Yodh and
Vav. See below in 7 9. 6, note.
NOTE. It is hence evident, that these seven accents do not neces-
sarily mark the tone-syllable ( 33. 4); since their position is always
the same, whether the tone be on the ultimate or penult syllable.
IT 5. Position of accents when compound or repeated.
() Merka Mahpakh The Merka is always placed on the
tone^syllable, and the Mahpakh on the preceding syllable of the same
word, if there be one. If not, usage varies; sometimes, in case of a
monosyllable or a penacuted dissyllable, both parts of the accent are
written on the same letter, as aid, ; at other times, the Mahpakh
is thrown upon the last syllable of the preceding word, with or with-
out Maqqeph; as D
n
a'/bs, Different copies vary in
regard to the accentuation of the same words.
() Rebhia Geresh ( ) . The Rebhia is always placed on the
tone-syllable, and the Geresh is praepositive; as In mon-
osyllables and penacuted dissyllables, they both fall on the same let-
ter, as Ms, ; the Geresh being never thrown upon the pre-
ceding word.
(c) Pashta when repeated (!_?). Pashta being always postpositive,
and therefore not always marking the tone-syllable (IT 4.6), is common-
ly written again over the penult syllable, when that syllable happens to
have the tone; as Gen. 1: 2 'inn. This is done merely to mark the
real tone-syllable, and occurs only with Pashta; though the same
was formerly practised with all the praepositive and postpositive ac-
cents. See the treatise porta accentudan appended to
the final Masora.
(<Q Pesiq f|) with conjunctives. The accent Pesiq is always placed
3 9 2
APPENDIX G ; ACCENTS.
after the word to which it relates, and is always preceded by a con-
junctive accent on the same word, the latter retaining its usual posi-
tion. Pesiq is thus connected with at least seven of the conjunctives,
and very probably with all of them; see IT 6. 6, note (l); and IT 7
Tab. HI.
(e) Zarqa (?) in poetry with other accents. The accent Zarqa, as
a conjunctive in poetry, appears only in connection with some other
accent following it;* either upon the same word, as nby; or on one
joined by Maqqeph, as fEn's ; or perhaps without Maqqeph, as
D3 3TV] Ps. 49: 15 ed. Mich. In every case of genuine accentua-
tion, it appears to be connected with 'some one of the conjunctives.
Zarqa appears only on words of more than one syllable, and is placed
on the syllable next preceding the tone-syllable.
IT 6. Classification of the accents.
() The division of the accents into the two greater classes of dis-
junctives and conjunctives, and the opposite uses of these two kinds of
accents, are stated in 33. 7. The test for distinguishing to which of
these two divisions any given accent belongs, is the following, viz.
When an accent stands upon a word ending with a vowel or quiescent,
and the next word begins with an aspirate ; if that aspirate takes Daghesh
lene, the accent is disjunctive ; if not, it is conjunctive. ( 29. 13.)
() The conjunctive accents all appear to be on an equality as to
their power or office ; but the subdivision of the disjunctive accents
into appropriate classes, js a subject on which great labour has been
bestowed by the older grammarians, and in respect to which scarcely
any two have been agreed in opinion. Bohl divided them into domxni
majores et minores; Wasmuth afterwards classed them as emperor*,
kings, dukes, and counts; Pfeiffer arranged them as emperors, arch-
dukes, barons, and counts ; and Boston, in his celebrated Tractatus Stig-
mologicus, divides them into dommus absohttus, domxni primarily majo-
res, minores, et minimi. The conjunctives they all denominated min-
istri or servants.
The reason of this diversity is, that there are no certain and pre-
cise marks by which any one class of the disjunctives is definitely dis-
tinguished from the others. Every system of classification, which is
NOTE. The instance quoted below from Ps. 49 : 15 (the only ooe I hare
been able to find without Maqqeph) doe not disprove this; for the best copies
djer here, add the reading is not established.
APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS. 3 9 3
built upon the supposed interpunction or distinction of the sense of
Scripture by the different accents, must be nugatory; because there
is no one relation of words to each other, nor distinction of words from
each other, in which various accents, and even those of different clas-
ses, are not occasionally employed. By assuming this principle, there-
fore, as the basis of their divisions, the older writers on accents have
been led to widely different results, while they have been able to
form no system which will bear the test of close examination. See be-
low in If 10. b.
NOTE. Writers on the accents have also disputed respecting the
nature of some of the accents, i. e. whether they were disjunctive or
conjunctive. The chief disputes have been respecting Pesiq, Tiphhha
posterius in poetry, and Merka Khephula. An investigation of some
hundreds of chapters, in order to find examples for the application of
the rule given above in a, afforded the following results.
(1) Pesiq (l) is disjunctive, and is preceded by the following con-
junctives, viz. (l-) Gen. 3: 22. Bent. 31 : 24. Ecc. 4: 1, &c. (l-)
Ps.62: 13. 64:6! 70:5, &C. (l-) Ps. 10:7. 69:3. 96:6, &c. (j-)
Ps. 20:8. 131 : 1. 143: 6. (t-) Ps. 10: 3. 65 : 12, &e. (f-) Gen. 2:
21, 22. Deut. 7 : 26, &c. (ll) 1 Sam. 12: 3. 2 K. 18: 14. Pesiq was
not found with the three last of these conjunctives before an aspirate,
so as to furnish decisive evidence of its nature when connected with
them; but analogy, the nature of Pesiq, and the fact that conjunctives
are all on an equality as to their power, leave little room to doubt
that Pesiq is always disjunctive. See IT 7 Tab. III. a. IT 8. i.
(2) Tiphhha posterius ( _) is proved to be conjunctive in poetry,
by Ps. 3 : 9. 18 : 5. 22: 13. 57 : 7, &c.
(3) Merka Khephula (_) is proved to be conjunctive by Ex. 5:15.
Ezek. 14: 4, &c.
(c) The divisions in the foregoing table are founded on the use of
the accents in prose. The basis of the classification of the disjunc-
tives, as there exhibited, is simple. The pause-accents make the pri-
mary divisions of a verse; or, when a verse is very short, it has
only one of them (Silluq) at the end; as 1 Chr. 1: 1, 2, 3, 4. When
the verse is longer, it is divided by Silluq and Athnahh into two parts,
which are often very unequal in length.
(rf) The secondary divisions of a verse are made within the limits
of the primary divisions, by the second class of disjunctives as marked
In the table. The number of these secondary divisions In any verse
3 9 4
APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS.
depends, of course, on the number of the primary ones, and on the
length of the whole verse. In the same manner, the disjunctives of
the third class are used to subdivide the secondary divisions; and
those of the fourth class to subdivide the divisions made by those odf
the third.
(e) The poetry of the Hebrews, according to the accentuators,
comprises only the books of Psalms (D^nn), Proverbs and
the greater part of Job ; technically called rtigM truth, by com-
bining the initials of the names (IT 11. c). In these books, the primary
divisions are made by Silluq, Athnahh, and Merka Mahpakh. Thus,
Silluq alone is found in Ps. 19:1. Job 19:1, fee. Silluq and Athnahh in
Ps. 1:4,5, &c. and Silluq and Merka Mahpakh in Ps. 1:2. 3:4. Some-
times all three are employed, and the verse is divided into three parts ;
as Ps. 1: 1, 3, &c.
( f ) To subdivide these primary divisions in poetry, all the other
disjunctive accents, excepting those which belong exclusively to prose,
are used indiscriminately; so that in poetry all the accents of the sec-
ond, third, and fourth classes in the table, may be assigned to one
class, and called, in distinction from the pause-accents, leaser disjunc-
tives.
IT 7. Consecution of the accents.
(a) The leading pause-accent (Silluq) always stands at the end of
a verse, and the other disjunctives which may be employed, are
distributed on the right of it, viz. between it and the beginning of the
verse, according to their respective rank. See above in IT 6. c, d, &c.
and also the tables below.
(b) To disjunctives of every class are usually attached one or
more conjunctives, located on one or more of the preceding words, and
occasionally on the same word.
(c) The words thus occupied by a disjunctive and its preceding
conjunctive or conjunctives, are called the clause of that disjunctive;
and the disjunctive is said to govern this clause.
NOTE. Zaqeph Gadhol ( j ) and Yethibh (_) have no conjunctives
attached to them; and of course have no clause except the word on
which they stand.
(d) The following tables, with the accompanying explanations,
exhibit the various consecutions of the accents both in prose and in
poetry.
APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS. 395
TABLE L PROSE ACCENTS.
(a) Consecutions qf the disjunctives.
Class I; pause-accents. Class II.
3
Class III.
Class IV.
8
9 10
C 9 v r
4
ff V c t
Pesiq (i) in its various
J *
9 C 9
none. connexions see below
in Table III.
-
V V V V
8
9 V Y
f t I
9 C 9
OP V V V
Class IV.
9
none.
10
Pesiq (i) in its various
connexions see below
in Table III.
(6) Disjunctives in connexion with conjunctives.
Class I.
11 12
r - I
Class II.
13 14 IS
c > ff \ | 1 *
r;
none.
Digitized btf Good
396
APPENDIX ; ACCENTS.
16
)
H:= =
Class ID.
17
18
> H
19
t=
20
none*
21
) s
Class IV.
22 23
' < : " 1 ~ - i -
Peslq (f) with conjunctives see below in Table III.
TABLE I I . POETIC ACCENTS.
(a) Consecutions of the dujunctives.
Class I; pause-accents.
25 26 24
J
I
^ 1 s
Class II; lesser disjunctives.
27
t 1
t
Ps. 18: 1,
9f t
29
APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS. 3 9 7
(6) Disjunctives in connexion with conjunctive*.
Class I.
SO 31 32
>
f
*
>
*
-A
)
-J
>
J
c
>
ft
1 *
FEZ
,
1
\
I -
>
*
V
H
I
33
) t
1 1
36
Class II.
34 35
37
" - t r
TABLE I I I . PESIQ.
(a) Pesiq as a disjunctive.
In prose, Pesiq with a conjunctive usually appears as a disjunctive
of the fourth class, and as such is regularly found occupying the place
of any of the accents in the consecutions given in Tab. I no. 8. But
it occasionally appears to have also the power of a disjunctive of the
second and third classes, and is so used in Gen. 22: 11, 14. 39: 10.
46 : 2. Ex. 17 : 15. 34 : 6, 23. 35: 35, &c. &c.
59
Diaitized bv G0 0 5 l (
308 APPENDIX K ; ACCENTS.
In poetry, Pesiq belongs to the second class, and is usually r emov-
ed one or two places from the governing pause-accent. With Mer ka
and Shalsheletb, it sometimes stands next to Silluq and Athnahh ; as
Ps. 24: 4. 89: 2, &c.
(b) Pesiq in connexion with conjunctives.
Prose.
39
I
I
*
38
H
40
Prose or Poetry.
41
f ~
I
42
) *
43
> i
44
H - :
V j )
IT 8. Explanation of the tables of consecutions.
(a) General remarks, (l) The tables are designed to exhibit the
usual consecutions of the accents, beginning at the close of a verse and
reckoning towards the right In all the consecutions, as given in the
tables, the accents which stand at the left band belong to the next
higher class; and those on the right of them are used to subdivide the
clauses of the former in the order there exhibited.
(2) When more than one consecution, or line of accents, is placed
on the right of an accent in the tables; any accent in any one of the
perpendicular columns may, generally speaking, be used in the place
of any other accent in the same column. Thus in Tab. I no. 5, the
first subdivision on the right of Zaqeph Qaton (L) may be made by
t
APPENDIX G ; ACCENTS.
3 9 0
Pashta (_) or Yethibh (-); the second by Rebhia, Pashta, or Yethibh;
the third also by Rebhia, Pashta, or Yethibh; and so through all the
tables.
(3) With the exception of the pause-accents, Tiphbha, and Se-
gholta, all the accents, disjunctive or conjunctive, may be repeated in im-
mediate consecution, as often as is necessary.
PROSE ACCENTS. TAB. I.
(6) In the first class, no. 1 shews that Silluq is sometimes the only
pause-accent in a verse; no. 2 exhibits it as preceded by Athnahh in
the same verse, as is usually the case; see above in 1 6. c. These
accents are never repeated.
(c) In the second class, no. 3 shews what secondary divisions are made
on the right of Silluq and Athnahh; both of them having subdivisions
of the same kind, made by the same accents, and in the same order.
Thus Tiphhha stands at the head of the first subdivision; Zaqeph
Qaton or its equivalent Zaqeph Gadhol at the head of the second, third,
fourth, Sic. and Segholta at the head of the fifth kc. see above in a.
2, 3. The number of intermediate clauses between Tiphhha and
Segholta is various, depending on the length of the verse, and the con-
sequent repetition or omission of the Zaqephs; comp. Gen. 1: 7.* 3:
3. Ezra 7:13. Tiphhha is never repeated nor omitted; Segholta is
never repeated, but is often omitted. Comp. in a, 3.
NOTE. In general, Segholta seems to govern a larger clause than
Zaqeph; and Zaqeph a larger one than Tiphhha. (IT 7. c.)
(d) In the third class, the several consecutions shew the order of
the subdivisions made by this class of accents under those of the pre-
ceding class; L e. those made within the limits of the secondary divis-
ions (IT 6. d). All these accents are subject to repetition or omission,
as the length of the secondary clauses may require. The tables shew
that Rebhia ('-) and Pashta (L) are common in the consecutions at-
tached to all the disjunctives of the second class; while Tebhir (-) is
attached only to Tiphhha ( - ); Yethibh ( _ ) to Zaqeph Qaton ( ) ;
and Zarqa (-) to Segholta (i.).
(e) The fourth class of disjunctives have no subdivisions under
them, and of course have none but conjunctives attached to them.
No. 8 exhibits the order of their consecutions when attached to ac-
cents of the third class ; and shews that they may all be connected, In
the same order, with any one of the third class which admits subdivis-
ions In its clause.
400
APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS.
( / ) In Tab. I. 6, Is exhibited the manner in which the conjuno
tires are attached to the several disjunctives. They are often repeat-
ed (supra a, 3), and in many cases are wholly omitted; especially
where the disjunctive clause consists of only one word, or of two or
three words Joined by Maqqeph.
POETIC ACCENTS. TAB. II.
(g) The poetic accents are arranged in the tables, on the same
principles as those of prose, as above explained. But fai poetry, the
verses, and of course the members of them, are much shorter than m
prose, and the subdivisions much fewer.
(A) The conjunctives in poetry (nos. 3037) are much more nu-
merous than in prose, and are more frequently repeated. Most of
the disjunctives have a long train of them.
PESIQ. TAB. 111.
(t) Pesiq appears to possess an equal value in all its combinations
with conjunctives; and is quite anomalous in respect to position, as is
stated in the table. From an investigation of several hundreds of chap-
ters, it was found with only the seven conjunctives exhibited in the ta-
ble ; but it is very possible, that in other parts of the Bible it may oc-
cur in connexion with the remaining ones. Some of the consecutions
fai nos. 4044 belong only to prose.
(k) The mode of tracing the accents on the pages of the Bible is
simple. Commencing at the close of a verse, the consecutions are to
be followed through to the beginning. In the following examples,
those accents in capitals are pause-accents; those in small are lesser
disjunctives, and the class to which they belong is designated by the
figures which follow them; those in Italic are conjunctives.
Prose. Gen. 1 : 1 SILLUQ with Merka ; Tiphhha 2 with Merka:
ATHNAHH with Munahh ; Tiphhha 2. The shortness of the verse ex-
cludes all disjunctives of the third and fourth classes, and admits only
one in each clause of the second class; see above in c.
Verse 2 SILLUQ with Merka ; Tiphhha 2; Zaqeph Qaton 2 with
Munahh: ATHNAHH with Munahh ; Tiphhha 2; Zaqeph Qaton 2, Pash-
ta 3 (written twice IT 5. c) with Merka, Rebhia3. Here are subdivis-
ions made by accents of the third class, but none by those of the
fourth; and Tiphhha and Rebhia occur without any conjunctives, as is
often the case, both with them and with all the disjunctives.
NOTE. Words before Maqqeph, here and elsewhere, have no ac-
APPENDI X E ; ACCENTS. 4 0 1
cent upon them; unless it be, that occasionally they have one part of
a composite accent. See 32.
Poetic. Ps. 1:1 SILLUQ with Munahh; Rebhia Geresh with Mer-
ka: ATHKAHH with Merka; Tiphhha anterius with Munahh: MER-
KA MAHPAKH with Yerah ; Zarqa postpositive with Merka; Pesiq with
Muhpakh; Rebhia with Munahh.
Verse 2 SILLUQ with Merka ; Rebhia Geresh with Merka: MERKA
MAHPAKH ; Rebhia with Merka; Tiphhha anterius; Pesiq with Mahpakh.
NOTE. The preceding tables of the accents were formed with much
labour from actual investigation, and are as perfect as circumstances
would permit. It is believed, that they are more complete than are
elsewhere to be found; though an attentive and more extended ex-
amination would probably afford the means of making some additions to
several of the consecutions. In some cases too, the student wilt prob-
ably find parts of consecutions varying from those in the tables, both
because copies of different editions differ in the accentuation besides
having various readings in themselves, and because occasional errors
in this species of typography are unavoidable. In doubtful cases, the
only method of obtaining satisfaction is to compare different editions.
The most accurate edition in all respects is that of Michaelis; the
next is that of Jablonski; that of Van der Hooght, although the most
elegant, is not always correct, especially in regard to the accents.
IF 9. Double accentuation.
() Double accentuation is to be carefully distinguished from all
those cases of compound accents and of accents repeated, which are
treated of in IT 5. It is of two kinds, as pertaining either to particular
words or to a train of discourse.
() Many cases occur, both in prose and in poetry, where particu-
lar words exhibit a double accentuation; viz. two disjunctives, or a
disjunctive and conjunctive, or two conjunctives, in the usual order of
consecution, are placed on the same word, instead of placing the in-
ferior accent on the preceding word. The following are examples, viz.
4
* ' P hta * *
1
#
t c A c A *
J
i > -* * >
v c f r r c ) j j > j
j - t >
Pesiq (t) also, besides its usual conjunctives, frequently takes Zar-
qa ( ~ ) conjunctive on the same word.
Digitized by
4 0 2 APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS.
NOTE. ID the case of Zaqeph Qaton with Pashta ( 11), the latter
though postpositive is here necessarily thrown hack upon a preceding
syllable; see IT 4. b.
(c) A case of double accentuation, as pertaining to a train of dis-
course, occurs in the decalogue, Ex. 20: 215. When the decalogue
was read in course, as a part of a Sabbatical section of the law, it was
read as thirteen verses; and was furnished with one train of accents
accordingly, containing thirteen Silluqs. But at the feast of Pentecoet,
in which the Jews were accustomed to commemorate the promulga-
tion of the law from Mount Sinai, the decalogue was publicly read as
divided into ten portions, each of which was furnished with its appropri-
ate train of accents. These portions were very unequal, and are indi-
cated in our common Hebrew Bibles by the letter 0.* See on this
subject ABIGHT de accentibus Heb. c. VII.
In some cases, where the different divisions terminate at the same
place, the two trains of accents coincide and only one appears; as in
part of v. 6, and v. 7, 11, 12, 14. The two last portions were made
by dividing v. 14; and of course Silluq must be understood upon
along with Athnahh, although in modern editions the former is usual-
ly omitted.
NOTE. The above quotations are made from the edition of Michae-
ls. In that of Van der Hooght, the verses are numbered differently,
but the other divisions and the two trains of accents are the same as
in that of Michaelis.
IT 10. Original design of the accents.
It is stated in 33.1 that three uses have been assigned to the ac-
cents, viz. to mark the tone-syllable; to serve as signs of interpunc-
tion; and to guide the recitation or cantillation of the sacred text It
may here be proper to inquire, which of these uses was probably in-
tended by the accentuators.
(a) Were the accents intended to mark the tone-syllable ? We have
seen (IT 4. b) that seven of the accents do not necessarily indicate the
* The Rabbins considered this doable accentuation as a (treat mystery, and
delighted to draw from it recondite doctrines. "Magna multaque in its latere
mytltria, quitibet fateri neecsse habet, qui duplieem in deealogo et a/iis in loeis
eonsiderabit accentualionem. Nemo unquam fuit ex omnibus retro howinibui,
qui rationem ejus dare potuit, nee erit posthae utftu, qui cam penetrate vatebk
ke.
n
Elias Scbnegassius in Abicht c. VII.
APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS. 4 0 3
place of the tone. It can therefore hardly be deemed probable, that
the authors of the accents invented them for this purpose, and then
placed them in such positions as not to accomplish their object. Nor is
it any more probable, that they invented nearly forty accents to de-
signate the tone-syllable, when in all cases one would have better an-
swered their purpose. For such reasons, this opinion has generally
been rejected.
(6) Were the accents invented as signs of interpunction ? This opin-
ion has found many supporters, both among ancient and modern wri-
ters on the accents. No satisfactory theory, however, has ever yet
been proposed by the advocates of this view; scarcely any two of
them being agreed in respect to it. Nor is this disagreement a sub-
ject of wonder; for there is not a page of the Hebrew Bible which
does not confound all attempts to support the theory of real interpunc-
tion by the accents. Every kind of connexion, even the most intimate
that can exist between words, is constantly broken up by the use of
the disjunctives. Thus in Ps. 18 : 1 we have ntt?n
the words of this song, where a noun in regimen with the follow-
ing word, the most intimate of all grammatical connexions, has a dis-
junctive accent upon i t ; and so in a multitude of cases. On the other
hand, the conjunctive accents are sometimes placed on words which
have no connexion, either in respect to grammar or sense. Thus in
Ps. 4 : 5 commune with your own hearts on your bed nbo ^73*11 and be
still Selah, where the words be still and Selah are united by the ac-
cents in the most intimate and inseparable connexion; and so in very
many cases. Not a chapter in the Bible can be pointed and read
according to the accents and make sense of it, if they are regarded as
distinctive of the sense and meaning of words. (IT 6. 6.)
Some writers have been aware of this difficulty, and to avoid it
have made the accents distinctive of either a dictamen logicum, gram-
maticum, or rhetoricum. When one of these fails, they then resort to
the other. But in 1 Chr. 1 : 110,which is a mere catalogue of
proper names, all having the same relation to, and connexion with
each other,the accents, both conjunctive and disjunctive, are employ-
ed in all their accustomed mixture and sequences. To what dictamen
must we resort, in order to account for a usage like this ?
Another difficulty in the way of considering the accents as signs of
interpunction, is presented by those cases in which two or more ac-
cents are placed on the same word (IT 9. b). Is a word at the same
Diqitized by Google
04
APPENDIX E ; ACCENTS.
time disjoined in different degrees ? or at die same time both disjoined
and conjoined ? or can it be doubly conjoined ? The same difficulty
also occurs in those cases, in which the very same words, in the same
connexion and sense, are furnished with accents of different kinds; as
2 Sam. 22 which has prose accents, compared with Ps. 18 where the
lame song has poetic accents; and which in the former case often has
conjunctives, where in the latter it has disjunctives. Is then the same
composition at the same moment both poetry and prose ? or are the
same words, in the same connexion and meaning, in the one case to be
conjoined with others in sense, and in the other case to be at the same
time disjoined from them in sense ? Let him believe it, who thinks
with the Rabbins, that the Scriptures have seven times seven senses !
(e) The accent* were intended to guide the cantiUation of the sacred
text. From time immemorial the Jews have cantillated the Scriptures
in their synagogues ( 33. 8). Among the greater part of them, this
cantiliation is and ever has been modulated by the accents. This cus-
tom is at least as old as the Talmud, in which it is mentioned; and this
must be as old as the accents themselves. (Talm. Bab. Megilla c. rv.
fol. 32 col. a.)
If we allow this to have been the primary design of the accents,
then we can account for it how genealogical tables can have conjunc-
tive and disjunctive accents,how the poetical consecution should di
for from that of prose,-rand how the titles of the Psalms fee. should
have the same consecution as the body of the Psalms themselves. On
this ground too we can account for the variety of the accents, which on
any other is inexplicable. For to what purpose are so many conjunc-
tives, all having merely one and the same power of joining words to
each other, if that is all their office ? Whereas variety of modulation,
so as to render cantiUation agreeable, would not only admit, but require
various conjunctives, as the representatives of different modulations.
One other circumstance may be added. The name given to the
accents, in the Porta Jccentudm appended to the final Masora and
certainly very ancient, is m*uic, modulation, a word derived from
J t heat a musical instrument, as a harp &c. All the Jews, with
one consent, allow the musical use of the accents to be one of the de-
signs which the authors had in view; and the foregoing considerations
may serve to shew, that in all probability it was the principal one.
APPENDIX ; ACCENTS. 4 0 5
IT 11. Present utility of the accents.
{a) All the accents, except seven, almost invariably designate the
tone-syllable of words. This affords great assistance to any one, who
desires to render himself familiar with this part of Hebrew grammar,
so intimately connected with the vowel-changes which take place in
this language.
(b) They generally serve, like the accents in Greek, to distinguish
words of the same form but of different meaning; as 5)32 they built,
5|32 among us ; nilC they led captive 3 plur. from they turned
back 3 plur. from 2=nzj; Tnsj he caught 3 praet. of Kal, THN I shall see
1 fut. apoc. from HTN, &c. &c.
(c) In poetry, the pause-accents serve, for the most part, to distin-
guish the parallelisms with a good degree of accuracy. Very seldom
indeed is one constrained to differ from the division which they make.
This is quite useful to the beginner in the study of Hebrew poetry.
It is indeed a matter of surprise, that the authors of the accents should
have committed such a mistake, as to designate only the books of
Psalms, Proverbs, and Job, as poetic (IT 6. ). Is then the song of
Moses, of Deborah and Barak, the Canticles, Lamentations, and most
of the prophets, not poetry ? Still, as the prose accents which are
used in these books, generally serve to distinguish the parallelisms
which they contain, the mistake of the authors of the accents is of lit-
tle consequence at the present time.
In regard to the prosaic parts of the Old Testament, the accents
are of less importance in marking the divisions of the text; as the stu-
dent seldom needs any other guide to interpunction, than the sense of
a passage.
(<2) The vowels, in innumerable cases, are affected by the accents,
being changed through their influence from short to long, and vice
versd. It becomes then indispensable to an accurate and extensive
knowledge of the mutations of the Hebrew vowels, to acquire an ad-
equate knowledge of the accents.
(c) Finally, no student of Hebrew, who has a love for his business
and genuine ardour in the pursuit of it, can ever sit down satisfied to
read his Hebrew Bible, and pass over it leaving large portions of its
characters unexplained, and himself unable to decide whether they are
worth the trouble of explanation. The labour of acquiring all the
knowledge of the accents which is attainable at the present day, is
Diaitized bv
406
APPENDIX F J CONJUGATIONS.
certainly very little, with the aid of tables like those presented above.
Two or three days faithful exercise in writing down the accents
and tracing their consecutions, will render the business easy; and to
pursue it afterwards will frequently be pleasant, and not unfrequently
profitable.
F. p. 145.
The following table exhibits the forms of in all the conjuga-
tions, and of course the origin of all the names of the conjugations.
/. Usual
ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
l.Kal
2. Niphal b*B3 taphJaL
3. Piel pi-9el. 4. Pual pfcf&L
5. Hiphil b^crr toph-9iL 6. Hophal hdpt+SdL
7. Hithpael btfann tith-pa^el
II. Ummial
8. Hothpaal hithrp&9&h
9. Poel b*1B pd-siL 10. Poal pd-Sdl.
11. Hithpoel bsinnn hith-p^siL
12. Polel
VvjjB pW-fcl
13. Polal
bb*B p6S4dL
14. Hithpolel hUh~p69-liL
15. Pilel p&4il. 16. Pulal V&RJf-W-
17. Hithpalel bbxBnr-t huhrp&4iL
18. Pealal 19. Poalal
b?b?B p*ydl#al
20. Pilpel
^tpilrpiL
21. Polpal
bs^B pdlrpaL
22. Hithpalpal b$bDnn kuh-pdl-pdL
23. Peoel >9191 pi9d-9cL
24. Tiphel fiphrScL
25. Popaal bB*n pW-pd&dL
PRAXIS.
In the following praxis, the Jirst number or figures of any refer-
ence indicate in all cases the section of the grammar, and the other
figures or letters refer to the subdivisions of that section. Dec. 1. &c.
refer to the declensions in 154 Par. II. When the letters no. are
prefixed, the reference is to the number in the praxis itself.
Those portions of the grammar which are to be attentively studied
in the first perusal, are indicated by the marks (*) and ( t ) ; the for-
mer being used to mark whole sections, and the latter parts of sec-
tions. When placed before a section or part of a section, they include
also all subdivisions belonging thereto, which are printed in large type.
If the study of Hebrew be commenced under an instructer, the
following assignment of recitations will be found convenient.
RECITATION I. 1019 inclusively. II. 2023. III. 24
27. IV. 2836. V. 3738 to verse 6. VI. Reading of
Gen. 1 : 616; the reading lessons in all cases to be conducted on
the same principles as in 38. VII. Gen. 1: 16 to 2 : 25. VIII. Gen. 3
and 4 to v. 11. IX. 4552. X. 5360. XI. 6271. XII.
7280. XIII. 8490. XIV. 9193 with the paradigm of
the regular verb ( 127 Par. 1); giving an account of the characteris-
tics and the uses of each conjugation as studied in REC. XII. Exerci-
ses here in writing full paradigms of various regular verbs, would be
very useful. XV. 128134. XVI. 135143.
The student may now with advantage begin the study of his He-
brew Bible, and in this way come gradually to a more thorough
knowledge of those portions of the grammar which he has already
been over; while recitations in the remaining part may be continued
at the pleasure of the instructer. The student will find it most profi-
table, to take at first short lessons, to make himself perfectly familiar
with the parts of grammar referred to in the praxis, and to persevere
in reviewing thoroughly and frequently the ground which he may
have gone over.
Diaitized bv G o o Q l e
2 PRAXIS ; GENESIS I .
GENESIS, CHAP. 1.
Rxc. XVII. Vent 1. n^Citna.
1. n*a$na, 9 preposition 157. 1; for punctuation, see 61. 7.
a feminine denominative noon 129.6. b ; Dec. I. fc, and 138. I.
Syntax" 173. 4.
2. a verb Kb 120 and 127 Par. XIV; 3 masc. praet of Kal,
conjugated Kal f it "is, Nipb. Pi. fiOa ;* syntax in 189. 1.
3. a noun phiral from ftibfijt 133. 1; comp. Sheva under M
26: 5; Pattahh furtive under final n of the root disappears when the
word receives any accession 27, 1, 2, as does also Mappiq 30. 1; the
Hholem in the plural is defectively written 24. 3, as is usual in thii
and other similar words; Dec. I. d; nom. case to 167. 2.
XVIII. Verse$ 1,2.nnvr * ynfitn ntn nfij .
4. nfi$ 167.1,4. d ; syntax in 173. 2. m a d e up of the ar-
ticle -n 65 and 61.1; and the noun 134.3 note, and 151. 3 note
with 154 Par. Ill; acc. case after fiOS 196. 1.
6. yjfitrr nf ijl. Vav conjunction 158. 1 and 61. 15. nfij in no. 4.
m a d e up of the article n 61. 2, and the noun y^fij firom
ground-form ynij Dec. VI. a, and 143 note 2; comp. 55. 5. a; syn-
tax as in no. 4.
6. a verb ?ib from rtjfi 122 and 127 Par. XV, also Pt
guttural 102. 3 note; conjugated Kal fPH, Nipb. mna; 3 fem.
praet of Kal 122. 4 note.
7. XIX. Vtrse 2 to the end. irfefl irin nouns originally of Dec.
VI ; see 143 note 19, and 47. 3; for the pointing of FOT, see 61.19.
bo See also 216. 2. a. '
8. -pjjn masc. noun from root Dec. VI. I; nom. case to
understood 211. 7. b? prep, with the fcrm of a noun 157. 2. a; root
nb^. *2B noun plur. const from obs. sing. HJD Dec. IX. &, and 146;
found only in the plural 133.6; syntax in 207 and 172.3. d, compared
with 135. 1. Dinn masc. noun Dec. I. c, and 138; plur. in ni 133.
4; genitive 170. 1 and 135. 1.
9. ni l Dec. I. d ; const, state 135.1; nom. case (172.3) to rH*n!a
participle fem. from P]!^ a verb gutt. conjugated Kal Piel
NOTE. TO conjugate a verb in Hebrew, is to repeat the forma of it in the
praeterof all the conjugations in use. It should then be declined through the
tense or mood in wLicb it ia found. The nouns also should be declined through
all their forms.
PRAXIS ; GENESIS I . 3
J)inn, Inf. PJhn, part masc. 5)nn 90. 2; for the fem. form, see 90. 3
and 127 Par. XX. It Is here used as a verb of past time 203. 2, and
agrees with ni l .
10. like in no. 4, except that Pattahh under is pro*
longed by the pause-accent 60. 7. a ; syntax in 170. 1 and 135. 1.
11. XX. Verse 3. Vav conversive 93; a verb KB
from 107 and 127 Par. V; conjugated Kal Niph.
Hiph. Hith. IB&nn; fut Kal and 107.1.
c ; final Tseri shortened to Seghol 54. 3, comp. 93.3 and 35.4. Synt.
as in no. 2.
12. fiit apoc. from in no. 6, 123.1, d 2 and note 1.
For the use, see 91.6 and 193.4. a. ma s c . Dec. I. a ; no plural
In Wi the Vav conv. omits Daghesh 93. 1 and 45. 6.
13. XXI. Verse 4. Vav in no. 11; N"V fut apoc. Kal from
itfin a verb rfb 122 and i gutt. 104; conj. Kal Niph. irio:,
Pu. Hiph. Hoph. fifiOfl, Hith. iiK^nSl; form in 123.1, d
2; synt as in no. 2. -tffcn art. 61. 2, and noun no. 12. conjunc-
tion. ma s c . adj. Dec. I, fem. nato Dec. X and 132. 4; synt.
in 180. 1 and 211. 7.
14. bio;! fut. apoc. Hiph. from b^a 99.1, c; comp. 91. 6. d and
93. 1. "P3 prep, like a const noun 157.2. a. 6 1 . 17.
61. 2 small.
15. XXn . Verse 6. verb Kb aa in no. 2. - i t e b 157. 1 and
61. 6; synt in 173. 1 and 195. 1. OV* irreg. noun, sing. Dec. 1, plur.
Dec. II. nb^b noun with p paragogic 50. 4. a, from b?b of Dec.
VI. q; form in 143 note 24; Pattahh changed to Qamets 60. 7. a;
*b a mixed syllable 37. 5. Snjfr Segh. n. Dec. VI A class, but found
only in abs. state. D e c . VI. i nnjj numeral 152. 3 small, an4
154 Par. IV; used as an ordinal.
16. XXIII. Versa 6 and part of 7. Dec. Ill and 140; Pat-
tahh furtive 27. 2. !^r>3 from Dec. VI. />, and 143 note 16;
const and the whole taken as a prep. 157. 2. c. Tp 61. 16 small
b*33 Hiph. part see in no. 14; Dec. I; synt. in 203. 4. trnb
nos. 10, 15.
17. Verse 7. fut apoc. Kal from nip* a verb ?4b and I) gtUU
123.1, d 1; Vav in 93.1. VyF* *"> 16 and* 61. 2.
4 PRAXIS ; OXNKSM !
18. XXIV. Vent* 7 in put, 8, 9. reL proo. 187; nom. to
fPFj understood 211.7.HITOn prep. 61.11 and 157.2. e ; nnn like
noun of Dec. VI. b ; lit mder part. 6 1 . 6; genitive case 170.
2. b. ^ 61.12 and 187. 2. e; b? like a noun of Dec. Hd; lit
upper part. "iT
f
3 no. 12; synt in 190. 1. adverb; root
19. Vent 8. no. 4 and 60. 7. a. >29 ordinal 164 Par. IV
and 152. II.
20. Vent 9. <ut Niph. from a verb rfb with Vav move*
able 117. 2. b. ^ prep. 157. 1, 2. a. D e c . HI; root Mp.
21. ttiprn Vav conj. verb from no. 13, fat Niph. 102. 5.
a r t and fem. adj. with understood, or used as a noun,
Dec. X; root
22. XXV. Vent 10. conj. 61. 16; prep. 61. 7; noun Dec.
IX. o, and 146 const state; root rnjd in no. 20. tPT?? Doc* VIII. a,
and 145.
23. Vent 11. frit apoc. Hiph. from fitSH 91. 6. a.
and 3 ^ Dec. VI. 5"HTa part. Hiph. from 105 and 127 Par.
IV; Dec. L #1l Dec. VI. c.
24. XXVI. y* Dec. VII. a. D e c . VI. u, and 143 note 19;
root !Tn$. nip part, act Kal from Site* in no. 17; 90. 1. 6, and
122. 2.6 ; defectively written 24.3. "Hi with Dagh. euphonic 29. 8.
25. prep, and noun Dec. I; S suffix pronoun 5 masc. sing.
135. 6 col 2. qual i f i es to 187. 2, tn which. tan J Dec. VL c,
with light suffix. ia 157. 4. a.
26. Vent 12. axinj 3 fem. fut apoc. Hiph. fro* R2 a verb "*
class I, and lk 6 109, 120, and 122 Par. VI and XIV. n o .
25; suffix IST, 135. 5. b and 7. e. *0^3 hi no. 13.
- 27. XXVII. Vent 13. ordfoal 152. 0, and 154 Par. TV.
28. Vent 14. no. 12; sing, with plur. nom. 189. 4. nSWD
def. written for 24. 3 and 133. 3. c, note 2; from ground-
form Dec. Ill; plur. 0*
1
- and rft 133. 5; root
prep, with Hhireq parvum, to prevent the concurrence of two vocal
Sheva* 58. 1, compared with 61. 7; 3pj?n const Dec. Ill; see no. 16.
29. inf. const Hiph. from Vie ; synt 201. 1. 9 4 .
1 and 192. 5. 6 ; comp. 189. 4 note 1. ririttb 24. 3; pL from ni
Dec. I, see 133. 4; synt 196.3 tPTarta!:*, conj. 61. 17; noun pi
from "15
s
)& Dec. VII and 144 ; root jjj; synt 195. 3 and 215.
no. 15 pi. of rtatt) Dec. XI; plur. in D% and rrt .133. 6.
PRAXIS ; GENESIS I .
30. XXVIII. Verse 15. rrrtKJOb no. 28 ult Vitvjb Inf. const
Hiph. from a verb 1*9 117 and 127 Par. XII; comp. no. 29.
31. Verse 16. rnK!3 154 Par. IV. 2; art 163. 2.
a, and 165. 1; tPb^Ja pi. adj. masc. from bi l l Dec. Ill; Hholem def.
written 24. 3, comp. no. 3; synt in 179. 1. b^tt 24. 3; art 165.
1; synt 178. 1. a. p r e p , and Segh. noun Dec. XIII const
state; root b l t t E . 1 6 3 . 2. a, and no. 1 5 . m a s c . adj.
Dec. VIII and 145 (with suff. 'Staj? 2 Chr. 10: 10); synt. as
above. D e c . II. b.
32. XXIX. Verse 17. fut. Kal from *|n3 a verb "JD 113 and
127 Par. X; anomalous 114. IV. b. finfct 157. 4. d.
33. Verse 18. b'uiab"?, no. 14 ul t inf. const Kal from b-j E; synt.
in 201. 1. 6 1 . 6.
34. Verse 20. fut. Kal from f ni B, 193. 4. a. XD3
nouns of Dec. VI in apposition 168. 1. f e m . adj. Dec. X from
masc. ''n Dec. VIII, 132. 4; root "
,
2^- D e c . I ; see 133. 7.
Fiste? fut. Polel from 5)1^, 81. 4 and 117. 8.
35. XXX. Verse 21. art. and n. plur. Dec. I ; 133. 1. b,
note. ~b3 const, ofb' s Dec. VIII. e, and 145. 2. a; synt in 161.1. 6,
note. a r t . 61. 2 small, and 165. 2. a, note 2. ni773Hi1 art.
and fem. Segh. part. Kal from 90. 3 and 127 Par. XX; synt in
163. 3 and 203. 1 ; comp. in no. 9. DPJP&b nos. 25, 26, and 135.
7. b. Pj33 Dec. IV./*; synt. in 161. 1. a.
36. Verse 22. no. 12 ult. fut. Piel from - f j a 104. 4 and 127
Par. I l l ; final Tseri changed to Seghol as in no. 11 ult. S*3i*b inf.
const, from no. 11; for punctuation of b, see 61. 9 and 47. 5. a.
i m p e r a t i v e s Kal of verbs Hb. c o n j . 61. 17, and
imper. Kal of D*V3*2 prep. 61. 6, and noun plur. no. 22 ult.
37. Verse 24. KStin no. 26, and 193. 4. a. !"WH2 irreg. noun, see
lexicon; in apposition with aj?3 168.1. i r pn const, of ii*H taken as
a noun (comp. no. 34) with paragogic i 50. 4. d, and 50. 5; Daghesh
omitted in Yodh 45. 4, 6; vowel under Yodh dropped 56. 3. The
regular const. n*n appears in v. 25.
38. Verse 26. 1 pi. fut. Kal of nili* no. 17; synt. in 189. 1
note, and 193. 4. a. wnbs a prep, and noun Dec. VI. a, with light
suffix 135. 5. b. !)2nsi73"l3 prep, as in no. 28 ul t n w i Dec. I with
light suff. as above. 7 ! conj. and fut. Kal of r H^. nana prep.
Digitized bv
6 PEAXIS ; GENESIS I*
as in no. 28, and noun Dec. XL a; Daghesh omitted in i 29. 15. a,
6. Enn art as pron. 163. 3, and masc. part Kal; comp. in no. 35.
39. Verse 27. HSJ53 found only in abs. state, 137.1 note; root
40.. Verse 28. no. 36.DHb 157. 4. a note, and corrigenda
at the end of the volume. & c . no. 36. f o r 95.
2. a i hnper. Kal with suit 126. 6. a &c. and IV note 11. YVTIM-
per. of SYin, comp. no. 38.
41. Verse 29. mn 159. 1 and 50. 4.6.*M13 114. IV. b.TlblMtb
* - s * s
prep, and noun Dec. XII. <2, and 149; syrit. in 195. 3.
42. Verse 30. Dec. VI; gen. after 172. 3. 6, and const be-
fore aip? 161. 1. 6. *
43. Verse 31. Htor 192. 2. 1 7 8 . 2. a. a r t . 165. 2.
a, note 2. In the similar cases w. 5, 8, 13, 19, 23, the ordinal does
not take the article.
CHAPTER II.
44. Verses 13. Vav 93. 1 small; fut Pual from Mb*.
BtttX Dec. IV. g, and 141 note 3; see 214. 2. [2] fut apoc.
Piel from rrbs 123. III. c. D e c . XI. f , and 148 note 2; for
the form of the word, see 47. 2 note; the N would here seem to be
in otio 23. 6, since it does not prolong the Pattahh. [3] in 157. 4. <u
r-ns 192. 2. rntDS^ prep. 61.9, and inf. const, from iiu>9 122. 2.
ey synt. in 200. 6. c.
45. Verses 4, 5. ni'lb'in pi. const found only in this form and with
suff. 137.1 note; root Dipgfis, prep, and inf. const Niph. from
with noun-suffix 126. 5 and IV notes 14, 15 ult Synt in 202.
2 small. See 16. b and 95. 2. d. rrito* no. 44 ult genitive after
200. 2; const before rhiV. and governing &c. in the acc. 202.1,
2 and note 1. [5] Dec. IX. b. !i;rn DntJ 193. 3. o ; so ng3?
fut Kal of a verb gutt. 60. 7. a, and 105. 2. b. -pDtJn Hiph. of
nOtt; pluperf. 192. 2 . a d v . 156. 3.6; synt. in 206. 1. o.
no. 44 ult synt. in 201. 1 and 202. 1.
46. Verses 6, 7. fut- Kal from ttb*. njrsfj Hiph. of ttjSW.
[7] fut. Kal from cl. Ill of 111. 4 note, and I; Seghoi
for Tseri 93. 3 and 54. 3. *>*9 synt in 174. 2. e, and 197. 3 ult
170. 2. c. no* 3 fut Kal of ITO3 a verb "|d and !? gutt. 113 and
105. "PBN Dec. VIII. 6; dual with light suff. 135. 9 and 154 Par.
Ill; form in 41. 3. a ; root P)2it. c o n s t from ST31B3 Dec. XI.
c; acc. after ns?; root DtD3. O^n n. pi. Dec. VIII. t, and 145 note
4; comp. 133. 6. TCtp.b synt in 195. 3.
PRAXIS ; GENESIS I I . 7
47. Verses 8, 9. fut. Kal from t33 113.EipV fut. apoc.
eonv. Hiph. from DT ; iV 118. HI. c. d$3 adv. *12* 60. 7. a. [9]
fut. apoc. Hiph. from 105. 3; comp. no. 45 v. 5.
part. Niph. from I t t n a verb togutt. 90. 1. a, and 102. 3; used as an
adj. 90. 3; comp. 179.1 small. D e c . IX ; root Jti O. bswa
Dec. II; root b^t*.^pna no. 16."jail Dec. VIII; two forms "ja
and "ja 145 note 1, the former being most common. f e m . inf.
const, from 109. I. c, comp. 87. 4. ; genitive 200. 2, and governs
the acc. 202. 1. It has the article like a common noun. yni aita
61. 19.6; synt. 162 and 202. 1.
48. Verses 1014. Klti part, of MS* 24. 3; synt. 203. 2.
61. 12. nipttJlrib no. 46 v. 6, and 201. 1. f u t . Niph. as past,
193. 3. 6. p i . of m' n Dec. I, irregular. [11] Ki n 183. 1.
a r t . as rel. pron. 163. 3; part. Kal from SiO a verb yy 115
and 127 Par. XI; synt. 203. 1. 1 8 7 . 2 . 6. [12] i n t i const,
from 2"T Dec. IV; comp. Sheva under T, 26. 5 small; for 1, see 61.18
small; nom. to ITtt 211. 7. NlnJi, art. 61. 2 small, and 165. 1 ;
66. 6, used as a demonstrative, 179. 6. [14] ntt"lJ3 const, of riE'lp
Dec. XII. 6; acc. after 196. 2.KlfT 183. 2.
49. Verses 1517. njS' l fut. Kal from nj?b 114. IV. a.
fut. Hiph. from H3* a verb "MD cl. IV, 112 and 127 Par. IX andX Hiph.
def. written 24. 3; suffix 126. 6. c, and IV note 16. mayb inf.
~
7
t : T i
const, from l ay with verbal suffix 126. 5; comp. 126. IV note 6 and
127 Par. XXI; synt. in 201. 1 and 202.1 small. r n n ^ b l idem. [16]
1S*H fut. apoc. Piel from rniE 123. III. c ; comp. 117. 2. 6; and see
above in no. 44 v. 2. Sbn!: no. 36. bbN inf. abs. Kal from b?N 127
Par. V; synt. in 199. 1,2. d. basin fut. Kal of bafij, but also with
final Pattahh in v. 17, see Ges. lex. art. "DN note 1; synt. in 193. 5,
c. [17] case absolute 175. 3. c. i n f . const, with noun-
suffix 126. 5 and IV note 6; comp. 202. 2 small. mEn nifc inf. abs.
and fut. Kal from fi?a 127 Par. XII; synt. in 199. 1, 2. 6.
50. Verses 1822. r v n inf. const, of rTH, nom. case to STTrt un-
derstood 211. 7 ; governing D"1Kn 202. 2. *nab adv. 156.3. a and 5
note; properly a noun of Dec. VIII. ib 157. 4. a note; Daghesh
euphonic inb 29. 8 ; synt. in 173. 1. 11^3 prep, and noun of Dec.
VI with suffix. [19] no. 46 v. 7, def. written 24. 3. fi*a*2 fut.
apoc. Hiph. from Mia 124. 4. a, and 127 Par. XIX. ni&nb, b in no. 28;
synt. in 201.1. 1 9 3 . 5. c, and 195. 1 small. 1BC3 in app. with
^b 168.1,but the b omitted 211.12. 6 ; or perhaps 210. 2. [20]
s
54
Digitized by Google
8 PRAXIS J GENESIS HI.
133. 4. 0*^4 case absolute 175. 3. b. [21] bey fut apoc. HI ph.
from bB3. D e c . XI; root dnn. ^ a l of 1^25^ cL
II of*B 110; Pattahh changed 60. 7. a. vns}?5M3 pi. with sufF. f rom
*b3 Dec. IV. t, and 141 note 4; comp. 133. 5 ; synt in 170. 2- c,
p r e p , with verbal suffix 157. 3 note; for suffix, which re-
fers to fern, ybag, see 126. 7, 8; comp. in no. 18. [22] 73*2 fut. apoc.
Kal of ttsa 123.1. d 1. iiiBAtb irreg. noun of Dec. 1, XIII, and I I ;
synt in 195. 3. A i t Hiph. of Mis with suffix which moves for-
ward the tone and causes Qamets under Yodh to fall away, 118 par.
second; see also 93. 1 small.
61. Verses 2326. D?i3 this time, now, 163.3; adverbially 156. 3,
b ; or 174. 2. e. n finjT 198. 2 note. nn^b Pual, 95. 3. <2, e.
[24] ST3 with Qamets Hhateph for Hholem 54. 2. b. "PliJ 136.
13 and 164 Par. I. isfit Dec. VIII. d. pan] as fut 192. 5. b.
from ira, const. &c. Irreg. see In v.22. [26] IVTJ synt in
188. 3. dt7.
n
3*Jj numeral with suff. 152 note 4. a d j . from
t hr Dec. VIII. e, and 146. 2. c ; Shureq for Qjbbuta 21. 19 note.
WKptan? Hithpolel of site 117.8, and 118. IV. c; for Qamets, see also
60. 7. b 2 a j as past, 193. 3. b.
CHAPTER III.
62. Verses 15. b*3> 177. 1 and 178. 1. d. ^ PJt? 211. 10.
^baetn rib 193. 4. b, and 196. 4. [2] baas 193.6. c. [3] conj.
61. 17; but, 211. 11 note. c o mp . 210. 2, 3. f r o m 9*3,
193. 4. b, and 196. 2. ]nnn fut Kal of nn with parag. Nun 96.
1. a, and 35. %; see also 118 at the beginning; as subjunctive 193. 5.
b 9. [4] ni 199. 2. 6. [5] 203. 1. tjabSK no. 49 v. 17.
*n|3B3i Niph. as fut 192. 5. c par. second. O^IP? dual of Dec.
VI. q, and 143 note 16 (2). QTrbfcO 61.9 and 47. 5. a. 204. 2.
53. Verses 610. s. 123.1, d. ttWQ noun Dec. X,
used as predicate 161. 3. inn 5 part Niph. 90. 1. a, and 102.
3; see 203. 3 note 2. b^tonb' 201. 1. n^rn then 211. 13.
frjn] 114. IV. b. TTB5 157. if.* [7] from D-P? Dec. VIII,
comp. no. 51 v. 25. f o t . of IBn. Stirs const of Dec.
IX. b; root Sib*. riian from rniAil Dec. X; see 24. 3, and comp.
no. 3. [8] ^cnn?3 part Hlthp. agreeing with D^nbit 203. 3 note 1;
see 80. 3. d. Hmb no. 9; see Jahn's Bib. Arch. 101. V.
fut Hithp. 80.3. b; synt In 189. 9, comp. 188. 3. [9] ad?.
with suff. 156. 5; form of ^ as of Dec. VIII, 166. 3. b. [10] Vin
Vav conv. 93. 1 small; fut Kal of fit V 110. 2 and I. b. iOn# fat
Niph. 102. 5; sense in 77. 2. c.
PRAXIS ; GENESIS IV. 9
54. Verses 1115. VAH Hipb. from obe. naa.PnM 66.3.
-Vdk 54. 2. b; synt In 201. 1 note. ttJfD no. 52 v. 3.nVstt
60. 7. a, and 37 pole 5. [12] iinn3 114. IV. b, and 95. 3. o.
157. 3. / [13] rVip* 211. 6. c. H i p h . 124. 3. d, and 127
Par. XVII; with suit 126. 6. b. [14] pass. part of ; synt
180.1, and 177. 1; see also 178. 1. d. f r o m used as fut. of
124 a. 2. Tg^-bS, see no. 15; synt in 161. 1. b note, and
174*. 2. c. '*p*n in no* 46 v. 7; with snff. 135. 5. c. [15] Dec.
X; root 118 beginning. n o . 48 . 10; synt. in
174. 2./. s u f f . in 126. 7. 1 4 2 note 5.
55. Verses 16-^24. tta-jtl 123. IV.7; synt 199.2. a. <]3faS*
Dec. III. d, and 140 note 1 par. second, with fem. snff. 135. 5. b; put
with }3hn 215 and 161. 6. ' f u t . Kal of n\ ff3S plur. of 75
irreg. noun 152.1. [17] . . . "lip# 187.2. a, and note 1.
prep. 157.2. c, and 3; root *15*. 1 2 6 . IV note 9; comp. She-
va under S 26. 5 small; suff. in 126.7, referring to HOIK which here
means the earth and its productions ; comp. 213 and 185.2. 1. [8] *b in
pause 157. 4. a note. [19] n?T const, of M5T Dec. X. n o . 46 v.
7. ' i n f . const of with n. suff. 126. 5; synt 200.4. e. [20] *n
60. 7. a ; for "*13 Dec. VIII. i. [21] n"l3ns pi. const Dec. XIII. d.
[22] const 172. 1. e. nr^b no. 47 v. 9; prep, in 61. 10. a;
synt 201. 1. & c . in 192. 7. a. V a v conj. 61. 19. a;
verb *n 124. 4. 6. ' [23] 126. IV note *14. [24] ttjnrj 54.3
and 93. 3; also 105. 4. A i t apoc. Hiph. 1 6 1 . 1.
b ; comp. 61. 2 small. f e m . Segh. part Hithp. 90. 2, 3, and
127 Par. XX; sense in 80. 3. b ; article in 163. 3.
CHAPTER I V.
56. Verses 15. fut apoc. of ITjtt; and fut cony, of "lb^;
see for both 192. 3 note. [2] fut apoc. cony. Hiph. of us-
ed adverbially 205. 1 and note. 1 0 9 . 1 , c, and 61. 10. a.
T*ntt from ntt irreg. noun 162. 1. fig*! part as a noun const Dec. IX.
[3] see no. 50 v. 19. ! i s e e Qes. lex. art ttjrr, and 47.5. a.
[4] jr^xblTJp, conj. 61. 17; prep. 61. 12; noun Dec. VI; suff. 135.
7. b ; synt 161. 6 and 216. yd* 3 fut apoc. of WO. [6] fut.
apoc. of Sinn; synt 211. 1.
67. Verses 715. 111 and 127 Par. VIII. i n f . const of
IFTTOS 124. 3. d, and 127 Par. XVII; put for 6 0 . 4 , comp. 4 7 . 2 ; synt
200! 1. p a r t 203. 3 note 1, and 1 8 9 . 6 . s u f f referring
to nmsn 181. 2. 6 ; so ta. [8] dnfti3 no. 50 v. 18; prep, in no.
1 0 PRAXIS; GENESIS V.
*8, comp. 61.16 small, and 102. 3 note; synt. in 200. 6. a, and 202. 2
mall. f a t apoc. conv. of Dip 118.1, c, pap. third.
fat of 126. IV. note 9; Pattahh under ^ 68. 3, comp. 102. 4;
sua 126. 6. c. [10] part of p?X, 203. 1, 3 note 1. [11]
STO irreg. noon from n$, const *D &c. suff. 135. 6. a. nnj^b Segb.
inf. of OJ5V 114. IV,a; form in 131. 2. c; prep. 61. 10. a.
Dec. II, and 139 note 1. [12] l)$h no. 66 v. 2. nn 114. IV. 6.
93 part of Spa. 131 61. 19. b; see 216. 2.a. [13J *9*19 Dec. III.
i n f . const of K3 reg. form, comp. supra in v. 7; synt in
177. 3. [16] 162 note 2. Dj9* fat Hoph. of D3, 60. 7. a.
n o . 47 t. 8. nisn inf. const Hiph. from FD3 124.3. e, and
127 Par. XVIII; synt 201. 1 note, and 202. 2 notes 1,2.
68. Verse* 1 6 2 6 . f a t COOT, of [17] Tnil no. 66.
*133 part of rt3S; pynt 203, 4, and 204. 1. *132, suff state of 73
o. 64. "pan in apposition with DV after 168. 1. [18] 1^1*2
fat Niph. of lib\ [19] "nu> 164 Par. IV. 2, and 152 note 1. D"*tp3 ir-
peg. pi. of JlOfit no. 50 v. 22; pi. of Dec. II. rP3?5 152. II note.
[20] *Mt const of 135. 13. ZV* 196. 2 and 204. 1. [22]
noun const Dec. VII. nu?ri3 Dec. XIII. e, and 160 note 1. -!^I
Dec. VIII and 145 note 2 ult. ninfijt const of rrirw irreg. 152. 1.
[23] VMbjb supra v. 19. 1 0 6 . 5 . ' *3 y. 19. HSTNH fern. pL
imper. Hiph. denominative from f ; properly {i33tKH, but one Nun Is
expressed by Daghesh 29. 2; comp. 114. IV. b ult 1 8 4 . 4. b.
[24] &W3 &c. 152. 5 small, and 176.10. [25] n 3praet of rTO) or
nwj. ijnn 126. IV note 1. [26] fitnn 182. 2, 3. *1^ Poal of
*ilb\ Vnin Hoph. of bin; synt 190. 1 nudl. s y n t 195.1
small, and 201.1.
CHAPTER V.
59. Verse 2. Dtna 126. IV note 1. n o . 45. [3] W lm
comp. in no. 12. 1 7 6 . 3,6. 1^*2 fat apoc. conv.
Hiph. of "lV\ [4] 167. 2. 6. i n f . const Hiph. 202. 2
note 1. nlttte nib 176.1,5. p i . of ng irreg. noun for 113$,
from 11 or obs. fs; sing. Dec. VIII; pi. Dec. XL [5] 124. 4. b.
ytin 176. 1. a. [6] ttign 176. 1. b. [8] tryo% d"W 152.
4 and 176. 2. [24] 'l56. 3. b and 5. [29] WJHg; fat PL of
ana with suff. 126. IV note 14; see 216. 2./. WV Dec. II dual.
rnnfij PL o f 1 0 4 . 4 and 116. 2. b small; suff. 126. IV note 14;
comp. Sheva 26. 5 small. [32] ntag 161. 6. <*, and 176.1. a.
PRAXIS; GKNESIS VI. VII. 11
CHAPTER VI .
60. Ferte* 16. bnSj Hiph. of b^n a verb 59 115 and 127 Par.
XI. anb inf. const, of aan, 201. 1. [2] riab 24. 3, fem. adj. 180.1.
f a t * f 45. 4. mna 60. 7. b 2 a. [3] *pv fut apoc.
Kal of "jT3 118.1, c par. third. aia?a perhaps prep, and inf. const
2HD from AMD 116.1, b par. second, with verbal suffix; or perhaps
prep, with reL pron. 'ttj 68. 2, and particle 6*. Neither mode is sat-
isfactory in regard to either the sense or the form of the word. [4]
]D 'in$ 156. 4 and 157. 2. b. irtt ref. to D^a omitted, 211. 2.
pi. const of obs. used as pL of tUVt [5] Man fem. adj.
from an 132. 4. VIII; const. Dec.
v
X; root aan. riatinn pi. const.
Dec. XIII or Dec. XI. f ; root 33?n. ^a^ see a Dec. VIII. d. an
adj. 145 note 5.
61. Ferses 621. Dns*5 fut cony. Niph. of DH3; sense in 77. 2.
e. [7] s. nna. 1 1 3 . 3 note. [11] nfrani s. nn.
D?an synt 198.2 and 197.3. [12] nnnttia fem. part Niph. 90.1. a and
3. [13] tta 8. firta. 1 5 9 . 3 ; see 28. 4. b. Dn^nttitt 203. 3 note
2; verbal sufL 126. 5. '[14] ** 172. 3. b. s . Jfc."pnn 61.
13. [15] nann s. arj-i. [16] inic light, trop. window.ns^Dn fut
PL of nbs with suff. 121 a, and 127 Par. XXII; lit. to a cubit rfialt thou
complete [limit, contract] it i. e. the ark. D a g h . omitted in
J? 45. 4; see 207. 2; in 143 note 24; adv. 156. 3. a. rnica s.
IX Dec. VIII. c. D^nnn pi. of 133. 1.6; synt in 197. 3 and
note. [17] nntib inf. Pi. 201. 1. s . sna 118. VI. 6, and 60. 7. a.
[18] "nbpm Hiph. of &*p; see 24. 6. nets* s. Jtia. [19] n'^nnb
inf. Hiph. of rnn, 201. 1. [21] Hfc 114. IV* a. 1 9 3 . 5. c.
nfiDKI 192. 6. a.
CHAP. VII. Ferae 2. was? 176. 9. JTlhtD without the art 165.
2. b. [4] 0^ 174. 2. c, and 176. 4. &*p^6I. 4 and Dec. I. [6]
&? gen. 170. 2. c, note. [8] 187. 2. a, and no. 59 y. 24.
[11] naipa 176. 7; comp. 170. 2. b. s . 7^3 Dec. II. [16]
$1?a 157. 2./, and 3; synt 195. 4. [17] 45. 4 note 1. tnn}
fut apoc. conv. of 118. I.e. [19] 206. 3. f u t Pu. of
nos. 0">in^ 61.3. [22] nann$ 61.3,6. s. rna 127 Par.
XII. [23] naJ fut apoc. Niph. of niTO 123. II. c, and 46. 3. TiiJ
-bs 173. 2 note 2.
12 PRAXIS ; GENESIS VIII. IX. X. XI.
CHAP. VIII. Vent 1. fut Kal of [3] 118 par.
first atej 199. 2. c. D e c . IX and 61. 13. [4] nam
a 0 " nd H8.1, c par. third nit '^rt 167. 3. [5] nnfi*s 811. 6.
[7] fem. In const of tBS* 110.1, c ; synt. 202. 2. [8] in-
terrog. and praet Kal of 192. 7. c. [9] 126. IV note 9
par. second. [10] in*} fut. apoc. cony, of >*n or b"*n. nV inf. PI
of n^ 205. 1 and note; comp. in no. 56 v. 2. [12] bn**2 fat. coo v.
Niph. of bn* 110. II. a; see 77. 2.b. [13] 10^ 118. Ill e par. third.
[16] K3t 124*. 3. b. [17] 109. III. b. 1 9 2 . 6. a. (19]
BrpnnBilj^b Dec. XI. g, and 148 note 2. [20] s. rfry 123. IV. <L
rfcy s . ' 1 2 1 j n*Vl s. n*n 119. 5 par. second. Tnna 133.6.
ntertl? 124. 3. . [22] 60. 7. b 2 a.
CHAP. IX. Vent 2. Dec. II; root ; suff. in 184. 4. b.
fi^nn s. nn 145 note 1 ult 1 3 9 note 1. *apa Niph. of
Jna 60. *7. b 2 a. [3] fiMH 183.2. [4]^ 168.1. T6] ^ 175.2. c.
[14] "says inf. Pi. of denom. verb from l ay with noun-suff. 126.5, and
IV note 14; Dagh. omitted in 3 29. 4. 6, and 95. 3. d, e. [20]
fut. con v. Hiph. of 143 note 1. [21] fut apoc. Kal
of rtntt 123.1, d. vin*2 127 Par. XV j Hithp. like Piel 123. III. c.
ttVriK with unusual suff. 135. 6 col. 2. [23] Dec. VI. n, and
143 note 14. [24] y**2 111.4 note, and 1. [25] 178. 1.
c. [27] RB2 123. IV. d par. second.
CHAP. X. Verse 9. nj f T *$! 178. 2. e. f i n . Pattahh 105.
4; comp. 60. 7. a 2. [12] AOH 185. 2 note. [16] &c. 167.
1. [18] *S3 Niph. of ysIB. [19] nS&ts lit in thy coming, 124. 4.
a par. second. !"TO'lO 157. 2. g. ' [25]* 189.4.
CHAP. XL Vent 1. B*nn<* 152 note 3. [2] D*03 126. IV note 6.
[3] rran 159.2. a. 9 1 . 2,3 . & ; comp. 126. IV note 9, and 196.
4. [5] *n*2 s. nn* 109.1. b. [6] DVsb s. b's Dec. VIII. e. DVnn
inf. const Hiph. of bin; regularly' bnfi, but takes the suff. as in 126.
IV note 14, comp. note 15; see also 116 both paragraphs at the be-
ginning. The tt would properly have a comp. Sheva, as 56. 2; but
this would seem to be prolonged here into the corresponding short vow-
el, perhaps on account of the Methegh; nom. case 200. 1. s .
DJBJ 116. IV. d. [7] s. 116. IV. <2, and 91. 2, 3. [8]
A w j 102. 3; comp. 103.1. b. [9*] fin|5 190. 2. [12J *n 124. 4. b.
[30] nbl noun Dec. IV. [32] for D*n0 47. 5. a; dual of
ttijg Dec. XI.
PRAXIS ; GENESIS XII. XI I I . XIV. XV.
1 3
CHAP. XII. Verse 1. 109.1, d, and 210.3. f u t . Hiph.
of nn; suff. 126. 7. [2] 127 Par. XXII and 58. 3. "nab
195. 3.SJD-J3K.2 126. IV note 14. SYjni 61. 16 small, and 194. 2!
b. p a r t . PL of be Dec. VII. , and 144 note 3. SNN fut.
of T3K. [4] 98.1, a. inKSa 124. 3. b; see 60. 4 and 47. 2.
[5J 60. 8. a. [7] an2 123.' II. c. n?T 144. note 2. L8]
f Ti nn 55. 5 and 157. 2. g. 1 2 4 . 3. e Kal, and 127 Par. XVIII.
[9] >*1057 199. 2. c. [11] i r ob 205. no* const, of
n s 1 fern, of 171. 3. [12] rrrt l * 192. 5. a. [13] 190. 1
and 193. 5. b 4. [14] N12S 200. 6. b. [15] fut. Pi. of bbP,
comp. i nc. IX v. 14. [17] D^a: 196.4. [19] njUO 93. 1 small,
and 193. 5. c.
CHAP. XIII. Verse 5. *JBHRT 163. 3 and 203. 2. 1 4 3 note
13. a. [6] TniV adv. 156. 3. 6, and 5. [7] part, of nan used as a
noun. [9] "HEiri 77. 2. c ; tone retr. 35. 6 ; comp. 54. 3. bfitbteSJ
174. 2. a. iiSQ'W fut. parag. Hiph. of a denom. verb from 127
Par. VIII: see 211.'13.Stb'W&totn idem from bfcbiD [10] nHtti
t s ; - I ;
L j
"
200. 6 and 202. 2 note 1. [16] "'raiu'i s. onto. " i cr - nt t . .
187. 2. a. io^Pfut. Hoph. of ; used as the future of Kal 124 a. 2, 3.
CHAP. XIV. Verse 3. H3n constr. praeg. 213. [4] liblti*
176. 7. [5] :|3*1 124. 3. e, Hiph. [6] D ^ n a s. - i ^ n i. q. * n n .
110J 143 note 14 par. second; and i69. I. a. ! Ty! , prep.
157. 2. g ; and noun from "in, 60. 1 ; see Ges. lex. [11] IJlp*} 45.
4. [12] 203. 2, comp. 4. [13] 163. 4, or per-
haps 167. 1 . ' 1 6 1 . 6. c. [15] 77* 2. c, and 213.
D2PT 124. 3. e, Hiph. [17] i nf i npb 121.1. 6 ; Qamets for Pattahh 55.
1 and 54. 2. a, note 1 ; tt prob. in otio
y
comp. in no. 44 v. 2. [20]
*pn2 s. 1 2 and 144 note 5. [21] - ] n 114. IV. b. [22] n"jn Hiph. of
6*1. [23J DK, see Ges. lex. Dfi* no. 6 ; nfc$ implied 211. 15 note 1.
[24] pn nothing for me except ^c. see Ges. lex. and 156. 5 note.
CHAP. XV. Verse 1. Ji a^n 156. 3. d, and 206. 3; comp. 169. 1. rf,
note. [2] niS-T with the vowels of because ' tfiK precedes;
see Ges. lex. ' 2 1 1 . 1 3 . 1 6 1 . 6. d. i n n 183.
2. pi a^I 161 note ult. [5] "C32H imper. Hiph. of tti: [6]
s. 3*i3n, 102. 3; with suff. 185. 2, comp. 166. [7] nrjb 114.
IV. 6, and 35. 6*. PfPttHb inf. fem. of 112 a, Dec. XIII. g. [9]
nnp parag. form of nj5 92. 1, 4, and 114. IV. a. n*J?bd5p fem. Segh.
part. Pual denom. from ttjb'^. [121 fiiiDh 201. 2. a- HSUjfi 5WX
Diaitized bv Google
14 PRAXIS J GENESIS XVI* XVII. XVIII. XIX.
161. 2. [14] 60.8. a. s . 203. 3 and note 2. [ 17] r w3
8. ia; *2 when omitted, comp. 211.14.. "p&j 161.1. a. T'Bbl 41.
1. i. [18] nn3 Ik. 163. 2. c, and 164. 1 small.
CHAP. XVI. Verse 1. 131.2. 6; comp. 129.6. a, wmll.
[2] n^afit 97. 4. [3] inf. 170.2.6/ so ib. [4] nn^n 60. 8. a.
b^ hit. Kal of b^ 116.1, c par. second. [6] fT|?n2 fat. PL of
nay; suff. 126 a. 5. [8] rtVja fem. Segh. part 131. 2. c, and 60. 3
note. [10] nann 123. 4. 6, and 199. 2. a. [11] Poel of
100 a. D e c . VI. w. [13] my vision Dec. VI. w; tone on
the suffix 135. 7. a. e h I here yet see Llive] after my vision t
with Hholem as if the tone were upon it 60. 7. b 2 c, as is some-
times the case before pause-accents. [14] #nj5 190.2. "^nb 61. 6.
CHAP. XVII. Verse 4. 175. 1, 2. HKb 195. 3. [51 ^aiV~nt*
173. 2 note 2. [10J bian inf. const Niph. of b*a 200. 1 and 168. 1;
see also 198.1 and 202. 2. [14] ntn 118. III. a 2, and 60. 7. a 2.
[15] 175. 1, 2. [17] l^n61. 24. ifcv *!15 2H- 1. 0*0
Ges. lex. DM no. 8. [26j bias Niph. of baa 114. II. a.
CHAP. XVIII. Verse 2. ^nnc*L 123 VI. 6, and 80. 2. a. [3] "
,
3
I
T*T
and ^35 186.1. [4] Bra 206.1. a. [10] irjn see Ges. lex. art
*n no. A. [12]
n
nba inf. const of nba. [14] nin^Q is any thing
greater than Jehovah ? i. e. too great for him to accomplish, 177. 2,
[17] n$?an 61. 21. 203. 3 note 2. [18] vn inf. abe. of rt^n
123. 1. b, and 199. 2. 6. [19] }?ab 158.2. b. *naizn that ie.
211. 13, comp. 193. 5. b 3. fiOan s. fitia, put after prep. ]?b 157.
2. c; see 202. 2 note 1. [20] nan s. ajn. [21] nnjpyxsn 61. 24.
nata* 163. 3. nVs adv. [ 2 2 H1 5 6 . 5 . [25j*n^n 159. 2.
6. ?rni 212. 1. [271 216.2. a. [28] pnorr 95. 1. a,
and 196*3. 6. [30] in". 211. 1, and 193. 5. a.
CHAP. XIX. Verse 4. tetf? 60.7. 62 a; see 193. 3. a,and 211. 13.
[7] s. ysin 118. III. a*2, and 60. 7. 6 2 a. [8] bfijn 67. 1. [9]
114*. I. c. natbn s. fi^n. toic 199. 2. d. ana s. 118.
III. a 2, comp. 116. III. a; see 177. 2. [11] nn$ 174.2. 6. *sn s.
nsa. s . nfitb. [15] iaiM 157. 4. 6, note. 12*^2 8. y m
[16J nanan*n s. nna 116. VI. c! [19] ^ j i n w 127 Par. XII
and 192. 7. a* [21] *0!)n 126. IV note 6 ; see 201. 1 note, and 202.
2 note 1. [22] ni^a 205. [25] D"nyn s. n** irreg. 143 note 17
and 61.3. [27] D2>U^1 213. [32] nsb 109. I. d, comp. 159. 2. a.
[33] 95. 2. b! nn33 126. IV note 8.
PRAXIS; PSALMS TV. 15
CBAP. XX. Verse 3. riVjfS pass. part. fem. of 204. 3. b. [5]
Dna s. Dh and 146. 2.
1
s . ]i"j53 and 140 note 1. 16] iOHJj
121*. I. 6 paf. second tilt. [7]Vrrn 194. 2. b. -^ttja 203.\
yj s. sh\ (9) nTj 68. 4 1 9 3 . 5. c. [13; 5ynn s. nrn-
[16J cc$ 211. 4. nn^-i fern. Segh. part Niph. of ni* 203.*2.
[17j Terrain Irreg. pi. of rtnt* 43. 2. a.
PSALMS.
I. Verse 1. 159. 2. 6, and 209. 2.
1
& c . 192. 4. b.
n2y? s. Dec. XI; root ys\ [2] Da^ 156.2.0. [3]
Dec. VI. , and 143 note 19. biiP s. >3^ 114.1. b ult [4] U^in
i. J|^3 and 187. 2. a. [6] ?TP 203. 1 note.
1). Verse 1. s. DfiO> Dec. VIII; comp. 211. 15. d, and so
in v. 2 before &c. For the use of the tenses, see 192. 4. 6, and
193. 2. [2] 91013 Niph. of [3] nn33 PL of pns, 193. 4. a,
note. ia^nilCjia s. n$ia Dec. VII, and 133. 5; root 10^; poetic
uff. 135. 7. c, and 50. 4. d. ib 157. 4. a, note. [7] D^n l63. 3.
s . 96.1, b ult [8] sjn^ns 195. 3 ult [9] fi^R fut.
Kal of yyn with suff. 116 par. second. [12]
n
l5^n s. SfOn.
III. Verse 2. s. ag-j. [3] ^2^ 186. 2. a. iWItt)* 50. 4.
*, and 40. 2. [5] **ip 211. 12. . '[6] 91. 2, comp. 126
IV note 9 par. second. [7] in s. n"*ttj, reflexive. [8] see
99.1, d. ->n Dec. VI. , and 174. 2. f . d u a l of].
IV. Verse 1. nssa^ s. n*3 Ges. Lex. [2] 185. 1. nan^rt
192. 4. by and 211. 6. a. ^Sxn imper. of ]30 with suff. 115. 1 notes
1, 2, and 55. 5; comp. 126. IV note 11. [3] HJJl? 60. 1 note 2;
comp. 66. 4; see also 211. 15. d. 2 1 1 . 7. [4] 170. 2. b.
[5] q#
1
!! 8. Da*5. [7] nD3 121. IV. b ; comp. Ges. lex. let. 0. [8]
nya 177. 2, and 211. 6. d* ult
V. Verse 2. '92.1, and supra no. 58 . 23. i mp e r . of]^.
[3] lOO.'l. [4] 211. 2. [5] y$n Dec. VII; par-
ticlple, 90. 1. o. 1 1 8 par. first and second; suff. in 184. 2. b.
[6] D^Jprr partof n3to 121.1, a. [7] OW-ui**# 161. 6. a.
ayn-j PI of a*n. [9] rjro s. nijs. ^hjvjx,suff.*i84. 4. 6, which
thou requirest. nil?} 109. III. b. [10] na'iSa fem. part. Niph. of
IIS, 162 and 166. rM 13 Dec. X. D3TZ51> 211.12. [12J
PI. of 60. 8. a. ?jqn? a. !pO and 2*11. 13. [13] 197. 3.
55 *'
16 PRAXIS; PSALMS VIXII.
VI. Verse 3. V&19N part. Pulal of 81. 6 and 90. 2, 3; 73 omit-
ted 95. 2. t ; formerly followed by Maqqeph, as is yet the case fa
some copies, and therefore written with Pattahh 54. 2.6; synt. 180. 1.
' 1 2 6 . IV note 12. "' JOX* 186. 2. <L [4] idem.
1J811. 9 note. [6] TTVP fut. Hiph. of !Ti\ [9] J>ec-
VI. ti; see 135. 7. a, which should read ' one Yodh is usually dropped.
7
VII. Verse 1.iti s. Ttt. [2] ""S^n, see in 99.1, d. [5] rob
*1 197. 3. [6] 124 b.
1
IWlj 61. 3, 6. [7] 77. 2. "e.
p r o b . forimper. 192.6. [9] supp. Vtaa, as in Pa. 18:21;
see
T
2li. 9 note. [10] 613-1 r 193. 5. a. [11] 3 * ^ ^ 153.2
and 171. 3. [12] CT supp. probably *1, which must be taken as
the nom. of 3*aT; comp. v. 10, and see 211. 1. [14] p-"*-
VIII. Verse 2. St2n prob. inf. const of JP3 like r n i from I T
Gen 46: 3; comp. 87. 4; nom. case to rPtt understood 200. 1 and
211. 7; lit. the spreading out of whose [thy] glory is over the heavens.
.... nt a 187. 2 and 202. 1. [4] nn3:is 95. 3. a. [5] -Tia
uii: 211. 8. [8] D> s. Vb and 161. 2. ^3? -
133
* *
IX. Verse % fem. part of 6tD 162 and 166. [3] niSJK
196. 2. [6] 60. l' note 1. [7] 3^n 175. TOR s. Won.
m?n2 scil. rtPK, rrtrr,211. 1 note, man'genitive 182. 2. a; see
corrigenda. L8j ifctOS) 144 note 3. [lOlnisa 210. 5. o. [13J Dnifit
185. 2. [ 14j *333^ regular, for the usual *5Sn ; see 126. IV note 11.
[15J i^S-rD 16l! 6. d; comp. 131.6 note. 116] =IT 187.1 note. [17]
lagta part Kal from Uij33. (19] nafitti sc. 211. 11. [.21]
nan sc.-3 211.14. d.
X. Verse 1. sc. 211. 15. d. [3] ?X33 parallel with
ifljl and nom. to and y*N2, see 211. 14. a, and note; and comp.
v. 13. [4] 211. 8, and comp. v. 13. [5] 01173 161. 3.
175. 3. a. [7] nbfi* 196. 3. 6. [10] r*T Qeri, fut. of
wwj sc. foifits. nttf; s. nm?
7
. 1 8 9 . 4. lisi 60.1 note
2 ;'see 211.15. d. [fsffitsarr^a comp! Ps. 37: 36. [18] ]170.2. c.
XI. Verse 1. 186. 2. o. 1^B2t 211. 14. c. [2j ni l * s.
S-v, comp. 47.1. -USds 157. 4. 6, note. [3] rrinista s. nti Dec.
I; root ni or n^lp. [6] ri3B irreg. noun; root H2 ; synt 168.
XII. Verse 2. si&D s. OCC. [3] n$to 211. 12. a. 3 b a 169.
2. [6] ft 211. 6. e. [8] 0^7:n sc. D'35 in v. 6; see 185.
2 note. [9] inf. const, of Dn, 200. 6. 6; prob. for and
then m'?T is in app. with D- 168; comp. v. 2, and Prov. 28:12.29:2.
PRAXIS ; PSALMS XIIIXIX, . 17
XIII. Verse 3. Dec. Ill; see 211. 15. c. [4] nian
213 note; comp. 193. 6. b 9. [6] PnVs? I
26
- note 1 par. sec-
ond; comp. 184. 2. 6.
XIV and LIII. Verse 2. tE*n 203. 6; comp. 211. 15. d. [4]
ee Ges. lex. sn? no. 4. 2 1 1 . 1 4 . c. In L11I. 6, ?j:n Is part, of
n:n; suff. In 126. 8 col. 2, and 184. 2. b.
XV. Verse 4. DKJ33 . . . ntaa 203. 1 note, comp. 180. 1.
prob. inf. const. Hiph. of 9*n like & 118. III. a 2; comp. 105.3,
and see Ps. 37:8. na^ fat Hiph. of nia.
XVI. Verse 2. nnae* either by mistake for nnaK 86. 2; or else
in the voc. is to be supplied; see Ps. 42: 6. 43: 5, &c. TiSTD
184. 2. b; lit my happiness is nothing in addition to [besides] thee I. e.
I have no happiness but thee; comp. in Gen. 28: 9. 31: 50.
[3] o*nainpV 175. 3. b.
1 7 2
-
2
- M
8C
- *^0$
2l1
-
1. a; comp. 213. [8] Tan adv.'^JT'a "3 sc. nin* 211. 1 note;
see 61. 14. [9] *nipa .. "^Tias 186. 2. c, i
XVII. Verse 1. ^npi? dual const of nciiJ. [3] ^nTST prob. inf.
const, of DT with suff. 116.1, b par. second ult. nom. case 200. 1.
[5] !jbn 199*4. c. [6] Dn s. no:. [9] "WSJ s. nra. u?^a 161,
4. ilPja; sc. n^?K 211. 6. [12] i Sw 174. 2./, or#. Ll3]
211. 12. ' [14] d:B3 186. 2. <*, and 197. 2.
XVIII. Verse 2. ^nrnfit 126. IV note 9. [4] Vina 203. 3 note
2. [5l 130. 1. [7] "^-nsta s. nx and 170. 2. b; for the historic
use of the*future, see 193. 3. b. [8] U>?nn2 ibwni 216. 2. o. [9]
s.n^m irreg. [10] s.ntM. Ill] *j*3s.frfifi. [1?] nig;fut
apoc. of n*, for ntt* 35. 6 and 54. 3. DJ>nt *22 178. 2. d, comp.
169. d, note. [l5j DXWl 185. 2. an s. to shoot. s .
Dan and 116 at the beginning. [17] n^ttP sc. i"P 211. 2. [22]
^rvin-Jtbi 213. [24] *nKi 123.1, d 2 and note l. [26] iDnnn
&c. ioo. 1. ' [28] nian pi. fem. part Kal of Din 90. 3 and 179. 4.
[34] mints 211. 3. [35] nnns PL of nna agreeing with wi nt
189. 4. *138] DnSiS s. n!?3 and 200. 6. e. [41] Sin'* 174. 2. / .
[42] DW s. n 'and" 127 Par. XXII. [46] iSa? s. b?:. wnn^
102. 3* and 21*3. [47J ^ 124. 4. 6. 3*n? intrans. 76. 3, 4, and
193. 4. a.
XIX. Verse 5. s. ip_ Dec. VIII. Dr^Va s. n*a. [8] na^tfa
fem. part. Hiph. of ai 204. 2. -"no Dec. VI.. [14] Dn^fit I shall
be blameless, fut Kal with Pattahh from D^n, also Dn; in another
meaning: see 116.1, c par* second; and for the Yodh, 24. 4.
1 8 PEAX1S; MALMS XXXXVH.
XX. Vene 2. Sj33 *. rt:, 126ft and 58. 3; see also 103* 6. e, c.
--^TP* 126. IV note 14. [4| 50. 4. c, ad 91. 8, [7] **53
213. [8] sc. 211. 15 note 1. [10] nyvptfl comp.
99. hi .
XXI. Fw 4. ntel* W. 2, OP 211. 12. a. [11] >?)% Pec.
VI. ti; poetic suffix. 113 J Dec. VI. n, and 174. g-
XXII. Vene 2. pirn sc. tVi\ 211. 15. sc. fa 211. 16. e.
[7] B* ""itaa 204. 3. 6. *[9| Supply here 2)1. 8. Vs 199. 4.
a. [10] >na prob. inf. const- of Ti^; l|t to r prodire m*um i. e.
thou didst cau*e me to come forth &c. [13] 162 note. [15]
PS? s. 03 and 116. II. a. [16] ''nipVQ dual; supply i; 2U. 12. 6.
[17] part Hiph. of 511 borrowing the form of verbs ys 118,
III. a comp. 145 note 5. m u s t be rendered at a Hon if
tb present reading be correet, supplying as in Pa. 7: 3;
comp. ^11. 9 note. Another probable reading is from a root "1*21
signifying in Arabic arete eon*trinxit. Others are and ; bqt
none of the readings are entirely satisfactory. (18j reC to
comp. 185. ?. t h e y triumph over me; comp. the sense of
HIti in Ps. 37 : 34. 64 : 9. |22] Spin s. QfiJI or r i and 47. 2;
prob. i q. in v. 13. 193. 6. o, comp. 5 note j, see 213.
[231 s. n and 60. 1. 29. 4. b ; suff. in 126. 7. (30]
Pi. of !TPP agreeing with Tij^ understood, 211.6. o. [311 1??
impers. 190. 1 par. third, and corrigenda at the end of the volume.
[32] nips to exhibit beneficence ; comp. in Ps. 37 : 5. 52: 11, fee.
XXU1. Ver$e 4. 130. 1. a n d 150. notes 2,^
3; comp. in Ps. 27: 4.
XXIV. Von* 4. ^3 &c. 171. 3. [4] *];yl lit who
h*i not taken in vain; cemp. Ex. 20: 7.
XXV. Verse 5. s. for Dec. VIII and 145 note
a ult. [7] rwon s. naton fem. isom fiH$n isi. 2. b; const Wgn; pL
lYWtt&n by 47. 2; comp. 47. 6. [11 j nnbD] 192. 6. 6. [12] 1*3?
supp. 216. 6. c. [14} IS noun aa predicate 1^1.3. D5"
|V
lin5
t
for fut. 201. 2. c.
XXVI. Vine 2. *3an2 s. jni and 126. IV note 12. --FHDV^ fur
paragogk imper. of 92. 1; comp. 126 note 11- [4j
s. Dbr. 19) D?} nor 11* 11 note.
XXVII. Verse 2. Shga 202. 2; ""nS.. 168, 1. [4) '
comp. supra in Ps. 23: 4. [9] DP s. WM. [18] S. EH*
and 61. 16 smalk
PRAXIS 5 PSALMS XXVI I I HI T.
1 9
XXVIII. Verse 1. tnnn-bst 213. [4] a?n s. 5*2. [8] tab
referring prob. to in v! 9; see 185. 2. 19] D?"| Imper. of
with suffix.
XXIX. Verse 159. 2. a, and 209. 2. [4] hba 210. 6. a.
[6] ttyp'lis, 8off. in 185. 2. [8] b*n^ 8. b*n. [9] bbirP 8. bsin.
'tea prob. refers to CPbjtJ *:a in v. 1; and the stiff. is to be taken
collectively.
XXX. Verse 2. 116. IV note 14. [4] Tn* Qeri, as
reg. inf. const, with suff. ; but the usual form of the inf. IB
nin, with suff. VTp
#
as in v. 10. The Kethib is therefore prob*
ably the true reading; as in Ps. 28: 1. [6] and D^n nom. cases
to verbs of existence implied, t i l . 7. *3$ Dec. VI. v. [8]
^Jttb s. i q. inn. b?3 203. 4. [10J Supply 211.8.
[13] fat. Chald. of azre.
XXXI. Verse 10. 190- I- [121 $ 1?- [
| 8
1
fut Chald. of DO
1
?; see 213. [22] niXJg sc. 3 211. 14. c.
[23J "Ttna Inf. of T$a
XXXII. Vtrtt 1. 121. IV. c, and 204.3. b ; see also 216.
2. c. 141 s. Tg!: Dec. VIII. 15] Comp. 211.15 note 1, for the
prob. use of'n [6| After fitaa supp. perhaps rnat, comp. Ps.
116: 3 ; others supply ^nfc. 17] 'SQ s. from ]3n ; inf. used as a
jioun; so tabt. [8] nxsptt s. and 213. |9] pj n ^ sc. Bi^b.
s . *n*. Oibab 8. Obi; synt in 201. 2. e, n^n being understood.
ainj? b$ 200. 1; lit. there it no approaching to thee L e. they fly from
thee. The meaning of the simile probably fa, do not foolishly depart
from God. For comp. 190. 3.
XXXIII. Verse 3. J13 205. [10] VCrt 118. III. a 2.
XXXIV. Verse 6. TO* art fee. sc. a*l in v. 3. [10] s. KV
121. I. d. [13] 61*. 2. 9a 1. "a, or 174. 3. [18] sc.
In V. 16. 120] suff. in 181. 2. b.
XXXV. Verse 3. p"VT| imp. Hiph. of p*). Sap prob. noun; s.
1130. [8] y r Kb suddenly, 205. 2. [10] Nlinxy-bs ego ipse
186. 2. d. [121 biOUj / am utterly forsaken, 200. 1. [14] VprriJ s.
niw. [15] 8.'rt^3. [16] &c. lit. profane mockers at
feasts i. e. profligate parasites; synt in 210. 5. a. pSn 199. 4.
[17J s. s-unaj. [21] i"rnn sc. W1BB3 as in v. 25.
[28] Comp. 211. 15.
20 PRAXIS; PSALMS XXXVIXLV.
XXXVI. Verse 2. QMS s. &M3, the evil aspiration qf the tricked
is in my heart i. e. either it afflicts me, or it shall be my subject. 13}
fitfcnb &C. V prob. tf regard to. [8] 123. I. A. [9j
123.1. h par. second. [13] *ril Pual of fini 104. III. e.
XXXVII. Verse 2. either fut Kal of V$3 used intransitively
and tropically; or fat Niph. of bbtt to bum, consume, fee. 116. IV . 6, note
1. V33. 14] bi* 8. and 116.1, b, note. s e e
above in Ps. 22 : 32. [7J Vbinnrn s. bin to wait 181 s. n o i
123. IV. e, comp. 69. 2. b. s . JW-| 118. III. a 2; *[ eerie, uti-
que. [10 j n:3irnn s. ps. [22] part Pual of suff.
ref. to rrtrp in r. 20; see 185. 2 note.' [24] btaV s. ^O. * [31]
T*n 189! 2^ 4. [34] rtJjnn see above in Ps. 22. 18.
XXXVIII. Verst 3. inns Niph. of nns 113. 3 note. [6]
s. n^K. [8J n^p
;
3 part Niph. of nb{?, 198. 2. [11] i n i n p Pe-
alal of 81. 8. 1-0n 182. 2. b. [17] supp. ^ 211. 16.
XXXIX. Verse 2. sc. lis ni-rr2 211. 7. [7] 123. f.
h. [14] son iroper. apoc. Hiph. of for fis-ttn; comp. 123. IV.
e, and 55. 1.
XL. Verse 4. ... to'V 216. 2. a. [6] JVPSK 193. 6. e.
* t %
J
-
XL1I. Verse 6. these things sc. which follow. DTjfiJ fut
Hithp. of rm with suff. see 80. 2. b, and 184. 2. b. [6]
n
b.rpn fern,
imp. Hiph. of to wail.
XL1V. Verse 3. DTtsrn 185. 2 note. [5] fiH 183. 2 note, f l l ]
poetic for , 50. 4.' e. [16] 126 a. 2, and 126. IV note 2.
[23 ! wanin Pual of ann 104. 4, comp/24. 4. [27] nniT* 50. 4. a,
comp. 40. 2.
XLV. Verse 3. JTCW Popaal of SW 81. 13. pssi s. p\
^3^5126. IV note 14 uit' [6] 331 nbX 205. [6] 168.
3rz 161. 4. [7] 145 note 3, comp. 45. 4 note 2. [9] *323
prob. 133. 2. c. [12j s. fPK and 55. 2. [131 131. 6
note. &13* s. n to caress. [14] rTTD3) s. nas Dec. VIII. [15]
8. '
A D D E N D A A N D C O R R I G E N D A .
I . IN THE TEXT.
[The following table gives every error which ha been discovered in the He-
brew ; and also some things which are to be added to the text. Those
narked with (*) were occasioned bj the breaking of the types &c. and do
not occur in all the copies. A few trivial errors in the English part are not
noted, because they can occasion no difficulty to the student. The occur-
rence of these will be readily pardoned, by all who can estimate the extreme
labour of correcting the proofs in this species of typography.]
Page 52 cl. Ill line 2 for 1272 read UE. Page 71 I. 4 from bottom,
for sha-mdayt r. shawnasH. Page 83. 3. a, I. 1 for third r. second; 6,
I. 1 for fourth r. third. Page 95 38. 4 for N-Kneth r. nM Heth; this
error arose from an accident which happened to the form, after the
last proof had been revised. Page 96. 12 1.3 for
4
r. 2' read
4
r. 3.*
Page 101. a, I. 2 for r. Page 107 for the nos. 7, 8 r. 4, 5.
Page 123 note 2 I. 4 for nt-heph&kh r. ni-h
e
phakh. Page 124. 2 let
the two last lines of the paragraph read as follows:
4
with penultimate
or final gutturals, PcUtahh ; and with Yodh penultimate or final, Hhireq
Page 129. 6 I. 5 for d
n
p*aa* r. Page 130. 16 I. 3 for 1* r. \
Page 139 16 for nan* r. nsn. Page 143 I. ult for r. Tuns';
for CDn* r. Page 146.1 1.1 after
4
infinitive' add
4
and im-
perative.' Page 153 82 I. 4 for fens
r
- Page 155 in 2 fem.
for
n
n* r.
n
n. Page 179. 3 I. 3 for an? r. arr:. Page 180. III. d, in
the Hebrew twice for T r. T. Page 186.1. c, I. 3 for n ^ r. nyi Gen.
46 : 3. Page 18*7 1.1 before n^T insert '3H Gen. 20: 7.' Page 188.
Ill I. 2 for r. 0*ytD22. Page 193. IV. a, I. 6 for
4
Hiphil
and HophaP r.
4
and Hiphil'; IV. 6, I 1, 2 read thus:
4
imper. fn,
n:n; inf. fem. nan Ps. 8: 2, nn for n?n' &c. 115. 1 1.7 dele com-
ma after
4
vowel.' Page 196. 7 I 5 in 12 copies for ''nrniD r. ^nirrr.
Page 199 (2) I. 1 for r. "p\ Page 200 I. 2 for r.
Page 204. 2 I. 4 for T8 r. "IV. Page 207. a, I. 1 for 2 r. 3; c, 1 2
in a few copies dele a to*. Page 209. IV I. 2,3 in the Hebrew twice
for n r. n. Page 230. A, I. 7 for 2 r. 3. Page 236 Niph. fat. 2 pi. m.
for r. *iopn. Page 237 Pual fat. 1 pi. for r. btDp.3.
Page 242 Niph. fat. 1 sing, for r. Page 245 Polpal
praet. 2 pi. m. and fat. 2 sing. f. insert Qibbuts ( ) under the first D*.
ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA*
Page 251 Hlthpael Inf. ate. for r. nn. Page 300 correct t be
numbers after no. 3, to 4, 5, 6, 7. Page 304. c, for GiBTp r. OieiD.
Page 306 Dec. VI. d, for r. Page 313 In 7 for MO r-
Page 318 2. 2 after the word
4
masc.' insert
i
and'. Paye
339.1. e, 2. 3 for -n5a r. l i st . Page 341. 2 2. 8 for n^D* r.
Page 343. a, L 1 for
4
nominative r.
1
genitive,
1
and throw that and
the next paragraph into one. Page 351 190.1 2.9 at the end Insert
4
So Rath 2: 11, and other places/ Page 357. 6, 2. 12 for 6 r- 9.
Page 393. 2. 6, 2. 3 for r. PDOtt.
I I . IN THE REFERENCES.
See the prtfau, page vi
Page 34 line alt for E. 19, 20 r. E. 10. Page 51 I. 1, 2 for II
read 10. Page 70 I. 3,5 for 35.1. 3 read 61. 2. Page 84. L alt.
for 1 r. 2. Page 85 33. 4 for 2. 6, c read 4. b. Page 86.1, alt for
19 r. 10. Page 89. A, 2.3 dele c. Page 100.1. o for 113. 3. r. 113. I.
Page 103. 2. b for 126. 6. d, r. 126. 7. Page 105. L alt. for the whole
reference r. 140 note 1. Page 109. 4. I ult for the whole refer-
ence r. 143. V. a. Page 112 2. 2 for 137 r. 146. Page 115 I. 6 for
8 r- 6; 5 2. 3 for d r. c. Page 120. 5. 6,1. 3 for 137 r. 146. Page
121. 2 note, I. alt for XV r. XXI; I 4 fr. bot. for 137 r. 144. Page
122. 2 L ult for 6, 12 r. 9, 12. Page 125. 2 2. ult for the ref. r.
139 note 1. Page 126. 6 ult for 137 r. 143. Page 129 2. ult for
3 r. 4. Page 139. 6 note 2. 3 for 184 r. 182; 2. ult for 125 r. 126.
Page 153 82 2. ult for the reference r. $ 124 c. Page 155 L alt
for the references r. 199, 200. Page 157 2.6 for the references r.
199, 200, or dele the whole line. Page 161 2. 1 for 128 r. 125.
Page 182 2. 2 for 182 r. 175. Page 194 note 2 for 55 r. 54. Page
214. II. c, for the reference r. 139 note 3. Page 219. A, 2. ult for 20
r. 21. Page 233 note 6 2.3 for q read
(
m, * ( 143 note 15)'. Page
279. c (2) 2.3 for 59 r. 58. Page 300 2.7, 14, and 24, for 177 r. 176.
Page 302 153. 2 2. 2 for the reference r. 6177, 178.
i
(
V.
w p
v
V
i
t
N
.1
i
. . . V > ')
.'*K-
* *
L I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Call Niimhei
STUART
%
Moses
16U
AU
B
<c
ffebrew grammar.
S932he
1821
TI TLE
cop. l
-
A CC NLJMRPP
NJ A
/>
3\11
C5
Ann
/
STA
STUABT, Moses
A Hebrew grammar
S932he
ift2?
COD * 1
.
t * '
v * ' 4
.
n n
L* *. j
Di ai t i zed bv Google
.
f t